B-64644EN - 08 FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR

< +HMI
Home Screen
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64644EN/08
© FANUC CORPORATION, 2016

- No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
- The design and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's "Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law".
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of the country from
where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations
of the United States government. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact
FANUC for advice.
In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be performed, and if the
manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any operations that are not explicitly described as being possible
are "not possible".
Program and device names belonging to companies other than FANUC in this manual include registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
However, the ® and ™ marks may be omitted for some of those names.
B-64644EN/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
When using FANUC iHMI, you must comply with the instructions written in "SAFETY 2
PRECAUTIONS".
3
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION,
4
NOTE, AND MEMO
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing
5
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into " ! Warning" and " !
Caution" according to the degree of the risk or severity of damage. 6
Also, supplementary information is described as "Note" and "Memo".
Read these indications thoroughly before using this product.
7
! Used if a danger resulting in the death or serious injury of the user is
Warning expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved procedure.
8
Used if a danger resulting in the minor injury of the user or equipment
! damage is expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved
CAUTION procedure. A1

NOTE
Used if points to keep in mind not related to WARNING or CAUTION
are to be indicated. A2
 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or additional Z
information not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to be indicated.
MEMO
* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
B-64644EN/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following warnings and cautions provide information to be noted when
1 handing the CNC device for safer use of the machine with the CNC device.
2 • Carefully check that data you want to enter is correctly entered before
performing the next operation. Operation with incorrect data may
cause unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the
work or machine or injury.
3 • Carefully check that program command value, offset value, current

position, and external signal settings are correct before starting the
machine for operation, such as machining the work. Also, perform trial
operation, such as using the single block, feed speed override, or
4 machine lock function, or operating without a tool or work, to carefully
check that the machine operates correctly.
• Check that an appropriate feed speed value is specified for the
5 operation. The maximum feed speed is normally limited for each
machine. Follow the manual of the machine as well because the
!
Warning optimal speed is different depending on the operation.
6 Operation with an incorrect speed may cause unexpected load to the
machine, resulting in damage to the work or machine or injury.
• Before using the tool offset function, carefully check the offset
7 direction and value. Operation with incorrect data may cause

unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the work
or machine or injury.
• Optimal values are set to the CNC and PMC parameters, so they do
8 not normally need to be changed. If you change the parameter for
some reason, fully understand its function before change. An incorrect
parameter setting may cause unexpected behavior of the machine
A1 depending on the setting value, resulting in damage to the work or
machine or injury.
A2
• After pressing the power on button, do not touch any key on the
Z keyboard until the screen appears. Some keys are used for
maintenance or special operation and may cause unexpected
behavior.
• NC programs, parameters, and variables are stored in the non-volatile
memory in the CNC device. These data are usually not lost by
! powering on/off. However, precious data stored in the non-volatile
CAUTION memory may be lost due to incorrect operation or may have to be
erased due to fault recovery.
To recover fast from such an unexpected situation, back up all kinds of
data beforehand.
• There are some embedded machine operations and screen functions
installed by machine tool builders (MTB). Follow the manual of the
machine tool builders for operations and precautions.
s-2
B-64644EN/08
PREFACE 
iHMI
PREFACE 1
0.1
2
1 iHMI
3
1.1 Concept of iHMI
iHMI is designed based on the concept of supporting the PDCA (Plan Do Check 4
Act) cycle at production sites.
The Home screen (portal to the user interface), application types to be installed,
operation screen are all designed to provide excellent operability to users. It 5
redefines the PDCA cycle, an activity conducted in production and management
sites, as "PLANNING -> MACHINING -> IMPROVEMENT" for machining sites
and embeds functions useful for work into "UTILITY" to consolidate activity 6
supporting applications for an integral support of machining site work.
7
G
M
IN
AC
8
N
N
HI
A
NI
PL
NG
A1
IMPROVEMENT
A2
Fig. 1.1 Concept of iHMI
Z
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
CGTech and VERICUT are registered trademarks of CGTech.
Other companies and product names herein may be their respective trademarks or
registered trademarks.
p-1
B-64644EN/08
PREFACE 
MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI
0.2
2 MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI

The table below lists manuals related to iHMI.
1 Table 2 Related Manuals List

Manual name Specification
2 number
FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (this manual) B-64644EN
FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-1
3 FANUC iHMI Machining Cycle OPERATOR'S MANUAL

FANUC iHMI Set-up Guidance Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64644EN-2
B-64644EN-3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
p-2
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1
2 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 2
3 OPERATING THE PLANNING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 3
4 OPERATING THE MACHINING AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 4
5 OPERATING THE IMPROVEMENT AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 5
6 OPERATING THE UTILITY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 6
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 A
c-1
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
c-2
B-64644EN/08
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO ...........s-1 3
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................s-2
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p-1
1 iHMI ..................................................................................................... p-1
4
1.1 Concept of iHMI .............................................................................. p-1
2 MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI ........................................................... p-2 5
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .............................................................2
1.2 USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW ...................................................4
6
1.2.1 Home Screen ................................................................................... 4
1.2.2 Applications ...................................................................................... 5 7
2 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS IN
THIS MANUAL ............................................................................16 8
2.2 APPLICATION COMMON INFORMATION .................................28
2.2.1 Screen Common Information Display ............................................. 28
2.2.2 About Screen Common Information Display .................................. 29
A1
2.2.2.1 CNC status display ................................................................. 29
2.2.2.2 Message display ..................................................................... 32 A2
2.2.2.3 Time display ............................................................................ 33
2.3 HOME SCREEN (APPLICATION MENUS) .................................34
2.3.1 Starting the Home Screen .............................................................. 35 Z
2.3.1.1 Shutting down PANEL iH Pro ................................................. 35
2.3.2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Home Screen .............. 37
2.3.3 Starting an Application ................................................................... 38
2.3.4 Returning to the Home Screen ....................................................... 39
2.3.5 Applications Registered with the Home Screen ............................. 39
2.4 INFORMATION CENTER ............................................................41
2.4.1 Information Center Displays ........................................................... 41
2.4.2 Information Center Overview .......................................................... 43
2.4.3 Main Display Description ................................................................ 44
2.4.4 Operating the Information Center Screen ...................................... 45
2.4.4.1 MDI key operation ................................................................... 45
2.4.4.2 Operating with the horizontal soft keys ................................... 46
c-3
B-64644EN/08
2.4.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 52

2.4.5.1 Description of the troubleshoot window .................................. 52
2.4.5.2 Performing troubleshooting .................................................... 54
2.4.5.3 Clearing latched data .............................................................. 56
2.4.6 Updating Software ......................................................................... 57
1 2.4.7 Display When a Power Failure Is Detected ................................... 59
2 3 OPERATING THE PLANNING AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

3.1 PC OPERATION ......................................................................... 62
3.1.1 PC OPERATION Overview ............................................................ 62
3.1.1.1 Usage examples of PC OPERATION ..................................... 62
3 3.1.2 Setting and Operating PC OPERATION ........................................ 63
3.1.2.1 Setting the PC ........................................................................ 63
3.1.2.2 Setting the embedded Ethernet function to the CNC ............. 63
4 3.1.3 How to Connect the PC to the CNC ............................................... 63
3.1.3.1 Starting from the Home screen ............................................... 63
5 3.1.3.2 Advanced connection settings ................................................ 64

3.1.3.3 How to operate from the MDI ................................................. 68
3.1.4 Precautions for PC OPERATION ................................................... 70
6 3.2 TOOL MANAGER ....................................................................... 72

3.2.1 Overview of TOOL MANAGER ...................................................... 72
3.2.1.1 Tool database ......................................................................... 73
7 3.2.1.2 Compatibility of the tool management function ....................... 79
3.2.1.3 Compatibility of the tool life management function ................. 80
3.2.1.4 Managing offset data for each tool ......................................... 81
8 3.2.1.5 Tool geometry dimension data that can be set ....................... 83
3.2.1.6 Referencing tool catalog data ................................................. 85
3.2.1.7 Steps to use tool manager ...................................................... 85
A1 3.2.1.8 Main screens and screen transition ........................................ 85
3.2.2 Basic Operation in the Table Display Screen ................................ 86
3.2.2.1 Displaying the table display screen ........................................ 87
A2 3.2.2.2 Part names and functions in the table display screen ............ 87
3.2.2.3 Editing tool data ...................................................................... 97
Z 3.2.2.4 Copying and pasting tool data ................................................ 98

3.2.2.5 Deleting tool data .................................................................. 102
3.2.2.6 Entering equations ................................................................ 103
3.2.2.7 Searching for tool data ......................................................... 105
3.2.2.8 Setting filters for tool data ..................................................... 106
3.2.2.9 Resetting the tool life state individually ................................. 107
3.2.2.10 Resetting the tool life state by group .................................... 108
3.2.2.11 Checking the life type (count, time) match ........................... 108
3.2.2.12 Displaying the tool slide ........................................................ 109
3.2.2.13 Importing tool presetter measurement data .......................... 109
3.2.2.14 Displaying the large tool geometry settings screen .............. 112
3.2.2.15 Managing multi-edge tools ................................................... 113
3.2.3 Basic Operation in the Tool Individual Settings Screen ............... 118
c-4
B-64644EN/08
3.2.3.1 Part names and functions in the tool individual settings

screen ................................................................................... 118
3.2.3.2 Displaying the tool individual settings screen ....................... 125
3.2.3.3 Editing tool data .................................................................... 125
3.2.3.4 Inputting an operation memo ................................................ 128
3.2.3.5 Switching between the previous tool and next tool ............... 128 1
3.2.3.6 Importing tool presetter measurement data .......................... 129
3.2.3.7 Displaying the tool slide ........................................................ 130
3.2.3.8 Setting image pictures for tool/holder parts .......................... 130 2
3.2.3.9 Entering data with the calculator ........................................... 132
3.2.3.10 Resetting the tool life state individually ................................. 133
3.2.3.11 Displaying the large tool geometry settings screen .............. 133
3
3.2.4 Basic Operation in the Tool Status Screen .................................. 134
3.2.4.1 Part names and functions in the Tool Status screen ............ 134
3.2.4.2 Displaying the tool status display screen .............................. 138
4
3.2.4.3 Checking the icon data ......................................................... 138
3.2.4.4 Searching for tool data in the icon data list ........................... 139 5
3.2.5 Basic Operation in the Magazine Management Screen ............... 140
3.2.5.1 Displaying the magazine management screen ..................... 140
3.2.5.2 Name and function of each part of the magazine management 6
screen ................................................................................... 141
3.2.5.3 Editing magazine management data .................................... 146
3.2.5.4 Searching empty pots in magazines ..................................... 146 7
3.2.5.5 Searching information on tools within magazines and
magazines/pots ..................................................................... 147
3.2.5.6 Searching tools within magazines using the tool number ..... 147 8
3.2.5.7 Attaching a tool onto a pot .................................................... 147
3.2.5.8 Detaching a tool from a pot ................................................... 148
3.2.5.9 Moving tools in magazines .................................................... 149 A1
3.2.5.10 Registering a tool number to a pot ........................................ 150
3.2.5.11 Canceling the registered pot management number .............. 151
3.2.5.12 Registering tool storage information ..................................... 151
A2
3.2.5.13 Canceling tool storage information ....................................... 152
3.2.5.14 Displaying the magazine properties screen .......................... 153
3.2.5.15 Changing the properties data settings in the magazine properties
Z
screen (divided screen view) ................................................ 158
3.2.5.16 Deleting properties data in the magazine properties screen
(divided screen view) ............................................................ 159
3.2.5.17 Changing multiple properties data settings in the magazine
properties screen (list view) .................................................. 159
3.2.5.18 Deleting properties data in the magazine properties screen (list
view) ..................................................................................... 159
3.2.5.19 Displaying the pot properties screen ..................................... 159
3.2.5.20 Changing the settings in the pot properties screen (divided
screen view) .......................................................................... 168
3.2.5.21 Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen (divided
screen view) .......................................................................... 168
c-5
B-64644EN/08
3.2.5.22 Changing multiple properties data settings in the pot properties

screen (list view) ................................................................... 169
3.2.5.23 Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen (list
view) ..................................................................................... 169
3.2.5.24 Searching magazines/pots in the pot properties screen ....... 169
1 3.2.6 Basic Operations of the Total Life Data Screen ........................... 170
3.2.6.1 Names and functions of each part of total life data screen ... 170
2 3.2.6.2 Displaying the total life data screen ...................................... 173
3.2.6.3 Changing the display of life type ........................................... 174
3.2.6.4 Searching by tool number (T code) ...................................... 175
3.2.6.5 Sorting the total life data table .............................................. 175
3 3.2.6.6 Displaying the detailed life data screen ................................ 177
3.2.7 Basic Operation in the Tool Catalog Data Management
Screen .......................................................................................... 179
4 3.2.7.1 Part names and functions in the tool catalog data management
screen ................................................................................... 180
3.2.7.2 Displaying the tool catalog data management screen .......... 183
5 3.2.7.3 Adding catalog data (tool) ..................................................... 184
3.2.7.4 Adding catalog data (part) .................................................... 185
6 3.2.7.5 Editing catalog data .............................................................. 186

3.2.7.6 Copying and pasting catalog data ........................................ 187
3.2.7.7 Setting tool parts image/holder image pictures .................... 188
7 3.2.7.8 Entering equations ................................................................ 190
3.2.7.9 Deleting catalog data ............................................................ 193
3.2.7.10 Deleting all catalog data ....................................................... 194
8 3.2.7.11 Importing catalog data .......................................................... 194
3.2.7.12 Setting catalog data to be referenced ................................... 198
3.2.7.13 Canceling/changing the setting for catalog data to be
A1 referenced ............................................................................ 199
3.2.7.14 Reflecting catalog data to NC tool database ........................ 200
3.2.7.15 Searching for catalog data .................................................... 200
A2 3.2.7.16 Setting filters for catalog data ............................................... 202
3.2.7.17 Output tool data that can be imported in tool manager ........ 202
3.2.8 Basic Operation in the Large Tool Geometry Settings Screen .... 203
Z 3.2.8.1 Part names and functions in the large tool geometry settings
screen ................................................................................... 203
3.2.8.2 Setting the occupied area ..................................................... 207
3.2.8.3 Setting the geometry ............................................................ 208
3.2.8.4 Selecting the large tool geometry number ............................ 208
3.2.9 Importing/Exporting Tool Data ..................................................... 209
3.2.9.1 Displaying the select import/export item screen ................... 209
3.2.9.2 Name and function of each part on the select import/export item
screen ................................................................................... 209
3.2.9.3 Name and function of each part on the tool import/export
screen ................................................................................... 210
3.2.9.4 Importing/exporting all tool data ........................................... 214
c-6
B-64644EN/08
3.2.9.5 Importing/exporting tool manager unique data that contains iCAP

T tool data ............................................................................. 215
3.2.9.6 Exporting machine collision avoidance function tool data ..... 216
3.2.9.7 Outputting a tool information file ........................................... 217
3.2.9.8 Import/export data ................................................................. 220
3.2.10 Details of Each Data in the Tool Database .................................. 223 1
3.2.11 Displaying Tool Attach/Detach Histories ...................................... 230
3.2.11.1 Part names and functions in the Tool Attach/Detach History
screen ................................................................................... 231 2
3.2.11.2 Exporting tool attach/detach histories ................................... 234
3.3 CALENDAR ...............................................................................236
3.3.1 Overview of Calendar Function .................................................... 236
3
3.3.1.1 How to use calendar ............................................................. 237
3.3.1.2 Information list for each function ........................................... 238
3.3.2 Operating in Calendar Screen ...................................................... 239
4
3.3.2.1 Displaying calendar screen ................................................... 239
3.3.2.2 Names and functions of each part of calendar screen .......... 239 5
3.3.2.3 Creating (registering) new schedules ................................... 242
3.3.2.4 Editing schedules .................................................................. 243
3.3.2.5 Copying schedules ................................................................ 245 6
3.3.2.6 Deleting schedules ................................................................ 246
3.3.2.7 Displaying schedule that includes specified date .................. 247
3.3.2.8 Importing schedules .............................................................. 248 7
3.3.2.9 Exporting schedules .............................................................. 249
3.3.2.10 Switching to list screen ......................................................... 251
3.3.2.11 Switching between [Show Month] and [show schedule] ....... 251 8
3.3.2.12 Closing calendar screen ....................................................... 252
3.3.3 Operating in Schedule List Screen ............................................... 252
3.3.3.1 Names and functions of each part of schedule list screen .... 253
A1
3.3.3.2 Creating (registering) new schedules ................................... 255
3.3.3.3 Editing schedules .................................................................. 255
3.3.3.4 Copying schedules ................................................................ 255
A2
3.3.3.5 Deleting schedules ................................................................ 256
3.3.3.6 Limiting display items ............................................................ 257 Z
3.3.3.7 Sorting display contents ........................................................ 258
3.3.3.8 Switching to calendar screen ................................................ 259
3.4 CYCLE TIME ESTIMATION ......................................................260
3.4.1 Overview of Cycle Time Estimation .............................................. 260
3.4.2 Steps for Cycle Time Estimation .................................................. 260
3.4.3 How to Read the Cycle Time Estimation Screen ......................... 261
3.4.3.1 Displaying the cycle time estimation screen ......................... 261
3.4.3.2 Name of each part on the cycle time estimation screen ....... 263
3.4.3.3 CNC data imported to the cycle time estimation function ..... 264
3.4.4 Updating Estimation Data ............................................................. 265
3.4.4.1 Selecting estimation data update items ................................ 265
3.4.4.2 Operation and display while updating estimation data .......... 266
c-7
B-64644EN/08
3.4.5 Starting Estimation ....................................................................... 269

3.4.5.1 Selecting a program for estimation ....................................... 269
3.4.5.2 Executing estimation ............................................................ 271
3.4.5.3 Updating estimation data ...................................................... 274
3.4.5.4 How to set estimation conditions .......................................... 275
1 3.4.6 Checking the Estimation Results ................................................. 280
3.4.6.1 Checking the estimation results ............................................ 280
2 3.4.6.2 Checking on the estimation details screen ........................... 280
4 OPERATING THE MACHINING AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
4.1 MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION ................... 288
3 4.1.1 Overview of the Machine Collision Avoidance Function .............. 288
4.1.2 Setting and Operating the Machine Collision Avoidance
Function ....................................................................................... 289
4 4.1.3 Defining Blanks and Jigs .............................................................. 289
4.1.3.1 Simple edit for blanks and jigs .............................................. 293
4.1.3.2 Detail edit for blanks and jigs ................................................ 296
5 4.1.4 Setting the Machine Collision Avoidance Function ...................... 301
4.1.4.1 Setting the common items .................................................... 301
6 4.1.5 Monitoring the Machine Collision Avoidance ............................... 305

4.1.6 Limitations, Constraints, and Precautions .................................... 306
4.1.6.1 Limitations ............................................................................ 306
7 4.1.6.2 Constraints ........................................................................... 306
4.1.6.3 Precautions ........................................................................... 309
4.2 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION ............................... 311
8 4.2.1 Overview of the 3D Interference Check Function ........................ 311
4.2.2 Setting and Operation Flow of the 3D Interference Check
Function ....................................................................................... 314
A1 4.2.3 Creating Model Figures ................................................................ 315
4.2.4 Setting the Moving Axis ............................................................... 348
4.2.5 Setting Combinations of Model Figures as Interference Check
A2 Targets ......................................................................................... 352
4.2.6 Importing/Exporting Setting Data for 3D Interference Check ....... 355
4.2.7 Reflecting Setting Data for 3D Interference Check ...................... 358
Z 4.2.8 Monitoring Interference Check ..................................................... 358
4.3 Remote iPendant ...................................................................... 363
4.3.1 How to Add the Remote iPendant Screen ................................... 363
4.3.1.1 Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer ....................................... 364
4.3.1.2 Registering the Remote iPendant screen to the Home
screen ................................................................................... 367
4.3.2 Displaying the Remote iPendant Screen ..................................... 368
5 OPERATING THE IMPROVEMENT AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
5.1 DATA LOGGER ........................................................................ 372
5.1.1 Overview of Data Logger ............................................................. 372
5.1.1.1 What data logger can do ...................................................... 372
5.1.1.2 Collectable data .................................................................... 374
c-8
B-64644EN/08
5.1.1.3 Flow of data logger use ......................................................... 375

5.1.2 Basic Operation of Data Logger ................................................... 375
5.1.2.1 Opening data logger ............................................................. 375
5.1.2.2 Data logger screen ................................................................ 376
5.1.2.3 Closing data logger ............................................................... 377
5.1.3 Displaying Data ............................................................................ 377 1
5.1.3.1 Displaying collected data ...................................................... 377
5.1.3.2 Display format of collected data ............................................ 379
5.1.4 Collecting Data ............................................................................. 384
2
5.1.4.1 Adding list of data to be collected ......................................... 384
5.1.4.2 Deleting log items from list .................................................... 386
5.1.4.3 Modify log item ...................................................................... 387
3
5.1.5 Importing or Exporting Logs ......................................................... 388
5.1.5.1 Importing log items ................................................................ 388 4
5.1.5.2 Exporting log items ............................................................... 389
5.1.5.3 Exporting log data ................................................................. 392
5.2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER .....................................................396 5
5.2.1 Overview of the Maintenance Manager ........................................ 396
5.2.1.1 Maintenance category ........................................................... 396
5.2.1.2 Determining the state of the maintenance item .................... 399 6
5.2.1.3 Flow of using the maintenance manager .............................. 401
5.2.1.4 Main screens and screen transition ...................................... 401
5.2.2 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Information List Screen .... 403
7
5.2.2.1 Opening the maintenance information list screen ................. 403
5.2.2.2 Maintenance information list screen (icon style) ................... 404
5.2.2.3 Maintenance information list screen (data style) ................... 411
8
5.2.2.4 Setting the maintenance item of [CNC System
Maintenance] ........................................................................ 416
5.2.2.5 Closing the maintenance information list screen .................. 418
A1
5.2.3 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Item Information Screen ... 418
5.2.3.1 Displaying the maintenance item information screen ........... 418 A2
5.2.3.2 Operations in the graph style ................................................ 419
5.2.3.3 Operations in the guide style ................................................ 423
5.2.3.4 Closing the maintenance item information screen ................ 426 Z
5.2.3.5 Checking maintenance history data ...................................... 426
5.2.4 Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item .................................... 428
5.2.4.1 Adding and setting the maintenance item ............................. 428
5.2.4.2 Editing the maintenance item ................................................ 437
5.2.4.3 Deleting the maintenance item ............................................. 438
5.2.4.4 Setting the read restriction on user maintenance items ........ 439
5.2.4.5 Text for export ....................................................................... 440
5.2.4.6 Text for import ....................................................................... 442
5.2.5 Notification and Completion of Maintenance ................................ 444
5.2.5.1 How a notification is displayed .............................................. 444
5.2.5.2 Completion task .................................................................... 446
5.2.6 User Maintenance Protection Setting ........................................... 448
c-9
B-64644EN/08
5.2.6.1 Setting protection on user maintenance ............................... 449

5.2.6.2 Outputting user maintenance protection setting ................... 450
5.2.6.3 User maintenance protection setting XML format ................ 451
5.2.7 List of Icons .................................................................................. 454
5.3 SERVO Viewer ......................................................................... 455
1 5.3.1 Overview of the SERVO Viewer .................................................. 455
5.3.2 Basic Operations of the SERVO Viewer ...................................... 455
2 5.3.2.1 Opening the SERVO Viewer ................................................ 455
5.3.2.2 Main screen of the SERVO Viewer ...................................... 456
5.3.2.3 About SERVO Viewer slides ................................................ 459
3 5.3.2.4 Screen, slide, and window operations .................................. 460

5.3.3 Displaying and Operating the Main Screen ................................. 460
5.3.3.1 Selecting data to be displayed [Select Draw] ....................... 460
4 5.3.3.2 Moving the entire waveform ................................................. 460
5.3.3.3 Changing the horizontal axis ................................................ 461
5.3.3.4 Changing the vertical axis of the entire waveform ................ 461
5 5.3.3.5 Moving a selected waveform ................................................ 462
5.3.3.6 Changing the vertical axis scale of a selected waveform ..... 462
5.3.3.7 Showing or hiding waveform data in a chart ......................... 463
6 5.3.3.8 Automatically adjusting the scale [Auto Scale] ..................... 463
5.3.3.9 Changing the display mode [Mode] ...................................... 464
5.3.3.10 Starting or canceling measurement [Measure] / [Measure
7 Cancel] ................................................................................. 464
5.3.3.11 Setting the base point of measurement [Origin] ................... 465
5.3.3.12 Setting to repeat measurement [Auto Repeat] ..................... 465
8 5.3.3.13 Monitoring measured data [Monitor] ..................................... 465
5.3.3.14 Auto saving the waveforms [Auto Save Setting] ................... 466
A1 5.3.3.15 Saving data [Save Data] ....................................................... 467

5.3.3.16 Loading data [Load Data] ..................................................... 467
5.3.3.17 Saving the setting [Save Setting] .......................................... 468
A2 5.3.3.18 Loading the setting [Load Setting] ........................................ 469

5.3.3.19 Saving the view setting [Save View Setting] ......................... 470
5.3.3.20 Loading the view setting [Load View Setting] ....................... 470
Z 5.3.3.21 Exporting data to a file .......................................................... 471
5.3.4 Measure Setting Slide .................................................................. 472
5.3.4.1 Description of each part of the slide (example: Measure Setting
slide) ..................................................................................... 473
5.3.4.2 Measurement time setting area to set a measurement time 475
5.3.4.3 Comment edit area to edit a comment ................................. 476
5.3.4.4 Obtained data setting area to set the type and axis of measured
data ....................................................................................... 476
5.3.4.5 Trigger settings area to set a trigger to start obtaining
data ....................................................................................... 479
5.3.4.6 Other conditions setting area to set other conditions ........... 482
5.3.5 Operation Setting Slide ................................................................ 485
5.3.6 Scale Setting Slide ....................................................................... 489
c-10
B-64644EN/08
6 OPERATING THE UTILITY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

6.1 MANUAL VIEWER ....................................................................492
6.1.1 Overview of Manual Viewer .......................................................... 492
6.1.1.1 How to use manual viewer (screen transition diagram) ........ 493
6.1.2 Operating in Manual List Screen .................................................. 494
1
6.1.2.1 Displaying manual list screen ............................................... 494
6.1.2.2 Names and functions of each part on the manual list
screen ................................................................................... 495
2
6.1.2.3 Viewing manuals ................................................................... 497
6.1.2.4 Sorting manual list ................................................................ 497 3
6.1.2.5 Selecting categories of manuals ........................................... 498
6.1.2.6 Deleting manuals .................................................................. 498
6.1.2.7 Importing manuals ................................................................ 500 4
6.1.2.8 Closing manual list screen .................................................... 505
6.1.3 Operating in Manual File Viewer Screen ...................................... 505
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION ....................................................................516 5
6.2.1 Overview of Memo Function ......................................................... 516
6.2.1.1 How to use whiteboard ......................................................... 517
6
6.2.2 Operating in Whiteboard List Screen ........................................... 518
6.2.2.1 Displaying whiteboard list screen .......................................... 518
6.2.2.2 Names and functions of each part of whiteboard list
7
screen ................................................................................... 519
6.2.2.3 Creating new whiteboards .................................................... 521
6.2.2.4 Displaying whiteboards ......................................................... 522
8
6.2.2.5 Deleting whiteboards ............................................................ 522
6.2.2.6 Sorting whiteboard list ........................................................... 523 A1
6.2.2.7 Renaming whiteboards ......................................................... 524
6.2.2.8 Outputting whiteboards ......................................................... 525
6.2.2.9 Closing whiteboard list screen .............................................. 526 A2
6.2.3 Operating in Whiteboard Screen .................................................. 527
6.2.3.1 Names and functions of each part of whiteboard screen ...... 527
6.2.3.2 Drawing lines ........................................................................ 529 Z
6.2.3.3 Handling memos ................................................................... 531
6.2.3.4 Inserting images .................................................................... 539
6.2.3.5 Undoing and redoing ............................................................ 541
6.2.3.6 Closing whiteboard screen .................................................... 542
6.3 WEB BROWSER .......................................................................543
6.3.1 Basic Operations of the Web Browser ......................................... 544
6.3.1.1 Opening the Web browser .................................................... 544
6.3.1.2 Web browser screen ............................................................. 545
6.3.2 Operations Performed While the Web Page Appears .................. 548
6.3.3 Setting a Proxy ............................................................................. 549
6.3.4 Web Browser Configuration File ................................................... 550
c-11
B-64644EN/08
6.3.4.1 Storage location of the configuration file .............................. 550

6.3.4.2 Contents of the configuration file .......................................... 550
6.3.4.3 Setting the start page ........................................................... 551
6.4 SETTINGS ................................................................................ 552
1 6.4.1 Overview of the Settings .............................................................. 552

6.4.2 Basic Operations of the Settings .................................................. 553
6.4.2.1 Opening the Settings screen ................................................ 553
2 6.4.2.2 Displaying the Settings screen ............................................. 553
6.4.3 Display Settings ........................................................................... 554
6.4.3.1 Switching the language [Language Setting] ......................... 555
3 6.4.3.2 Switching the background color of the screen [Theme

Setting] ................................................................................. 556
6.4.3.3 Showing or hiding slide animation [Slide Setting] ................. 557
4 6.4.4 General Settings .......................................................................... 557

6.4.4.1 Adjusting the brightness of the screen [Brightness Setting] (for
PANEL iH only) .................................................................... 557
5 6.4.4.2 Correcting the settings of the touch panel [Touch Panel
Setting] ................................................................................. 558
6.4.4.3 Setting whether to show or hide the mouse cursor [Mouse Cursor
6 Settings] ................................................................................ 559
6.4.4.4 Setting a time [Time Setting] ................................................ 560
6.4.4.5 Disabling the touch panel operation [Cleaning Mode] .......... 561
7 6.4.4.6 Enabling the screen saver [Screen Saver Setting] ............... 562
6.4.4.7 Saving a screen image [Screenshot Settings] ...................... 563
6.4.4.8 Setting Japanese/Chinese input [Japanese and Chinese
8 Input] ..................................................................................... 565
6.4.4.9 Displaying the NCBOOT32 screen at startup [Boot Setting] 566
6.4.5 Information Center Setting ........................................................... 567
A1 6.4.5.1 Setting the type of the automatically displayed message [Auto
Display Setting] ..................................................................... 567
6.4.6 Update ......................................................................................... 568
A2 6.4.6.1 Enabling update check [Update Check] ............................... 568
6.4.6.2 Setting update server [Server Settings] ................................ 569
6.4.7 Displaying System Information .................................................... 570
Z 6.4.7.1 Outputting version information to text [Version
Information] ........................................................................... 570
6.4.7.2 Displaying license information [License Information] ............ 572
6.4.7.3 Displaying data usage [Remaining Data Capacity] .............. 573
6.4.7.4 Displaying memory usage [Memory Usage Display] ............ 574
6.4.7.5 Displaying operation histories [Operation History Display] ... 575
6.5 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY ........................................................ 583
6.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Display ................................................ 583
6.5.2 Open Maintenance Display .......................................................... 583
6.5.3 Register Multiple Icons of Maintenance Display .......................... 584
6.5.4 Display Size of Maintenance Display ........................................... 585
6.5.5 Setting The Display Screen Size ................................................. 589
c-12
B-64644EN/08
6.5.6 Keyboard Input ............................................................................. 590

6.5.7 Touch Panel And Mouse Input ..................................................... 591
6.5.8 Entering Function Keys ............................................................... 592
6.5.9 Input and Output of CNC Data ..................................................... 593
6.5.10 Other Pop-Up Menu Items ........................................................... 595
6.5.11 Alarms .......................................................................................... 596 1
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER ....................................................................600 2
A.1.1 Settings for the Manual List Screen ............................................. 600
A.1.1.1 Manual information settings file ............................................ 600
A.1.1.2 Folder configuration for import .............................................. 603 3
A.1.1.3 Name rules to update a manual file ...................................... 603
A.2 MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA ....................................605
A.2.1 Description Position of Maintenance Item Information ................. 605
4
A.2.1.1 Description example of MaintenanceInfo.xml ....................... 605
A.2.1.2 Between <maintenanceinfo> and </maintenanceinfo> ......... 606
A.2.1.3 Between <item> and </item> ................................................ 606
5
A.2.1.4 Used languages .................................................................... 610
A.2.1.5 Data types that can be used in the <datatype1> and
<datatype2> tags .................................................................. 610
6
A.2.1.6 Data address formats that can be used in the <dataaddress1>
and <dataaddress2> tags ..................................................... 611
A.2.1.7 Substitution character strings of symbols that used in tags .. 612
7
A.3 TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL CATALOG
DATABASE ...............................................................................613 8
A.3.1 Tool Information in Tool Catalog Database .................................. 613
A.3.2 Holder Part and Holder Geometry Information of Tool Catalog
Database ...................................................................................... 615 A1
A.3.3 Offset Number Set for Each Tool ................................................. 616
A.3.4 About Reflecting Tool Catalog Data into the NC Tool Database .. 617
A.3.5 About the Tool Information Used in the Machine Collision A2
Avoidance Function ...................................................................... 619
A.3.6 Data That Can Be Imported as Tool Catalog Data ....................... 623
A.4 LIVE UPDATE ...........................................................................630 Z
A.4.1 Overview of Live Update Function ............................................... 630
A.4.1.1 CNC update flow ................................................................... 631
A.4.2 Checking and Downloading Update Software .............................. 633
A.4.2.1 Downloading latest software ................................................. 634
A.4.3 Updating Software ........................................................................ 637
A.5 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CNC DEVICES AND iHMI
SOFTWARE ..............................................................................640
A.6 CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR TRADITIONAL CHINESE
ZHURIN SYMBOLS ...................................................................641
A.7 ITEMS DISPLAYED IN "OPERATION HISTORY" ....................644
c-13
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
c-14
1
1
OVERVIEW 2
3
4
5
This chapter gives an overview of iHMI.
1.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW ....................................................................... 2

6
1.2 USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW ............................................................ 4
A
1
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 
1.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW
1.1

iHMI supports the following models:
1
Table 1.1 (a) Supported iHMI Models
2 Model Name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B 30i–B Series 30i
3 FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 31i–B5

FANUC Series 0i-TF Plus 0i-TF Plus Series 0i-F Plus
4 FANUC Series 0i-MF Plus 0i-MF Plus
FANUC Series 30i-B Plus 30i-B Plus Series 30i
5 FANUC Series 31i-B5 Plus 31i-B Plus Series 31i

FANUC Series 31i-B Plus
6 FANUC Series 32i-B Plus 32i-B Plus Series 32i
There are two types of hardware: PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro. The differences
between these two are listed below.
7 Table 1.1 (b) Specification Comparison between PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro
PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro
8 Features
OS
High cost performance High processing performance
Windows Embedded Compact 7 Windows Embedded Standard 7
CPU ARM Core i
A1 Commercially None Usable
available Windows (Operation verification
Application necessary)
A2 Shutdown Not required Required
2
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 1.1 PANEL iH

6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
3
B-64644EN/08
1.2 USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW
1.2

The user interfaces are common to all machines, facilitating and integrating
1 various operations and works in the machining process.
2 1.2.1 Home Screen

1.2.1
In the Home screen, you can start applications categorized into PLANNING,
MACHINING, IMPROVEMENT, and UTILITY.
3 In addition to preregistered applications, you can register applications specific for
machine tool builders (MTB) to the Home screen for quick start.
You can smoothly move from this Home screen, where machining site work is
4 consolidated, to each tool screen.
5
6
7
8
A1
Fig. 1.2.1 Home screen
A2
Z
4
B-64644EN/08
1.2.2 Applications
1.2.2
In the Home screen, you can start each categorized application.

Major registered applications are as follows.
 PC Operation
PC Operation allows you to display and operate the remote computer screen on 1
the CNC indicator screen by connecting the CNC to the Windows OS remote
computer (PC remotely connected) through Ethernet. This application uses the
Windows remote desktop and allows you to use applications of the remote 2
computer on the CNC screen.
Ethernet cable
3
HUB
4
PC CNC
Fig. 1.2.2 (a) PC Operation 5

 Tool Manager
Tool Manager allows you to manage more detailed information required at
production sites, as well as tool information which operators want to check and set 6
on a daily basis used in a tool slide on the CNC operation screen, on the database
and display and set them in the dedicated screen.
7
Tool Manager
CNC
Tool offset 8
View function
Tool
Tool life
information
management A1
function
CNC built-in
3D interference A2
check function
Fig. 1.2.2 (b) Tool Manager
5
B-64644EN/08
 Calendar
Calendar allows you to register, check, and edit schedule. You can also register
schedule from applications other than Calendar.
1
2
3
4 Fig. 1.2.2 (c) Calendar
5  • You can receive a notification about your schedule from the

information center at the specified time.
MEMO
6
 Cycle Time Estimation (Option)
Cycle Time Estimation allows you to estimate the cycle time when executing an
7 existing machining program.
1. Start Cycle Time Estimation.
8
2. Update estimation data.
A1 (automatic update for the first time)
3. Select a program for which you want to

A2 execute estimation.
Z 4. Start estimation.
5. Finish the estimation.
6. Check the estimation results.
Fig. 1.2.2 (d) Steps for Cycle Time Estimation
6
B-64644EN/08
 CNC operation screen

In the CNC operation screen, machine tools such as machining centers and lathes
can be numerically controlled. All tasks required for machining such as operating,
editing, setup can be performed on the screen. You can smoothly perform
programming, setup changes and machining by using systematic operations and
screen layout tailored to the work processes. 1
2
3
Programming Changing setups Machining 4
Fig. 1.2.2 (e) CNC Operation Screen
5
 • For details about the CNC operation screen, see "FANUC iHMI CNC
Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1). 6
MEMO
 Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe (Option)

7
Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe is a programming tool for
lathe that can create NC programs by only entering blank geometry and parts
figure and deciding the machining process.
8
Generally, creating NC programs requires programming knowledge of G codes
and so forth. With this software, you can automatically create NC programs
without such knowledge. The following shows comparison with the conventional
A1
NC program creation:
A2
Z
7
B-64644EN/08
Blank: AL 
Diagram

̷
2
°
̷
Conventional NC program creation NC program creation using this software
3 - Consider machining process
- Calculate coordinate values
Enter blank shape and parts figure
Blank shape Parts figure
outside the diagram
- Decide tool to use and
4
investigate tool dimension
- Decide feedrate and cutting
amount according to the blank
and tool
- Enter G codes manually
5 - Check the movement of the

entered G codes and
coordinate values
Automatically decide machining process
6
- Others Process 1
Machining type
Type of the tool
Tool dimension
Cutting amount
Feedrate
Machining start position
Process 2
Machining type
Type of the tool
Tool dimension
7
Cutting amount
Feedrate
Machining start position
Automatically create NC program
8 *** Start NC program creation *** *** Start NC program creation ***

2 352*5$0 2 352*5$0
*;<=& *;<=&
A1
**;= **;=
287(5528*+,1* 287(5528*+,1*
0 0
0 0
0 0
*;<=& *;<=&
7 7
0 0
*6 *6
A2
*60 *60
**= **=
Z
Lathe
Fig. 1.2.2 (f) Creating NC Program with Interactive Programming Function for
Complex Lathe
(Compared with the Conventional Flow)
 • For details on Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe,

see "Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe
MEMO OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64654EN).
8
B-64644EN/08
 Machine Collision Avoidance Function (Option)

The machine collision avoidance function detects a collision beforehand to safely
stop the machine by performing a simulation based on the 3D machine model and
the preview position of the machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 1.2.2 (g) Machine collision avoidance
The function can also be used as shown below.
Machine tool builder
Machine user
7
(MTB)
8
A1
A2
Create a 3D Create a jig and material Execute
machine model on on the CNC
the PC Select a tool from TOOL Z
Embed it to the MANAGER
CNC
Fig. 1.2.2 (h) Collision Avoidance (Usage Example)
9
B-64644EN/08
 3D Interference Check Function (Option)

The 3D interference check function is an optional function to stop the machine
beforehand when detecting interactive interference with the machine, workpiece,
or tool to prevent damage on the machine.
Built in the CNC device, the 3D interference check function is used to register
1 model figures, such as tools and workpieces, and update setting data to the CNC
device using the 3D interference check application.
2
 • For details on 3D Interference Check Function, see "4.2 3D
INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION".
MEMO
3
 Data Logger
4 Data Logger collects data inside the CNC periodically and stores them to the
database in the memory device. Data stored in the database can be displayed in
list form. These data are used in other applications such as Maintenance
5 Manager.
Internal
6 information
Operation
information
7 Maintenance
Information
(CNC parts, machine parts) Machine
information
8
Servo/ Maintenance
spindle information
Data Logger Manager
A1 Fig. 1.2.2 (i) Data Logger
A2
Z
10
B-64644EN/08
 Maintenance Manager
Maintenance Manager monitors the state of a maintenance target, and notifies
alarms and maintenance timings for efficient preventive maintenance of
machinery.
In Maintenance Manager, you can monitor the device using the three categories -
CNC System Maintenance, Machine Maintenance, and User Maintenance - and 1
display a detected abnormality, a monitored state graphically, and a guide for
maintenance task support.
Maintenance Manager
2
Alarm display
Monitor Notify
3
Maintenance
CNC maintenance
Information
4
parts
Information
Center 5
Machine/user
maintenance parts
6
Fig. 1.2.2 (j) Maintenance Manager
 SERVO Viewer 7
SERVO Viewer observes information, such as the position, speed, or torque of the
feed axis or spindle, and displays it in waveform.
In addition to behavior of each axis, the CNC operation status (such as program
8
number, sequence number, and MST code) and PMC signal can be observed.
This function is also used to monitor secular changes of the machine by
measuring waveforms periodically.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 1.2.2 (k) SERVO Viewer
11
B-64644EN/08
 Manual Viewer
Manual Viewer allows you to manage and view registered manuals. Registered
manuals can be displayed in a list, and manuals can be viewed, added, and
deleted.
1
2
3
4 Fig. 1.2.2 (l) Manual Viewer
 Memo function
5 Memo Function allows you to draw lines, paste memos, and insert images to
"whiteboard".
6 You can create and edit a whiteboard. You can also create or edit a memo to be
pasted on the whiteboard.
You can also convert a whiteboard to an image format and output it to an external
device (USB flash drive, memory card).
7
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 1.2.2 (m) Memo function
12
B-64644EN/08
 Web Browser
Web Browser allows you to view Web pages from the CNC and helps you collect
information required for machining sites. Operation management pages of MT-
LINKi and Web pages containing machining know-how can be viewed on the CNC
screen without leaving a work machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 1.2.2 (n) Web Browser
7
 • By registering start pages, you can display the Web pages easily. 8
MEMO
A1
A2
Z
13
B-64644EN/08
 Setting
Settings allows you to configure the overall settings (brightness adjustment,
language settings, time settings, etc.) for applications on iHMI.
You can also check information, such as version and remaining data capacity.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 1.2.2 (o) Settings Screen
7
8
A1
A2
Z
14
2
1
BASIC OPERATION 2
3
4
5
This chapter gives basic operations of iHMI.
2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS IN THIS

6
MANUAL ............................................................................................... 16
2.2 APPLICATION COMMON INFORMATION ........................................... 28
2.3 HOME SCREEN (APPLICATION MENUS) .......................................... 34
A
2.4 INFORMATION CENTER ..................................................................... 41
15
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION 
2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL
2.1
2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTA-

TIONAL CONVENTIONS IN THIS
1 MANUAL
iHMI operation is performed using the MDI keyboard. If it is equipped with the
2 touch panel, operation can be done by tapping the screen.
3  Basic operation
MDI key operation
Press the MDI keyboard buttons to input characters and numbers.
4
5
6 Fig. 2.1 (a) MDI Keyboard (15 Inch Qwerty Keyboard)
7 Operation of returning to the previous screen

When you press and hold the <HOME> key, you will return to the previous screen
(except for the Home screen).
8
Soft key operation
If soft keys are found around the screen, you can press any key to execute the
A1 corresponding function.
A2
Vertical soft keys
Z
Horizontal soft keys
Fig. 2.1 (b) Soft keys
Touch panel operation

Tap the buttons and soft keys on the screen to operate. They can be dragged or
swiped depending on the function.
16
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.1 (c) Touch panel 5
 • You can also connect a mouse to the USB port for maintenance or
application development. If a mouse is connected, you can start an
6
MEMO application or select an item using the mouse.
7
Launcher/screen keyboard operation 8
The following controls are displayed on top of the Home screen.
A
A1
A2
B Z
Fig. 2.1 (d) Controls Displayed on Top of the Home Screen
17
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.1 (a) Part Names and Functions of Controls Displayed on Top of the Home Screen
Name Description
A Launcher You can perform the following operations:
• Switching the display of the screen keyboard
1 • Moving to the Home screen

• Switching to a specific application
B Screen keyboard You can type with the keyboard on each iHMI application.
2
3
A B C D
4 Fig. 2.1 (e) Launcher
5 Table 2.1 (b) Part Names and Functions in the Launcher

Name Description
A Keyboard button Shows or hides the screen keyboard.
6 B Menu button Moves to the iHMI Home screen.
C Application button Calls a specific application.
7 Up to ten application buttons can be registered from settings. For details,

see "FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN).
D Pinch Drag this to move the launcher.
8 However, you cannot move all or part of the launcher outside the Home
screen.
A1
 • If you change the theme setting, the background color of the launcher
changes. For details on the theme setting, see "6.4.3.2 Switching the
A2 MEMO background color of the screen [Theme Setting]".
18
B-64644EN/08
There are two screen keyboards available.
Table 2.1 (c) Screen Keyboard Types

Name Description/appearance
Standard keyboard This keyboard conforms to the hardware keyboard of the
standard indicator. 1
It has no screenshot key. To take a screenshot, press the
<CTRL> and <GRAPH> keys.
2
3
4
Keyboard for the function to This screen keyboard is for the function to display the machine 5
display the machine operator's operator's panel screen.
6
panel screen (FANUC Auto It has no function and reset keys. If you need these keys for
HMI/T) maintenance, use the virtual MDI on the maintenance display
screen.
7
8
A1
A2
• Even if you change the theme setting, the background color of the
 screen keyboard does not change. For details on the theme setting,
see "6.4.3.2 Switching the background color of the screen [Theme
Z
MEMO
Setting]".
19
B-64644EN/08
To move the screen keyboard, drag any other area than the keys.
1
2
Fig. 2.1 (f) Moving the Screen Keyboard
3
<CTRL>, <SHIFT>, and <ALT> are alternate keys.
When you press these keys to toggle, they change as follows.
4
Table 2.1 (d) Key Display for Each State
5 OFF ON
6
7 The special keys on the standard keyboard are as follows.
A B
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.1 (g) Special Keys on the Standard Keyboard
Table 2.1 (e) Special Keys on the Standard Keyboard

Name Description
A Reset key This key is available only on the standard keyboard.
When it is pressed, bit 0 of the signal specified in the iHMI overall
configuration file is turned ON. For details on the setting, see "FANUC
iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN).
B Close key Hides the screen keyboard.
20
B-64644EN/08
The special keys on the keyboard for the function to display the machine operator's panel
screen (FANUC Auto HMI/T) are as follows.
A B
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.1 (h) Special Keys on the Keyboard for the Function to Display the Machine
Operator's Panel Screen (FANUC Auto HMI/T)
5
Table 2.1 (f) Special Keys on the Keyboard for the Function to Display the Machine
Operator's Panel Screen (FANUC Auto HMI/T) 6
Name Description
A Screenshot key This key is available only on the keyboard for the function to display the
machine operator's panel screen (FANUC Auto HMI/T). 7
When it is pressed, a screenshot is taken.
8
To enable the screenshot key, the setting is required. For details, see
"6.4.4.7 Saving a screen image [Screenshot Settings]".
B Close key Hides the screen keyboard.
A1
 • From settings, you can temporarily hide the launcher and screen
MEMO
keyboard when taking a screenshot. For details on the setting, see
"FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN). A2
 Description in this manual Z

Description of MDI keys
Key names are enclosed by brackets (< >).
Example: <INPUT>
Description of buttons and icons

Button and icon names are enclosed by brackets ([ ]).
Example: [OK] soft key
To standardize the differences in operation between the MDI keyboard and touch
panel, some of button and icon execution operations are described as follows in
this manual.
21
B-64644EN/08
Description example: Press [XXX].
Actual operation with the MDI keys

Select the [XXX] icon with <←> <→> <↑> <↓>, and press <INPUT>.
1 Actual operation with the touch panel

Tap the [XXX] icon.
2  Item selection
Using the MDI keys
3 Move the cursor with <←> <→> <↑> <↓> and press <INPUT>.
Using the soft keys

4 Press the key corresponding to a soft key displayed on the screen.
Using the touch panel

5 Tap the icon on the screen.
 Conversion operation to Japanese/Chinese input

6 You can input Japanese or Chinese (Simplified/Traditional) using Microsoft IME.
To use this function, you need to enable the Japanese/Chinese function.
7 For details, see "6.4.4.8 Setting Japanese/Chinese input [Japanese and Chinese
Input]".
Changing the conversion mode

8
<1> Move the cursor to a field where Japanese or Chinese can be input.
A1
 • Japanese or Chinese can be input for text memo in the Memo
function, schedule in the Calendar, or search in the Manual viewer.
A2 MEMO
The Japanese/Chinese icon appears in the iHMI common status display.

Z
<2> Press the <Ctrl> + <Space> keys.

The system enters the Japanese/Chinese conversion mode, and the
Japanese/Chinese icon lights up.
22
B-64644EN/08
How to cancel the Japanese/Chinese conversion mode

Press the <Ctrl> + <Space> keys again.
 • In PANEL iH Pro, you can also press the <Ctrl> key twice to switch
MEMO
to the Simplified Chinese conversion mode. 1
2
Text conversion
Conversion operations are different depending on the language (Japanese/
Chinese) or device (PANEL iH/PANEL iH Pro) as follows: 3
Table 2.1 (g) Japanese Text Conversion 4
Operation MDI key to use
To type text
Type a Roman character using the alphabet keys.
5
It is converted to Hiragana.
To enter converted Hiragana Press the <INPUT> key to confirm. 7

To convert to the most Press the <Space> key.
frequently used Kanji
character 8
To display conversion Press the <Space> key again.

A1
candidates
A2
Z
To select a conversion Press the <↑> or <↓> key.

candidate
To confirm the text Press the <INPUT> key.
23
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.1 (h) Simplified Chinese Text Conversion

To type text Type a Pinyin character using the alphabet keys.
1
2 To convert to the most Press the <Space> key. -
3 character
4 To display conversion
candidates
Press the <←> key. Press the <Space> key.
5
6
7
To switch between - Press the <PageUp> or
conversion candidate pages <PageDown> key.
8 To select a conversion Press the <↑> or <↓> key to -
candidate select it and then press the
<Space> key.
A1
A2
To confirm the text Press the <INPUT> key. Press the number key
corresponding to the target
Z candidate.
24
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.1 (i) Traditional Chinese Text Conversion

To type text Type a Zhuyin symbol.
For Zhuyin symbols corresponding to MDI keytop
characters, see "A.6 CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR
1
TRADITIONAL CHINESE ZHURIN SYMBOLS".
2
3
To convert to the most - Press the <Space> key.
character
4
5
To display conversion Press the <Space> key. Press the <↓> key.
candidates
6
7
8
A1
To select a conversion Press the <↑> or <↓> key. Press the <↑> or <↓> key to
candidate select it and then press the
<INPUT> key. A2
Z
To confirm the text Press the <INPUT> key. Press the <INPUT> key
again.
Limitations
There are the following limitations on the Japanese/Chinese input function:
25
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.1 (j) Limitations on the Japanese/Chinese Input Function

Device Limitations
Common to PANEL • The following language bar is not displayed:
iH/PANEL iH Pro
1 • To protect the disk, text conversion learning results are not

saved to a file.
2 PANEL iH Japanese/Chinese input from a keyboard connected to a USB port

is not supported.
PANEL iH Pro • This function supports the following IMEs:
3 Japanese Microsoft IME
Simplified Chinese Microsoft Pinyin ABC Input Style
Traditional Chinese New Phonetic
4 If you specify an IME other than the above or general IME, input
language switch or text conversion may not be correctly
performed.
• When this function is enabled, the keyboard layout for Japanese
5 input changes from Japanese keyboard (106 keyboard) to
English keyboard (101 keyboard).
• When this function is enabled, Caps Lock is automatically turned
6 on after logon, allowing typing in uppercase characters. The
"Caps lock is ON" message appears on the logon screen, but
this is not an error.
7 When you log off, Caps Lock is automatically turned off, entering
lowercase input mode. This cannot be changed because it is the
default Windows action. To return to the uppercase input mode,
8 press <ABC/abc> key to turn on Caps Lock.

• Do not change "Chinese/English Input Switching Key" in the
Simplified Chinese Microsoft Pinyin ABC Input Style setting
(Options) to Shift. If you do, you will not be able to input text from
A1 the keys used when Shift is pressed on the MDI keyboard.
A2
Z
26
B-64644EN/08
Device Limitations
• Do not change "Use left SHIFT to" in the Traditional Chinese
New Phonetic setting (Properties) to any other than (None). If
you do, you will not be able to input text from the keys used
when Shift is pressed on the MDI keyboard.
1
2
3
4
5
6
• For details on the Microsoft Pinyin ABC 7
Input Style setting (Options) and the New
 Phonetic setting (Properties), see
MEMO
Windows Help.
<https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/
8
products/windows?os=windows-7>
A1
A2
Z
27
B-64644EN/08
2.2 APPLICATION COMMON INFORMATION
2.2
2.2 APPLICATION COMMON INFORMA-

TION
1 This section describes information common to all iHMI applications.
2 2.2.1 Screen Common Information Display

2.2.1
Important information for operation is displayed in the upper section of the screen
3 in all applications of the iHMI.
4
Screen common
5 information display
6
7
8
A1 Fig. 2.2.1 Screen common information display
A2
Z
28
B-64644EN/08
2.2.2 About Screen Common Information Display

2.2.2
The screen common information display consists of the following three display
functions.
CNC Status Display Time Display
1
2
Message Display
Fig. 2.2.2 Screen Common Information Display (Enlarged View) 3
Table 2.2.2 Screen common information display 4
Name Description
CNC Status Display Displays CNC status information, such as emergency stop and
operation mode.
5
Time Display Displays the time.
Message Display Displays the highest priority message of ones displayed in the 6
information center ("2.4 INFORMATION CENTER").
2.2.2.1 CNC status display 7

The CNC status display function displays the following information.
2.2.2.1
B D F 8
A C E G
A1
Fig. 2.2.2.1 Screen Common Information Display (CNC Status Display)
A2
Z
29
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.2.2.1 CNC Status Display

Name Description
A Path in Operation Displays the path currently in operation with an icon.
Displayed State Description
1 Icon
Path 1 Selected Indicates that the first path is
displayed and operated in a
2 1
multi-path system.
(The corresponding number
icon is displayed for Path 2 to
3 15.)
Loader Path Indicates that the loader path is
L Selected displayed and operated in a
4 multi-path system.
B Operation Mode Displays the current operation mode with an icon.
5 Icon
MDI Mode Indicates that the system is in
MDI manual data input state and
6 MDI operation mode.
MEM Mode Indicates that the system is in
MEM automatic operation (memory
7 operation) mode.
EDIT Mode Indicates that the system is in
EDIT memory edit mode.
8 Handle Mode Indicates that the system is in
HANDLE (Option) manual handle feed mode.
A1 JOG
JOG Mode Indicates that the system is in
JOG feed mode.
Teach in JOG Indicates that the system is in
A2 TJOG Mode
(Option)
teach in JOG feed mode.
Teach in Handle Indicates that the system is in
Z THDL Mode
(Option)
teach in handle feed mode.
Incremental Indicates that the system is in

INC Mode incremental feed mode.
(Option)
Reference Mode Indicates that the system is in
REF manual reference point return
mode.
Remote Mode Indicates that the system is in
REMOTE automatic operation (DNC
operation) mode.
30
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
C Program Displays the current program operation state with an icon.
Operation Displayed State Description
Icon
Automatic
Operation
Indicates that the system is in
automatic operation.
1
Running State
Automatic
Operation Stop
Indicates that the system
finished executing for a block
2
State and stops automatic operation.
Automatic Indicates that the system halted 3
Operation Halt executing for a block and stops
State automatic operation.
D Emergency Stop Displays the emergency stop state with an icon. 4
Icon
Emergency Stop Indicates that the system is in 5
emergency stop.
E Data Input/Output Indicates whether or not data are being input/output with an icon.
State
6
Icon
Data Input/ Indicates that data are being 7
Output State input/output.
In this state, the power of the
CNC cannot be turned off. If the
power is turned off when data
8
are being input/output, the data
may be damaged.
A1
F 3D Interference Displays whether the 3D interference check function is turned ON
Check State or OFF if the system has the function.
(Option) Displayed State Description A2
Icon
3D Interference Indicates that the 3D
Check Function interference check function is Z
OFF disabled.
3D Interference Indicates that the 3D
Check Function interference check function is
ON enabled.
31
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
G Program Storage Displays the program storage state of the high-speed program
State manager with an icon.
1 Icon
Program Not The program is not stored in F-
Stored ROM.
2 Program Stored The program is stored in F-
ROM.
3
• "3D Interference Check State" is displayed when one of the following
4  options exist.
3D interference check by standard CNC
MEMO
3D interference check by open CNC
5
2.2.2.2 Message display
6 This display shows a message from the information center ("2.4 INFORMATION
2.2.2.2
CENTER").
If there are multiple messages, the one with highest priority is displayed.
7 Also, when a reset signal is received, "Resetting..." is displayed.
8 Fig. 2.2.2.2 Screen Common Information Display (Message Display)

Messages are displayed in different colors according to their types.
A1 Table 2.2.2.2 Message type
Message type Display color
A2 Alarm Background color: Yellow

Text color: Red
Operator message, Warning Background color: Yellow
Z Text color: Black
Reset notification, notification Background color: Blue
Text color: White
 • For details about messages to be displayed, see "2.4 INFORMATION

CENTER".
MEMO • The overflown part of a message is omitted, replaced by ".......".
32
B-64644EN/08
2.2.2.3 Time display

This display shows the current time set on the CNC.
2.2.2.3
Fig. 2.2.2.3 Screen Common Information Display (Time Display) 1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
33
B-64644EN/08
2.3 HOME SCREEN (APPLICATION MENUS)
2.3
2.3 HOME SCREEN (APPLICATION

MENUS)
1 iHMI allows you to call an application by selecting the corresponding icon on the
list in the Home screen (application menus).
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 2.3 Home screen
8
A1
A2
Z
34
B-64644EN/08
2.3.1 Starting the Home Screen

2.3.1
The Home screen is displayed following the splash screen after turning on iHMI.
Power-on
1
2
Splash screen
3
4
5
Home screen 6
Fig. 2.3.1 Starting the Home Screen
7
2.3.1.1 Shutting down PANEL iH Pro
In PANEL iH Pro, you can power off the PANEL iH Pro using the [Shutdown] soft
8
2.3.1.1
key only it is set by the machine tool builder.
A1

NOTE
• The PANEL iH Pro may not be able to start unless it is shut down
correctly.
• For details, contact the machine tool builder.
A2
Z
35
B-64644EN/08
<1> Press the [Shutdown] soft key.

The shutdown dialog box appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6 <2> Press [Shutdown PANEL i] or the [Shutdown] soft key.
PANEL iH Pro is turned off.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • Alternatively, you can select the dialog with the <↑> and <↓> keys
and press the <INPUT> key to confirm.
MEMO
36
B-64644EN/08
 Other operations in the shutdown dialog box

In the shutdown dialog box, you can perform the following operations, as well as
turning off the PANEL iH Pro.
[Restart PANEL i]: Restarts the PANEL iH Pro.
[Cancel]: Closes the shutdown dialog box.
1
2.3.2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Home
Screen
2
2.3.2
The Home screen consists of the following three parts.

3
Page button display
4
5
6
7
8
Category display Icon display
Fig. 2.3.2 (a) Home screen

A1
Table 2.3.2 (a) Home Screen Information List for Each Function A2
Name Description
Page button display Switches the icon display of applications registered by category
for each page.
Z
Each item can be switched by tapping the [<] and [>] buttons.
If there is no previous or following page, the [<] or [>] button is not
displayed respectively.
Category display Displays the categories where the applications are registered.
If applications registered in the categories are not displayed on
one page, the number of pages is displayed.
Icon display Displays registered applications with an icon and name.
If there is a previous or following page, the display can be
switched using the [<] and [>] buttons or
<PAGE UP> and <PAGE DOWN>.
37
B-64644EN/08
 Indication of a notification from the application

If there is a notification from the application, an appropriate mark is added to the
lower right of the icon as follows.
1
2
Notification from the
3 application
4
5
6 Fig. 2.3.2 (b) Home Screen (Notification Example)
7 Table 2.3.2 (b) Notification Types and Description

Notification mark Description
8 Notification:
Information that the user should be notified
Example: Schedule notification in "Calendar".
Information that shows no problem with machine operation but

A1 Warning: requires attention
Example: Operator message in CNC operation screen.
Information to notify a problem with machine operation
A2 Alarm: Example: NC alarm in CNC operation screen.
Z
 • A displayed notification mark is the same as one displayed in the
information center. For details about notification messages, see "2.4
MEMO INFORMATION CENTER".
2.3.3 Starting an Application

2.3.3
In the Home screen, the following methods can be used to start an application.
• MDI keyboard operation: Select the icon with <←> <→> <↑> <↓> and press
<INPUT>.
• Touch panel operation: Tap an application icon you want to start.
38
B-64644EN/08
2.3.4 Returning to the Home Screen

2.3.4
Pressing the <HOME> key displays the Home screen even when an application is
running.
1
2
Fig. 2.3.4 MDI Keyboard (15 Inch Qwerty Keyboard)
3
 • When you press and hold the <HOME> key, you will return to the
previous screen (except for the Home screen).
4
MEMO
5
2.3.5 Applications Registered with the Home Screen
2.3.5
The following applications are preregistered with the Home screen. 6

Table 2.3.5 Application List
Application name Function overview Icon View
7
PLANNING
PC Operation Allows you to use CAD/CAM on a PC 3.1 8
remotely connected.
Tool Manager Allows you to centralize tool information 3.2 A1

required at production sites.
Calendar Allows you to enter work schedule. An 3.3

A2
alarm is issued when the set time arrives.
Cycle Time Estimates the cycle time when executing 3.4

Z
Estimation a machining program.
(Option)
MACHINING
CNC operation Allows you to edit, change setups, and (*1)
screen execute machining programs in the CNC
screen.
Collision Avoidance Allows you to check the interference of a 4.1
(Option) work and tool.
39
B-64644EN/08
Application name Function overview Icon View

IMPROVEMENT
Data Logger Always collects CNC data. 5.1
1
Maintenance Collects CNC and tool machine 5.2
Manager information, allowing you to manage
2 maintenance information, such as
consumable life management and
abnormality detection.
3 SERVO Viewer Observes information, such as the

position, speed, or torque of the feed axis
5.3
or spindle, and displays it in waveform.
4 UTILITY
Manual Allows you to view CNC and machine 6.1
manuals.
5
Memo Allows you to create a hand-written memo 6.2
using a text memo or touch panel.
6
Browser Allows you to view Web pages. 6.3
7
Maintenance Displays the conventional CNC screen. (*2)
8 Display
File Management Allows you to manage files. -
A1
Setting Allows you to configure the overall iHMI 6.4
A2 settings.
(*1)See "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-

Z 1).
(*2)See "CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-63164EN).
• Some preparation, such as data registration or settings, is required

depending on the application.
 • For applications not described in this manual, refer to the appropriate

operating manual.
MEMO • Due to configurations by the machine tool builder (MTB), some
applications may not appear, or the manufacturer-specific applications
may be added.
40
B-64644EN/08
2.4 INFORMATION CENTER
2.4

The information center notifies the user of an NC alarm regardless of which
application of iHMI is running.
It displays the notification mark on an application icon in the Home screen to notify
1
the user that there is information (notification) from the application.
2
2.4.1 Information Center Displays
3
2.4.1
If you receive a notification from a running application, the information center

automatically appears.
4
Message
5
Fig. 2.4.1 (a) Information Center Displays

6
7
 • If you receive a notification while the information center is displayed, it
is added to the information center.
MEMO
8
Manually Displaying the Information Center
The information center can be displayed manually as follows.
A1
• Press the [Display] soft key.
A2
[Display]
Soft keys Z
Fig. 2.4.1 (b) Manually Displaying the Information Center
41
B-64644EN/08
 How to view the [Display] soft key

The [Display] soft key changes as follows, depending on the number and type of
messages received.
1 Table 2.4.1 Notification Types and Description

Notification mark Description
White A display when no message occurs.
2
Notification: Notifies the user that there is a notification message (information
3 Blue to be shared with the user).
Warning: Notifies that there is a warning (information that shows no
4 Yellow problem with machine operation but requires attention)

message.
Alarm: Notifies that there is a alarm (information that shows a problem
5 Red with machine operation) message.
When the Display in the information center display. You can close the
information information center.
6 center is
displayed:
7
 • The number (0 to 9) in the lower right of the notification mark
represents the number of notification.
8 MEMO For ten or more messages, "9+" is displayed instead of a number.
A1
A2

NOTE
• The information center is not automatically displayed in the
maintenance display.
42
B-64644EN/08
2.4.2 Information Center Overview

2.4.2
The information center consists of the following displays.

Screen common information display [X] soft key
1
2
3
Main display
4
5
Horizontal
soft keys 6
Fig. 2.4.2 Information Center
7
Table 2.4.2 Information Center Displays
Name Description
8
Screen common Displays the CNC status.
information display
A1
Main display Displays notification messages in a list.
[X] soft key Closes the displayed information screen and returns to the Home
screen or application screen. A2
Horizontal soft keys Operate the information center.
43
B-64644EN/08
2.4.3 Main Display Description

2.4.3
There are two main display types - detailed display and list display, and the display
can be switched by using the [Display Details]/[Display List] soft keys.
1 Detailed display screen
A
2
3 B
4
5 C
6
7 Fig. 2.4.3 (a) Information Center (Detailed Display)
List display screen
8
A
A1
B
A2
Z
Fig. 2.4.3 (b) Information Center (List Display)
44
B-64644EN/08
Table 2.4.3 Information screen details

Name Description
A Title Displays the title of this screen.
B Message list Lists current messages in the order of alarm, warning,
and notification for each application.
If there is no message, "No Alarm" is displayed.
1
C Message details Displays the details of a message currently selected.
2
2.4.4 Operating the Information Center Screen
2.4.4
The information center screen can be operated with the MDI keys and horizontal
3
soft keys.
2.4.4.1 MDI key operation 4

2.4.4.1
<1> Select a message with <↑> <↓>.

5
<2> Press the [Display Details] or [Display List] soft key.
The details of the selected message are displayed. 6
7
Selected
8
A1
Detailed
A2
display
[Display Details] or [Display List]
• In the horizontal soft key section, [Display list] is displayed on the

 detailed display screen, and [Display Details] is displayed on the list
display screen.
MEMO
You can switch the display by pressing this soft key.
45
B-64644EN/08
2.4.4.2 Operating with the horizontal soft keys

The horizontal soft keys are used for the following operations, as well as switching
2.4.4.2
the display.
1
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (a) Horizontal Soft Keys on the Information Center
2
 Switching the path ([Selected Path]/[All Paths])
3 Among the messages in the CNC operation screen, only ones in the selected path
are displayed.
Messages other than ones in the CNC operation screen are not to be filtered.
4 If [All Paths] is selected, the filter by path is reset.
 Switching the display ([Display Details]/[Display List])

5 The main display is switched between the detailed display and the list display.
6  Displaying the History window ([History])

When you press the [History] soft key on the Information Center, the history
window appears.
7 One of the following history windows is displayed according to the selected soft
key:
• Alarm history
8 • Operator message history
A1 • The [Operator Message] and [Alarm] soft keys are not displayed under
A2

NOTE
the following conditions:
There is no external message function, external data input function,
or custom macro option.
Bit 2 of parameter No. 3112 is set to "0".
46
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
B
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (b) History window

6
Table 2.4.4.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the History Window 7
Name Function
A History window One of the following history windows is displayed: 8
• Alarm history
• Operator message history
A1
A2
Z
47
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
B Horizontal soft keys
Displays the alarm history window if pressed when the operator
message history window is displayed.
1 [Alarm] • The path name varies depending on the
CNC parameter No. 3141 to 3147
settings. However, only alphanumeric
2 characters - not Japanese, Chinese, and
 FANUC encoding - can be set. When this
is not set, the default name "PATHn" (n:
3 MEMO
Path number) is used.
• "External alarm" is displayed for all
external alarms while "Macro alarm" is
4 displayed for all macro alarms.
Displays the operator message history window if pressed when

5 the alarm history window is displayed.
[Operator Message] • When bit 6 of parameter No. 3196 is set
6 to "1", the operator message history may

not be displayed. For details on the
 parameter, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/

32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL"
7 MEMO (B-64490EN).
• The message number display depends
on the parameter No. 6301#1 and
8 parameter No. 6310 values.
Saves the displayed history (alarm or operator message) to a

A1 text file.
[Output]
A2
Each window contains a maximum of 200 entries of history in the order of
occurrence.
Z A message is displayed in the following format.
Alarm history
Serial number Path name Alarm occurrence date/time
Alarm number Alarm message
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (c) Display Example of Alarm Message
48
B-64644EN/08
Operator message history

Serial number Alarm occurrence date/time
1
Alarm number Operator message
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (d) Display Example of Operator Message 2

Take the following steps to save the history in a text file.
<1> Display a history (alarm history or operator message history) you want to save.
3
<2> Insert the external device (USB flash drive or memory card) where the file is to
be saved. 4
<3> Press the [Output] soft key.
The Select Folder window appears.
5
<4> Select the output destination folder.
Use the <←> <→> <↑> <↓> keys to select the folder.
6
7
8
A1
<5> Press the [OK] soft key.
A2
• The encoding for saved text files is UNICODE (UTF-16).
• The displayed history (alarm or operator message) is output to a
text file. Z
 • If the [Cancel] soft key is pressed, the save will be canceled, and
the alarm history or operator message history will not be saved.
MEMO • The name of the text file to which the history is output is as follows.
You cannot change it.
Alarm history: AlarmHistory.txt
Operator message history: OperatorMessageHistory.txt
 Memory Usage Display ([Details])

When the available memory for PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro becomes lower than
the threshold, a message about low memory appears.
49
B-64644EN/08
• Initial values for available memory threshold are as follows:
 PANEL iH: 100 MB

PANEL iH Pro: 600 MB
1 MEMO • The available memory threshold can be changed from settings. For
details, see "FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 Fig. 2.4.4.2 (e) Message about Low Available Memory
Checking memory usage

A1 Press the [Details] soft key with the message selected.
A2
Z Fig. 2.4.4.2 (f) [Details] soft key
The Memory Usage Display window appears and you can check the operation
status and memory usage of each application.
50
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (g) Memory Usage Display Window 5
 • For details of the Memory Usage Display window, see "6.4.7.4

6
Displaying memory usage [Memory Usage Display]".
MEMO
7
End launched application
When available memory becomes low, it can be recovered without restarting the 8
CNC device.
<1> Select a launched application by touch operation or with the <↑><↓> keys.
A1
A2
<2> Press the [Close App] soft key.
The end application confirmation message appears. Z
 • Ending an application may take time. In such cases, the processing

window appears.
MEMO
 Deleting the message ([Delete])

The selected message "notification" is deleted.
"Alarm" and "warning" cannot be deleted.
51
B-64644EN/08
 Diagnosing the trouble

If a diagnosable alarm or operator message occurs, the [Resolve Problem] soft
key is displayed.
A selected alarm or operator message trouble is diagnosed. See "2.4.5
Troubleshooting".
1  iHMI update notification ([Software Update])
When there is a software update notification, the [Software Update] soft key is
2 displayed.
Check the message displayed on the Information Center screen and update the
software.
3 For details, see "2.4.6 Updating Software".
 Clearing the alarm SW0100 ([Clear SW0100])
When the alarm SW0100 occurs, press the [Clear SW0100] soft key on the
4 Information Center to clear the alarm.
5
Fig. 2.4.4.2 (h) [Clear SW0100] Soft Key
6 If the alarm SW0100 occurs on multiple paths, this soft key clears the alarm on all
the paths.
7
• The [Clear SW0100] soft key appears when the alarm SW0100
8  occurs.
• Even if you press the [Clear SW0100] soft key during emergency stop,
MEMO the alarm is not cleared. When you release the emergency stop, the
alarm is cleared.
A1
2.4.5 Troubleshooting
A2 2.4.5
Troubleshoots based on an alarm or operator message that occurred. This

function shows guidance information useful to solve problems.
Z 2.4.5.1 Description of the troubleshoot window

Using the troubleshoot (diagnose) window, you can proceed with troubleshooting
2.4.5.1
by answering questions displayed. When the cause is identified, a solution is

displayed in the troubleshoot (resolution) window.
52
B-64644EN/08
Troubleshoot (Diagnosis) window
A 1
B
2
C
3
4
D
5
Fig. 2.4.5.1 (a) Troubleshoot (Diagnosis) window
6
Table 2.4.5.1 (a) Name and Function of Troubleshoot (Diagnosis) Window
Name Description 7
A Trouble type/ Displays the type and description of a trouble that occurred.
description The following icons are displayed according to the trouble
type. 8
Icon Type
Alarm
A1
Operator message
A2
B Question Displays the number of questions and a question to identify
the cause of the trouble.
C Additional Displays additional information about the question in text Z
information and image.
D Horizontal soft keys
Yes Answers "Yes" to the question.
No Answers "No" to the question.
[Change Scroll] Moves the selection focus between "Trouble type/
description" and "Additional information".
[Back] Displays the last question message.
[Cancel] Cancels troubleshooting.
53
B-64644EN/08
Troubleshoot (Resolution) window
1 A
B
2
3 C
4
D
5
Fig. 2.4.5.1 (b) Troubleshoot (Resolution) window
6
Table 2.4.5.1 (b) Name and Function of Troubleshoot (Resolution) Window
7 Name Description
A Trouble type/ Displays the type and description of a trouble that occurred.
description The following icons are displayed according to the trouble
8 type.
Icon Type
Alarm
A1
Operator message
A2
B Solution Displays the cause of the trouble and a solution to the
cause.
Z C Countermeasures Displays additional information about the solution in text
and image.
[Change Scroll] Moves the selection focus between "Trouble type/
description" and "Countermeasures".
[Back] Moves to the troubleshoot (diagnosis) window.
[End] Ends troubleshooting.
2.4.5.2 Performing troubleshooting

Troubleshoot based on an alarm or operator message that occurred to identify the
2.4.5.2
cause and display a solution.
54
B-64644EN/08
<1> Select an alarm or operator message you want to troubleshoot with <↑> and
<↓>.
The details of the selected alarm or operator message are displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
 • If a solvable alarm or operator message occurs, the [Resolve
MEMO
Problem] soft key is displayed in the list of soft keys. 7
<2> Press the [Resolve Problem] soft key. 8

The Troubleshoot (Diagnosis) window appears to identify the cause of the
trouble.
A1
A2
Z
55
B-64644EN/08
<3> Check the information in "Question" and press the [Yes] or [No] soft key to
answer the question.
1
2  • If the cause is already identified, the troubleshoot (resolution)
window is displayed without displaying the troubleshoot (diagnose)
MEMO window.
3
<4> Answer questions until the cause is identified.
When the cause is identified, a solution message to the cause is displayed in
4 the Troubleshoot (Resolution) window.
5
6
7
8
A1
 • When you press the [Back] soft key, the screen returns to the last
A2 MEMO
question message.
Z <5> Perform troubleshooting work by following the solution message displayed.
2.4.5.3 Clearing latched data

After solving the problem using the troubleshooting function, a warning message
2.4.5.3
is displayed in the information center, prompting you to clear latched data. If

latched data does not need to be saved, clear it.
<1> Select the warning message that requests you to clear latched data and press
the [Clear Data] soft key.
The clear confirmation message appears.
56
B-64644EN/08
 • When you press the [Display Details] soft key, the details of the
selected warning message are displayed.
MEMO
1
<2> Press the [Yes] soft key.
Latched data is cleared, and the warning message is cleared.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
 • If a spindle alarm or servo alarm occurred, you cannot start
clearing latched data.
NOTE
A1
A2
 • If you press the [No] soft key, latched data will not be cleared.
• If latched data is used to investigate the cause of the alarm, keep
MEMO the data. Z
2.4.6 Updating Software

2.4.6
When there is a software update notification, check the content displayed on the
Information Center screen and update the software.
 • With the update check function enabled, you are notified of software
update when needed.
MEMO For details, see "6.4.6.1 Enabling update check [Update Check]".
57
B-64644EN/08
<1> Press the [Software Update] soft key.

The system checks if the installation destination folder has enough free space
for the latest software update.
1
2
3
4
5
6
• When there is a software update notification, the [Software Update]
7 soft key is displayed.
• If the software download/backup folder does not have enough free
8  space, the [Select Download] or [Select Backup] soft key is

displayed. Press the appropriate soft key and select another folder.
MEMO • If the folder to install the latest software does not have enough free
space, a window indicating the error will be displayed. Press the
A1 [OK] soft key to close the window and then check the free space
according to the message displayed.
A2 <2> Press the [Start Download] soft key.

The software download will start, and a window indicating the downloading
Z state will be displayed.
 • An error window will be displayed when an error, such as network

disconnection and invalid download file, occurs. Press the [OK] soft
MEMO key to restart iHMI.
<3> When the update start window is displayed, press the [OK] soft key.
The software update will start.
58
B-64644EN/08
2.4.7 Display When a Power Failure Is Detected

If a power failure is detected in the CNC device, the message "A temporary power
failure was detected." is sent to the Information Center.
 • To use this function, parameter No. 24347#2 (DPW) must be set to 1.

1
MEMO
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
59
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
60
OPERATING 1
3
THE PLANNING 2
AREA 3
4
5
You can use applications for planning such as Tool Manager and Cycle Time
Estimation.
6
3.1 PC OPERATION ................................................................................... 62
3.2
3.3
TOOL MANAGER ................................................................................. 72
CALENDAR ........................................................................................ 236
A
3.4 CYCLE TIME ESTIMATION ................................................................ 260
61
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 3 OPERATING THE PLANNING AREA 
3.1 PC OPERATION
3.1
3.1 PC OPERATION
1 3.1.1 PC OPERATION Overview

3.1.1
PC OPERATION is a function to display and operate the remote computer screen

on the CNC indicator screen by connecting the CNC to the Windows OS remote
2 computer (PC remotely connected) through Ethernet.
This function uses the Windows remote desktop and allows you to use
applications of the remote computer on the CNC screen.
3
3.1.1.1 Usage examples of PC OPERATION
4 3.1.1.1
Usage example 1: Connecting to a PC installed in an office

Only one CNC can be connected to a remote computer at a time.
5
6 PC in an office
Ethernet cable
7
8
Fig. 3.1.1.1 (a) PC Operation (Usage Example 1)
A1
Usage example 2: Embedding the PC into the machine
A2
Z
Ethernet cable
PC embedded into a machine
Fig. 3.1.1.1 (b) PC Operation (Usage Example 2)
 • Operation of applications on the remote computer complies with the

remote desktop or OS specifications.
MEMO
62
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
3.1.2 Setting and Operating PC OPERATION

3.1.2
3.1.2.1 Setting the PC

Enable the remote desktop on a PC you want to connect to CNC.
3.1.2.1
1
 • For details on the settings, see the Microsoft home page.
MEMO 2
3.1.2.2 Setting the embedded Ethernet function to the CNC 3
Set the embedded Ethernet function to the CNC.
3.1.2.2
• For how to configure the settings, see "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,

4
 Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
5
MEMO • In an indicator separated CNC, the embedded Ethernet port needs to
be set to the Ethernet connector on the back of the indicator.
6
3.1.3 How to Connect the PC to the CNC
3.1.3
7
3.1.3.1 Starting from the Home screen
3.1.3.1
<1> Press [PC OPERATION] icon in the Home screen. 8

PC OPERATION starts, and the [Remote Desktop Connection] screen
appears.
A1
A2
Z
<2> Enter the computer name or IP address.
63
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
<3> Click [Connect].

The [Remote Desktop Connection] window appears.
1
2
<4> Enter the user credentials (User name, and Password) and click [OK].
3
4
5
6 3.1.3.2
3.1.3.2
Advanced connection settings
When [Options] is clicked in the [Remote Desktop Connection] window, the
advanced settings screen appears, allowing for the following settings.
7
 [General]
This tab is for saving the connection settings into a file and loading saved
8 connection settings.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 3.1.3.2 (a) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([General] Tab)
64
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
Table 3.1.3.2 (a) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([General] Tab)

Item name Description
Logon settings Specify the computer name or IP address.
Connection Save the advanced settings into a file (.rdp) and load from files.
settings The recommended destinations to save the advanced settings file are
the following:
1
• PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER
• PANEL iH \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER
2
 [Display]
This tab is for setting the screen size and number of colors for the remote desktop.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 3.1.3.2 (b) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Display] Tab)
A1
Table 3.1.3.2 (b) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Display] Tab)
Item name
Display
Description
Select the screen size for remote desktop connection.
A2
configuration
Colors Select the number of colors for remote desktop connection. Z
Display the Select whether to display or hide the connection bar when displaying in
connection bar the full screen.
when I use the
full screen
65
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
 [Local Resources]
This tab is for setting the audio, keyboard, and resources.
1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 3.1.3.2 (c) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Local Resources] Tab)
6 Table 3.1.3.2 (c) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Local Resources] Tab)
Remote audio This section is for setting the audio. However, the audio function
7 cannot be used with the CNC.
Keyboard Select whether or not to use Windows key operation on the connected
PC.
8 On this computer Use on the CNC.
On the remote computer Use on the connected PC.
A1 Only when using the full
screen
Use on the connected PC when
displaying the screen. Otherwise, use
on the CNC.
A2 Local devices
and resources
Select to use local devices and resources.
66
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
 [Programs]
This tab is for specifying a program to start when connected.
1
2
3
4
Fig. 3.1.3.2 (d) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Programs] Tab) 5
Table 3.1.3.2 (d) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Programs] Tab)
6
Start a program Set a program to be automatically executed on the connected PC
when connected. 7
 [Experience] 8
This tab is for setting performance when the remote desktop is connected.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 3.1.3.2 (e) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Experience] Tab)
67
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
Table 3.1.3.2 (e) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Experience] Tab)

Performance Select a function to use when connected.
Reconnect if the Select whether or not to reconnect when the connection is dropped.
1 connection is
dropped
2  [Advanced]
This tab is for setting server authentication.
3
4
5
6
7
8 Fig. 3.1.3.2 (f) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Advanced] Tab)
Table 3.1.3.2 (f) [Remote Desktop Connection] Screen ([Advanced] Tab)

A1 Item name Description
Server Select operation when server authentication fails.
A2 authentication
Z 3.1.3.3 How to operate from the MDI

For operation from the MDI, note the following.
3.1.3.3
 Common precautions
• When displaying in the full screen, you cannot return to the Home screen with
the <HOME> key. To return to the home screen, use the key when displaying in
a window.
• When using PC operation <ALT> + <TAB>, you cannot press <TAB> multiple
times while holding down <ALT>.
68
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
• CTRL, SHIFT, and ALT are one-touch keys.

These keys are kept valid once pressed. It is reset when pressing another key
and releasing the one-touch key.
To press two or three keys, use the following operation.
Example: For <ALT> + <AUX>, press ALT and AUX one at a time.
Example: For <CTRL> + <ALT> + <DELETE>, press CTRL, ALT, and DELETE 1
one at a time.
 Precautions when operating the screen

2
For MDI key operation when using an application screen, see the following.
Table 3.1.3.3 (a) Precautions When Using CNC Key Operation 3
Key operation Description
<ALT> + <TAB> Displays Task Manager of the CNC. 4
<CTRL> + <ALT> + Displays Task Manager of the CNC.
<DELETE>
<ALT> + <ESC> Switches the active window of the CNC. 5
• It is disabled when the keyboard setting is set to [On the remote 6

 computer] in the [Remote Desktop Connection] advanced settings
screen or when the remote computer screen is displayed in the full
MEMO
screen with [Only when using full screen] set in the settings. 7
 Precautions when operating the remote computer screen 8
For MDI key operation when the remote computer screen is selected, see the
following.
Table 3.1.3.3 (b) Precautions When Using CNC Key Operation
A1
Key operation Description
<CTRL> + <ALT> + Displays Task Manager of the CNC. A2
<DELETE>
<CTRL> + <ALT> + Displays the security screen of the remote computer.
<ALTER> However, it may vary depending on the OS. Z
<ALT> + <ESC> Switches the active window of the remote computer.
• It is disabled when the keyboard setting is set to [On this computer] in

 the [Remote Desktop Connection] advanced settings screen or when
the remote computer screen is not displayed in the full screen with
MEMO
[Only when using full screen] set in the settings.
69
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
 Inputting from the MDI keys

Use the MDI keys for inputting alphanumeric characters.
1  • To input correctly from the MDI keys, the remote computer keyboard
settings need to be set to English 101 Keyboard because the MDI
MEMO keys are regarded as a English 101 keyboard.
2  Precautions when inputting Japanese

There are limitations for inputting Japanese from the MDI, such as the lack of a
3 conversion key.
4  • If inputting in Japanese is required frequently, using a USB keyboard

is recommended.
MEMO
5
3.1.4 Precautions for PC OPERATION
6
3.1.4
The following shows precautions for PC OPERATION.

Table 3.1.4 Precautions for PC OPERATION
7 Item
Remote computer operation
Description
How to display and operate the remote
computer screen comply with the Windows
8 Pointing devices
or remote desktop function specifications.
In PC OPERATION, we recommend you to
use a mouse or touch panel.
A1 Precautions when using a keyboard or

mouse
You can use a general keyboard or mouse
by connecting it to the USB connector on
the front of the indicator. However,
A2 waterproofness cannot be maintained while
the USB cover is open.
Input devices Operation of input devices during PC
Z OPERATION, such as a touch panel,
keyboard, and mouse, depends on the
remote computer settings.
If adjustment is required, set it in Control
Panel on the remote computer.
Inputting from the USB keyboard in the NC You cannot input from the USB keyboard in
screen the NC screen.
70
B-64644EN/08
3.1 PC OPERATION
Item Description
Touch panel On the touch panel, you cannot perform
multi-touch operation (such as pinch and
swipe).
Double-tap operation on the touch panel
requires tapping the same area twice in a
1
row. If the operation is difficult, change the
double-click settings range on the remote
computer. 2
For precautions when using the touch
panel, see "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,
Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B 3
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-
64483EN-1).
Indicator resolution The entire window may not be displayed in 4
the screen due to resolution issues
depending on the application.
Remote computer installation environment Before embedding the remote computer 5
into the machine, check that the
environment inside the machine meets the
remote computer usage environment 6
conditions.
Remote computer operation during PC When the CNC is in PC OPERATION, the
OPERATION remote computer screen becomes the login 7
screen.
To return operation to the remote computer,
log in on the remote computer. 8
Connection to multiple remote computers In PC OPERATION, the CNC can be
connected to a remote computer.
When another CNC connects to a remote New connection becomes valid, and the old A1
computer which is in PC OPERATION CNC is disconnected.
A2
Z
71
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

TOOL MANAGER is an application to manage tool information.
1 It allows you to centralize the following three types of tool information required at
production sites on the database.
• Tool information used in the CNC functions
2 Example: Tool management information, tool offset (geometry, wear), tool life
management information
• Tool information useful for maintaining work machines
3 Example: Tool name, chip information, tool attach/detach history
• Tool catalog data information defined in the tool catalog
4 Example: Geometry information, machining condition, component's
manufacturer name, model number, etc.
5 3.2.1 Overview of TOOL MANAGER

3.2.1
[TOOL MANAGER] allows you to manage more detailed information required at

6 production sites, as well as tool information which operators want to check and set
on a daily basis used in the tool slide on the database and display and set them in
the dedicated screen.
7 For details on the tool database, see "3.2.1.1 Tool database".
This function includes the existing tool management function and tool life
management function.
8 When each CNC option is enabled, the following corresponding function can be
used.
A1 Tool management function

• Displaying and setting various tool information, such as tool type, life, spindle
A2 speed, feedrate, and tool offset
• Displaying and setting the position relationship between the tool and one
attached in the tool magazine
Z • Specifying the tool storage location
• Managing the life strictly for each tool
• Setting customized data
Tool life management function

• Managing the tool life for each group
[TOOL MANAGER] is a basic function. To set tool information managed by this

function that is related to the CNC option functions, such as the tool management
function, and interact it with the functions, the corresponding option is required.
72
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.1.1 Tool database

In [TOOL MANAGER], tool information is managed in each of the following tool
3.2.1.1
databases.
• NC Tool Database
Database that handles data related to the tools attached on to the machine. This
1
is used for CNC operations and maintenance management.
• Tool catalog database 2
Database that handles information on tools attached on to the CNC, as well as
detailed data of tools that exist within the production site, including geometry
information, machining condition, component's manufacturer name, and model 3
number defined in the tool catalog.
 NC Tool Database
4
The NC tool database is grouped into the following five categories according to
the description. 5
Table 3.2.1.1 (a) NC Tool Database
Category Description
6
Tool Management Data required to manage tools, such as tool attribute information and
Data storage information 7
Tool life data Data related to tool life, such as the life count method, current life
value, and maximum value
Offset Data Offset data used in tools 8
Tool Geometry Data to set the three-dimensional interference check function and
Dimension Data the tool geometry dimension for machining simulation
Customized data Data area optionally used by the user
A1
For tool information used in each category, see "Table 3.2.1.1 (b) Tool Information A2
Used in NC Tool Database".
For details on the data, see "3.2.10 Details of Each Data in the Tool Database".
Z
Table 3.2.1.1 (b) Tool Information Used in NC Tool Database
Item Description
Category data of "tool management data"
Tool Name Name of the tool
Tool Management Number Serial number of the registered tool
Group Number Group number of tool life management
Inner Group Number Serial number of the tool in the tool life management group
Tool Number (T Code) Tool identifying number used to specify a T code command
Optional Group Number Group number optionally set by the user which is used to
specify a T code command
73
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Description
Magazine Number Magazine number where the tool is attached
Pot Number Pot number where the tool is attached
Stored Magazine Magazine number or pot number where the tool after use is
1 Stored Pot stored
Enable/Disable Tool Select whether or not to place in the magazine

Management Function
2 Tool Size Select Normal Tool/Large Diameter Tool
Data Access Select Allowed/Not Allowed
3 * This is not used in the CNC.
It can be set and viewed as necessary.
Data Search Searched/Not Select Searched/Not Searched when Tool Life State is "Life
4 Searched
Spindle Speed (S)
Not Managed"
Spindle speed automatically used when the tool is used
Feedrate (F) Feedrate automatically used when the tool is used
5 Large Tool Geometry No. Large tool geometry number defined in the tool geometry
settings screen
6 Tool Image File name of the tool image, tool parts image, or holder
image
Tool Model Number Model number of the tool
7 Comment Additional information about the tool

Operation Memo Contains the date/time + text data (up to 32 characters),
and up to five memos can be registered
8 *When attaching or detaching a tool, you can leave a
comment (for example, information to identify the worker).
Flutes Number of blades on the tool
A1 Catalog No. Management number of the catalog data to be referenced
Conditions Cutting condition number to be referenced
A2 Category data of "tool life data"

Life Count Type Select Count/Time for the tool life count method
Tool Life Count Cycle Select 1 sec/8 msec for the life count cycle
Z Tool Life Counter Current value of the tool life
Maximum Tool Life Value Count value to output the life reach signal
Forenoticed Tool Life Count value to output the life reach forenoticed signal
Tool Life State Select Life Not Managed/Life Remaining/No Life
Remaining/Damaged
Category data of "offset data"
Path • The path number which the tool belongs to
74
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Description
Tool Offset Number (OFS) • Offset number of the tool
Tool Length Offset Number • Displays linked offset data in the screen as well
(H) * For details, see "3.2.1.4 Managing offset data for each
Tool Diameter Offset

Number (D)
tool".
1
Tool Geometry Offset
Number (TG) 2
Tool Wear Offset Number
(TW)
Category data of "tool geometry dimension data" 3
Tool Type Type of the tool
* For details, see "3.2.1.5 Tool geometry dimension data
that can be set". 4
Tool Attach Position Direction to attach the tool
Holder Geometry Number Geometry number of the holder to attach the tool
5
Tool Data 1 to 8 Tool Size Data
Category data of "customized data"
Customized Data 0 to 40 • Customized Data 0 is bit-type data, and Customized Data 6
1 to 40 are integer or real data.
The number of tools that can be registered in the NC tool database is as follows.
7
Table 3.2.1.1 (c) Number of Tools That Can Be Registered in the NC Tool 8
Database
Option condition
When the tool
Number of tools that can be registered
64/240/1000 pairs
A1
management function is
enabled
When the tool life 256/1024 pairs (when the tool life management tool pair count
A2
management function is addition is enabled)
enabled
When the above options 1000 pairs
Z
are disabled
 • Items that can be displayed or set differ according to the machine's

configurations and settings.
MEMO
75
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 Tool catalog database

Tool catalog data consists of basic information, geometry information, part
information, and cutting condition information.
In this function, parts that are used for cutting, such as chip, end mill, and drill, are
indicated as "tool(s)", and other parts that are not used for cutting, such as holder
1 and tooling, are indicated as "holder(s)".
2 Table 3.2.1.1 (d) Tool Information Used in Tool Catalog Database

Item Description
3 Basic information
Catalog No. Unique number to manage catalog data
Tool Name Name of the tool
4 Tool Type Type of the tool
Tool Image File name of the tool image
* For details, see "3.2.1.5 Tool geometry dimension data that
5 can be set".
Comment Additional information about the tool
6 Geometry information
Machining Diameter Dimensions of the entire tool including components, such as
Part Diameter chip, end mill, drill, tooling, holder, and adapter
7 Base Total Length

Maximum Cut
8 Tool Protrusion Length

Flutes Number of blades on the tool
Part information (tool part)
A1 Manufacturer Name Name of the part manufacturer
Model Number Model number of the part
A2 Tool parts image

Material
File name of the tool parts image
Material of the part
Cut Edge Length Dimensions and geometry of the part
Z Available Length
Chamfering Height
Machining Diameter
Screw Thread Pitch
Screw Part Length
Screw Part Diameter
Function Length
Total Length
Nose Angle
Taper Angle
Comment Additional information about the part
76
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Description
Insert Geometry Type The insert geometry type that can be selected differs
according to the tool type.
• When button turning tool is selected: Circle
• When boring tool or face mill tool is selected: All insert types
can be selected 1
• When general tool, threading tool, grooving tool, straight
tool, or versatile tool is selected: All insert types other than
circle can be selected 2
• When a tool type not mentioned above is selected: You
cannot select an insert type
Max. Cut Depth Dimensions and geometry of the part 3
Inscribed Circle
Diameter
Corner R 4
Main Clearance Angle
Tip Width 5
Tip Thickness
Min. Cut Width
Contact Surface 6
Diameter
Neck Diameter
Protruding Length
7
Tip Diameter
Thread Part Inner 8
Diameter
Part information (holder part)
Manufacturer Name Name of the part manufacturer A1
Holder Model Number Model number of the part
Holder Image File name of the holder image A2
Z
77
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Description
Part Diameter Dimensions and geometry of the part
Shank Width
Shank Height
1 Total Length
Machining Diameter
2 Max. Machining
Diameter
Max. Cut Depth
3 Max. Cutting Width
Min. Cutting Width
Cutting Width
4 Cutting Angle
Function Height
5 Function Width
Head Height
Function Length
6 Shank Diameter
Contact Surface
7 Diameter (Machine)
Contact Surface
Diameter (Workpiece)
8 Comment Additional information about the part
Holder Geometry Type Holder Geometry Type
Conditions
A1 Material Material of the workpiece to be machined
Machining Type Description of the machining
A2 Spindle Speed (S) Recommended spindle speed for machining
Feedrate (F) Recommended feedrate for machining
Cutting Speed Recommended cutting speed for machining
Z Cut Depth Maximum cut depth for machining
Cut Width Maximum cut width for machining
Coolant Coolant specified for machining
78
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• The display item of part information (tool part) changes depending on

the tool type. For details, see "A.3 TOOL INFORMATION USED IN
TOOL CATALOG DATABASE".
• The display item of part information (holder part) or holder geometry
type changes depending on the tool type or holder geometry type. For 1
details, see "A.3 TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL CATALOG
DATABASE".
 • Related data is deleted when the tool type, insert geometry type or 2
holder geometry type is changed.
MEMO All catalog data in the catalog number that was changed is deleted
when the tool type is changed.
All catalog data for the tool part that was changed is deleted when
3
the insert geometry type is changed.
All catalog data for the holder part that was changed is deleted when
the holder geometry type is changed.
4
• Old data of the tool catalog database is displayed depending on the
machine configuration.
5
The number of tools that can be registered in the tool catalog database is 2000
pairs (maximum). 6
3.2.1.2 Compatibility of the tool management function
3.2.1.2
[TOOL MANAGER] includes the tool management function. 7

The following operations, which are performed in the tool management function
when each CNC option of the tool management function is enabled, can be
performed in the screens developed for iHMI. 8
• Magazine Management
• Magazine/pot properties A1
• Tool attach/detach management
• Tool attach/detach history A2
• Life management for each tool or total life management of the same tool number
• Customized data management Z
• Large tool management
• Multi-edge tool management
For details on each function of the tool management function, see "TOOL
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION" in "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-
MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System / Machining Center
System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
79
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 Customized data management

Customized data can be set for users to configure as they desire. Like the tool
management function, there are Customized Data 0, which is set in bit type data,
and Customized Data 1 to 40, which are set in integer or real data.
To set Customized Data 5 to 40, the option is required.
1

2 MEMO
• The name of the customized data may differ according to the machine.
3
3.2.1.3 Compatibility of the tool life management function
4 [TOOL MANAGER] includes the tool life management function.
3.2.1.3
The following operations, which are performed in the tool life management
function when each CNC option of the tool life management function is enabled,
5 can be performed in the screens developed for iHMI.
• Managing the tool life for each group
For details on each function of the tool life management function, see "TOOL LIFE
6 MANAGEMENT" in the "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B,
Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
7  Tool life management

Tools can be classified into some groups, and the tool life (use count or use time)
can be specified for each group.
8 Set tool data, such as tool number (T code), offset value, and geometry dimension
data, for tools to be managed.
Even when the tool life management function is enabled, tool data can be
A1 displayed and set in the table display screen. You can call the tool individual
settings screen, which allows for the detailed settings for each tool, and the tool
status display screen, where the tool state can be checked visually by the icon,
A2 according to the purpose.
 Setting to disable the tool life management function
Even when the tool life management function option is enabled, if the number of
Z tool life management pairs is 0, the tool life management function is disabled.
• When this function is enabled, the information registered in the tool life

NOTE
management is deleted.
• If the tool life management is enabled/disabled with this function, turn
on the CNC device again.
To enable this function, set the maximum number of tool life management pairs for
all paths (parameter No. 6813) to 0.
When this function is enabled, the standard specifications (no tool management
function and tool life management function) are applied.
80
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Parameter (No. 6813) to set the maximum number of tool life management
pairs
6813 Maximum number of tool life management pairs
[Input type] : Parameter input

1
[Data type] : Word
[Data unit] : Pair
[Data range] : 0, 8, 16 to 256
2
Set the maximum number of pairs to be used for each path. The
maximum number of pairs must be a multiple of 8.
If the tool life management function is not used, set it to 0.
3
Make sure that the total number of pairs for all paths does not
exceed the total number of pairs (256) in the entire system.
4
• You need to set life management data on all paths that use the tool life
5

NOTE
management because all data in the tool life management file are
initialized when the device is powered on.
• When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
6
3.2.1.4 Managing offset data for each tool 7
The offset number can be set for each tool in use. You can also check and set the
3.2.1.4
tool offset value defined in the offset number. This data management can be
performed regardless of the CNC option. 8
If a D99 or H99 command is specified in the NC program when the tool
management function or tool life management function option is enabled, the
offset number registered in the tool data of the tool in use is automatically
selected, allowing for offsetting the tool with the specified tool offset value.
A1
The offset number type or offset data varies depending on the CNC system, option
configuration, and parameter settings. For types and settings of the offset number,
see "Appendix A.3.3 Offset Number Set for Each Tool".
A2
Z
81
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.1.4 Offset Data

offset Machining center system Lathe system
Item Tool Tool Tool Complex Geometry Geometry Complex
offset offset offset machining wear wear machining
1 memory
A
memory
B
memory
C
offset without with offset
offset
offset
1 Offset Geometry Tool X Axis X Axis X Axis X Axis

Value Length (Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry)
2 (Geometry)
2 TIP Wear Tool X Axis Z Axis X Axis X Axis
Length (Wear) (Wear) (Wear)
3 (Wear)
3 TIP Tool Z Axis Y Axis Z Axis Z Axis
Diameter (Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry)
4 (Geometry)
4 Tool Z Axis Tool Z Axis Z Axis
Diameter (Wear) Diameter (Wear) (Wear)
5 (Wear)
5 Corner R Y Axis TIP Y Axis Y Axis
(Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry)
6 6 Corner R
(Wear)
Y Axis
(Wear)
Y Axis
(Wear)
Y Axis
(Wear)
7 TIP Tip R Tool Tip R
7 (Geometry) Diameter (Geometry)
(Geometry)
8 Tip R Tool Tip R
8 (Wear) Diameter
(Wear)
(Wear)
9 TIP TIP TIP
A1 10 Corner R
(Geometry)
X Axis Corner R
(Second (Geometry)
Geometry)
A2 11 Corner R
(Wear)
Z Axis
(Second
Corner R
(Wear)
Geometry)
Z 12 Y Axis
(Second
X Axis
(Second
Geometry) Geometry)
13 Z Axis
(Second
Geometry)
14 Y Axis
(Second
Geometry)
 • This function cannot be used for the fourth/fifth offset.

• To set offset data, you must set the tool compensation number. Also,
MEMO set the path number if you can.
82
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.1.5 Tool geometry dimension data that can be set

The three-dimensional interference check function or the machining simulation
3.2.1.5
function allows you to set the tool geometry dimension data used for tool geometry
and size data.
To set this data, an option is required. This data can only be set in tool individual
settings screen. You can also set this data in the table display screen depending 1
on the machine configuration.
Tool geometry dimension data that can be set in this function are as follows. 2
(1) Tool Name (*1)
(2) Tool Type (*2)
(3) Tool Attach Position 3
(4) Holder Shape Number
(5) Tool Data 1 to 8
4
(*1) When transferring the tool geometry dimension data set in this
function to the CNC, the conventional default tool name is
transferred.
5
 (*2) Tool types that can be set differ according to the machine's
configurations and settings.
6
MEMO • To set geometry dimension data, you must set the tool compensation
number. Also, set the path number if you can.
• The number of tool geometry dimension data you can set differs
according to the machine configurations and settings.
7
Table 3.2.1.5 (a) Options and Configurable Values for Internal Three-Dimensional 8
Interference Check Function
Internal three-
dimensional
Number of paths Configurable value A1
interference check
option
Disable - 1 to 120
A2
Enabled 1 1 to 120
Enabled 2 1 to 60 Z
Enabled 3 1 to 40
Enabled 4 or more 1 to 30
Data used in (2) to (5) are the same as used for the conventional tool geometry
dimension data.
For details, see "Tool geometry size data" in "Built-in 3D Interference Check" of
"FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
83
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.1.5 (b) Tool Type Data

Tool Type Default name Icon
General Tool GeneralTool
1 Threading Tool ThreadTool
Grooving Tool GrooveTool

2 Button Turning Tool ButtonTool
3 Point Corner Straight Tool StraightTool
Versatile Tool VersatileTool

4
Drilling Tool DrillTool
5 Chamfering Tool ChamferTool
6 Flat End Mill Tool FlatEndTool
Ball End Mill Tool BallEndTool

7 Tap Tool TapTool
8 Reamer Tool ReamerTool
Boring Tool BoringTool

A1
Face Mill Tool FaceMillTool
A2 Thread Cutting Side Tool SideThread
Z Taper Ball End Mill Tool TaperBallEndMillTool
Back Tool BackTool
Angle Cutting Tool AngleTool
Drilling Side Tool SideDrill
Probe Probe
84
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.1.6 Referencing tool catalog data

You can set the catalog data to be referenced from each tool managed in the NC
3.2.1.6
tool database.
When you set the catalog data as the reference destination, the catalog data that
you set can be displayed on the tool catalog data management screen, and the
dimension data and cutting conditions in the catalog data can be reflected to the 1
NC tool database. For details, see "3.2.7 Basic Operation in the Tool Catalog Data
Management Screen".
The management number of the catalog data and cutting condition number 2
referenced from each tool can be checked on the tool table display screen.
3
3.2.1.7 Steps to use tool manager
The steps to use Tool Manager are as follows.
4
3.2.1.7
<1> Check tool data. -> See "3.2.2".

<2> Display and check individual data as necessary. -> See "3.2.3".
<3> Check the tool data status as necessary. -> See "3.2.4".
5
<4> Add or delete tool data as necessary. -> See "3.2.3".
<5> Display and check catalog data as necessary. -> See "3.2.7". 6
3.2.1.8 Main screens and screen transition
3.2.1.8
Tool data on the tool database can be displayed and set in the tool display screen.
7
You can call the tool individual settings screen, which allows for the detailed
settings for each tool, and the tool status display screen, where the tool state can
be checked visually by the icon, according to the purpose.
8
Table 3.2.1.8 Number of Tools That Can Be Registered in the Tool Database
Screen/window name Work description A1
Table display screen Displays multiple pieces of tool information in tabular form
Individual Tool Settings

in one screen to view and edit data.
Displays detailed tool information about one tool to view
A2
screen and edit data.
Tool Status screen The screen displays multiple tool statuses in icon form,
allowing you to check them visually in one screen.
Z
Magazine Management Displays the status of the magazine pot in icon form to allow
screen you to perform tool attach, detach, or move.
Total Life Data screen Displays on a single screen the total life of multiple tools
that have the same tool number (T code). On this screen,
you can check the life state, maximum life, life counter, and
number of tools.
Select Import/Export Item Allows import/export of tool data.
screen
Catalog Data screen Views and edits tool catalog data.
Some screens may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration.
85
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2 Home screen Tool Status screen
3
4
5
Table display screen Magazine Management screen
6
7
8
Individual Tool Settings screen Total Life Data screen
A1
A2
Z
Catalog Data screen Select Import/Export Item screen
Fig. 3.2.1.8 Screen Transition
3.2.2 Basic Operation in the Table Display Screen

3.2.2
This screen allows you to display multiple pieces of tool information in tabular form
in one screen to view and edit tool data.
In this screen, you can edit (delete), search, and add tool data and perform the life
type check. In addition, the tool individual settings screen can be displayed.
86
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.2.1 Displaying the table display screen

Display the table display screen.
3.2.2.1
<1> Press the [TOOL MANAGER] icon in the home screen.

The table display screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
3.2.2.2
3.2.2.2
Part names and functions in the table display screen 7
E
8
G
A1
A
A2
Z
D
B
C
F
Fig. 3.2.2.2 (a) Part Names and Functions in the Table Display Screen
87
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.2.2 (a) Names and Functions

Name Description
A Tool Data Table Displays data in tabular form. Items that do not meet
predetermined conditions, such as when the option is disabled,
1 are not displayed.
* When using the touch panel, double-tap the tool management
number (No.) or inner group number to display the Individual
2 Tool Settings screen of the corresponding tool.

Or double-tap the group number to display the Individual Tool
Settings screen of the No. 1 tool of the corresponding group.
The edge number of a tool registered as a multi-edge tool is
3 displayed. Non-multi-edge tools show "---". When edge
information is collapsed, it is displayed with an icon.
4  • The editing icon may be displayed on the

right side of No. depending on the
MEMO machine configuration.
5
B Guide Message/ Displays explanation on data selected with the cursor.
Warning Message If the tool life management function is enabled, [Next], [In Use],
6 or [Selecting] is displayed next to the group number according
to the usage status of the tool group.
Displays a warning message if there is a tool which has no life
7 remaining or reached the forenoticed life.
If you select a multi-edge tool, the selected edge number is
displayed on the right side of the tool management number of
8 the tool.
For normal tools, the number is not displayed.
If multiple conditions are met simultaneously, the higher
message in the table is displayed.
A1 Message description State
The tool in use has no life • The tool currently used has no
A2 remaining.
There is a tool with no life
life remaining.
• The last tool with the same tool
remaining. type number has no life
Z remaining.
• The life in the group has no life
remaining. (Tool life
management)
The life of the tool in use • The life of the tool currently
will end soon. used will end soon.
Only a few tools are • The number of tools left in the
remaining. group selected with the T code
command is equal to or less
than the setting value in
Parameter (No.6846). (Tool life
management)
88
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Operation State Displays the icon showing the data editable mode, tool
Icon attaching state, or tool detaching state.
Icon State
Data Editable Data can be edited. 1
Tool The tool is being detached. (When
Detached the automatic detach mode is 2
selected)
Tool Attached The tool is being attached. (When
the automatic attach mode is 3
selected)
Tool Moved The tool is being moved. (When
the automatic move mode is 4
selected)
D Inch/mm Icon Displays an icon that indicates inch/mm of the displayed path.
Icon State
5
Inch Display setting is in inch
6
mm Display setting is in mm
E Filter Displays filtered target items. Only data that meet the conditions
7
are displayed in the tool data table.
The following filtering items are provided.
• Tool Type 8
• Magazine Number
• Tool Life State
• Active tool A1
• Attaching status
* Available items will vary according to the settings of each
option in the tool management function and tool life
management function.
A2
F Horizontal soft keys Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen.
First page Z
Changes the tool data to the editable or non-editable mode.
This may not be displayed depending on the machine
configuration and settings.
[Edit]/[End Edit] *When the tool management function is disabled, you can hide
the [Edit]/[End Edit] soft keys with the user customization
setting file.
Searches tool information on the database for data including a
keyword. Data are searched for by "Tool Management
Number", "Group Number", "Tool Number (T code)", or "Option
[Search] Group Number", "Option Group Number", " Tool Name", or
"Magazine/Pot".
89
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Displays the Filter screen window. Performs or cancels filtering
by the selected items on tool information in the database.
1 [Filter]/[Cancel
Filter]
Displayed when the tool management function and the multi-
2 edge tool management function are enabled.

The sub menu for displaying and editing edge information
[Multi Edge] appears.
3 Displays the Individual Life Reset window to confirm the reset of

an individual tool life state.
4 [Individual Reset]
Opens the tool individual settings screen.
5 [Individual Settings]
Opens the tool catalog data management screen.
6
[Catalog Data]
7 Sets the offset value data measured with the tool presetter to
the target tool.(*1)
8 [Tool Presetter]
Opens the CNC operation screen tool slide based on the offset
number of tool data where the cursor is placed.(*2)(*3)
A1 [Tool Slide]
Displays group status information about the tool life
A2 management function, such as the current group or groups to
replace. (Displayed only when the tool life management is
[Group State] enabled)
Z Second page
Adds a tool to a new tool group or the selected tool group.
(Displayed only when the tool life management is enabled)
(Displayed only in editable mode)
[Add Tool]
Deletes the tool data. (Displayed only during the editable mode)
[Delete]
90
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Shows or hides a guide image when the cursor is on a guide
image display target item in the tool data table.
[Guidance]/
[End Guidance] 1
Switches to the row of soft keys used to select a tool life state to
be reset.
On the row of soft keys that appears, press the [Current Group] 2
[Group Life Reset] or [All Groups] soft key.
Opens the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen where you can
edit large tool geometry data used for editing geometry.
3
(Displayed only when the tool management function is enabled)
[Large Tool
Geometry] 4
Displays the Tool Attach/Detach History screen. (Displayed only
when the tool attach/detach management function is enabled)
5
[Tool Attach]/[Tool
Detach]
G Vertical soft keys Displays the vertical soft keys to switch to the slides.
6
Displays the Information Center when pressed.
7
Information Center
Displays the Tool Status screen when pressed. 8
Tool Status screen
Displays the Magazine Management screen when pressed.
A1
(Displayed only when the tool management function is enabled)
Magazine
A2
Management
screen
Displays the Total Life Data screen when pressed.
Z
Total Life Data

screen
Displays the Select Import/Export Item screen when pressed.
Select Import/
Export Item screen
(*1) You can also hide the [Tool Presetter] soft key by enabling the tool presetter hide
function in the user customization setting file.
91
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
(*2) Pressing the [Tool Slide] soft key moves Tool Manager in the background and CNC
operation screen in the foreground.
(*3) Under the following condition, the [Tool Slide] soft key is not displayed.
The CNC operation screen is not defined in the configuration file (apps-gener-
1 al.xml).
Table 3.2.2.2 (b) Soft Keys When the [Group Life Reset] Soft Key Is Pressed
2 Name Description
Displays the Group Life Reset window to confirm the reset of all
3 tool life states in the current group.
[Current Group]
4 Displays the Group Life Reset window to confirm the reset of all
tool life states in all groups.
5 [All Groups]
6 The following table shows description of messages displayed as guidance

messages.
7 Table 3.2.2.2 (c) Guidance Message List

Message description State
8 Change to editable mode. You attempted to edit data in non-editable mode.
Incorrect Data The input format is not correct.

• You entered a string for an item that requires
A1 numerical input.
• You entered a real number for an item that requires
integer input.
A2 • You entered an invalid value for time.
Data is out of range. You have set a value that is out of the input range.
Z Too many characters. You attempted to enter a string that exceeds the number
of allowed input characters.
Write Inhibited You attempted to edit protected data.
This is not a free pot. You specified a magazine or pot number that is already
used for a magazine, pot, stored magazine, or stored
pot.
Storage overlapping You specified a stored magazine or stored pot number
that is already used.
Cannot use this pot. You specified a pot number that cannot be used.
Interfering with other tools or During large tool registration or change, you attempted
magazine frames. to make settings that will cause interference with other
tools or the magazine frame.
92
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The data is being used or is for You tried to add, delete, or edit data that is being used or
the next registered tool group. is for the next registered tool group.
Execution Denied An error, other than those described above, occurred.
1
 Displaying guide image
A guide image can be displayed when the cursor is on a guide image display 2
target item on the table display screen.
<1> On the table display screen, move the cursor to the data you want to display
3
the guide image.
<2> Press the [Guidance] soft key. 4
 • Pressing the [End Guidance] soft key hides a guide image.
5
MEMO
6
 Soft key/cutting condition display settings - User customization setting
file
In the user customization setting file, the display method of the following items can 7
be defined:
• [Edit] soft key: Show/Hide 8
• [Tool Presetter] soft key: Show/Hide
• [Add Tool] soft key: Change the position (Move to the position of the [Edit] soft
key)
A1
• Cutting conditions on the tool catalog data screen: Show/Hide
A2
In the Tool Manager, the customization setting file is loaded to determine
horizontal soft keys displayed on the screen when an application is started.
Z
Table 3.2.2.2 (d) User Customization Setting File Specification
File name custom.txt
Saved location PANEL iH \StorageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManage
(folder) (*1) r
PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager
(SSD type)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMana
(HDD type) ger
Valid character UTF-8
code (*2)
Linefeed code CRLF
93
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
(*1) If the setting file is not placed in the specified folder, the above soft key display is
considered to be set to the default.
(*2) Only ASCII code is valid, so it does not depend on the character code as long as
each definition can be identified.
1
Table 3.2.2.2 (e) Definition types of the customization setting file
2 Function Definition type Details

Hiding the [Edit] soft EDIT_KEY_HIDDEN Describe the symbol name in
key upper case from the beginning.
3 Define as follows:
YES: Hides the soft key.
NO or undefined: Shows the soft
4 key.
(Default:
DIT_KEY_HIDDEN=NO)
5 Hiding the [Tool

Presetter] soft key
TOOLPRESETTER_KEY_HI Describe the symbol name in
DDEN upper case from the beginning.
Define as follows:
6 YES: Hides the soft key.

key.
(Default:
7 TOOLPRESETTER_KEY_HIDD
EN=NO)
Changing the position ADD_KEY_RESHUFFLE Describe the symbol name in
8 of the [Add Tool] soft (*1) upper case from the beginning.
key Define as follows:
YES: Changes the soft key
A1 position.
NO or undefined: Does not
change the soft key position.
A2 (Default:
ADD_KEY_RESHUFFLE =NO)
Hiding the cutting CATALOG_HIDE_CONDITI Describe the symbol name in
Z conditions on the tool
catalog data screen
ONS upper case from the beginning.
Define as follows:
key.
(Default:
CATALOG_HIDE_CONDITIONS
=NO)
94
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Function Definition type Details

Hiding the taper ball TAPER_BALL_HIDDEN Describe the symbol name in
end mill tool upper case from the beginning.
Define as follows:
NO or undefined: Shows the soft 1
key.
(Initial setting:
TAPER_BALL_HIDDEN=NO) 2
Comment # Putting it at the beginning treats
the line as a comment line.
A comment line does not affect 3
the customization setting
behavior.
Use it to leave a note. 4
(*1) This is enabled only when the tool life management is enabled and
EDIT_KEY_HIDDEN=YES is set.
5
The following is an example of the user customization setting file:
#Do not use [Edit] key: YES or NO
EDIT_KEY_HIDDEN=YES
6
#Change the position of [Add Tool] key for Tool Life Manager: YES or NO
ADD_KEY_RESHUFFLE=YES
#Do not use [Tool Presetter] key: YES or NO
7
TOOLPRESETTER_KEY_HIDDEN=NO
CATALOG_HIDE_CONDITIONS=YES
8
In this example, each item is defined as follows:
• [Edit] soft key: Hide (See Fig. 3.2.2.2 (b)) A1
• [Tool Presetter] soft key: Show (See Fig. 3.2.2.2 (b) and Fig. 3.2.2.2 (c))
• [Add Tool] soft key: Changed to the position of the [Edit] soft key (See Fig. A2
3.2.2.2 (c) and Fig. 3.2.2.2 (d))
• Cutting conditions on the tool catalog data screen: Hide
Z
95
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Fig. 3.2.2.2 (b) First Page of Horizontal Soft Keys

1
2
Fig. 3.2.2.2 (c) First Page of the Soft Keys
3 (When the Tool Life Management Is Enabled)
4
5 Fig. 3.2.2.2 (d) Second Page of the Soft Keys
(When the Tool Life Management Is Enabled)
6  Offset input limit function

If an out-of-range value is entered, the "Compensation amount is out of range."
7 message is displayed, indicating that there is a limit to the offset value range. The
offset value can be changed only within the range specified in parameter No.
24305.
8 For example, if the original value is 100.00 and the value of parameter No. 24305
is 2.000, the input value range is between 98.000 and 102.000. This is enabled
when the signal OFSLIM<G0579.2> is "0".
A1 The target operations for input limit are as follows:

• Editing tool data
A2 • Importing tool presetter measurement data
Z  • The input amount is not limited when the value of parameter No.
24305 is 0 or less.
NOTE
The target items for input limit are as shown in the table below.
The offset input limit function is enabled when parameter No. 24305 is greater
than 0.000 and signal OFSLIM<G0579.2> is "0".
96
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.2.2 (f) List of the Target Items for Offset Input Limit
Path control Option Target item for limit
type
T-type Geometry X Axis, Z Axis, Y Axis, Tool Diameter
(Lathe type) wear
without offset
1
Geometry X Axis (Geometry), X Axis (Wear), Z Axis (Geometry), Z
wear
with offset
Axis (Wear), Y Axis (Geometry), Y Axis (Wear), Tool
Diameter (Geometry), Tool Diameter (Wear), X Axis (2nd
2
Geometry), Z Axis (2nd Geometry), Y Axis (2nd
Complex
Geometry)
X Axis (Geometry), X Axis (Wear), Z Axis (Geometry), Z
3
machining Axis (Wear), Y Axis (Geometry), Y Axis (Wear), Tip R
offset (Geometry), Tip R (Wear), Corner R (Geometry), Corner
R (Wear), X Axis (2nd Geometry), Z Axis (2nd 4
Geometry), Y Axis (2nd Geometry)
M-type
(Machining
Tool offset
memory A
Offset Value
5
center type) Tool offset Geometry, Wear
memory B
Tool offset Tool Length (Geometry), Tool Length (Wear), Tool
6
memory C Diameter (Geometry), Tool Diameter (Wear), Corner R
Complex
(Geometry), Corner R (Wear)
X Axis (Geometry), X Axis (Wear), Z Axis (Geometry), Z
7
machining Axis (Wear), Y Axis (Geometry), Y Axis (Wear), Tip R
offset (Geometry), Tip R (Wear), Corner R (Geometry), Corner
R (Wear)
8
3.2.2.3
3.2.2.3
Editing tool data
Edit tool data in the table display screen.
A1
<1> In the table display screen, move the cursor to data you want to edit.
A2
Z
97
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
5 <2> Press the [Edit] soft key.
The screen enters the editable mode, showing the Data Editable icon at the
6 lower right of the screen.
7
<3> Set or change the data.
8 To delete tool data -> 3.2.2.5 Deleting tool data

To enter equations for tool data -> 3.2.2.6 Entering equations
A1 <4> After the change, press the [End Edit] soft key.
The screen enters the non-editable mode, hiding the Data Editable icon at the
lower right of the screen.
A2
Z • While in editable mode, tool information related to CNC functions
such as tool offset and tool life cannot be obtained. To reflect
 changes made with the CNC functions to the tool data, press [End
Edit] to switch to the non-editable mode.
MEMO
• When you attempt to change the data of the currently used or next
used tool group, an error message will appear.
3.2.2.4 Copying and pasting tool data

In the editable mode, tool data can be copied and pasted.
3.2.2.4
 Copying/pasting tool data

Copy and paste tool data in the table display screen.
98
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the editable mode.
 • This step is not necessary depending on the machine configuration

or settings.
1
MEMO
2
<2> Move the cursor to the data to copy.
<3> Press the [Copy] soft key.

3
The copy source is displayed in the upper right of the table screen.
4
<4> Move the cursor to a tool to which you want to paste the data and press the
[Paste] soft key.
The tool paste confirmation window appears. 5
6
7
8
<5> Press the [OK] soft key. A1
The tool with the cursor in is overwritten by the tool data.
• When the launch mode is tool management, 0 is set to the

A2
following data:
 Magazine
Pot
Z
MEMO
Stored Magazine
Stored Pot
 Copying/pasting tool data when the launch mode is tool life

Copy and paste tool life in the table display screen.
99
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

or settings.
MEMO
1
<2> Move the cursor to the group or tool to copy.
2
3 <4> Press the [Tool] soft key.

The Copy from window is displayed.
4
<5> Specify the copy source tool.
When the cursor is in a tool, the cursor position No. is set to the default.
5
6
7
8 <6> Press the [Paste] soft key.
The Paste Tool window appears.
A1
A2
Z The tool paste confirmation window appears.

If the entered group number is new, a new group is added, and the tool is
added to the group.
100
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
If the entered group number already exists, the tool is added at the end of the
specified group.

MEMO
• Optional Group Number data will be 0.
1
2
 Copying/pasting a group when the launch mode is tool life
Copy and paste group data in the table display screen. 3
4
or settings. 5
MEMO
<2> Move the cursor to the group to copy.

6
<4> Press the [Group] soft key.
7
<5> Press the [Paste] soft key. 8
The Paste Tool window appears.
A1

A2
The group paste confirmation window appears.
Z

If the entered group number is newly added, and the tool is added to the group.
101
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • Optional Group Number data will be 0.

MEMO
1
3.2.2.5 Deleting tool data
2 In the editable mode, tool data can be deleted.
3.2.2.5
 Displaying guide image

3 A guide image can be displayed when the cursor is on a guide image display
target item on the table display screen.
4 <1> On the table display screen, move the cursor to the data you want to display
the guide image.
5 <2> Press the [Guidance] soft key.
6  • Pressing the [End Guidance] soft key hides a guide image.

MEMO
7
8 <4> Move the cursor to tool data you want to delete.
A1
A2
Z
102
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<5> Press the [Delete] soft key.

The horizontal soft key display changes.
1
<6> Press the [Current Data] soft key.
The selected tool data is deleted.
2
3
 • To delete all tool data, press the [All Data] soft key.
• To delete a group when the tool life management function is 4
MEMO enabled, press the [Current Group] soft key.
5
3.2.2.6 Entering equations
Equations for tool data can be entered.
6
3.2.2.6
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
<2> Move the cursor to the tool data for which you want to enter the equation. 7
8
A1
A2
Z
<3> Enter the equation.

<4> Press <CALC>.
The equation is applied to the tool data item.
103
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• If you enter an equation for a tool data item that does not allow
 entering equations, the calculation will not be performed.

• When you press <INPUT> after entering an equation for a tool data
1 NOTE item, the equation will be cleared, and the value before you entered
the equation will be displayed.
2  Allowable Tool Data Items and Ranges

The following table shows the tool data items and ranges for which you can enter
3 equations on the table display screen.

Table 3.2.2.6 (a) Allowable Tool Data Items and Ranges
Screen Tool data item Allowable range
4 Table display screen (*) Spindle Speed (S) 0 to 99999
Feedrate (F) 0 to 99999999
5 Offset Data 1 to 13 -9999.999 to 9999.999
Size Data 1 to 8
6 (*) Some items may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration.
 Operators, symbols, and functions allowed in equations

7 The following table shows operators, symbols, and functions that you can use in
equations.
8 Table 3.2.2.6 (b) Available Operators/Symbols

Operator +, -, *, /
Symbol ()
A1
Table 3.2.2.6 (c) Available Functions
A2 Function Format Description
Sine SIN(a)
Z Cosine COS(a)
Tangent TAN(a)
Arcsine ASIN(a)
Arccosine ACOS(a)
Arctangent ATAN(a,b) Calculation of Arctangent requires
careful attention; it is a special format
and requires two arguments. Input as
ATAN(a,b).
Calculates arctan(a/b).
Square root SQRT(a)
104
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Function Format Description

Exponent function 1 EXP(a)
(allows calculation of the
exponent function of e =
2.718...)
Exponent function 2 PWR(a,b) Calculation of Exponent function 2
1
(allows calculation of the requires careful attention; it is a
bth power of a) special format and requires two
arguments. Input as PWR(a,b). 2
Calculates the bth power of a.
Common logarithm
Natural logarithm
LOG(a)
LN(a)
3
Absolute value ABS(a)
Round off 1 RND(a) 4
(rounds off to the nearest
integer)
Round off 2 RND2(a,b) Calculation of Round off 2 requires 5
careful attention; it is a special format
and requires two arguments. Input as
RND2(a,b).
Rounding off to b is performed. Values
6
allowed for b are 1, 0.1, 0.01... .
Truncate FIX(a) 7
Circumference ratio PAI
8
3.2.2.7 Searching for tool data
Search for tool data in the table display screen.
A1
3.2.2.7
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Search] soft key.
The Search window appears. A2
Z
<2> In the [Search] window, select "Items" and enter "Description".
"Tool Management Number (No.)", "Group Number", "Tool Number (T Code)",
"Option Group Number", "Tool Name", or "Magazine/Pot" can be selected.
105
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• For "Tool Name", you can also perform search using the wildcard
symbol (*).
 • When you select "Tool Name" and perform search without entering
1 MEMO
"Description", the system will search for the tool data having tool
names.
• Some items may not be displayed depending on the machine
configuration.
2
<3> Press the [OK], [Previous Direction] or [Next Direction] soft key.
3 If matching description is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding tool
data.
If matching description is not found, the message "No Match" is displayed at
4 the lower part of the Search window.
To search tool data, press either of the following soft keys.

5 Soft keys Search range Search range
(When no data exists within target
6 [Previous Before the current cursor

range)
From the end to the cursor position
Direction] position
7 [Next
Direction]
After the current cursor
position
From the beginning to the cursor position
8 When a search for the target tool data is finished, press the [Cancel] soft key.
3.2.2.8 Setting filters for tool data

A1 3.2.2.8
Performs or cancels filtering by the selected items on tool information in the

database.
A2 <1> In the table display screen, press the [Filter] soft key.
The Filter Settings window appears.
Z <2> In the Filter window, select "Items" and enter "Description".

If matching description is found, filtering is performed on the applicable tool
data table, and the "filtered item" is displayed next to [Filter] at the upper part of
the screen.
If matching description is not found, the message "No Data" is displayed at the
lower part of the Filter window.
106
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• The following options can be selected for the tool attaching status
([Attaching Status]) item.
[Detached Tools]: Management: Enable Magazine Pot: Tool that
 is not set
[Temporary Detached Tools]: Tool Information, Tool with Bit:10 = 1
MEMO
1
[Attached Tools]: Magazine Pot: Tool that is set
• To cancel filtering, press the [Cancel Filter] soft key. 2
3.2.2.9 Resetting the tool life state individually 3
After changing a tool that has no life remaining in the group or has reached the
3.2.2.9
tool life count or time after a certain period of operation, individually reset its tool
life state to usable. 4
<1> In the table display screen, put the cursor on the row of tool data for which you
want to reset the life state.
5
<2> Press the [Individual Reset] soft key.
The Individual Life Reset window appears. 6
When selecting an individual cell
7
8
Group/No. for the selected cell's row are to be displayed.
A1
When selecting a merged cell
A2
Z
Group for the selected cell's row is to be displayed. Enter the number in group
in No. using the spin box.
The tool currently being used is displayed on a high priority. If it does not exist,
"1" is displayed.
The life state of the selected tool data will be reset. Even if the life state is set
not to be displayed, it is reset.
107
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.2.10 Resetting the tool life state by group

tool life count or time after a certain period of operation, reset the tool life state for
the current group or all the groups of the selected path to usable.
1 <1> In the table display screen, put the cursor on a group for which you want to
reset the life state.
<2> Press the [Group Life Reset] soft key.
2 <3> Press the [Current Group] or [All Groups] soft key.
The Group Life Reset window appears.
3 When selecting the current group
4
5 When selecting all the groups
6
7 <4> Press the [OK] soft key.
The life state for the current group or all the groups of the selected path will be
8 reset.
3.2.2.11 Checking the life type (count, time) match

A1 Check the life count types (count, time) of tools with the same Tool Number (T
3.2.2.10
Code).
A2 <1> In the table display screen, press the [Life Type Check] soft key.
The life count types (count, time) of tools with the same Tool Number (T Code)
are checked, and a message is displayed.
Z
Check condition Message

If the types of tools with Life count types match.
the same tool number
match
If the types of tools with Life count types do not match: (Tool Number) (*)
the same tool number do
not match
108
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
(*) If multiple matching tool numbers are found, the smallest tool number is
displayed.
<2> Press the [Check] soft key.

If you press this key when there are different types of tools, details of the check
results are displayed.
1
2
<3> After checking the results, press the [Close] soft key.
The message is closed.
3
4
 • The Search window for tool data with "T" set in Items and "(Tool
Number with a different type)" in Description appears.
MEMO • After the search, the target data can be checked and edited.
5
3.2.2.12 Displaying the tool slide
3.2.2.11
Display the CNC operation screen tool slide from the table display screen. 6
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Tool Slide] soft key.
The CNC operation screen tool slide appears, and Tool Manager moves in the
7
background.
8
 • To display the tool individual settings screen from the CNC
MEMO
operation screen tool slide, press the [Tool Manager] soft key.
A1
3.2.2.13 Importing tool presetter measurement data A2
You can import the XML file of the tool presetter measurement data to use it as
3.2.2.12
offset data for the target tool.

Z
 • When you enable the tool presetter hide function in the user
customized setting file, the [Tool Presetter] soft key will be hidden.
MEMO
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Tool Presetter] soft key.
The Measurement Data Import screen appears. The displayed contents will
vary according to the CNC option.
The target tool is the one selected with the cursor in the table display screen.
<2> Check the target tool and press the [OK] soft key.
Import the offset data from the measurement data and set it to the target tool.
109
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Depending on the machine settings, you can select [Initialize Tool Life Counter]
for the tool life. Selecting this check box will reset the tool life counter to its
initial value.
1
2
3 A message is displayed according to the results of the measurement data
import.

The [Measurement Data Import] window closes.
The following table shows the messages displayed as results for importing tool
5 presetter measurement results.
Results of import Message

6 When measurement data was Import of measurement data is complete.
successfully imported
When measurement data was not Cannot import measurement data.
7 successfully imported
When measurement data was not found Measurement data does not exist.
in the specified folder
8 When the measurement data value is out Compensation amount is out of range.
of the tool offset data setting range that is
set with the error operation protection
A1 function
A2  Offset data items

Offset data items corresponding to tool presetter measurement data are as
follows.
Z
110
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.2.13 Offset Data Items of the Measurement Data XML File
Measurement Machining center system Lathe system
data Tool Tool Tool Complex Geometry Geometry Complex
XML file offset offset offset machining wear wear machining
memory memory memory
A B C
offset without
offset
with
offset
offset
1
length geometry Offset Geometr Tool Z Axis Z Axis Z Axis Z Axis
Value y Length (Geometry)
(Geometry)
(Geometry) (Geometry)
2
Wear Wear Tool Z Axis Z Axis Z Axis
Length
(Wear)
(Wear) (Wear) (Wear)
3
radius geometry Offset Geometry Tool Tip R Tool Tool Tip R
Value Diameter (Geometry)
(Geometry)
Diameter Diameter (Geometry)
(Geometry)
4
Wear Wear Tool Tip R Tool Tip R
Diameter
(Wear)
(Wear) Diameter
(Wear)
(Wear) 5
corner- geometry Corner R Corner R Corner R
r (Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry) 6
Wear Corner R Corner R Corner R
x-axis geometry X Axis X Axis X Axis X Axis 7
(Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry)
Wear X Axis X Axis X Axis
(Wear) (Wear) (Wear) 8
y-axis geometry Y Axis Y Axis Y Axis Y Axis
(Geometry) (Geometry) (Geometry)
Wear Y Axis Y Axis Y Axis
A1
second geometry
-x-axis
X Axis
(Second
X Axis
(Second
A2
Geometry) Geometry)
second geometry
-y-axis
Y Axis
(Second
Y Axis
(Second
Z
Geometry) Geometry)
second geometry Z Axis Z Axis
-z-axis (Second (Second
Geometry) Geometry)
tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip
111
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• The name of the XML file to import must be "ToolOffset.xml".

• The XML file to import must be stored in the following folder. When
the file does not exist, the message "Measurement data does not
1 exist." will be displayed.

PANEL iH:
\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager\Preset
PANEL iH Pro (SSD):
2 D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager\Preset
PANEL iH Pro (HDD):
 C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager\Preset
3 MEMO
• The measurement data to be imported must be created in a format
prescribed by FANUC. Check with the vendor whether the tool
presetter can output in the prescribed format.
4 • Depending on the machine configuration or settings, information

contained in the XML file may not be imported as offset data. When
import cannot be performed, the message "Cannot import
5 measurement data." is displayed and the operation will be ignored.

• When the measurement data value is out of the offset data setting
range that is set with the error operation protection function, the
message "Compensation amount is out of range." is displayed.
6
3.2.2.14 Displaying the large tool geometry settings screen
7 3.2.2.14
From the table display screen, you can display the Large Tool Geometry Settings
screen (for editing) where you can only edit large tool geometry data or the Large
Tool Geometry Settings screen (for selecting numbers) where you can select and
8 edit large tool geometry data.
To display the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen (for editing), follow the steps
below.
A1
A2  • For details on the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen (for selecting
numbers) where you can select and edit large tool geometry data, see
MEMO "3.2.8.4 Selecting the large tool geometry number".
Z <1> In the table display screen, press the [Large Tool Geometry] soft key on the
second page of horizontal soft keys.
The Large Tool Geometry Settings screen (for editing) appears.
112
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, edit the large tool geometry data.
1
2
3
 • For details on the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, see "3.2.8
Basic Operation in the Large Tool Geometry Settings Screen". 4
MEMO
3.2.2.15 Managing multi-edge tools

5
A multi-edge tool has multiple edges as shown in the figure below.
3.2.2.15
6
Edge No.5
Edge No.4
7
Edge No.3
Edge No.2
8
Edge No.1
Fig. 3.2.2.15 (a) Conceptual Diagram of a Multi-edge Tool A1

The following elements are required to manage multi-edge tools. A2
• Multiple pieces of edge information associated with each tool
• Tool offset data and tool life data for each edge
Z
• Edge information used in on-going machining
• Tool data with "Edges: 1" set in the CNC is treated as a normal tool
on the Tool Manager application but actually regarded as a multi-
 edge tool. Therefore, when tool data with the number of edge set to
"1" in the CNC exists, if you try to add a multi-edge tool on the Tool
MEMO
Manager application, it may fail with a warning message even if the
total number of multi-edge tools does not reach the limit (100).
 Expanding or collapsing the edge information display

On the table display screen, you can show/hide multi-edge tool edge information.
113
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Collapse: Collapses multi-edge tool edge information into one row.
Fig. 3.2.2.15 (b) When Edge Information Is Hidden

1
Expand: Expands multi-edge tool edge information into multiple rows according to
2 the number of edges of the multi-edge tool.
3
Fig. 3.2.2.15 (c) When Edge Information Is Expanded and Displayed in Multiple
4 Rows
You can collapse/expand information all or individually.

5 All: Collapses/expands information for all multi-edge tools.
Individually: Collapses/expands information for the selected multi-edge tool.
6 <1> In the table display screen, press the [Multi Edge] soft key.
The sub menu for displaying and editing edge information appears.
7
8 <2> Press a soft key you want to collapse/expand.
A1
A2 Horizontal soft keys Description
Expand Displays the edge information of the selected multi-edge
Z tool.
Expand All Displays the edge information of all multi-edge tools.
Collapse Hides the second and subsequent edge information pieces
of the selected multi-edge tool.
Collapse All Hides the second and subsequent edge information pieces
of all multi-edge tools.
Cancel Hides the sub menu for showing/hiding and editing edge
information.
<3> Press the [Cancel] soft key.
114
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 Adding edge information

Select a tool in the table display screen and add edge information of the selected
multi-edge tool to the end of the edge list.
When edge information of a non-multi-edge tool is added, the tool is treated as a
multi-edge tool.
1
 You can register up to 100 multi-edge tools.
If you try to register multi-edge tools above this limit, the message “You
2
MEMO have already added the maximum number of multi edge tools.” appears.
3
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool to which you want to add an edge.
<3> Press the [Multi Edge] soft key.
4
<4> Press the [Edge (+)] soft key.
New edge information is added to the end of the edge list. 5
 Deleting edge information
Delete edge information of the selected multi-edge tool in the table display screen.
6
When there is only one piece of edge information left, it is treated as a normal tool.
7
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool from which you want to delete an edge.
8
<4> Press the [Edge (-)] soft key.
The deletion confirmation window appears. A1
The last edge information is deleted. A2
 Copying a multi-edge tool
Copy the information including all the edges of the selected multi-edge tool in the Z
table display screen.
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool you want to copy.
If the selected tool is a multi-edge tool, the tool information including all the
edges of the target tool is copied.
The copy source information shows "No.", and the [Paste] soft key becomes
enabled.
115
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 Copying and pasting a multi-edge tool

Rewrite the information of the selected tool with the copied multi-edge tool
information in the table display screen.
1 <1> In the table display screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the editable mode.
<2> Move the cursor to a tool to which you want to paste the tool information.
2 <3> Press the [Paste] soft key.

The tool paste confirmation window appears.
3 The tool with the cursor in is overwritten by the tool data.
If the copy source tool is a multi-edge tool, the edge information of the target
tool is replaced all with the copy source information including the configuration.
4
 Extracting a multi-edge tool
5 Extract a multi-edge tool by a specific filter item in the table display screen.
Table 3.2.2.15 (a) Filter Items in Multi-edge Tool Extraction
6 Filter item
Tool Type
Description
Displays multi-edge tools that match the specified tool type
in the edge information.
7 Magazine Displays multi-edge tools that match the specified magazine

number.
Tool life Displays multi-edge tools with at least one edge that
8 matches the specified tool life in the edge information.
Select Not Managed, Life Remaining, No Life Left, or
Broken.
A1 Attaching status Displays multi-edge tools that match the specified attaching
status.
Select Detached Tools, Temporary Detached Tools, or
A2 Attached Tools.
Z <1> In the table display screen, press the [Filter] soft key.
<2> Specify the filter item and description and press the [OK] soft key.
If a multi-edge tool meets the filter item condition, the edge information is
displayed expanded.
 Deleting tool data

Delete the selected multi-edge tool (including edge information) in the table
display screen.
116
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool you want to delete.

The soft key display changes.
The selected tool data is deleted. 1
If the selected tool is a multi-edge tool, the tool information including all the
edges of the target tool is also deleted.
2
 Editing edge information
Edit the selected multi-edge tool or edge information in the table display screen. 3
<2> Move the cursor to a tool/item you want to edit.
4
<3> Modify the data.
If the edited tool is a multi-edge tool, all the edges of the selected tool become 5
selected.
 Checking the offset data of a multi-edge tool in the tool slide screen
6
Check the offset data of a multi-edge tool in the tool slide screen.
Offset data displayed in the tool slide is the first edge information. 7
<1> Select a multi-edge tool for which you want to display offset information in the
table display screen. 8
<2> Press the [Tool Slide] soft key.
The CNC operation screen tool slide appears, and Tool Manager moves in the
background.
A1
 Searching for multi-edge tools A2
Search for multi-edge tools by a specific search target in the table display screen.
Table 3.2.2.15 (b) Search Targets in Multi-edge Tool Search

Z
Search target Description
No. Searches for multi-edge tools that match the specified tool
number.
Tool Number (T Code) Searches for multi-edge tools with at least one edge that
matches the specified tool number (T code) (The first edge
is selected).
Tool Name Searches for multi-edge tools that match the specified tool
name.
Magazine/Pot Searches for multi-edge tools that match the specified
magazine/pot.
117
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Search] soft key.
The Search window appears.
<2> In the [Search] window, select an item.
1 Select one of the search targets shown in the table above.
2 If a matching multi-edge tool is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding
data. If a matching multi-edge tool is not found, the message "No Match" is
displayed at the lower part of the Search window.
3
3.2.3 Basic Operation in the Tool Individual Settings
4 Screen
3.2.3
This screen allows you to display detailed tool information about one tool to view
5 and edit data.
In this screen, you can edit tool data and input an operation memo.
6 3.2.3.1
3.2.3.1
Part names and functions in the tool individual settings screen
7 B C I
8
A
A1
A2 D
Z
E G
F
H
Fig. 3.2.3.1 Part Names and Functions in the Tool Individual Settings Screen
118
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.3.1 Names and Functions

Name Description
A Tool list Tool Management Number and Group Number are displayed in
the base (parent node) in tree structure.
If Tool Name is set for the tool, the tool name is enclosed in
double quotation marks.
1
The edge information of a tool registered as a multi-edge tool is
displayed in tree structure.
Tool components, such as tool parts and holder parts, are 2
displayed in a child or grandchild node in the "icon + name"
format.
Part Icon 3
Tool Part Varies depending on the tool type
See "3.2.1.5 Tool geometry dimension data that
can be set". 4
Holder Part
The tree configuration is as follows.

5
(Parent node) Tool Management Group Number
(Child node)
Number
+ Part + Inner Group
6
Number
(Grandchild node) + Part
7
Displays the following icons on Tool Management Number and
Inner Group Number in the tree according to the tool life state. 8
Icon State
Warning The tool has no life remaining or
was damaged. A1
Abnormal The remaining life exceeded the
forenoticed life.
B Tool data Displays item data described in "3.2.1.1 Tool database". A2
The item is switched according to the area selected with the
cursor.
For areas selected with the cursors and items displayed, see Z
"3.2.10 Details of Each Data in the Tool Database".
 • Some items may not be displayed

depending on the machine configuration.
MEMO
C Tool image preview Displays imported image data.
119
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
D Operation Memo/ Displays memos, such as tool attach/detach and inspection
guidance work records and notifications for the next operator.
Up to five memos can be registered, each of which contains the
1 date/time written + text data (up to 32 characters).

The guidance shows an image that will aid the operator when
setting the tool data.
When the cursor is on the "Tool Attach Position" of a guide
2 image display target, a guide image of coordinate system is
displayed in the lower left section of the guidance.
3  • This may not be displayed depending on

the machine configuration.
MEMO
4 E Guide message/ Displays a warning message if there is a tool which has no life
Warning message remaining or reached the forenoticed life.
5 message in the table is displayed.
6 The tool in use has no life

remaining.
• The tool currently used has no
life remaining.
There is a tool with no life • The last tool with the same tool
7 remaining. type number has no life

remaining.
• The life in the group has no life
remaining. (Tool life
8 management)
A1 will end soon.

Only a few tools are
used will end soon.
• The number of tools left in the
remaining. group selected with the T code
A2 command is equal to or less

than the setting value in
Parameter (No.6846). (Tool life
management)
Z The data is being used or is • You tried to edit data that is
for the next registered tool being used or is for the next
group. registered tool group.
120
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
F Operation State Displays the icon showing the data editable mode, tool
Icon State
Data Editable Data can be edited. 1
Tool The tool is being detached. (When
Detached the automatic detach mode is 2
selected)
Tool Attached The tool is being attached. (When
the automatic attach mode is 3
selected)
Tool Moved The tool is being moved. (When
the automatic move mode is 4
selected)
G Inch/mm Icon Displays an icon that indicates inch/mm of the displayed path.
Icon State
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
121
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
H Horizontal soft keys Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen.
Changes the tool data to the editable or non-editable mode.
1 [Edit]/[End Edit]
configuration and settings.
*When the tool management function is disabled, you can hide
the [Edit]/[End Edit] soft keys with the user customization
2 setting file.
Switches the displayed tool data to the previous tool.
3 [Previous Tool]
Switches the displayed tool data to the next tool.
4
[Next Tool]
5 Displays the Individual Life Reset window to confirm the reset of

an individual tool life state.
6 [Individual Reset]
Moves the selection focus between the tool list and tool data.
7 [Switch Focus]
Sets the offset value data measured with the tool presetter to
8 the target tool.(*1)
[Tool Presetter]
A1 Opens the CNC operation screen tool slide based on the offset
number of tool data where the cursor is placed.(*2)(*3)
A2 [Tool Slide]
Input an operation memo. (Displayed only during the editable
mode)
Z [Operation Memo]
The window will be closed.
[Close]
122
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
I Vertical soft keys Displays the vertical soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
Displays the Tool Status screen when pressed.
2
Tool Status screen
Displays the Magazine Management screen when pressed. 3
Magazine
Management
4
screen
Displays the Total Life Data screen when pressed. 5
Total Life Data
screen
6
7
Select Import/
Export Item screen
(*1) You can also hide the [Tool Presetter] soft key by enabling the tool presetter hide
8
(*2) Pressing the [Tool Slide] soft key moves Tool Manager in the background and CNC A1
operation screen in the foreground.
(*3) Under the following condition, the [Tool Slide] soft key is not displayed.
The CNC operation screen is not defined in the configuration file (apps-gener- A2
al.xml).
Z
 Offset input limit function
If an out-of-range value is entered, the "Compensation amount is out of range."
message is displayed, indicating that there is a limit to the offset value range. The
offset value can be changed only within the range specified in parameter No.
24305.
For example, if the original value is 100.00 and the value of parameter No. 24305
is 2.000, the input value range is between 98.000 and 102.000. This is enabled
when the signal OFSLIM<G0579.2> is "0".
The target operations for input limit are as follows:

• Editing tool data
• Importing tool presetter measurement data
123
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

NOTE
• The input amount is not limited when the value of parameter No.
24305 is 0 or less.
1
For the target items for input limit, see "Table 3.2.2.2 (d) List of the Target Items for
Offset Input Limit".
2 The offset input limit function is enabled when parameter No. 24305 is greater
than 0.000 and signal OFSLIM<G0579.2> is "0".
3  Displaying/editing iCAP T tool data
4
 The iCAP T basic function option and setting are required to use this
function.
MEMO
5
<1> In the Individual Tool Settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the
6 editable mode.
<2> Move the cursor to Tool.
7 <3> Set a value in Tool Compensation Number to display the Tool Type items.
<4> Set a value in Tool Type to display the iCAP T tool data items.
8 <5> Move the cursor to each of the iCAP T tool data items.
<6> Edit the value with the MDI key.
The iCAP T tool is displayed.
A1
A2
Z
124
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

NOTE
• If you change Tool Type set in Tool, the iCAP T tool data is cleared
(initialized).
1
3.2.3.2 Displaying the tool individual settings screen
Display the tool individual settings screen.
2
3.2.3.2
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Individual Settings] soft key.
The tool individual settings screen appears. 3
4
• When using the touch panel, double-tap the tool management number 5
 (No.) or inner group number to display the Individual Tool Settings
screen of the corresponding tool.
MEMO Or double-tap the group number to display the Individual Tool Settings
screen of the No. 1 tool of the corresponding group.
6
7
3.2.3.3 Editing tool data
Edit tool data individually.
3.2.3.3
8
<1> On the tool list in the Tool Individual Settings screen, move the cursor to a tool
you want to edit.
A1
A2
Z
125
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • If the cursor is on tool data, press the [Switch Focus] soft key to
move the cursor to the tool list.
MEMO
1
2
3 <2> Move the cursor to the item (tool or holder) containing data you want to edit and
press the [Switch Focus] soft key.
4 The cursor moves to the tool data.
5
<3> Move the cursor to the data to edit.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • For details on data displayed on tool data, see "3.2.10 Details of

Each Data in the Tool Database".
MEMO
126
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<4> Press the [Edit] soft key.

1
<5> Move the cursor to tool data you want to edit and set or edit the data.
2
<6> After the change, press the [End Edit] soft key.
The screen enters the non-editable mode, hiding the Data Editable icon at the 3
 Operating edge information 4

The tool individual settings screen allows you to perform the following edge
information operations:
5
• Add edge information
• Delete edge information
• Display the offset data of a multi-edge tool in the tool slide
6
 Adding edge information 7

Add edge information of the selected multi-edge tool to the end of the edge list in
the tool individual settings screen.
8
<1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the
editable mode.
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool to which you want to add an edge. A1
<4> Press the [Edge (+)] soft key. A2
New edge information is added to the end of the edge list.
 Deleting edge information

Z
Delete edge information of the selected multi-edge tool in the tool individual
settings screen.
When there is only one piece of edge information left, it is treated as a normal tool.
<1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the
editable mode.
<2> Move the cursor to a multi-edge tool from which you want to delete an edge.
<4> Press the [Edge (-)] soft key.
The deletion confirmation window appears.
127
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The last edge information is deleted.
 Checking the offset data of a multi-edge tool in the tool slide

1 In the tool individual settings screen, execute the tool slide function.
Offset data displayed in the tool slide is the first edge information.
<1> Select a multi-edge tool for which you want to display offset information in the
2 tool individual settings screen.
<2> Press the [Tool Slide] soft key.
3 The CNC operation screen tool slide appears, and Tool Manager moves in the
background.
4 For details on the operations, see "3.2.2.15 Managing multi-edge tools".
5 3.2.3.4 Inputting an operation memo

Input an operation memo.
3.2.3.4
6 <1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
<2> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Operation Memo] soft key.
7 The [Input Operation Memo] window appears.
8
<3> Select No. (1 to 5) for the write destination and input text (up to 32 single-byte
A1 characters).
A2
Z
The text is displayed on the selected operation memo.
 • Pressing the [Delete] soft key deletes the operation memo.

MEMO
3.2.3.5 Switching between the previous tool and next tool

In the tool individual settings screen, switch the displayed tool data to the previous
3.2.3.5
or next tool information.
128
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<1> To switch to the previous tool, press the [Previous Tool] soft key.
The screen will show the previous tool information.
1
<2> To switch to the next tool, press the [Next Tool] soft key.
The screen will show the next tool information.
2
3
 • If the first or last tool data is displayed, you cannot select the
[Previous Tool] or [Next Tool] soft key.
4
MEMO
5
3.2.3.6 Importing tool presetter measurement data
You can import the offset data from the measurement data and set it to the target
3.2.3.6
tool. 6
You can also hide the [Tool Presetter] soft key by enabling the tool presetter hide
7
<1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Tool Presetter] soft key.
The Measurement Data Import screen appears. The displayed contents will 8
vary according to the CNC option.
The target tool is the one selected with the cursor in the table display screen.
A1
A2
Z
<2> Check the target tool and press the [OK] soft key.
Import the offset data from the measurement data and set it to the target tool.
If you select [Initialize Tool Life Counter] for the tool life at this point, you can
reset the tool life counter to its initial value depending on the machine
configuration.
A message is displayed according to the results of the measurement data

import.
129
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The [Measurement Data Import] window closes.
1  • For offset data items for the measurement data XML file, see
"Table 3.2.2.13 Offset Data Items of the Measurement Data XML
MEMO File".
2 3.2.3.7 Displaying the tool slide

Display the CNC operation screen tool slide from the tool individual settings
3.2.3.7
3 screen.
<1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Tool Slide] soft key.
4 The CNC operation screen tool slide appears, and Tool Manager moves in the
background.
5
 • To display the tool individual settings screen from the CNC
operation screen tool slide, press the [Tool Manager] soft key.
6 MEMO
7 3.2.3.8
3.2.3.8
Setting image pictures for tool/holder parts
Image pictures can be set for tool or holder parts in the tool list on the tool
individual settings screen. The image you set will be displayed as a tool image
8 preview.
<1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
A1 <2> Move the cursor to the tool or holder parts image and edit it.
Image files are listed in the Select Image window.
A2
Z
<3> Select an image in the image selection window and press the [OK] soft key.
The file name of the selected image file is reflected to the tool or holder parts
image of the tool data, and the selected image is displayed in the tool image
preview.
130
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • To cancel a tool parts image that was already set, select [No Image] in
the image selection window and press the [OK] soft key.
MEMO
1
 Setting image pictures for external reference folder
You can select an image picture from an external reference folder and set it for a
tool part. 2
<1> Press the [Select Folder] soft key while the image selection window is
displayed.
3
<2> Select an external reference folder and press the [OK] soft key. 4
5
 Switching to external reference folder
You can switch to the external reference folder used previously to select an image
picture and set it for a tool part.
6
<1> Press the [External] soft key while the image selection window is displayed. 7
 • Pressing the [Internal] soft key causes a switch to an internal 8

reference folder.
MEMO
A1
A2
• In setting an image picture for a tool part, if an image file having the
 same name already exists, a window asking confirmation for
MEMO
overwriting will appear. Press the [OK] soft key to display an Z
overwritten image picture.
 Saving images
Save images in a USB flash drive or memory card and insert it into the device.
The conditions for images that can be used are as follows:
• File name: Up to 32 characters
• File format: PNG
131
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• Image data that include an alpha channel or images with a bit

NOTE
depth of 32 bit or above may not be displayed.
• If the set image size is large, the response of the screen display
1 may get slow down.
2 3.2.3.9
3.2.3.9
Entering data with the calculator
Enter data using the calculator along with equations for tool data.
3 <1> In the tool individual settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
<2> Move the cursor to the tool data for which you want to enter the equation.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
The following table shows the tool data items and ranges for which you can enter
A2 equations on the Individual Tool Settings screen.

Z Individual settings Spindle Speed (S) 0 to 99999
screen (tool node) Feedrate (F) 0 to 99999999
Offset Data 1 to 13 -9999.999 to 9999.999
Size Data 1 to 8

<4> Press <CALC>.
132
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 entering equations, the calculation will not be performed.

NOTE item, the equation will be cleared, and the value before you entered
the equation will be displayed. 1
2
 • For operators, symbols, and functions that can be used in equations,
see " Operators, symbols, and functions allowed in equations". 3
MEMO
3.2.3.10 Resetting the tool life state individually

4
3.2.3.10
tool life count or time after a certain period of operation, individually reset its tool
life state to usable.
5
For detail on the operation, see "3.2.2.9 Resetting the tool life state individually". 6
3.2.3.11
3.2.3.11
Displaying the large tool geometry settings screen
From the Individual Tool Settings screen, you can display the Large Tool
7
Geometry Settings screen where you can select and edit large tool geometry data.
8
<1> In the Individual Tool Settings screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
<2> Move the cursor to the large tool geometry number in the tool data and then
select the large tool geometry number with the MDI keys.
A1
<3> In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, edit the large tool geometry data.
A2
Z
 • For details, see "3.2.8 Basic Operation in the Large Tool Geometry
Settings Screen".
MEMO
133
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.4 Basic Operation in the Tool Status Screen

3.2.4
The tool status information is represented with icons when the screen is displayed.
On this screen, you can search for tool information on the database.
When you reopen the slide, the information is updated to the latest.
1
3.2.4.1 Part names and functions in the Tool Status screen
2
3.2.4.1
3 C H
A
4
5 B
6
7 D E
8 G
Fig. 3.2.4.1 Part Names and Functions in the Tool Status Screen
A1
A2 Name Description
A Tool image preview Displays imported image data.
Z B Tool Information
Display
Displays tool information of the selected icon data.
Displays the information of the edge in use if the tool displayed
in the spindle position is a multi-edge tool.
If a normal tool is displayed, the edge in use is not displayed.
Life data are retrieved from the information of the edge in use.
134
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Icon Data List Displays icons showing the tool type and status on the list.
Icons are displayed grouped by magazine.
The maximum number of icons to be displayed in one line is 10
for the 10.4- or 15-inch indicator and 15 for the 19-inch
indicator. 1
Tool icons are displayed according to the tool type.
For multi-edge tools, the upper-right corner of the icon is
displayed in white. 2
If the tool is set to the spindle, the displayed tool type depends
on the edge number in use.
For tools without the tool type set, the following tool icons are
displayed.
3
Lathe system: General Tool
Machining center system: Drilling Tool
Icon color Tool state
4
With the tool icon display
Gray Life remains, or life management is disabled. 5
Yellow The remaining life exceeded the forenoticed life.
Red The tool has no life remaining or was damaged.
Without the tool icon display
6
Gray It is a tool with invalid tool management, a tool
being detached, or a skip tool. 7
Displays the following icons next to Magazine Name according
to the tool state in the magazine.
If both conditions are met, the [Abnormality] icon is displayed. 8
Icon State
Warning There is a tool whose remaining
life exceeded the forenoticed life. A1
Abnormal There is a tool which has no life
remaining or was damaged.
D Warning Message Displays a warning message if there is a tool which has no life
A2
remaining or reached the forenoticed life.
message in the table is displayed. Z
The tool in use has no life • The tool currently used has no
remaining. life remaining.
There is a tool with no life • The last tool with the same tool
remaining. type number has no life
remaining.
will end soon. used will end soon.
135
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
E Operation State Displays the icon showing the data editable mode, tool
Icon State
1 Tool
Detached
The tool is being detached. (When
the automatic detach mode is
selected)
2 Tool Attached The tool is being attached. (When
the automatic attach mode is
selected)
3 Tool Moved The tool is being moved. (When
the automatic move mode is
selected)
4 F Filter Displays filtered target items. Only data that meet the conditions
are displayed in the tool data table.
The following filtering items are provided.
5 • Tool Type
• Magazine Number
• Tool Life State
6 • Attaching status
* The items vary depending on the settings.
G Horizontal soft keys Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen.
7 Searches tool information on the database for data including a

keyword. Data are searched for by "Tool Management
Number".
8 [Search]
Displays tool information selected in the table list screen.
A1 [Select]
A2
Z
136
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
H Vertical soft keys Displays the vertical soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
Displays the table display screen when pressed.
2
Tool Status screen
Magazine
Management
4
screen
Displays the Total Life Data screen when pressed. 5
Total Life Data
screen
6
7
Select Import/
Export Item screen
8
A1
A2
Z
137
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.4.2 Displaying the tool status display screen

Display the tool status display screen.
3.2.4.2
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Tool Status] soft key.
1 The tool status display screen appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7
3.2.4.3 Checking the icon data
Icon data can be checked.
3.2.4.3
8
<1> In the icon data list, move the cursor to icon data of which you want to check
A1 the status.
Tool information of the selected icon data is displayed at the left of the screen.
A2
Z
138
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> In the tool status display screen, press the [Select] soft key.
The tool status display screen is closed, and the cursor moves to the
corresponding data in the table list screen.
1
3.2.4.4 Searching for tool data in the icon data list 2
Search for data in the icon data list.
3.2.4.4
<1> In the tool status display screen, press the [Search] soft key. 3
<2> In the [Search] window, select "Items" and enter "Description". 5

"Tool Management Number (No.)", "Tool Number (T)", "Tool Name", or
"Magazine/Pot" can be selected.
6
7
8
 symbol (*).
• When you select "Tool Name" and perform search without entering
A1
MEMO "Description", the system will search for the tool data having tool
names.
A2
If matching description is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding icon
data.
Z
the lower part of the [Search] window.

Soft keys Search range Search range
range)
[Previous Before the current cursor From the end to the cursor position
Direction] position
[Next After the current cursor From the beginning to the cursor position
Direction] position
139
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
When a search for the target tool data is finished, press the [Cancel] soft key.
3.2.5 Basic Operation in the Magazine Management

1 Screen
3.2.5
The status of the magazine pot is shown in icon format to allow you to check them
visually.
2 You can also perform tool attach, detach, or move. Data related to each tool must
be registered beforehand in the table display screen or Individual Tool Settings
screen.
3
3.2.5.1 Displaying the magazine management screen
4 3.2.5.1
Display the Magazine Management screen.
<1> In the table display screen, press the vertical soft key for the Magazine
5 Management screen.
The Magazine Management screen appears.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
140
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.5.2 Name and function of each part of the magazine management screen
3.2.5.2
A F 2
3
C
B D 4
E
5
Fig. 3.2.5.2 Name and Function of Each Part of the Magazine Management
Screen
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
141
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Name Description
A Magazine Displays the statuses of magazine pots and tool attaching
management data status in relation to the spindle position or waiting position.
1 For multi-edge tools, the upper-right corner of the icon is
displayed in white.
If the tool is set to the spindle, the displayed tool type
2 depends on the edge number in use.

The pot number (number of spindle positions, number of
waiting positions, and number of pots/pot start number in
each magazine) is displayed under the icon.
3 Icon Pot Status
The pot where the tool is attached
4 * Displays the tool type with an icon.
Occupied by a large tool
5
Tool storage location is set
6 Tool is detached
7 Disabled or closed pot (not configurable)
8 Empty pot
A1 B Guidance message Displays information on the currently selected item.

Displays the information of the edge in use if the tool
displayed in the spindle position is a multi-edge tool.
A2 C Tool management
If a normal tool is displayed, the edge in use is not displayed.
Enter the tool (No.) to attach onto the magazine pot.
number (No.) input
Z box
142
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
D Operation State Icon Displays the data editable mode, tool attach state, tool detach
state, and tool move state.
Icon State
Data can be edited. 1
Data Editable
The tool is being detached. (When the 2
automatic detach mode is selected)
Detaching
Tool 3
The tool is being attached. (When the
automatic attach mode is selected)
Attaching Tool 4
The tool is being moved. (When the
Tool Moved
automatic move mode is selected)
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
143
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
E Horizontal soft keys Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen.
First page
Changes the magazine management data to the editable or
1 non-editable mode.
[Edit]/[End Edit]
2 Searches for a pot or empty pot in the Magazine
Management screen.
Displays the sub-menu to perform search within a magazine.
3 [Search]
Reattaches the tool. (*)
4
[Reattach]
Attaches or detaches the tool. (*)
5 (Detach method: detach, temporary detach, hold detach)
The state of this soft key ([Attach], [Detach], [Hide]) will vary
[Attach]/ according to the cursor position and input state of the tool
6 [Detach] management number (No.) input box.
Moves the tool to another magazine or pot. (*)
7
[Move]
Registers the tool (No.) to the specified pot.
8
[Tool (No.) Register]
A1 Cancels the registered tool (No.).
A2 [Tool (No.) Cancel]

Registers or cancels storage information for the tool
registered in the magazine management data. (*)
Z Displays a sub-menu for registering or canceling storage
[Register Clear] information.
Shows or hides the properties tile.
[Properties]
Second page
Switches the display of the tool set in the pot to the tool
number icon or tool type icon.
[Tool No. (T)]/

[Tool Type]
144
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Displays the Magazine Properties screen.
[Magazine
Properties] 1
The Pot Properties screen appears.
2
[Pot Properties]
Displays the Tool Attach/Detach History screen. (Displayed
only when the tool attach/detach management function is
3
enabled)
[Tool Attach]/[Tool
Detach] 4
F Vertical soft keys Displays the vertical soft keys to switch to the slides.
Displays the Information Center when pressed. 5
Information
Center
6
7
Tool Status
Display screen
Displays the Magazine Management screen when pressed.
8
Magazine
A1
Management screen
A2
Total Life Data
screen Z
Select Import/Export
Item screen
(*) Displayed only when the option is enabled
145
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.5.3 Editing magazine management data

Edit magazine management data.
3.2.5.3
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to the data you want to
1 edit.
2
3
4
5
6
7 <2> Press the [Edit] soft key.
8 lower right of the screen.

<3> Set or change the data.
A1 The screen enters the non-editable mode, hiding the Data Editable icon at the
A2
3.2.5.4 Searching empty pots in magazines
Z Search for empty pots in magazines to which the specified tool is attached.
3.2.5.4
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, press the [Search] soft key.
<2> In the [Search] window, select an empty pot.
 • An empty pot can only be selected when a value is entered into the
tool management number (No.) input box.
MEMO
146
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<3> Press the [Previous Direction] or [Next Direction] soft key.

To search backwards towards the previous pots, press the [Previous Direction]
soft key. To search towards the next and subsequent pots, press the [Next
Direction] soft key.
If an empty pot is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding pot. If an empty
pot is not found, the message "No Empty Pots" is displayed. 1
3.2.5.5 Searching information on tools within magazines and magazines/pots 2
Search for data related to tools, magazines, or pots in the Magazine Management
3.2.5.5
screen.
3
The Search window appears. 4
<2> In the [Search] window, select an item.
Select "Tool (No.)" or "Magazine/Pot".
5
If matching description is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding data. If
matching description is not found, the message "No Match" is displayed at the 6
lower part of the [Search] window.
3.2.5.6 Searching tools within magazines using the tool number 7

Search for information on tools within a magazine using the tool number (T code).
3.2.5.6
8
<2> In the [Search] window, select [Tool Number (T Code)]. A1
<3> Press the [Previous Direction] or [Next Direction] soft key.
To search backwards towards the previous pots, press the [Previous Direction] A2
soft key. To search towards the next and subsequent pots, press the [Next
Direction] soft key.
If a tool is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding tool number. If
matching description is not found, the message "No Match" is displayed at the
Z
lower part of the [Search] window.
3.2.5.7 Attaching a tool onto a pot

Select the tool to attach in the table display screen and then attach the tool onto
3.2.5.7
an empty pot in the Magazine Management screen.
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Filter] soft key.
147
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> In the Filter window, extract the detached tool.
 • For details, see "3.2.2.8 Setting filters for tool data".

1 MEMO
2 <3> Select the tool to attach.

<4> Press the vertical soft key for the Magazine Management screen.
The Magazine Management screen appears. The tool (No.) of the selected tool
3 will be entered in the tool management number (No.) input box.
<5> Press the [Attach] soft key.
4 "Attach tool (No.):(tool name)." is displayed in the Attach window.
<6> Press the [Manual Select]/[Auto Select] soft key to switch the attach mode.
5 <7> Press the [OK] or [OK (Close)] soft key.

The selected tool will be attached with the selected attach mode.
Pressing the [OK (Close)] soft key will close the Magazine Management
6 screen.
7 3.2.5.8
3.2.5.8
Detaching a tool from a pot
Select the attached tool in the table display screen and then detach the tool from
its pot in the Magazine Management screen.
8
A1 The Filter Settings window appears.

<2> In the Filter window, extract the attached tool.
A2
MEMO
Z
<3> Select the tool to detach.
will be entered in the tool management number (No.) input box.
<5> Press the [Detach] soft key.
"Attach tool (No.):(tool name)." is displayed in the Attach window.
148
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<6> Press the [Manual Select]/[Auto Select] soft key to switch the detach mode.
<7> Press the [Detach] soft key.
The tool is detached with the specified method. If you select [Detach (Close)] or
[Detach], the [Reason 1] to [Reason 5] soft keys will be displayed. Pressing any
of the [Reason] soft keys will detach the tool. 1
Horizontal soft keys Description
[Hold Detach] Performs hold detach of the tool and closes the Magazine 2
Management screen.
[Hold Detach] Performs hold detach of the tool but does not close the
Magazine Management screen. 3
[Temporary Detach] Performs temporary detach of the tool and closes the
[Temporary Detach]
Magazine Management screen.
Performs temporary detach of the tool but does not close
4
the Magazine Management screen.
[Detach (Close)] Displays the sub-menu to perform detach when pressed.
The Magazine Management screen closes. Pressing any
5
of the [Reason 1] to [Reason 5] soft keys will perform
[Detach]
detach.
Displays the sub-menu to perform detach when pressed.
6
The Magazine Management will not close. Pressing any
of the [Reason 1] to [Reason 5] soft keys will perform
detach.
7
8
 • Contents of [Reason 1] to [Reason 5] may vary according to the
machine.
MEMO
A1
3.2.5.9 Moving tools in magazines
3.2.5.9
Moves the attached tool.

A2
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to the pot where the Z
tool you want to move is attached.
<2> Press the [Move] soft key.
The magazine number, pot number, and tool (No.) of the tool to be moved
(source) is displayed.
<3> Move the cursor to the destination of the tool.

The magazine number and pot number of the destination will be displayed
while the cursor moves.
149
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
5 <4> Press the [Select Dest.] soft key and select the destination.
<5> Press the [Manual Select]/[Auto Select] soft key to switch the move mode.
The tool will be moved with the selected move mode.
7 3.2.5.10 Registering a tool number to a pot
Select the tool to attach in the table display screen and then register the tool (No.)
3.2.5.10
8 to the specified pot in the Magazine Management screen.
A1 The Filter Settings window appears.
<2> In the Filter window, extract the detached tool.
A2
Z MEMO
<3> Select the tool to attach.

<5> Press the [Tool (No.) Register] soft key.
The tool (No.) is registered to the specified pot.
150
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • You can also register the tool (No.) by pressing the <INPUT> key.
MEMO
1
3.2.5.11 Canceling the registered pot management number
Select the attached tool in the table display screen and then cancel the registered
2
3.2.5.11
tool number from the pot where the tool is attached in the Magazine Management
screen.
3
4
5
MEMO
6
<3> Select the registered tool to cancel.
<4> Press the vertical soft key for the Magazine Management screen. 7
8
<5> Press the [Tool (No.) Cancel] soft key.
<6> Press the [Current Data] or [All Data] soft key.
Pressing the [Current Data] soft key will cancel the tool (No.) in the tool
A1
information registered to the currently selected pot. Pressing the [All Data] soft
key will cancel all tools (No.) in the tool information registered to all pots.
A2
The tool (No.) in the tool information for the specified pot is canceled.
Z
3.2.5.12 Registering tool storage information
Select the tool to register in the table display screen and then register the storage
3.2.5.12
for the tool registered in the magazine management data in the Magazine
Management screen.
151
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

1 MEMO
2 <3> Select the tool to register.

The tool management number (No.) input box will be empty.
3 <5> Press the [Register Storage] soft key.
<6> Press the [Register Current] or [Register All] soft key.
4 Pressing the [Register Current] soft key will register to the storage the tool
information registered to the currently selected pot. Pressing the [Register All]
soft key will register to the storage the tool information registered to all pots.
The tool information is registered as the storage with the specified method.
6 3.2.5.13 Canceling tool storage information
Select the attached tool in the table display screen and then cancel the registered
3.2.5.13
7 tool information from the pot where the tool is attached in the Magazine
Management screen.
8 <1> In the table display screen, press the [Filter] soft key.
A1 <2> In the Filter window, extract the attached tool.
A2  • For details, see "3.2.2.8 Setting filters for tool data".

MEMO
Z
<3> Select the tool to detach.
<5> Press the [Cancel Storage] soft key.
<6> Press the [Clear Current] or [Clear All] soft key.
Pressing the [Clear Current] soft key will cancel from the storage the tool
information registered to the currently selected pot. Pressing the [Clear All] soft
key will cancel from the storage the tool information registered to all pots.
152
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The tool information is canceled from the storage with the specified method.
3.2.5.14 Displaying the magazine properties screen

3.2.5.14
Display the Magazine Properties screen from the Magazine Management screen. 1
Check and edit magazine properties data.
The Magazine Properties screen has two views available: Divided screen view
and list view. 2
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, press the [Magazine Properties] soft key
on the second page of soft keys.
3
4
 Items on Magazine Properties screen (divided screen view)
A B C D 5
6
7
E
8
A1
A2
F
Z
Fig. 3.2.5.14 (a) Part Names in the Magazine Properties Screen (Divided
Screen View)
Table 3.2.5.14 (a) Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
A Magazine Type Displays the magazine type (Matrix/Chain).
B Lines Displays the number of lines for each magazine type.
• Matrix: Number of lines of pots lined up on the matrix
• Chain: Number of pots of the magazine
153
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Rows Displays the number of rows for each magazine type.
• Matrix: Number of rows of pots lined up on the matrix
• Chain: One row (fixed)
1 D Magazine
Information
#0 -: Magazine Invalid
V (Valid): Magazine Valid
2 #1 -: Magazine Available
N (None): Magazine None
#2 -: Magazine Unusable
3 U (Usable): Magazine Usable
#3 to 7 Customized Bit
4 E Customize 1 to 4 Enter a number between -99999999 and 99999999 in

Customize 1 to 4.
* Customization of the name is not supported.
5 F Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
First page (when the focus is on the magazine management tile)
Changes the magazine management data to the editable
6 or non-editable mode.
[Edit]/[End Edit]
7 Searches for a pot or empty pot in the Magazine

Management screen.
Displays the sub-menu to perform search within a
8 [Search] magazine.
A1 [Reattach]
A2 (Detach method: detach, temporary detach, hold detach)
The state of this soft key ([Attach], [Detach], [Hide]) will
[Attach]/ vary according to the cursor position and input state of the
Z [Detach] tool management number (No.) input box.

Moves the tool to another magazine or pot. (*)
[Move]
Registers the tool (No.) to the specified pot.
[Tool (No.) Register]

Cancels the registered tool (No.).
[Tool (No.) Cancel]
154
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Registers or cancels storage information for the tool
Displays a sub-menu for registering or canceling storage
[Register Clear] information.
Switches the focus to the properties tile when the focus is
1
on the magazine management tile.
[Switch Focus]
2
Shows or hides the properties tile.
3
[Properties]
First page (when the focus is on the magazine properties tile)
4
or non-editable mode.
[Edit]/[End Edit]
5
Displays the properties of the magazine preceding the
currently displayed magazine. 6
[Previous Magazine]
Displays the properties of the magazine following the 7
currently displayed magazine.
[Next Magazine] 8
Displays the deletion confirmation message window. When
you press the [OK] soft key, the currently displayed
magazine properties data is deleted. A1
[Delete]
A2
[Magazine
Properties] Z
[Pot Properties]
Switches the focus to the magazine management tile when
the focus is on the magazine properties.
[Switch Focus]
Hides the properties tile.
[Properties]
155
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Second page (when the focus is on the magazine management tile)
1 [Magazine
Properties]
2 The Pot Properties screen appears.
3 [Pot Properties]
Displays the Tool Attach/Detach History screen. (Displayed
only when the option/parameter is enabled)
4 [Tool Attach]/[Tool
Detach]
5 (*) Displayed only when the option is enabled
 Items on Magazine Properties screen (list view)

6
A B C D E F G
7
8
A1
A2
Z
H
Fig. 3.2.5.14 (b) Part Names in the Magazine Properties Screen (List View)
Table 3.2.5.14 (b) Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
A Magazine Displays the magazine management number.
B Magazine Type Displays the magazine type (Matrix/Chain).
156
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Lines Displays the number of lines for each magazine type.
• Matrix: Number of lines of pots lined up on the matrix
• Chain: Number of pots of the magazine
D Rows Displays the number of rows for each magazine type.
• Matrix: Number of rows of pots lined up on the matrix
1
• Chain: One row (fixed)
E Top Pot No.
F Magazine
Displays the first pot number.
2
Information #0 -: Magazine Invalid
V (Valid): Magazine Valid 3
#1 -: Magazine Available
N (None): Magazine None
#2 -: Magazine Unusable 4
U (Usable): Magazine Usable
G Customize 1 to 4
Enter a number between -99999999 and 99999999 in
5
Customize 1 to 4.
H Horizontal soft keys

Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
6
or non-editable mode. 7
[Edit]/[End Edit]
Displays the sub-menu to initialize the magazine properties
data.
8
• [Current Data]: Initializes the selected magazine
[Delete] properties data.
• [All Data]: Initializes all magazine properties data.
A1
Cancels deleting the properties data and closes the sub-
menu.
A2
[Close]
Z
The following table shows description of messages displayed as guidance
messages.
Table 3.2.5.14 (c) Description of Messages Displayed as Guidance Messages

Magazine Information Magazine: Magazine Number Magazine Information Bit 0:
bit 0 Setting value below
• -: Magazine Invalid
• V: Magazine Valid
157
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

• -: Magazine Available
1 Magazine Information
• N: Magazine None
Magazine: Magazine Number Magazine Information Bit 2:
2 • -: Magazine Unusable
• U: Magazine Usable
3 bit 3 Setting value below

• Customized Bit

• Customized Bit

• Customized Bit

• Customized Bit

• Customized Bit
Customize 1 Magazine: Magazine Number Customize 1: Setting value
8 Customize 2 Magazine: Magazine Number Customize 2: Setting value

A1
3.2.5.15 Changing the properties data settings in the magazine properties
screen (divided screen view)
A2 3.2.5.15

You can check the magazine setting status and change the magazine information
Z settings according to the status. Set a damaged magazine, which can be no

longer used, to unusable.
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a magazine for which
you want to change the properties data settings.
<2> Press the [Properties] soft key.
<3> Press the [Switch Focus] soft key.
<4> Enter a value in each properties display item.
158
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.5.16 Deleting properties data in the magazine properties screen (divided

screen view)
You can delete the target magazine properties data to clear the information.
3.2.5.16
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a magazine for which 1
you want to delete properties data.
2
The deletion confirmation message window appears. 3
4
3.2.5.17 Changing multiple properties data settings in the magazine properties
screen (list view) 5
3.2.5.17
You can check the setting status of multiple magazines and change the magazine
information settings according to the status. Set a damaged magazine, which can 6
be no longer used, to unusable.
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, press the [Magazine Properties] soft key
7
on the second page of soft keys.
Displays the Magazine Properties screen. 8
A1
3.2.5.18 Deleting properties data in the magazine properties screen (list view)
You can delete specific or all magazine properties data to clear the information.
A2
3.2.5.18
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a magazine for which
you want to delete properties data. Z
<2> Press the [Magazine Properties] soft key on the second page of soft keys.
[Current Data]: Delete the selected properties data.
[All Data]: Deletes all properties data.
3.2.5.19 Displaying the pot properties screen

Display the Pot Properties screen from the Magazine Management screen. Check
3.2.5.19
and edit pot properties data.
159
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
The Pot Properties screen has two views available: Divided screen view and list
view.
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, press the [Pot Properties] soft key on the
1 second page of soft keys.

2  Items on Pot Properties screen (divided screen view)
A B C D
3
4
5
E
6
7
8 F
A1 Fig. 3.2.5.19 (a) Part Names in the Pot Properties Screen (Divided Screen
View)
A2 Table 3.2.5.19 (a) Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
Z A Tool Management If a tool is registered to the pot, the management
Number number of the tool is displayed. If not, 0 is displayed.
B Pot Type Enter a tool geometry number (0 to 20, 99).
160
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Pot Information 1 Check and edit pot properties data.
#0 -: Pot Usable
L (Locked): Pot Unusable
#1 -: Empty Pot
O (Occupy): Occupied Pot
1
#2 -: Empty Pot
R1 (Reserve1): Reservation 1 Pot 2
#3 -: Empty Pot
R2 (Reserve2): Reservation 2 Pot
#4 -: Empty Pot 3
E (Expect): Not Empty Pot
#5 -: Not Temporarily Detached
TU (Temporary Unmount): Temporarily 4
Detached
#6 -: Not an Invalid Pot
D (Disable): Invalid Pot 5
#7 -: Not a Closed Pot
D Pot Information 2
C (Close): Closed Pot
Check and edit pot properties data.
6
#0 -: With Interference Check
NI (Not Interfering Check): No Interference
Check
7
E Customize 1 to 10 Enter a number between -99999999 and 99999999 in 8
Customize 1 to 10.
F Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen. A1
First page (when the focus is on the magazine management tile)
Changes the magazine management data to the
editable or non-editable mode. A2
[Edit]/[End Edit]
Searches for a pot or empty pot in the Magazine
Z
Management screen.
Displays the sub-menu to perform search within a
[Search] magazine.
[Reattach]
161
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
(Detach method: detach, temporary detach, hold
detach)
1 [Attach]/
[Detach]
The state of this soft key ([Attach], [Detach], [Hide]) will
vary according to the cursor position and input state of
the tool management number (No.) input box.
2 Moves the tool to another magazine or pot. (*)
[Move]
3 Registers the tool (No.) to the specified pot.
4 [Tool (No.) Register]

Cancels the registered tool (No.).
5
[Tool (No.) Cancel]
6 Registers or cancels storage information for the tool

Displays a sub-menu for registering or canceling
[Register Clear] storage information.
7 Switches the focus to the properties tile when the focus
is on the magazine management tile.
8 [Switch Focus]
A1
[Properties]
A2 First page (when the focus is on the pot properties tile)

editable or non-editable mode.
Z [Edit]/[End Edit]
Displays the properties of the pot preceding the
currently displayed pot.
[Previous Pot]
Displays the properties of the pot following the currently
displayed pot.
[Next Pot]
Displays the deletion confirmation message window.
When you press the [OK] soft key, the currently
displayed pot properties data is deleted.
[Delete]
162
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
[Magazine Properties]
1
[Pot Properties]
2
Switches the focus to the magazine management tile.
3
[Switch Focus]
4
[Properties]
Second page (when the focus is on the magazine management tile)
5
6
[Magazine Properties]
The Pot Properties screen appears. 7
[Pot Properties] 8
Displays the Tool Attach/Detach History screen.
(Displayed only when the option/parameter is enabled)
[Tool Attach]/[Tool
A1
Detach]
(*) Displayed only when the option is enabled A2
Z
163
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 Items on Pot Properties screen (list view)
A B C D E F G
1
2
3
4
5
H
6 Fig. 3.2.5.19 (b) Part Names in the Pot Properties Screen (List View)
7 Table 3.2.5.19 (b) Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
8 A Magazine Displays the magazine management number.
B Pot Displays the pot number.
A1 C Pot Status Displays one of the following pot statuses:

Attach/Detach/Reserve/Occupy/Disable/Close/Not
Attached
A2 D Tool Management
Number
If a tool is registered to the pot, the management
number of the tool is displayed. If not, 0 is displayed.
E Pot Type Enter a tool geometry number (0 to 20, 99).
164
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
F Pot Information 1 Check and edit pot properties data.
#0 -: Pot Usable
L (Locked): Pot Unusable
#1 -: Empty Pot
O (Occupy): Occupied Pot
1
#2 -: Empty Pot
R1 (Reserve1): Reservation 1 Pot 2
#3 -: Empty Pot
R2 (Reserve2): Reservation 2 Pot
#4 -: Empty Pot 3
E (Expect): Not Empty Pot
#5 -: Not Temporarily Detached
TU (Temporary Unmount): Temporarily 4
Detached
#6 -: Not an Invalid Pot
D (Disable): Invalid Pot 5
#7 -: Not a Closed Pot
G Pot Information 2
C (Close): Closed Pot
6
#0 -: With Interference Check
NI (Not Interfering Check): No Interference
Check
7
- Customize 1 to 10 Enter a number between -99999999 and 99999999 in 8
Customize 1 to 10.
H Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen. A1
editable or non-editable mode.
A2
[Edit]/[End Edit]
Displays the Search Pot screen.
Z
[Search Pot]
Displays the sub-menu to initialize the pot properties
data.
[Current Data]: Initializes the selected pot properties
[Delete] data.
[All Data]: Initializes all pot properties data.
Cancels deleting the properties data and closes the
sub-menu.
[Close]
165
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
The following table shows description of messages displayed as guidance

messages.
Table 3.2.5.19 (c) Description of Messages Displayed as Guidance Messages
1 Message description State

Tool Management Magazine: Target magazine management number
Number Pot: Target pot number
2 Tool Management Number: Setting value
Pot Type Magazine: Target magazine management number
Pot: Target pot number
3 Pot Type: Setting value
Pot Information 1 bit 0 Magazine: Target magazine management number
4 Bit 0: Setting value below
• -: Pot Usable
• L: Pot Unusable
5 Pot Information 1 bit 1 Magazine: Target magazine management number
Bit 1: Setting value below
6 • -: Empty Pot
• O: Occupied Pot
7 Pot: Target pot number
• -: Empty Pot
8 • R1: Reservation 1 Pot
A1 Bit 3: Setting value below
• -: Empty Pot
• R2: Reservation 2 Pot
A2 Pot Information 1 bit 4 Magazine: Target magazine management number

Z • -: Empty Pot
• E: Not Empty Pot
• -: Not Temporarily Detached
• TU: Temporarily Detached
• -: Not an Invalid Pot
• D: Invalid Pot
166
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

• -: Not a Closed Pot
• C: Closed Pot 1
Bit 0: Setting value below 2
• -: With Interference Check
• NI: No Interference Check
Pot Information 2 bit 1 Magazine: Target magazine management number 3
• Customized Bit 4
Bit 2: Setting value below 5
• Customized Bit
Pot: Target pot number 6
• Customized Bit
Pot Information 2 bit 4 Magazine: Target magazine management number 7
• Customized Bit 8
Bit 5: Setting value below A1
• Customized Bit
Pot: Target pot number A2
• Customized Bit
Pot Information 2 bit 7 Magazine: Target magazine management number Z
• Customized Bit
Customize 1 Magazine: Target magazine management number
Customize 1: Setting value
167
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

1 Customize 5 Magazine: Target magazine management number






7
3.2.5.20 Changing the settings in the pot properties screen (divided screen
8 view)
3.2.5.20
You can check the pot setting status and change the pot information settings
A1 according to the status. Set a damaged pot, which can be no longer used, to
unusable.
A2 <1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a pot for which you
want to change the properties data settings.
Z <2> Press the [Properties] soft key.
3.2.5.21 Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen (divided screen
view)
You can delete the target pot properties data to clear the information.
3.2.5.21
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a pot for which you
want to delete properties data.
168
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The deletion confirmation message window appears.
1
3.2.5.22 Changing multiple properties data settings in the pot properties

2
screen (list view)
3.2.5.22
Check and edit pot properties data. 3

You can check the setting status of multiple magazines and change the pot
information settings according to the status. Set a damaged pot, which can be no
longer used, to unusable. 4
second page of soft keys. 5
<2> Enter a value in each properties display item. 6
3.2.5.23 Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen (list view) 7
You can delete specific or all pot properties data to clear the information.
3.2.5.23
<1> In the Magazine Management screen, move the cursor to a pot for which you
8
want to delete properties data.
<2> Press the [Pot Properties] soft key on the second page of soft keys. A1
A2
[Current Data]: Delete the selected properties data.
[All Data]: Deletes all properties data. Z
3.2.5.24 Searching magazines/pots in the pot properties screen
Search magazines/pots in the pot properties screen.
3.2.5.24
second page of soft keys.
<2> Press the [Search Pot] soft key.
The Search Pot window appears.
169
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<3> In the Search Pot window, enter a magazine number you want to search for in
"Magazine".
1  • If you press the [OK] soft key in this step, data in the magazine are
searched by the entered query.
MEMO
2 <4> In the Search Pot window, enter a pot number you want to search for in "Pot".
3 If matching description is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding data in
the magazine. If matching description is not found, the message "No Match" is
displayed at the lower part of the [Search] window.
4
5 3.2.6 Basic Operations of the Total Life Data Screen
3.2.6
This screen displays the total life of multiple tools that have the same tool number
6 (T code).
Total life data is displayed for tools either by "count" or "time" counter type.
7 3.2.6.1 Names and functions of each part of total life data screen
3.2.6.1
B
8
A1
A
A2
C
Fig. 3.2.6.1 Name and Function of Each Part on the Total Life Data Screen
170
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Name Description
A [Total Life Data] table Displays life state, maximum life, life counter, and number
of tools for multiple tools that have the same tool number
(T code).
For multi-edge tools, life data retained in edge information
1
is used for Detailed Life Data and Tool Remaining Life.
Displayed name
Sort No.
Description
The number indicating the order of
2
display
T Code The number used to identify the tool 3
Total Remaining Life The total remaining life for the tools
(*1) with the same tool number (T code)
Detailed Life Data Life counter total value/Maximum 4
(*1) life total value
Progress rate of life is shown with a
progress bar and state display. (*2) 5
Progress rate of life is displayed
with a numerical value (0 to 100 %,
rounded to a whole number) 6
(Life counter total value/Maximum
life total value) x 100
Total Life (*3) The total value of the forenoticed 7
life of tools with the same tool type
number
Count The number of tools that have the 8
same tool number (T code)
B Order Shows whether the [Total Life Data] table is displayed in
ascending/descending order and based on which item.
A1
Data can be sorted by tool number ([T Code]) or total
remaining life.
Initially, data is sorted by tool number ([T Code]) in A2
ascending order.
171
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
1 Information Center
Displays the table display screen when pressed.
2
Tool Status screen
3 Displays the Magazine Management screen when

pressed.
4 Magazine
Management screen
5
Total Life Data screen
6 Displays the Select Import/Export Item screen when

pressed.
7 Select Import/Export
Item screen
D Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
8 Searches by the specified tool number (T code).
A1 [Search]
Sorts the displayed total life data.
A2
[Sort]
Changes the type ("count" or "time") of life count.
Z
[Change Tool Type]
Changes the displayed life time to either [Total Remaining
Life] or [Detailed Life Data].
[Remaining Life]/
[Count]
Displays the Detailed Life Data screen.
[Detailed Life Data]
172
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
(*1) The total remaining life and detailed life data are displayed exclusively using the
[Remaining Life]/[Count] soft keys.
(*2) The orange progress bar may not be displayed depending on the state of (*3).
(*3) This may not be displayed depending on the machine settings.
1
The color of the progress bar will change as follows according to the state of the
[Detailed Life Data].
2
Table 3.2.6.1 (b) Life State Indicated by Color of Progress Bar
No. Detailed Life Data Life state 3
Progress Bar
1
2
Gray
Green
Initial value
When the total life counter value is updated (*1)
4
3 Orange When the total life counter value surpasses the [Total
Life] (*2) (*3)
5
4 Red When all tools have no life remaining or was damaged.
(*1) When [Total Life] value < (Total of [Maximum Tool Life] value - Total life counter)
(*2) When [Total Life] value >= (Total of [Maximum Tool Life] value - Total life counter) 6
(*3) May not be displayed depending on the machine settings.
7
3.2.6.2 Displaying the total life data screen
Display the Total Life Data screen.
3.2.6.2
8
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Total Life Data] soft key.
The Total Life Data screen appears. A1
A2
Z
173
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.6.3 Changing the display of life type

On the Total Life Data screen, the [Total Life Data] table displays the total life data
3.2.6.3
of tools either by "count" or "time" counter type.

The type of [Total Life Data] table to be displayed can be switched with the
[Change Tool Type] soft key.
1
Example of displaying total life data of tools by "count" counter type
2
3
4
5
6 Fig. 3.2.6.3 (a) When “Count” Counter Type Is Selected for Display Type
7 Example of displaying total life data of tools by "time" counter type
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 3.2.6.3 (b) When “Time” Counter Type Is Selected for Display Type
174
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• If the life data for tools with the same tool type number contain both
"time" and "count" life counter types, any data to be included in the
total will each be calculated and displayed separately for "time" or
"count".
• [Count] displays the number of all tools with the same tool type 1
number regardless of their tool life state.
• For the total life counter, total remaining life, total maximum life, and
2

NOTE
total life, when data contains time values with units in seconds and
milliseconds for the same tool, time will be displayed in seconds.
Values in milliseconds will be rounded off.
• When the total remaining life is a negative value, it will be displayed as
0.
3
• When the value of the total life counter, total remaining life, total
maximum life, or total life surpasses the maximum displayed value,
asterisks (*) will be displayed.
4
Count: **********
Time: *****H**M**S (in seconds)/**H**M**S*** (in milliseconds)
5
3.2.6.4 Searching by tool number (T code)
3.2.6.4
Perform search by tool number (T code) in the Total Life Data screen.
6
<1> In the Total Life Data screen, press the [Search] soft key. 7
<2> In the [Search] window, enter the tool number (T code).

8
You can only perform search by tool number (T code).
A1
A2
<3> Press the [OK] soft key. Z

If matching description is found, the cursor moves to the corresponding data in
the [Total Life Data] table.
3.2.6.5 Sorting the total life data table

Sort the displayed total life data by one of the following items (Underline: Default).
3.2.6.5
• Item: T Code (Tool Number)/Total Remaining Life

• Description: Ascend/Descend
175
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<1> In the Total Life Data screen, press the [Sort] soft key.
The [Sort] window appears.
<2> Select the item and description.

1
2
3
4 Data in the [Total Life Data] table is sorted, and the "(Sorting Item)/(Order)" is
displayed next to "Order" at the upper part of the screen.
5
 • For multi-edge tools, edge information is sorted in ascending or
descending order for the shortest life data.
6 MEMO
7 Example of total life data displayed in ascending order
8
A1
A2
Z
Example of total life data displayed in descending order
176
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
3.2.6.6 Displaying the detailed life data screen
Display the individual life data for tools with the same tool number (T code). This
5
3.2.6.6
provides a breakdown list of the total life data displayed in the Total Life Data
screen.
6
<1> In the Total Life Data screen, press the [Detailed Life Data] soft key.
The Detailed Life Data screen appears.
7
A
B
A1
C
A2
Z
177
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
A Tool Number (T Code) Displays the tool number (T code) that shows the
breakdown of data in the Detailed Life Data screen.
1 The state display of the progress bar will change according
to the state of the life consumption.
For details on the progress bar, see "3.2.6.1 Names and
2 B [Detailed Life Data]

functions of each part of total life data screen".
Displays the individual life data of tools that have the same
table tool number (T code).
3 For multi-edge tools, life data retained in edge information

is used.
Displayed name Description
4 Order The number indicating the order of

display
* A number is assigned only when
5 there is life remaining; otherwise,

"-" is displayed.
No. Tool Management Number
6 Life Consumption Life counter total value/Maximum

life total value
Progress rate of life is shown with a
7 progress bar and state display.

Progress rate of life is displayed
with a numerical value (0 to 100 %,
8 rounded to a whole number)

(Life counter total value/Maximum
life total value) x 100
A1 Total Life Total value of the forenoticed life
A2
Z
178
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
C Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
2
Tool Status screen
Displays the Magazine Management screen when
pressed.
3
Magazine
Management screen
4
5
Displays the Select Import/Export Item screen when
pressed.
6
Item screen
7
Closes the Detailed Life Data screen and returns to the 8
Total Life Data screen.
[Close] A1
3.2.7 Basic Operation in the Tool Catalog Data Manage- A2
ment Screen
Z
3.2.7
It allows you to select a tool from the tool list and check the tool catalog data and
tool image.
In this screen, you can check and set catalog data as well as reflect the set data to
the information (NC tool database) of the tool attached to the NC.
179
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.7.1 Part names and functions in the tool catalog data management screen
3.2.7.1
B C D
1
2
3 A I
E
4
5 J
F G
H
6 Fig. 3.2.7.1 Part Names in the Catalog Data Screen
7 Table 3.2.7.1 Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
8 A Tool list Displays the catalog number in the base (parent node) in
tree structure.
If Tool Name is set for the tool, the tool name is enclosed in
A1 double quotation marks.
Tool components, such as tool parts and holder parts, and
cutting conditions are displayed in a child node in the "icon
A2 + name" format.
Up to nine tool parts and six holder parts can be set.
Part Icon
Z Tool Part Varies depending on the tool type
See "3.2.1.5 Tool geometry
dimension data that can be set".
Holder Part
Conditions
180
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
B Tool catalog data Displays item data described in "Table 3.2.1.1 (b) Tool
Information Used in NC Tool Database".
Different data are displayed depending on the cursor
selection on the tool list as follows.
Up to ten types of cutting condition information can be set 1
for each tool.
Catalog No.
Part Display data
Basic information, geometry
2
information
Tool Part Part information (tool)
3
Holder Part Part information (holder)
Conditions Cutting condition information
C Tool image preview Displays the image of the set tool. 4
D Filter Displays filtered target items.
E Tool data information

Items are filtered by the tool type.
The destination tool data information is displayed.
5
Displayed items are as follows:
• Tool Name
• Tool Type 6
• Path
• Optional Group Number
• Group Number 7
• Tool No.
• Tool Offset Number
• Tool Attach Position
• Imaginary Tool Tip
8
* Display items are different depending on the machine
F Edit state icon

configuration or settings.
Displays the icon showing the state of the data editable
A1
mode.
Icon State A2
Data Editable Data can be edited.
G Inch/mm Icon Displays an icon that indicates inch/mm of the displayed Z

path.
Icon State
H Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
Changes the catalog data to the editable/non-editable
mode.
[Edit]/[End Edit] configuration and settings.
181
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Searches for tools that match the search conditions and
places the cursor on the tool list.
1 [Search]
Displays the Filter screen window. Performs or cancels
filtering by the selected items on the catalog data.
2 [Filter]/[Cancel Filter]
Sets the selected catalog data as data to be referenced
3 when it is imported to the NC tool database. If already set,

the settings will be reset.(*1)
[Select]
4 Moves the selection focus between the tool list and tool
data.
5 [Switch Focus]
Information in the tool catalog database is reflected to the
selected tool in the tool database.
6 [Reflect Data]
Imports necessary tools from the tool data file (zip file).
7
[Import Data]
Add a tool or part (tool part or holder part).(*2)
8
[Add]
A1 Delete a tool or part (tool part, holder part, or cutting
condition).(*2)
A2 [Delete]
When the catalog data to be referenced was set or
Z [Close]
changed, or catalog data was edited, catalog data can be
reflected to the NC tool database.
I Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
Tool Status screen
182
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
Displays the Magazine Management screen when
pressed.
Magazine
Management screen 1
2
pressed.
3
Item screen 4
J Guide Message Displays descriptions for operation or warning messages.
(*1) When there is no data to be displayed in the tool data table, the soft key is grayed
out and cannot be operated. Not displayed during the editable mode.
5
(*2) Displayed only during the editable mode
6
• The cutting conditions can be hidden.
 For details, see " Soft key/cutting condition display settings - User 7
customization setting file" in "3.2.2.2 Part names and functions in
MEMO
the table display screen".
8
3.2.7.2 Displaying the tool catalog data management screen
3.2.7.2
Display the tool catalog data management screen. A1

<1> In the table display screen, press the [Catalog Data] soft key.
The tool catalog data management screen is displayed.
A2
Z
 Switch the number of lines to display tool names

Display the tool name shown in the tool list in one or two lines.
183
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2 1 line display 2 line display
Fig. 3.2.7.2 Switching the Number of Lines to Display Tool Names

3
To switch the display, press one of the following soft keys in the second page of
soft keys for the tool catalog data screen.
4
Table 3.2.7.2 Soft Keys to Switch the Number of Lines to Display Tool Names
5 Name Description
[Show tree of strings] Displays the tool name in two lines.
6 [Hide tree of strings] Displays the tool name in one line.
7  • Strings that cannot be displayed are shown abbreviated as “...”.

MEMO
8
3.2.7.3 Adding catalog data (tool)
A1 You can add catalog data (tool).

3.2.7.3
<1> In the tool catalog data management screen, move the cursor to the tool list.
A2 If the cursor is on tool catalog data, press the [Switch Focus] soft key to move
the cursor to the tool list.
Z <2> Press the [Edit] soft key.

The screen enters the editable mode, showing the [Data Editable] icon at the
<3> In the tool catalog data management screen, press the [Add] soft key.
184
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<4> Press the [Tool] soft key.

The [Add Tool] window appears.
1
<5> In the [Tool Add] window, enter the catalog number to which you want to add a
tool.
2
3
In the [Catalog No.] field, the lowest catalog number allowed to be entered will 4
be filled in as the default value.
<6> To add the catalog data (tool), press the [OK] soft key.
When finished, the tool (comprising Tool Part, Holder Part, and Conditions) will
5
be added to the tool list.
If the catalog number of the tool to be added is already used or the input
catalog number is out of range, an error message appears. 6
The screen enters the non-editable mode, hiding the [Data Editable] icon at the 7
8
3.2.7.4 Adding catalog data (part)
You can add catalog data (part).
3.2.7.4
A1
<1> In the tool list, move the cursor to a tool to which you want to add a part.
If the cursor is on catalog data, press the [Switch Focus] soft key to move the
cursor to the tool list.
A2
Z
<3> In the tool catalog data management screen, press the [Add] soft key.
185
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<4> To add a tool part, press the [Tool Part] soft key.
To add a holder part, press the [Holder Part] soft key.
1 When finished, the tool part or holder part has been added to the tool list.
If the maximum number of parts to be added (tool part: 9, holder part: 6) is
2 exceeded, an error message appears.
3 3.2.7.5 Editing catalog data

You can edit catalog data.
3.2.7.5
4 <1> In the tool list, move the cursor to a tool for which you want to edit data.
5 cursor to the tool list.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z <2> Press the [Edit] soft key.
186
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<3> Move the cursor to a part containing data you want to edit and press the
[Switch Focus] soft key to move the focus to catalog data.
1
2
3
4
5
<4> Move the cursor to the data to edit. 6
<5> Edit the data.
7
3.2.7.6 Copying and pasting catalog data
In the editable mode, catalog data can be copied and pasted.
8
3.2.7.6
<1> In the catalog data screen, press the [Edit] soft key to enter the editable mode.
A1
MEMO
or settings. A2
<2> Move the cursor to the catalog number to copy. Z

<4> Press the [Paste] soft key.

The paste destination number input window appears.
187
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

The paste confirmation window appears.
1
2
3 If the entered catalog number is newly added, and the catalog data is added to
the group.
4
 • The copy buffer is cleared at the following timings:
When pressing the End Edit key
5 MEMO
6 3.2.7.7
3.2.7.7
Setting tool parts image/holder image pictures
Image pictures can be set for tool data in tools and holders in the tool list on the
catalog data screen. The image you set will be displayed as a tool image preview.
7
<1> In the catalog data screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
8 <2> Move the cursor to the tool or holder parts image and edit it.
Image files are listed in the Select Image window.
A1
A2
Z
The file name of the selected image file is reflected to the tool parts image or
holder image of the tool data, and the selected image is displayed in the tool
image preview.
188
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • To cancel a tool parts image or holder image that was already set,
select [No Image] in the image selection window and press the [OK]
MEMO soft key.
1
 Setting image pictures for external reference folder
For details, see " Setting image pictures for external reference folder" of "3.2.3.8
Setting image pictures for tool/holder parts".
2
 Saving images 3
Save images in a USB flash drive or memory card and insert it into the device.
The conditions for images that can be used are as follows:
• File name: Up to 32 characters
4
• File format: PNG
5

NOTE
• Image data that include an alpha channel or images with a bit depth of
32 bit or above may not be displayed. 6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
189
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.7.8 Entering equations

Equations for tool data can be entered.
3.2.7.8
<1> In the catalog data screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
1 <2> Move the cursor to the tool data for which you want to enter the equation.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The following table shows the tool data items and ranges for which you can
enter equations on the catalog data screen.
A1
A2 Catalog Data Machining Diameter 0.000 to 999999.999
screen/Figure Part Diameter
information
Z Base Total Length
Maximum Cut
Tool Protrusion Length
190
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Catalog data Cut Edge Length 0.000 to 999999.999
screen/Part Available Length
information (tool)
Chamfering Height
Machining Diameter 1
Screw Thread Pitch
Screw Part Length
Screw Part Diameter
2
Function Length
Total Length 3
Nose Angle -999999.999 to 999999.999
Taper Angle
Max. Cut Depth 0.000 to 999999.999
4
Inscribed Circle Diameter
Corner R -999999.999 to 999999.999 5
Main Clearance Angle
Tip Width
Tip Thickness
0.000 to 999999.999
6
Min. Cut Width
Contact Surface Diameter 7
Neck Diameter
Protruding Length
Tip Diameter
8
Thread Part Inner Diameter 0.000 to 999999.999
A1
A2
Z
191
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Catalog data Part Diameter 0.000 to 999999.999
screen/Part Shank Width
information
Shank Height
1 (holder)
Total Length
Machining Diameter
2 Max. Machining Diameter

Max. Cut Depth
Max. Cutting Width
3 Min. Cutting Width
Cutting Width
4 Cutting Angle
Function Height
-999999.999 to 999999.999
0.000 to 999999.999
Function Width
5 Head Length
Function Length
6 Shank Diameter
Contact Surface Diameter
(Machine)
7 Contact Surface Diameter
(Workpiece)
Contact Surface Diameter
8 Catalog data Spindle Speed (S) 0 to 99999
screen/Conditions Feedrate (F) 0 to 99999999
A1 Cutting Speed
Cut Depth
0.000 to 999999.999
Cut Width
A2
Z <4> Press <CALC>.

NOTE
entering equations, the calculation will not be performed.
item, the equation will be cleared, and the value before you entered
the equation will be displayed.
192
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
 • For operators, symbols, and functions that can be used in equations,

see " Operators, symbols, and functions allowed in equations".
MEMO
1
3.2.7.9 Deleting catalog data
You can delete catalog data.
2
3.2.7.9
<1> In the tool list, move the cursor to a tool for which you want to delete data.
If the cursor is on catalog data, press the [Switch Focus] soft key to move the 3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
The screen enters the editable mode, showing the [Data Editable] icon at the A2
Z
193
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
The tool or part in the tool list is deleted.

If you try to delete data when there is only one tool part or holder part, an error
message appears.
If you delete a cutting condition, the target cutting condition data is initialized.
1
3.2.7.10 Deleting all catalog data
You can delete all catalog data.
3.2.7.10
2
3 If the cursor is on catalog data, press the [Switch Focus] soft key to move the
4 The screen enters the editable mode, showing the [Data Editable] icon at the
5 <3> Press the [Delete] soft key.

6
7 <4> Press the [All Data] soft key.
The delete confirmation message appears.
8
A1 <5> To delete all data, press the [OK] soft key.
A2 3.2.7.11 Importing catalog data

You can save the tool data output from Machining Cloud App to USB or memory
3.2.7.11
card and import it as tool catalog data. For data that can be imported as tool
Z catalog data, see "Appendix A.3.6 Data That Can Be Imported as Tool Catalog
Data".
194
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
<3> Press the [Import Data] soft key. 5
The Import Data Wizard screen appears.
6
7
8
A1
A2
<4> Select the folder where the tool data file is stored and select the data file to Z
import from the tool data file list.
<5> Press the [Next] soft key.
The tool data list is displayed.
195
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
<6> Select the tool data to import.
5
6
7 [Select]/[Cancel Select] Selects the tool at the cursor position. Deselects the
selected item.
8 [Select All]
[Cancel All]
Sets all tools in the selected state.
Sets all tools in the deselected state.
A1 • When the number of tool data to be imported exceeds the number
A2  of empty catalog tool data, the number of tool data that will be
selected and imported is equal to the number of empty catalog tool
MEMO data slots from the top. Any tool data beyond that will be
deselected.
Z
A screen to enter the first catalog number to be imported appears.
196
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
<8> Enter the first catalog number to be imported and press the [Next] soft key.
The catalog number for the tool data that has been imported is displayed. 5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z

NOTE
• When you import tool data, if the name of the image file already
exists, the file will be overwritten.
197
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• Tool data is imported starting from the first catalog number in

ascending order until all empty catalog numbers are used up.
When the catalog number reaches 99,999, tool data is imported
1 starting from No. 1 in ascending order until all empty catalog

numbers are used up.
• When the imported tool data cannot fit into a single screen, press
the [Next Page] soft key to display the list of the next catalog
2 numbers.
• Any tool data for which the tool data list is imported will have an
icon displayed in front of its catalog number. This icon will be
3 displayed until you close the tool catalog data management
screen.
4 
MEMO
5
6
7
8
A1 <9> Press the [End Edit] soft key.
A2 3.2.7.12 Setting catalog data to be referenced

When the tool management function is enabled, you can set the cutting conditions
3.2.7.12
Z for catalog data to be referenced from the tool data list.
<1> Move the cursor to the catalog number for the tool that has the catalog data to
be referenced when data is imported to the NC tool database.
198
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> Press the [Select] soft key.
is displayed next to the tool's catalog number set as reference data, and
is displayed for the tool part and holder part for which data will be reflected
into the NC tool database.
When multiple tool parts and holder parts exist, is displayed for the first tool 1
part and holder part.
<3> Move the cursor to a cutting condition in the tool list and press the [Switch
Focus] soft key.
2
<4> Move the cursor to the table column of the cutting condition number you want
to refer to and press the [Select] soft key. 3
is displayed next to the cutting condition number set as reference data.
Additionally, is displayed next to the cutting condition part. 4
5
6
 • Steps 3 and 4 are not required if you do not want the cutting
condition reflected into the NC tool database. 7
MEMO
3.2.7.13 Canceling/changing the setting for catalog data to be referenced

8
You can cancel the cutting condition settings for the catalog data to be referenced.
3.2.7.13
You can also change the catalog data to be referenced. A1

A2
<2> Move the cursor to the table column of the catalog number or cutting condition Z
number with displayed.
<3> Press the [Select] soft key to cancel the state set as reference data.
If you move the cursor to a catalog number different from the one with
displayed and press the [Select] soft key, you can change the catalog data to
be referenced. If the reference cutting condition number is already set, it will
reset.
199
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.7.14 Reflecting catalog data to NC tool database

You can reflect the dimension data and cutting conditions in the tool catalog data
3.2.7.14
into the NC tool database. For the content of the source and destination data, see
"Appendix A.3.4 About Reflecting Tool Catalog Data into the NC Tool Database".
1 <1> In the tool catalog data management screen, move the cursor to the tool list.
2 <2> Press the [Reflect Data] soft key.
A confirmation window appears asking whether or not to reflect the catalog
3 data set as reference data to the NC tool database.
You can also reflect catalog data by setting and changing reference data and
then pressing the [Close] soft key.
4 <3> To reflect the data to the NC tool database, press the [OK] soft key.
Catalog data with or displayed is reflected to the NC tool database,

5 and the completion message appears.
• If you do not want to reflect the data, press the [Cancel] soft key.
6  • Catalog data will only be reflected for the tool selected in the table
display screen.
MEMO • If data that cannot be reflected is detected, the error target and
7 reason are listed along with an error message.
8 3.2.7.15 Searching for catalog data

You can search for catalog data.
3.2.7.15
A1 <1> In the tool catalog data management screen, move the cursor to the tool list.
A2 cursor to the tool list.
<2> Press the [Search] soft key.
Z
200
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
4
<3> In the [Search] window, select "Items" and enter "Description". 5

You can select Catalog No. or Tool Name.
6
7
8
 symbol (*).
• When you select "Tool Name" and perform search without entering
A1
MEMO "Description", the system will search for the tool data having tool
names.
A2
If matching description is found, the cursor on the tool list moves to the
corresponding tool.
Z

Soft keys Search range Search range
range)
[Previous Before the current cursor From the end to the cursor position
Direction] position
[Next After the current cursor From the beginning to the cursor position
Direction] position
201
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
When a search for the target tool data is finished, press the [Cancel] soft key.
3.2.7.16 Setting filters for catalog data

Performs or cancels filtering by the selected items on the catalog data.
3.2.7.16
1 <1> Press the [Filter] soft key on the tool catalog data management screen.
2 <2> Select "Description" of the tool type to execute filtering.
3
4
The cursor will move to the head of the tool list to start filtering.
• If matching description is found, filtering is performed on the applicable tool
6 list, and the "type" is displayed at the "filter" in the upper part of the screen.
• If matching description is not found, the message "No Data" is displayed at
7 the lower part of the Filter window.
To cancel filtering, press the [Cancel Filter] soft key.
8 3.2.7.17 Output tool data that can be imported in tool manager

Use Machining Cloud App to select and assemble the tool to be used in
3.2.7.17
machining, and to output the tool data from the tool part data stored by the tool
A1 manufacturer. Machining Cloud App is a free software that can be downloaded
from the internet and used in PC and tablet devices. For how to use Machining
Cloud App, check the manual for the application. To output tool data after the tool
A2 to be used for machining is assembled, follow the procedure below.
<1> Select [Job Export] in Job Management.

Z Displays the cloud partner selection screen.
<2> Select [CUSTOM EXPORT].
The screen to select the type of output data is displayed.
<3> Place a check mark in [3D Rendered Model Image] of the tool assembly and
[Product Image (individual item)] of the tool item.
<4> Select “Export”.
Tool data (zip file) is output to the specified folder.
 • For how to import output data from the Tool Manager, see "3.2.7.11
Importing catalog data".
MEMO
202
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.8 Basic Operation in the Large Tool Geometry Set-

tings Screen
3.2.8
You can select the large tool geometry number to be set to the tool in the Large
Tool Geometry Settings screen and edit the large tool geometry data.
The Large Tool Geometry Settings screen can be displayed from the table display 1
screen or Individual Tool Settings screen.
For details on how to display the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen from the
table display screen, see "3.2.2.14 Displaying the large tool geometry settings 2
screen". For details on how to display the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen
from the Individual Tool Settings screen, see "3.2.3.11 Displaying the large tool
geometry settings screen". 3
3.2.8.1 Part names and functions in the large tool geometry settings screen 4
The display of the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen will vary according to the
3.2.8.1
magazine type (matrix or chain).

5
 For magazine type "matrix"
In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, you can enter the area occupied by
the tool in the magazine.
6
The occupied area you entered will be displayed and can be checked in the large
tool geometry preview. The area occupied by the tool is shown in reference to the
center single pot on a 5 x 5 or 7 x 7 pot grid.
7
B C
8
E A1
A A2
Z
Fig. 3.2.8.1 (a) Name of Each Part on the Large Tool Geometry Settings Screen
(5 x 5 Pot Grid)
203
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Name Description
A Large tool geometry list Displays eight lines of geometry data on the screen
regardless of the display unit size.
1 B Geometry edit table Displays the geometry edit table for the large tool geometry
number that corresponds to the position of the cursor in the
large tool geometry list.
2 Values (integers from 0 to 4 or 0 to 6) for the occupied area
(left, right, up, down) on the pot can be entered. A value of
"1" for the occupied area corresponds to 0.5 of a pot.
3 C Large tool geometry

Select the geometry with the combo box (A, B).
Displays the reference pot (in blue) and the area the tool
preview occupies (in yellow) on a 5 x 5 or 7 x 7 pot grid.(*1)
4 The way pots are handled in the large tool geometry

preview based on the input values is as follows.
5
6
7
8 D Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
A1
[Cancel]
A2 Selects or cancels the selection of the large tool geometry

number that corresponds to the cursor position. Deselects
the selected item.
[Select]/[Cancel Select]
Z Searches for the large tool geometry number.
[No. Search]
204
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
E Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
2
Tool Status screen
Magazine
Management screen
4
5
pressed.
6
Item screen
7
(*1) The display of the large tool geometry preview will vary according to the occupied
area value. 8
• Values in the large tool geometry list will not be updated at the point
when the large tool geometry data is changed in the background while
A1
the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen is being displayed.
 • When the value entered into the geometry edit table is within the
allowed input range, the entered value will be reflected to the NC tool A2
MEMO
database. However, if the entered value is outside of the allowed input
range, the entered value will not be confirmed and returns back to the
value prior to input. Z
 For magazine type "chain"

In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, you can enter the area occupied by
the tool in the magazine.
205
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1 D
2 A
3
4
5 C
Fig. 3.2.8.1 (b) Name of Each Part on the Large Tool Geometry Settings Screen
6 (Magazine Type: Chain)
7 Table 3.2.8.1 (b) Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
8 A Large tool geometry list Displays eight lines of geometry data on the screen
regardless of the display unit size.
B Geometry edit table Displays the geometry edit table for the large tool geometry
A1 number that corresponds to the position of the cursor in the
large tool geometry list.
Values (integers from 0 to 4 or 0 to 6) for the occupied area
A2 (left, right) on the pot can be entered. A value of "1" for the
occupied area corresponds to 0.5 of a pot.
C Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
Z The window will be closed.
[Cancel]
Selects or cancels the selection of the large tool geometry
number that corresponds to the cursor position. Deselects
the selected item.
Searches for the large tool geometry number.
[No. Search]
206
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
D Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
2
Tool Status screen
Magazine
Management screen
4
5
pressed.
6
Item screen
7
• Values in the large tool geometry list will not be updated at the point
8
when the large tool geometry data is changed in the background while
the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen is being displayed.
• When the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen is being displayed A1
and when the application is restarted while this screen is being
displayed, the large tool geometry data will be obtained from the NC
 tool database to display the values on the screen. A2
• When the value entered into the geometry edit table is within the
MEMO
allowed input range, the entered value will be reflected to the NC tool
database.
• However, if the entered value is outside of the allowed input range, an
Z
operation warning message appears, and the value entered into the
geometry edit table will not be confirmed returning to the value prior to
input.
3.2.8.2 Setting the occupied area

Set the occupied area for each large tool geometry number.
3.2.8.2
<1> Move the cursor in the large tool geometry list to the large tool geometry
number that you want to enter.
207
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<2> Enter a value in the occupied area column in the geometry edit table using the
MDI keys.
<3> Press <INPUT>.
3.2.8.3 Setting the geometry

1 3.2.8.3
In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen (magazine type: matrix), set the
geometry for each large tool geometry number.
2
<1> Move the cursor in the large tool geometry list to the large tool geometry
number that you want to set.
3 <2> Select a geometry from the combo box in the geometry column in the geometry
edit table using the MDI keys.
4 <3> Press <INPUT>.
5  • For a touch panel, tap the combo box in the geometry column to
select the geometry to be displayed.
MEMO
6
3.2.8.4 Selecting the large tool geometry number
7 Select the large tool geometry number for the tool.

3.2.8.4
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
8 <2> Move the cursor to the large tool geometry number in the tool data and then
select the large tool geometry number with the MDI keys.
A1
 • In the case of a touch panel, you can directly tap the large tool
geometry number to select it.
A2 MEMO
Z <3> In the Large Tool Geometry Settings screen, move the cursor to the large tool
geometry number you want to set.
The selected large tool geometry number will be reflected to the large tool
geometry number in the tool data.
 • Pressing the [Cancel Select] soft key cancels the selection of the
large tool geometry number.
MEMO
208
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.9 Importing/Exporting Tool Data

3.2.9
You can import or export tool data.

You can create the export data and deploy it to the same or another machine.
3.2.9.1 Displaying the select import/export item screen

1
Select the item to import or export.
3.2.9.1
2
<1> In the table display screen, press the vertical soft key for the Select Import/
Export Item screen.
The Select Import/Export Item screen appears. 3
3.2.9.2 Name and function of each part on the select import/export item 4
screen
5
3.2.9.2
6
A
7
8
A1
B
A2
Fig. 3.2.9.2 Name of Each Part on the Select Import/Export Item Screen
Z
209
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Table 3.2.9.2 Name and Function of Each Part

Name Description
A Item Displays the items to be imported or exported.
Tool Data (All) Imports/exports all tool management data, tool life data,
1 offset data, tool geometry dimension data, or customized
data at once.
Tool Data (Individual) Select and import/export each tool data.
2 However, this item is not displayed if there is no data to
import/export.
Machine Collision Exports tool information files that can be used for the
3 Avoidance Function machine collision avoidance function.
Tool Data This item is not displayed if the machine collision avoidance
function is disabled.
4 B Horizontal soft keys Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen.
Display the screen to import the selected item.
However, this item is not displayed if "Machine Collision
5 Avoidance Function Tool Data" is selected.
[Import]
Display the screen to export the selected item.
6
[Export]
7
3.2.9.3 Name and function of each part on the tool import/export screen
8
3.2.9.3
B A
A1
C
A2 D
G
Z
E
Fig. 3.2.9.3 Name of Each Part of the Select Import/Export Screen
210
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Name Description
A Mode check display Displayed when the [Import] or [Export] soft key is pressed
in the Select Import/Export Item screen.
B Target display Displays All Paths or Selected Path as the import or export
target.
1
C Folder path display Displays the folder path selected in the Select Folder
window that appears when you press the [Select Folder]
soft key. When an external device (USB flash drive or
2
memory card) is inserted while the screen is displayed, the
root directory of the connected external device will be
displayed (when multiple device types are connected, the
3
USB flash drive will take priority).
D Data Selection List Displays the data selection list for the target data to be
imported/exported. Select the target data by placing a
4
check mark in the appropriate check box.
<Tool Manager Unique Data>
When "Tool Manager Unique Data" is selected, if a multi- 5
edge tool exists, the following process is executed for
import/export.
• Import: Imports the tool data including tool information 6
and edge information if a multi-edge tool is included in the
"Tool Manager Unique Data" file.
• Export: Exports the tool information of the multi-edge tool
and the tool data including edge information to the "Tool
7
Manager Unique Data" file.
<Tool Attach/Detach History Data (CSV)>

8
When "Tool Attach/Detach History Data (CSV)" is selected,
if a multi-edge tool exists in the tool attach/detach histories,
the following process is executed for each export. A1
• Exports: Exports the history information of normal tools
and the history information of multi-edge tools to the "Tool
Attach/Detach History Data (CSV)" file. A2
E Tool tip display Displays a file name with the cursor in with the tool tip when
the trailing characters of the file name on the screen are
replaced by "..." because the name is too long. Z
211
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
F Horizontal soft keys Displays the soft keys used for operating this screen.
1 [Select Folder]
Selects or cancels selection of the data that corresponds to
2 the cursor position.
3 Selects all data displayed.
4 [Select All]
Cancels selection of all data displayed.
5 [Cancel All]
Executes import or export.
6
[Execute]
7 Returns to the Select Import/Export Item screen.
8 [Back]
A1
A2
Z
212
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Description
G Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Information Center
1
2
Tool Status screen
Magazine
Management screen
4
5
pressed.
6
Item screen
7
Table 3.2.9.3 (b) Data Selection List 8

No. Data name Tool function
Life Management Others A1
Import Export Import Export Import Export
1
2
Tool Manager Unique Data
Tool management: All tool
○
○
○
○
○
-
○
-
○
-
○
-
A2
management data
3 Tool management: All customized
data
○ ○ - - - - Z
4 Tool Life Management Data - - ○ ○ - -
5 Tool Offset Amount (Offset Data) - - ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Tool Geometry Dimension Data - - ○ ○ ○ ○
7 2nd Geometry Tool Offset      
8 Tool Attach/Detach History Data (*1) -  - - - -
9 Tool Attach History Data (*1) -  - - - -
10 Tool Detach History Data (*1) -  - - - -
Legend ○: Available, : Only available when the specific option/parameter is enabled,
-: Not available
213
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
(*1) Displayed as an option only when the parameter "tool attach/detach management
function" is enabled
3.2.9.4 Importing/exporting all tool data
1 Import/export all tool information data at once.

3.2.9.4
<1> Press the [All Paths] or [Selected Path] soft key.

2 If the file name contains more than 28 characters when switching from
Selected Path to All Paths, a message appears to indicate that the 29th and
subsequent characters are deleted.
3
<2> Press the [Select Folder] soft key.
4 The Select Folder window appears.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2 <3> Select the import/export source folder and press the [OK] soft key.
<4> From the data selection list, select the data to import/export.
Z For import, select the target file name from the path set in Select Folder.
For export, edit the file name using the keys.
<5> Press the [Execute] soft key.
The import/export starts. When the process is finished, a window where you
can check the results will appear.
<6> When the import/export is completed, check the results in the check results
window.
The results of the import/export will be displayed.
214
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.9.5 Importing/exporting tool manager unique data that contains iCAP T

tool data
<1> In the Import/Export screen, press the [Select Folder] soft key.
The Select Folder window appears. (See step <2> in "3.2.9.4 Importing/
exporting all tool data".) 1
<2> Select the import/export source folder and press the [OK] soft key.
<3> From the data selection list, select the data to import/export. 2
For import, select the target file name from the path set in Select Folder.
For export, edit the file name using the keys.
<4> In the data selection list, move the cursor to "Tool Manager Unique Data" and 3
press the [Select All] soft key.
When Tool Manager Unique Data is selected, Tool geometry dimension data is
also selected.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
• To import/export iCAP T tool data, both tool manager unique data and

NOTE
tool geometry dimension data must be imported/exported.
• When iCAP T tool data is enabled, if one of the above data is
Z
selected, the other is automatically selected as well.
215
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.9.6 Exporting machine collision avoidance function tool data

You can export machine collision avoidance function tool data in the Select Import/
3.2.9.5
Export Item screen.
1 <1> In the Select Import/Export Item screen, move the cursor to the export machine
collision avoidance function tool data item.
The Machine Collision Avoidance Function Tool Data Export window appears.
2 <2> Enter a file name to output.
3 • The file name "ToolData.tls" used for the machine collision

avoidance function is displayed by default.
• If the file name extension is not ".tls", ".tls" is added to the output
4 file name.
• If the file name contains \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |, an error message is
 displayed.
5 MEMO
• The TLS file is output to the following folder. If this folder does not
exist, it is created before the file is output.
PANEL iH Pro (HDD equipped version):
6 D:\FANUC\iHMI\User\ToolManager
PANEL iH Pro (SSD equipped version):
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\User\ToolManager
7
8 When the data is successfully exported, the destination folder where the TLS
file is output is displayed in the check results window.
If the target data does not exist or the export file fails to be written, an error
message is displayed in the check results window.
A1 <4> Check the export results and press the [OK] soft key.
A2  When failing to export machine collision avoidance function tool data

If machine collision avoidance function tool data fails to be exported due to illegal
Z data or a system error, the item where the error was detected and the detailed
error reason are displayed in the check results window.
If you correct the failed item by filtering, you can export the data again.
216
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
1
2
3
Fig. 3.2.9.6 Machine Collision Avoidance Function Tool Data Export Window
4
(Error)
<1> Press the [Filter] soft key. 5
Perform filtering.
6
<3> Correct the failed item and export the data again.
7
3.2.9.7 Outputting a tool information file
Generates tool information files (TLS files) from the tool information on tool
3.2.9.6
manager that can be used for the machine collision avoidance function. See 8
"Appendix A.3.5 About the Tool Information Used in the Machine Collision
Avoidance Function" for information on whether reference of information or input
of data is required or not when a TLS file is output. A1
<1> In the table display screen, press the [Export Tool Data] soft key.
A2
A message appears on the tool information export result window appears
depending on the result.
<2> Edit the name of the output file and press the [OK] soft key. Z
A message appears on the tool information export result window appears
depending on the result.
When data is successfully exported, the destination folder where the TLS file is
output is also displayed in this window.
217
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
The following table shows the messages displayed as results for exporting tool
information.
Condition Message
1 When the TLS file was successfully output The TLS file was successfully output.
When the TLS file names are overlapping Overwrite the TLS file?
*Press the [OK] soft key to continue the
2 process.
When the TLS file could not be overwritten. Could not overwrite TLS file.
Change file name.
3 When the TLS file names are overlapping, The TLS file is locked because the machine
and the machine collision avoidance collision avoidance function is in operation.
function is in operation
4 When the export destination folder does not Export destination folder does not exist.
exist or the folder name is too long
When the name of the TLS file to be output Name is not input.
5 is not entered
When the file name contains \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, This is a prohibited character.
>, or |.
6 When the TLS file was not successfully Could not export.
written.
7 The cause of this error will be displayed as

an error code at the end. Details of error
codes are as follows:
8
A1
A2
Z
218
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• The file name initially displayed is the file name (ToolData.tls) used
by the machine collision avoidance function.
• If the end of the file name is other than ".tls", the string ".tls" will be
added to the output file name. Additionally, if the file name contains
\, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |, an error message is displayed. 1
• The file is output to the same folder as the file that is set as “TLS
file to be used in machine collision avoidance” in the registry. If the
TLS file has never been saved with machine collision avoidance 2
function, the following output destination folder will be used to
output the TLS file. Additionally, a folder is created if it does not
exist. 3
Device Export destination folder
PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\User\ToolManager
(HDD
4
equipped
version)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\User\ToolManager
5
 (SSD
MEMO equipped
version) 6
• When a TLS file is output with this function, the setting value in the
TLS file for machine collision avoidance that is defined in the
registry is also overwritten. The output TLS file is displayed when
7
the machine collision avoidance function is activated next time.
• This function can be used when the machine collision avoidance
function is enabled.
8
• Data from the old version of the tool catalog database cannot be
output.
• This function supports inputting tool information in the machine A1
collision avoidance function by converting the tool information that
is saved in the tool manager function. Information that can only be
set in the machine collision avoidance function is not set. Set the A2
machine collision avoidance function as required.
• When tool information with the same tool number (T code) exists,
the tool information with a smaller tool management number or
group number is output to the TLS file.
Z
219
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.9.8 Import/export data

For import/export data, check the target data type, output range and format for
3.2.9.7
export, and operation conditions for import.

There are two major types of information that will be obtained as export data: CNC
data and Tool Manager specific data.
1
• You can enter up to 32 characters (excluding the file extension) for the
2 import/export file name.
• File extensions for multi-path are fixed. (Example: ".P-2", ".P-3", ...
 ".P10", ".P11" ...)
3 MEMO
• The reference destination for CNC data import/export is determined
according to the parameters.
• Some items may not be processed upon import/export depending on
the machine configuration.
4
 Data output range and format for export
5 Export output ranges and formats for each tool function are as follows:
6 Table 3.2.9.7 (a) Export Data Output Range

No. Operation conditions
7 1 Export will be performed for the tool information for the tool set count (tool function:
Management).
2 Data for all tools that were set will be exported. (tool function: Life).
8 3 Export will be performed for 1000 set of tools (tool function: Disable).
CNC data will be output in ".txt" format. Tool Manager specific data will be output
A1 in ".xml" format.
A2  Import operation conditions

Import is performed according to the following operation conditions.
Z Table 3.2.9.7 (b) Import Operation Condition List

No. Operation conditions Tool function Note
Stan Life Man
dard age
ment
1 When tool functions are identical ○ ○ ○ Since the structure of the tool
database will vary among
each tool function, import is
allowed only when tool
functions of the import targets
are identical.
220
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
No. Operation conditions Tool function Note

Stan Life Man
dard age
ment
2
3
When tool set counts are identical
When path counts, group count
-
- ○
- ○
-
This applies to an import
operation for tool machines
1
upper limit for each path, and tool with identical configurations.
set counts within the group are
identical
2
4 When path counts are identical ○ - -
5 When the program coordinate ○ - - 3
switching settings are identical
6 When database versions are ○ ○ ○ When the database versions
identical are different, and the import 4
fails, columns that do not
change between those
versions will be the import
target.
5
6

NOTE
• If an error occurs during import, the process will stop immediately. In
such a case, use the data that you have exported beforehand to
perform the import and restore all data.
7
 Import/export target data
You can import or export Tool Manager unique data, which can be configured only
8
on the iHMI Tool Manager, and CNC tool data, which can be configured even on
the CNC without iHMI.
The details of the target tool data files and data are as follows:
A1
Table 3.2.9.7 (c) Used Tool Data Files A2
No. Data file type Attribute Default file File Note
name extensi
on Z
1 Tool Manager System TOOL_DATA XML • All only
Unique Data common
2 Tool management: Path AL_TLMGR TXT • All only
All tool management type • Only when the tool
data management function is
enabled
• Including No. 5 to 8 data
221
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

name extensi
on
3 Tool management: System AL_TLCSM TXT • All only
1 All customized data common • Only when the tool

enabled
• Including No. 10 to 13
2 data
4 Tool Life Path TOOLLIFE TXT • All only
Management Data type P- • Only when the tool life
3 2,..,P10 management function is
enabled
5 Magazine Properties System MAG_PRTY TXT • Individual only
4 Data common • Only when the tool
enabled
5 6 Pot Properties Data System POT_PRTY TXT • Individual only
common • Only when the tool
6 enabled
7 Tool Offset Data Path TOOLOFST TXT • All only
type P-
7 2,..,P10
8 Tool Geometry Path TOOLSIZE TXT • All only
Dimension Data type P-
8 2,..,P10
9 2nd Geometry Tool Path SEC_GEOM TXT • All only
Offset Data type P-
A1 2,..,P10
10 Decimal Places System MAG_CDEC TXT • Individual only
Data of Magazine common • Only when the tool
A2 Properties management function is
Customized Data enabled
11 Name Data of System MAG_CNAM TXT • Individual only
Z Magazine Properties common • Only when the tool
Customized Data management function is
enabled
12 Decimal Places System POT_CDEC TXT • Individual only
Data of Pot common • Only when the tool
Properties management function is
Customized Data enabled
13 Name Data of Pot System POT_CNAM TXT • Individual only
Properties common • Only when the tool
Customized Data management function is
enabled
222
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

name extensi
on
14 Tool Attach/Detach System TOOL_CHA CSV • Both all and individual
History Data common NGE_HISTO
RY
• Only when the tool
management function is 1
15 Tool Attach History System TLATAHIS TXT enabled
• Export only
Data common
16 Tool Detach History System TLDTAHIS TXT
2
Data common
3
3.2.10 Details of Each Data in the Tool Database
4
3.2.10
This section describes details of each data used in this function.
Table 3.2.10 (a) Data in the Tool Database

Display target: Shows which area on the tool tree display in the tool individual
5
settings screen needs to be selected to display the item.
Item Data Unit Data description Display target 6
Tool Name 32 characters Tool
Management
Number 7
or
Tool Group
Tool Type See "3.2.1.5 Tool geometry Tool 8
dimension data that can be
set".
Tool Management 1 to 1,000 Tool A1
Number Management
Number
Group Number 1 to 1,024 Tool Group A2
Inner Group Number 1 to 32 Inner Group
Number
Tool Number (T 0, 1 to 99,999,999 Tool
Z
Code) Management
Number
or
Tool Group
Optional Group 0, 1 to 99,999,999 Tool Group
Number
Magazine Number 0, 1 to 8 Tool
Management
Number
Pot Number 0, 1 to 9,999 Tool
Management
Number
223
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Data Unit Data description Display target

Stored Magazine 0, 1 to 8 Tool
Management
Number
1 Stored Pot 0, 1 to 9,999 Tool

Management
Number
2 Enable/Disable Tool
Management
0: Disable (-)
1: Enable (R)
Tool
Management
Function Number
3 Tool Size 0: Normal Tool (N)

1: Large Diameter Tool (B)
Tool
Management
Number
4 Data Access 0: Allowed (U)

1: Not Allowed (L)
Tool
Management
Number
5 Data Search
Searched/Not
0: Searched (-)
1: Not Searched (S)
Tool
Management
Searched Number
6 Spindle Speed (S) /min 0 to 99,999 Tool

Feedrate (F) mm/min 0 to 99,999,999 Tool
Large Tool Geometry 0 to 20 Tool
7 No. Management
Number
Tool Image File name of PNG format Tool
8 image data Management
Number
or
A1 Tool Group
Tool Model Number 32 characters Tool
Comment 16 characters Tool
A2 Operation Memo Date/time data (up to 16 Tool
single-byte characters) + Management
text data (up to 32 single- Number
Z byte characters) or
Inner Group
Number
Flutes 0 to 999 Tool
Management
Number
or
Tool Group
Catalog No. 0: Reference destination not Displayed only
set in the table
1 to 99999 display screen
224
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Conditions 0: Reference destination not Displayed only
set in the table
1 to 10 display screen
Life Count Type 0: Count (C)
1: Time (T)
Tool
Management
1
Number
Tool Life Count Cycle 0: 1sec (S)
1: 8msec (M)
Tool
Management
2
Number
Tool Life Counter Count Specified:
Count
[Tool management function]
Count Specified: 0 to
Tool or
Tool Group
3
Maximum Tool Life Time Specified: 99,999,999 Tool or
Value [Tool management
function]
Time Specified: 0 to 999
hours 59 minutes 59
Tool Group
4
Forenoticed Tool Life Tool or
Seconds or seconds or 0 to 59 minutes
Tool Group
milliseconds 59 seconds 992
[Tool life milliseconds 5
management [Tool life management
function] function]
Minutes or 0.1
minutes
- Tool life management B
function disabled
6
Count Specified: 0 to 65,535
Time Specified: 0 to 4300
(4300.0) minutes
7
- Tool life management B
function enabled
Count Specified: 0 to 8
99,999,999
Time Specified: 0 to
100,000 minutes or 0 to A1
60,000.0 minutes
Tool Life State [Tool management function] Tool
0: Life Not Managed A2
1, 2: Life Remaining
3: No Life Remaining
4. Damaged (Skip)
[Tool life management]
Z
1: Tool Registered
2: No Life Remaining
3: Tool Skipped
Path None 1 to 10 Tool
Tool Offset Number None 0 to 999 Tool
(OFS)
Tool Length Offset 0 to 999 Tool
Number (H)
Tool Diameter Offset 0 to 999 Tool
Number (D)
225
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Tool Geometry Offset 0 to 999 Tool
Number (TG)
Tool Wear Offset 0 to 999 Tool
1 Number (TW)
Offset Data 1 to 13 mm or inch Value defined in IS-x Tool
Imaginary Tool Tip 0 to 8 Tool
2 Tool Attach Position 0 to 16 Tool
Tool Data 1 to 8 mm or inch Value defined in IS-x Tool
3 Tool parts image File name of PNG format

image data
Tool
Customized Data 0 0 or 1 for each bit Tool

4 Customized Data 1
to 40
-99,999,999 to 99,999,999 Tool
5 Table 3.2.10 (b) Tool Holder Data

6 Holder Model 16 characters Holder
Number
7 Holder Image File name of PNG format

image data
Holder
Holder Geometry 0 to 120 Holder
8 Number
A1
A2
Z
226
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
• For tool image and holder image files, see PNG files stored in the
following folders.
Indicator to Tool Reference folder
be used Image 1
PANEL iH Tool \StrageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMan
ager\Image\Tool
Tool \StrageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMan 2
parts ager\Image\Parts
image
Holder \StrageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMan 3
ager\Image\Holder
PANEL iH Pro Tool D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager\Imag
 (SSD type) e\Tool 4
MEMO Tool \StrageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMan
parts ager\Image\Parts
image 5
Holder D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolManager\Imag
PANEL iH Pro Tool

e\Holder
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Tool
6
(HDD type) Manager\Image\Tool
Tool
parts
\StrageCard2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\ToolMan
ager\Image\Parts
7
image
Holder C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Tool
Manager\Image\Holder
8
A1
Table 3.2.10 (c) Data Description in Tool Catalog Data
Item Data description A2
Basic information
Catalog No.
Tool Name
1 to 99999
Up to 32 character strings
Z
Tool Type General Tool, Threading Tool, Grooving Tool, Button Turning Tool,
Straight Tool, Versatile Tool, Drilling Tool, Chamfering Tool, Flat
End Mill Tool, Ball End Mill Tool, Tapping Tool, Reamer Tool,
Boring Tool, Face Mill Tool
Tool Image Up to 32 character strings
Comment Up to 16 character strings
227
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Item Data description

Geometry information
Machining Diameter 0.000 to 999999.999
Part Diameter
1 Base Total Length
Maximum Cut
2 Tool Protrusion
Length
Flutes 0 to 999
3 Part information (tool part)
Manufacturer Name Up to 16 character strings
Model Number Up to 32 character strings
4 Tool parts image Up to 32 character strings
Material Up to 8 character strings
5 Cut Edge Length 0.000 to 999999.999
Available Length
Chamfering Height
6 Machining Diameter
Screw Thread Pitch
7 Screw Part Length
Screw Part Diameter
Function Length
8 Total Length
Nose Angle -999999.999 to 999999.999
A1 Taper Angle
Insert Geometry Hexagon, octagon, pentagon, rectangle, rhombus, parallelogram,
A2 Type circle, square, triangle, triangular hexagon
Max. Cut Depth 0.000 to 999999.999
Z Inscribed Circle
Diameter
Corner R -999999.999 to 999999.999
Main Clearance
Angle
Tip Width 0.000 to 999999.999
Tip Thickness
228
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Min. Cut Width 0.000 to 999999.999
Contact Surface
Diameter
Neck Diameter 1
Protruding Length
Tip Diameter
Thread Part Inner 0.000 to 999999.999
2
Diameter
Part information (holder part)
Manufacturer Name Up to 16 character strings
3
Holder Model Up to 32 character strings
Number 4
Holder Image Up to 32 character strings
Part Diameter 0.000 to 999999.999
Shank Width
5
Shank Height
Total Length 6
Machining Diameter
Max. Machining
Diameter 7
Max. Cut Depth
Max. Cutting Width
Min. Cutting Width
8
Cutting Width
Cutting Angle -999999.999 to 999999.999 A1
Function Height 0.000 to 999999.999
Function Width
Head Height
A2
Function Length
Shank Diameter Z
Contact Surface
Diameter (Machine)
Contact Surface
Diameter
(Workpiece)
Holder Geometry Rectangular holder, Parallelepiped holder
Type (*3)
Conditions
Material Up to 8 character strings
Machining Type Up to 16 character strings
229
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER

Spindle Speed (S) 0 to 99999
Feedrate (F) 0 to 99999999
Cutting Speed 0.000 to 99999.999
1 Cut Depth
Cut Width
2 Coolant Not Specified, Cutting Oil, Cutting Mist
3 3.2.11 Displaying Tool Attach/Detach Histories

3.2.11
On the Tool Attach/Detach History screen, you can perform the following
operations:
4 • Displaying tool attach and detach operation histories
• Exporting history data
5
• To enable this function, all of the following conditions must be met:
6  The Tool Manager function is enabled.

The tool attach/detach management function is enabled.
MEMO • Display items may be different depending on the machine
configuration or settings.
7
To display the Tool Attach/Detach History screen, perform the following:
8 <1> Display the second page of horizontal soft keys for the table display screen or
Magazine Management screen.
A1 <2> Press the [Tool Attach]/[Tool Detach] soft key.
A2 • If there is no history data to display, the message window shows

"History data does not exist.".
• If history data cannot be obtained, the message window shows
Z 
"Could not import history data.".
• Edges in the Tool Attach/Detach History screen show the following
edge information.
MEMO
Multi-edge tool: Edge number
Normal tool: "---"
• If the selected tool is a multi-edge tool, "Edge" next to "Tool Name"
is shown in a guide message.
230
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.11.1 Part names and functions in the Tool Attach/Detach History screen
3.2.11.1
1
B
2
3
C
4
D
5
Fig. 3.2.11.1 Tool Attach/Detach History Screen
Table 3.2.11.1 (a) Part Names and Functions in the Tool Attach/Detach History
Screen 6
Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the screen. 7
B History data table Displays all histories (tool attach histories and tool detach
histories) in a chronological order by default.
When you press the [Tool Attach] or [Tool Detach] soft key, 8
only the target operations can be filtered.
The following items are displayed as fixed columns:
• Date/Time
• Operation (Reason)
A1
• Path
• No.
Items other than the above are displayed as variable
A2
columns:
For details on display items, see " Displayed items on the
Tool Attach/Detach History Screen". Z
C Guide Message • Displays the following items of the history information
selected in the history data table.
No.: Tool management number
Tool Number (T Code): Tool type number
Tool Name
• Displays a warning message if tool attach history data or
tool detach history data cannot be obtained.
231
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Name Function
Becomes enabled when tool attach or detach operation
histories are available and displays the target operation
1 [All History]
histories in a chronological order.
The screen title display area shows "(Filter: None)".
Becomes enabled when tool attach operation histories are
2 available and displays the target operation histories in a
chronological order.
[Tool Attach] The screen title display area shows "(Filter: Tool Attached)".
3 To cancel filtering, press the [All History] soft key.

Becomes enabled when tool detach operation histories are
available and displays the target operation histories in a
4 [Tool Detach]
chronological order.
The screen title display area shows "(Filter: Tool Detached)".
To cancel filtering, press the [All History] soft key.
5 Closes the Tool Mount/Unmount History screen.
6 [Close]
7 
• Up to 10 tool attach/detach history data each are shown. If there are
more than 10 histories, the 11th and subsequent data are deleted in
order starting from the earliest date.
MEMO
8 • A total of up to 20 tool attach and detach history data are shown.
A1  Displayed items on the Tool Attach/Detach History Screen

The items displayed on the Tool Mount/Unmount History screen are as shown in
the table below:
A2
Table 3.2.11.1 (b) Displayed Items on the Tool Attach/Detach History Screen
Z Displayed item
Date/Time
Description
Year/Month/Day Hour/Minute/Second when the tool was
attached or detached
Operation (Reason) (*1) Tool attach or detach operation (reason data)
Path (*2) Path where the tool was attached or detached
No. Tool management number of the stored tool
T Code Tool type number
Tool Name (*3) Name of the tool
Edge No. (*2) Multi-edge tool edge number
Magazine Magazine number where the tool was attached or detached
Pot Pot number where the tool was attached or detached
Edges (*2) Number of multi-edge tool edge information pieces
232
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
Displayed item Description

Management Tool management data: Enable/Disable
Life Type Life count type: Time/Count
Tool Size Tool type: Oversize Tool/Normal Tool
Data Access Data access: Not Allowed/Allowed 1
Data Search For non-target life management: Searched/Not searched
Life Period
Life Counter
Life count cycle: 8 ms/1 sec
Tool use count/use time
2
Maximum Life Tool maximum life value
Forenoticed Life (*2) Forenoticed tool life value 3
Life state Current tool status
S
F
Spindle speed set to the tool
Cutting feedrate set to the tool
4
G No. (*2) Geometry number of the oversize tool
Offset No. H (*4) (*5) Length Offset No. (offset number) 5
Offset No. D (*6) (*5) Diameter Offset No. (offset number)
Offset No. TG (*4) (*5)
Offset No. TW (*6) (*5)
Shape Compensation No. (offset number)
Wear Compensation No. (offset number)
6
Origin Magazine (*2) Magazine number where the tool is stored
Origin Pot (*2) Pot number where the tool is stored 7
Customize 0 Bit-format customization information
Customize 1 to 4
Customize 5 to 20 (*2)
Customization information (specific data)
Customization information (specific data)
8
Customize 21 to 40 (*2) Customization information (specific data)
(*1) "(Reason)" is displayed only for tool detach histories. A1
Only "Operation" is displayed for tool attach histories.
(*2) Can be displayed and exported only when the specific option/parameter is enabled.
(*3) Updated only when the tool is attached or detached on Tool Manager.
A2
Data that were not updated are displayed as empty data.
(*4) Length Offset No. is used when the machine control type is M series, or Shape Z
Compensation No. is used when the machine control type is T series.
(*5) The header is always displayed when the machine control type is complex machin-
ing.
(*6) Diameter Offset No. is used when the machine control type is M series, or Wear
Compensation No. is used when the machine control type is T series.
233
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
3.2.11.2 Exporting tool attach/detach histories

You can export tool attach/detach history data at once.
3.2.11.2
The history data that can be exported are as shown in the table below:
1 Table 3.2.11.2 Tool Attach/Detach History Data That Can Be Exported

Data name Default file name Note
2 Tool Attach/Detach History TOOL_CHANGE_HIS

Data (CSV) TORY
20 Tool Attach/Detach History Data
Tool Attach History Data TLATAHIS 10 Tool Attach History Data
3 (G10 Format)
Tool Detach History Data TLDTAHIS 10 Tool Detach History Data
(G10 Format)
4
 Exporting tool attach/detach history data at once
5 To export tool attach/detach history data at once, perform the following:
<1> In the table display screen, press the vertical soft key for the Select Import/
Export Item screen.
6 The Select Import/Export Item screen appears (See "3.2.9.2 Name and
function of each part on the select import/export item screen").
7 <2> Press the [Export] soft key.

8 <4> Select the destination folder and press the [OK] soft key.
<5> From the data selection list, select the data to export.
A1
A2
Z
 • Edit the file name as necessary.
MEMO

The export starts. When the process is finished, a window where you can
check the results will appear.
234
B-64644EN/08
3.2 TOOL MANAGER
<7> Check the results in the check results window.
• A CSV data file may become unreadable if it contains Japanese.

To open an output CSV data file in Microsoft Excel, perform the
following:
1
 1.Open the CSV data file in Windows text editor "Notepad".
2.Select [File] > [Save As].
MEMO 3.Select "UTF-8" from the [Encoding] list and click [Save].
4.In Microsoft Excel, select [From Text] from [Get External Data] in the 2
[Data] tab.
5.Select the exported CSV data file and click [Import].
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
235
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3
3.3 CALENDAR
Calendar is an application to register, check, and edit schedules.
1 You can also register schedule from applications other than Calendar.
2  • The displayed language is switched according to the language

settings in the Home screen.
MEMO
3
3.3.1 Overview of Calendar Function
4
3.3.1
You can register, check, and edit schedules with the calendar function.
5
6
7 Calendar screen Schedule list screen
8 Fig. 3.3.1 (a) Display of Calendar Function

You can see the schedules on the [Information Center] or the Home screen.
A1
A2
Z
Information Center screen Home screen
Fig. 3.3.1 (b) Schedule Notification
For the information center, see "2.4 INFORMATION CENTER".
236
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.1.1 How to use calendar

Operate the calendar function in the following order: Home screen -> calendar
3.3.1.1
screen -> schedule list screen.
1
2
3
Home screen 4
5
6
7
Calendar screen
8
A1
A2
Z
Schedule list screen
237
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.1.2 Information list for each function

The following table shows a list of functions included in the Calendar function.
3.3.1.2
Table 3.3.1.2 Information List for Each Function

Target function Reference item
1 Calendar screen 3.3.2 Operating in Calendar
Screen
2 Creating new schedules

Editing schedules
Copying schedules
3 Deleting schedules
Specifying a month to be
displayed
4 Importing schedules
Exporting schedules
5 Switching to the schedule list
screen
Switching between [Show Month]
6 and [Show Schedule]
Schedule list screen 3.3.3 Operating in Schedule
List Screen
7 Creating new schedules
Editing schedules
8 Copying schedules
Deleting schedules
Limiting items to be displayed
A1 Sort of contents to be displayed
Switching to the calendar screen
A2
Z
238
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.2 Operating in Calendar Screen

3.3.2
The calendar screen is a screen to display schedules by month or by day.

You can newly create (register), edit, copy, delete, import, and export schedules
and can go to the registration source application.
3.3.2.1 Displaying calendar screen

1
Display the calendar screen.
3.3.2.1
2
<1> Press the [CALENDAR] icon in the Home screen.
The calendar screen is displayed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.3.2.2 Names and functions of each part of calendar screen A1

3.3.2.2
A A2
Z
B
Fig. 3.3.2.2 Calendar screen
239
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
Table 3.3.2.2 Names and Functions of Each Part of Calendar Screen

Name Description
A Month display The schedules are displayed by month. The current day is
area indicated with a red frame.
1 • The subjects of schedules are displayed in each schedule
date. If all the schedules cannot be displayed within the frame,
[] is displayed at the lower right.
2 • To select a schedule date, use <←> <→> <↑> <↓>. In the case
of a touch panel, you can select a schedule date also by
tapping.
• When you specify a date by pressing the [Select Date] soft key,
3 the month that includes the specified date is displayed.
• When you press <PAGE UP>, the previous month is displayed.
With <PAGE DOWN>, the next month is displayed.
4 In the case of a touch panel, the previous or next month is
displayed also by tapping [] or [] on the left and right of the
display of date.
5 • If the time to notify the schedule is specified, the [Notifications]

icon is displayed. For a routine schedule, the [Repeat] icon is
displayed.
• When you press the [Show Schedule] soft key, the input target
6 is switched to the schedule display area.
• When you press the [Show Month] soft key, the input target is
switched to the month display area.
7 [Notification] Displayed when the time to notify the
Icon schedule is specified.
8 [Repeat]
Icon
Displayed for a routine schedule.
B Schedule display The events of the date selected in the month display area are
A1 area listed.
• The start time, end time, subject, and details of the registered
schedules are displayed.
For schedules registered from Calendar, the [Calendar] icon is
A2 displayed. For schedules registered from applications other
than Calendar, an icon that indicates the registration source is
displayed.
Z • To select each event, use <↑> <↓>. In the case of a touch
panel, tap an event directly to select it. You can edit, copy, and
delete the event selected.
[Calendar] Displayed for a schedule registered from
Icon Calendar.
240
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
Name Description
C Horizontal soft When the input target on the calendar screen is the monthly
keys display area,
the [Edit], [Copy], and [Delete] soft keys are disabled and cannot
be selected.
Registers a new schedule.
1
[Create New] 2
Edits a schedule.
3
[Edit]
Copies a schedule.
4
[Copy]
Deletes a schedule.
5
[Delete]
6
When you specify a date, the month that includes the specified
date is displayed.
7
[Select Date]
Imports a schedule. 8
[Import]
Exports a schedule.
A1
[Export]
A2
Switches to the schedule list screen.
Z
[List Screen]
Switches between [Show Month] and [Show Schedule].
[Show Month]/
[Show Schedule]
241
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.2.3 Creating (registering) new schedules

Create (register) new schedules.
3.3.2.3
<1> In the calendar screen, press the [Create New] soft key.
1 The Set Schedule window is displayed.
2
3  To register a one-time schedule
To register a one-time schedule, follow the procedure below.
4 <1> Enter the items (subject, start date/time, end date/time, etc.) in the Set
Schedule window.
5
6
7
8
A1
Item Input contents
A2 Subject
Repeat
Enter the subject of the schedule.
Select "None".
Time Specified Select either "Time Specified" or "All Day".
Z Start Date/Time Select the start date/time.
End Date/Time Select the end date/time.
Notifications Select the notification time from [Information Center].
Details Enter the details as necessary.
• To receive a notification about the scheduled event from the
 Information Center, select the notification time in [Notifications]

item.
MEMO For Information Center, see "2.4 INFORMATION CENTER".
• To register a routine schedule, set [Repeat].
242
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<2> After entering data, press the [OK] soft key.

The schedule is registered.
1
 • To cancel the schedule register operation, press the [Cancel] soft key. 2
MEMO
3.3.2.4 Editing schedules

3
Edit schedules registered in the calendar. The cases of a one-time schedule and
3.3.2.4
routine schedule are described below separately. 4

 • You can edit schedules registered from other applications. However,
you cannot change the application in which the schedule has been
5
MEMO registered.
6
 To edit a one-time schedule
To edit a one-time schedule, follow the procedure below.
7
<1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be edited and press the [Edit] soft
key. 8
The Set Schedule window is displayed.
A1
<2> Enter the items (subject, start date/time, end date/time, etc.) in the Set
Schedule window.
A2
Z
 • See "To register a one-time schedule" in "3.3.2.3 Creating
(registering) new schedules".
MEMO
<3> When editing is completed, press the [End] soft key.
 To edit a routine schedule

To edit a routine schedule, follow the procedure below.
<1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be edited and press the [Edit] soft
key.
243
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
The Edit window is displayed.

<2> In the Edit window, select "Edit As Routine Schedule" or "Edit Selected
Schedule Only" and press the [OK] soft key.
1
2
3 <3> Enter the items (subject, start date/time, end date/time, etc.) in the Set
Schedule window.
4
5
6
7
8
Item Input contents
Subject Enter the subject of the schedule.
A1 Repeat Select among "Daily", "Weekly" and "Monthly".
Time Specified Select either "Time Specified" or "All Day".
A2 Start Date/Time Select the start time.
End Date/Time Select the end time.
Notifications Select the notification time from [Information Center].
Z Details Enter the details as necessary.
• To receive a notification about the scheduled event from the

 Information Center, select the notification time in [Notifications]
item.
MEMO
For Information Center, see "2.4 INFORMATION CENTER".
<4> Press the [Next] soft key to go to the next page of the Set Schedule window.
The Set Schedule window (2/2) is displayed.
244
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
1
 • To cancel the schedule register operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
2
<5> Select the items (interval, repetition period) in the Set Schedule window (2/2).
3
Item Input contents
Interval With daily repetition Select "Every 1 Days", etc. 4
With weekly repetition Select "Every 1 Weeks", etc and a day.
With monthly repetition For monthly repetition, select "Every 1
Months", etc. and "Specify Date" or "Specify
5
Day".
• When "Specify Date" is selected, select a
date.
6
• When "Specify Day" is selected, select
"1st", "Monday", etc.
Repetition Start Date Select the start date.
7
period No End Date/End date Select [No End Date] or [End date].
When [End date] is selected, select a date.
8
<6> When editing is completed, press the [OK] soft key to register the schedule.
3.3.2.5 Copying schedules A1

Copy schedules registered in the calendar. The cases of a one-time schedule and
3.3.2.5
routine schedule are described below separately.

A2

NOTE
• You can copy schedules registered from other applications. However,
registered.
Z
 To copy a one-time schedule

To copy a one-time schedule, follow the procedure below.
<1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be copied and press the [Copy]
soft key.
245
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<2> Edit the schedule in the Set Schedule window.
 • See "To register a one-time schedule" in "3.3.2.3 Creating

(registering) new schedules".
1 MEMO
2 <3> When editing is completed, press the [End] soft key.
 To copy a routine schedule

3 To copy a routine schedule, follow the procedure below.
4 <1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be copied and press the [Copy]
soft key.
The Copy window is displayed.
5
<2> In the Copy window, select "Copy As Routine" or "Copy Selected Schedule
Only" and press the [OK] soft key.
6 The Set Schedule window is displayed.
7
8
A1

A2 MEMO
• See "To edit a routine schedule" in "3.3.2.4 Editing schedules".
Z <4> When editing is completed, press the [End] soft key.
3.3.2.6 Deleting schedules

Delete schedules registered in the calendar. The cases of a one-time schedule
3.3.2.6
and routine schedule are described below separately.
 To delete a one-time schedule

To delete a one-time schedule, follow the procedure below.
<1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be deleted and press the [Delete]
soft key.
The Delete Schedule message is displayed.
246
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<2> In the [Delete Schedule] message, confirm the schedule to be deleted and
press the [OK] soft key. 1
The specified schedule is deleted.
 To delete a routine schedule 2

To delete a routine schedule, follow the procedure below.
3
<1> In the calendar screen, select a schedule to be deleted and press the [Delete]
soft key.
The Delete window is displayed. 4
<2> In the Delete window, select "Delete As Routine Schedule" or "Delete Selected
Schedule Only" and press the [OK] soft key.
The deletion confirmation message is displayed.
5
6
7
8
<3> In the deletion confirmation message, confirm the schedule to be deleted and
press the [OK] soft key.
The specified schedule is deleted. A1
3.3.2.7 Displaying schedule that includes specified date
3.3.2.7
Display the month that includes the specified date in the calendar screen. A2
<1> In the calendar screen, press the [Select Date] soft key.
Z
The Select Date window is displayed.
<2> Select the date to be displayed and press the [OK] soft key.
The month that includes the specified date is displayed in the month display.
247
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.2.8 Importing schedules

Import schedules from an external device (USB flash drive or memory card).
3.3.2.8
If the same schedule has been already imported, that schedule is not
1 imported.
If all of the following items are the same as those of the schedule to be
2 
NOTE
imported, that schedule is considered to be the same schedule.
• With a one-time schedule: Subject, start date/time, and end date/time.
• With a routine schedule: Subject, repetition period (start/end),
repetition time (start/end), repetition pattern (daily, weekly, monthly),
3 and repetition interval.
4 <1> Connect an external device (USB flash drive or memory card) with a schedule
file (file name: CalendarSchedule.bin) included.
5
6
7
8 <2> In the calendar screen, press the [Import] soft key.
The Import window appears.
A1
A2 <3> In the Import window, select a file to import, specify the start date of the
schedule to be imported, and press the [OK] soft key.
The selected schedule file is imported.
Z
248
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
Item Input contents

Import start date All Imports all the schedules to be imported.
Specifie Imports schedules that start on and after the specified
d Date start date.
Select the specified date.
1
2
3
 • When you press the [View] soft key, the Select Folder window is
displayed.
MEMO • To cancel the import operation, press the [Cancel] soft key. 4
<4> Remove the external device. 5

To change the displayed file
1.Press the [View] soft key.
6
The [Select File] window appears.
7
8
 A1
MEMO
A2
2.In the [Select File] window, select a schedule file and press the Z
[OK] soft key.
The window returns to the [Import] window, and the new schedule
file is selected.
3.3.2.9 Exporting schedules

Export schedules registered in the calendar to an external device (USB flash drive
3.3.2.9
or memory card) in binary format (file name: CalendarSchedule.bin).

NOTE
• If a file with the same name exists in the export destination, the file is
overwritten.
249
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<1> Connect an external device (USB flash drive or memory card) to which a
schedule file is exported.
1
2
3
<2> In the calendar screen, press the [Export] soft key.
4 The Export window appears.
5
6 <3> In the Export window, select the folder to export and press the [OK] soft key.
The selected schedule file is exported.
7
8
A1  • When you press the [View] soft key, the Select Folder window is
displayed.
MEMO • To cancel the export operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
A2
<4> Remove the external device.
250
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
To change the folder

1.When you press the [View] soft key, the [Select Folder] window is
displayed.
2.When you select an export destination folder in the [Select Folder]
window and press the [OK] soft key, the window returns to the 1
[Export] window, and the new export destination folder is selected.
2

MEMO 3
4
5
6
3.3.2.10 Switching to list screen
This section describes how to switch from the calendar screen to the schedule list 7
3.3.2.10
screen.
<1> In the calendar screen, press the [List Screen] soft key. 8
The schedule list screen is displayed.
A1
3.3.2.11 Switching between [Show Month] and [show schedule]

A2
This section describes how to switch the area to enter schedules between the
3.3.2.11
month display area and the schedule display area. Z

 When a touch panel is not used
To switch the input area to the schedule display area
<1> Press the [Show Schedule] soft key.
The input area is switched to the schedule display area.
251
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
To switch the input area to the month display area

<1> Press the [Show Month] soft key.
The input area is switched to the month display area.
1
2  When a touch panel is used
<1> Tap the schedule to be entered directly.
3 The input area is changed.
3.3.2.12 Closing calendar screen

4 3.3.2.12
This section describes how to close the calendar screen.
5 <1> Press <HOME>.

The calendar screen is closed, and the Home screen is displayed.
6
3.3.3 Operating in Schedule List Screen
7
3.3.3
The schedule list screen is a screen to list the contents of the schedules registered
in the calendar.
As contents of a schedule, the subject/details, repetition, period, notification, and
8 the registration source application of the schedule are displayed. In this screen,
you can create (register), edit, copy, and delete schedules, conduct filtering
(limitation of display) and sorting of the list, and go to the registration source
A1 applications.
A2
Z
252
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.3.1 Names and functions of each part of schedule list screen

3.3.3.1
1
A
2
3
4
B
5
Fig. 3.3.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Part of Schedule List Screen
6
Name Description 7
A Schedule list area The subjects, details, repetition, periods, notifications, and the
registration source application of the registered schedules are
displayed.
Select each schedule with <↑> <↓>.
8
When using a touch panel, you can select them by tapping
directly.
You can edit, copy, and delete the schedule selected.
A1
A2
Z
253
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
Name Description
B Horizontal soft When a schedule whose registration source is the calendar is
keys selected, the [Go To App] soft key is disabled and cannot be
selected.
1 Registers a new schedule.
2 [Create New]
Edits a schedule.
3 [Edit]
Copies a schedule.
4
[Copy]
5 Deletes a schedule.
6 [Delete]
Limits the items to be displayed in the schedule list screen.
7 [Filter]
Sorts the display contents of the schedule list screen for
8 display.
[Sort]
A1 Switches to the calendar screen.
A2 [Calendar
Screen]
254
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
3.3.3.2 Creating (registering) new schedules

Create (register) new schedules to the calendar.
3.3.3.2
<1> In the schedule list screen, press the [Create New] soft key.
The Set Schedule window is displayed. 1
2
<2> Register the schedule in the Set Schedule window.
3

MEMO
• See "3.3.2.3 Creating (registering) new schedules".
4
3.3.3.3 Editing schedules 5

Edit schedules registered in the calendar.
3.3.3.3
6

NOTE
• You can edit schedules registered from other applications. However,
registered. 7
<1> In the schedule list screen, select a schedule to be edited and press the [Edit] 8
soft key.
A1

A2
Z
 • For how to edit the item, see "3.3.2.4 Editing schedules".
MEMO
3.3.3.4 Copying schedules

Copy schedules registered in the calendar.
3.3.3.4

NOTE
• You can copy schedules registered from other applications. However,
registered.
255
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<1> In the schedule list screen, select a schedule to be copied and press the [Copy]
soft key.
1
<2> Edit the schedule in the Set Schedule window to register.
2

3 MEMO
• See "3.3.2.4 Editing schedules".
4 3.3.3.5 Deleting schedules

Delete schedules registered in the calendar.
3.3.3.5
5
<1> In the schedule list screen, press the [Delete] soft key.
The horizontal soft keys for deletion are displayed.
6
7 <2> In the schedule list screen, select a schedule to be deleted and press the
[Select] soft key.
8
 • When a schedule is selected, the left check box is checked.
A1 MEMO
• To select multiple schedules, select a schedule again and press
[Select] each time.
A2
Z
256
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
1
2
3
4
5
Horizontal soft Description
keys
[Select] Confirms the selected schedule.
6
[Select All] Selects all the schedules in the list.
[Cancel All] Cancels all the selected schedules. 7
<3> After selecting a schedule to be deleted, press the [Execute] soft key.
The deletion confirmation message is displayed. 8
<4> Check the contents of the deletion confirmation message and press the [OK]
soft key. A1
The selected schedule is deleted.
A2
Z
 • To cancel the schedule delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
3.3.3.6 Limiting display items

Limit (filter) the display items of the schedule list screen.
3.3.3.6
<1> In the schedule list screen, press the [Filter] soft key.
257
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
<2> In the Filter Settings window, set the filtering conditions ([Display Period],
1 [Regist. App], and [[Subject]/Detail]) and press the [OK] soft key.
The schedule list is displayed with the filtering conditions that have been set.
2
3
4
5 Item Input contents
Display Period Select the display period.
6 Regist. App
[Subject]/Detail
Select "All" or a registration source application.
Enter the character string to be contained in [[Subject]/Detail].
7 3.3.3.7 Sorting display contents

Sort the display contents of the schedule list screen for display.
3.3.3.7
8 <1> In the schedule list screen, press the [Sort] soft key.
The horizontal soft keys for sorting are displayed.
A1
A2 <2> Press a horizontal soft key of sorting items ([[Subject]/Detail], [Repeat],
[Period], [Notification], and [Regist. App]).
You can sort the schedule list with the sorting item you set.
Z
 • Every time you press the same horizontal soft key, the ascending
display and the descending display are switched.
MEMO
258
B-64644EN/08
3.3 CALENDAR
Horizontal soft Description

keys
[[Subject]/Detail] Sorts in the order of character strings in [[Subject]/Detail].
[Repeat] Sorts in the order of frequency of repetition. 1
[Period] Sorts in the order of periods.
[Notification] Sorts in the order of notifications.
[Regist. App] Sorts in the order of registration source applications.
2
[Back] The sort status is not changed, and the display of the horizontal
soft keys returns to the original status.
3
3.3.3.8 Switching to calendar screen
3.3.3.8
This section describes how to switch from the schedule list screen to the calendar 4
screen.
<1> In the schedule list screen, press the [Calendar Screen] soft key. 5
The calendar screen is displayed.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
259
B-64644EN/08
3.4 CYCLE TIME ESTIMATION
3.4
1 3.4.1 Overview of Cycle Time Estimation

3.4.1
Cycle Time Estimation is an option function to estimate the cycle time when
executing an existing machining program.
2

3 MEMO
• This function is not available for a multi-path system.
4 Supported models for this function

• Series 30i-MODEL B iHMI
5 • Series 31i-MODEL B iHMI
6  This function cannot be used in the following models:

• 0i-F Plus
MEMO • 30i-B Plus
7
3.4.2 Steps for Cycle Time Estimation
8 3.4.2
The steps of this function, from starting estimation to checking results, are as
follows:
A1 1. Start Cycle Time Estimation.
A2 2. Update estimation data.

(automatic update for the first time)
Z
3. Select a program for which you want to
execute estimation.
4. Start estimation.
5. Finish the estimation.
6. Check the estimation results.
Fig. 3.4.2 Steps for Cycle Time Estimation
260
B-64644EN/08
3.4.3 How to Read the Cycle Time Estimation Screen

3.4.3
3.4.3.1 Displaying the cycle time estimation screen

Start Cycle Time Estimation from the Home screen.
3.4.3.1
<1> Press [CYCLE TIME ESTIMATION] on the Home screen. 1

2
3
4
5
6
When you start the Cycle Time Estimation function for the first time or there is 7
no estimation data from the past, estimation data required to estimate the cycle
time will be automatically obtained from the CNC.
8
A1
A2
Z
If estimation data from the past exists, the most recent estimation data will be
loaded. If loading fails, press the [Update Data] soft key to update the
estimation data.
261
B-64644EN/08
 • During estimation data update, you can cancel the update by

pressing the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
1
When the update is finished, the display is switched to the program list screen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
<2> Select a program and press the [Execute Estimation] soft key.
8 Cycle time estimation for the selected program will start.
A1
A2
Z
 • Multiple programs can be selected for cycle time estimation.

• Press the [Estimation Details On] soft key to display the Estimation
MEMO Details Screen for a selected program.
262
B-64644EN/08
3.4.3.2 Name of each part on the cycle time estimation screen

3.4.3.2
1
A
C
2
3
D E
4
5
Fig. 3.4.3.2 Cycle Time Estimation Screen
Table 3.4.3.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the Cycle Time Estimation
Screen
6
Name Description
A Folder tree Displays the folders that exist in the memory in a tree. The 7
program in the folder you select from the folder tree is displayed
in the program list.
• In the program storage file (PC_MEM device) 8
* Displayed path: //HDD_SSD
• In the program storage memory (CNC_MEM device)
* Displayed path: //CNC_MEM A1
When you press the plus sign, the tree for
Plus sign
each folder will open.
Minus sign
When you press the minus sign, the tree for A2
each folder will close.
B Current Path Displays the path of the selected folder.
Z
263
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
C Program List Displays a list of loaded programs.
Progress Complete: Estimation completed
Estimating: Estimation in progress
1 Alarm: Alarm occurred during estimation
Cancel: Estimation canceled
Time Over: Cycle time of more than 31 days
2 Name
Comment
Displays program names in ascending order.
Displays the comment next to the program
name.
3 If there is no comment set, it is blank.
Size Displays the program size in KB/MB/GB.
Machining Displays the estimated cycle time.
4 Time If estimation has not been executed, "--:--:--" is
displayed.
Cut Time Displays the estimated cutting time.
5 If estimation has not been executed, "--:--:--" is
displayed.
Non-cut Time Displays the calculation value of estimated
6 "Cycle Time" - estimated "Cutting Time".
If estimation has not been executed, "--:--:--" is
displayed.
7 D Progress Bar Displays the progress rate of estimation.
If estimation is executed for multiple programs, this bar displays
the progress rate of all progresses combined to all estimations
8 between 0 and 100 %.
E Message area If an error occurs, an error message appears.
A1
 • When you start the Cycle Time Estimation function for the first time,
the folder path where a program is set as the main program will be
A2 MEMO displayed as the current path.
Z 3.4.3.3 CNC data imported to the cycle time estimation function

Import the following CNC data required for cycle time estimation from the CNC to
3.4.3.3
this function and update the estimation data. You can select items to be imported
on the estimation data update item selection window that appears when
estimation data is updated.
• Parameter
• Macro Executor
• Program (CNC_MEM)
• Program (HDD_SSD)
• Tool Offset
• Custom macro variable
264
B-64644EN/08
• Workpiece Origin Offset

• Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset
* This is not imported in lathe cycle time estimation.
• 3D Interference Check
• Workpiece Placement Error Compensation 1
• Machine Configuration Select Function
• 5-axis Machining Condition Settings 2
• Tool Geometry Data
• Tool Management Data 3
• Magazine Data
• Decimal point data of customized data 4
• When you select the program storage file (PC_MEM device):
The latest program stored in the program storage file (PC_MEM
5
device) is referenced to estimate the cycle time. Programs shown
on the Cycle Time Estimation Screen are ones when the display is
refreshed after estimation data is updated. If you change a 6
program with another application after update, estimation may be
executed using a program different from the one shown on the
Cycle Time Estimation Screen. Also note that, if you execute 7
estimation on a program that was deleted from an external
 application, the estimation will result in an error.
MEMO
• When you select the program storage memory (CNC_MEM
device):
8
The program loaded from the program storage memory
(CNC_MEM device) to the Cycle Time Estimation function is
referenced to execute the estimation. A1
• If the add common variable option is disabled, data #500 to #549
for custom macro variables are updated.
• The main program is obtained when estimation data in the program A2
storage file (PC_MEM device) or program storage memory
(CNC_MEM device) is updated.
Z
3.4.4 Updating Estimation Data
3.4.4
3.4.4.1 Selecting estimation data update items

When you press the [Update Data] soft key, the estimation data update item
3.4.4.1
selection window appears.
265
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3 Fig. 3.4.4.1 Update Estimation Data Window
The estimation data update item selection window shows the estimation data item
names according to the CNC options, and you can select estimation data items to
4 be updated.
However, "Parameter", "Program (CNC_MEM)", and "Tool Offset" are always
displayed.
5
The update item "Tool Management Data" includes the following
6 
estimation data:
• Tool Geometry Data
MEMO • Tool Management Data
7 • Magazine Data
• Decimal point data of customized data
8 3.4.4.2 Operation and display while updating estimation data

3.4.4.2
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 3.4.4.2 (a) Update Estimation Data Window

• The estimation data item names are displayed according to the CNC options.
• Data without an option are not displayed.
• Updated data items have a check mark to the left.
266
B-64644EN/08
• Do not modify CNC data, update a program, switch between

applications, or operate vertical soft keys while updating estimation

NOTE
data.
• When the estimation data is updated while starting up the
1
maintenance display or using the CNC screen display function, it may
take 1.5 to 2 times longer than the usual time required for data update.
2
 When failing to update estimation data
If estimation data update fails, a message appears.
3
• Error message example:“Unexpected error occurred.”
4
5
6
7
Fig. 3.4.4.2 (b) Update Estimation Data Window (Error)
<1> Press the [OK] soft key. 8
The Update Estimation Data window closes.
A1
 • After solving the problem according to the error message, such as
by checking hardware connection, update the estimation data
MEMO again.
A2
 When canceling updating estimation data
To cancel estimation data update in progress, perform the following:
Z
<1> Press the [Cancel] soft key.
The confirmation message for Cancel Estimation Data Update appears.
267
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6 The update is canceled, and the display returns to the Cycle Time Estimation
Screen.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If you press the [Cancel] soft key while the confirmation message
for canceling is displayed, the estimation data update is not
MEMO canceled, and the system continues to update estimation data.
268
B-64644EN/08
3.4.5 Starting Estimation

3.4.5
3.4.5.1 Selecting a program for estimation

Select a program for which you want to execute estimation from the program list
3.4.5.1
screen as follows: 1
 Selecting one program at a time
<1> Select a program with <↑> and <↓>.
2
The program appears selected.
3
4
5
6
7
8
 Selecting multiple programs
You can select multiple programs. A1
<1> Press the [Select Multiple] soft key.
A2
Z
269
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5 <2> Select a program with <↑> and <↓>.
<3> Press the [Select] soft key or the space key.
6 The program is selected with a check mark.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
270
B-64644EN/08
<4> Press the [Back] soft key.
• Pressing the [Select All] soft key selects all programs displayed in
the program list.
• Pressing the [Cancel All] soft key unselects all programs.
• If you press the [Back] soft key, the select multiple mode is
1
 released, but the selected programs remain selected. The selected
MEMO programs have a check mark on them.

• During estimation data update or estimation in progress, multiple
2
programs cannot be selected.
• You cannot move a folder when you press the [Select Multiple] soft
key and select programs. 3
3.4.5.2 Executing estimation 4

Execute estimation for programs selected in the program list.
3.4.5.2
5
<1> Press the [Execute Estimation] soft key.
Estimation starts.
6
7
During estimation, the execute estimation displays as follows and updates the
following items:
8
• Progress: Displays "Estimating".
• Cycle Time: Displays the cycle time during estimation.
• Cutting Time: Displays the cutting time during estimation.
A1
• Non-cut Time: Displays the non-cut time during estimation.
• Progress bar: Displays the estimated progress with the progress bar and a
A2
numerical value (0 to 100 %).
Z
271
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
When the estimation is finished, "Complete" is displayed under "Progress".
6 • If multiple programs are selected for estimation, the cycle time is

estimated for them in order from the top down in the program list.
7 • If you display a screen other than the Cycle Time Estimation

Screen while executing estimation, it continues to run on the
 background.
• During estimation, the following soft keys cannot be used:
8 MEMO [Update Data] soft key
[Execute Estimation] soft key
[Select Multiple] soft key
A1 [Settings] soft key
• You cannot move a folder while executing estimation.
A2  Progress rate of the progress bar during estimation

The progress bar displays the entire progress of all programs including
Z subprograms.
For example, if you select five programs and execute estimation, the progress bar
displays as follows:
• 0%
• 1 to 20 %: Displays the estimation progress rate for the first program.
• 21 to 40 %: Displays the estimation progress rate for the second program.
• 41 to 60 %: Displays the estimation progress rate for the third program.
• 61 to 80 %: Displays the estimation progress rate for the fourth program.
• 81 to 100 %: Displays the estimation progress rate for the fifth program.
272
B-64644EN/08
 Canceling the estimation

To cancel estimation in progress, perform the following:
<1> Press the [Cancel Estimation] soft key.

The cancel estimation confirmation message appears. 1
2
3
4
The estimation is canceled, and the display returns to the Cycle Time
Estimation Screen.
5
6
• If you press the [Cancel] soft key while the confirmation message
7
for canceling is displayed, the cycle time estimation is not canceled
but continues.
• If you cancel estimation running for multiple programs, it will stop
8
for programs following the canceled one and leave their progress
 field blank. For programs already finishing the estimation before

the cancellation, each progress state remains shown in the A1
MEMO progress field.
• If the cycle time exceeds 31 days, the estimation will be canceled.
In such a case, "Time Over" is shown in "Progress" on the Cycle A2
Time Estimation Screen.
• Even though you cancel the estimation, it may take some time
before it is canceled. Z
 Finishing the estimation
Cycle time estimation will be finished on the following cases:
• Estimation is completed up to the last block of the program.
• An alarm occurs due to a program error.
• Estimation is canceled using the [Cancel Estimation] soft key.
• Estimation is canceled due to the time over when the cycle time exceeds 31
days.
273
B-64644EN/08
 When the estimation fails

When the cycle time estimation fails, a message such as "An application error
occurred." is displayed.
1
2
Fig. 3.4.5.2 Display Example of Application Error Message
3
3.4.5.3 Updating estimation data
To update estimation data as necessary, perform the following:
3.4.5.3
4
<1> Switch the CNC’s work mode to EDIT mode.
5 <2> Press [Update Data] soft key.
The Update Estimation Data window appears.
6
7
8
A1
<3> Use the <TAB> key to select an update item.
A2 <4> Press the [Select] soft key or the space key.

The update item is selected with a check mark.
Repeat the steps 3 and 4 to select necessary update items.
Z
 • Pressing the [Select All] soft key selects all update items.
• Pressing the [Cancel All] soft key unselects all update items but
MEMO gray ones.

The updating window appears.
274
B-64644EN/08
When the estimation data update is finished, the program information and
folder information are updated and displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
• When the estimation data in the program storage file (PC_MEM

6
device) is updated, the estimation result in the program storage file
 (PC_MEM device) is cleared.
• When the estimation data in the program storage memory 7
MEMO
(CNC_MEM device) is updated, the estimation result in the
program storage memory (CNC_MEM device) is cleared.
8
3.4.5.4 How to set estimation conditions
3.4.5.4
In cycle time estimation, you can configure the settings (PMC settings) of the A1
override and optional block skip for each program and use the setting values for
estimation.
A2
 Configuring the PMC settings
Set the override and optional block skip. Z
<1> Press the [Settings] soft key.
<2> Press the [PMC Settings] soft key.

The PMC Settings window appears.
275
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4  Setting the rapid traverse override
You can set the 3-level rapid traverse override to the rapid traverse speed to
reduce the speed.
5 For example, when the feedrate command is 10 m/min in a program, if the rapid
traverse override is set to 50 %, estimation is executed at the rapid traverse
command of 5 m/min.
6 Setting with the slide bar
By moving the slide bar, you can set the override to 25, 50, or 100 %.
7 <1> Select the slide bar for Rapid Traverse Override.
8  • Pressing the <TAB> key moves the focus.

MEMO
A1
<2> Press <←> and <→>.
A2 The slide bar moves to 25, 50, or 100%.

The rapid traverse override is set.
276
B-64644EN/08
 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key cancels the settings and closes the
PMC Settings window.
MEMO
1
Setting by entering a numerical value
By entering a numerical value, you can set the override to 25, 50, or 100 %.
2
<1> Select the numerical value input field for Rapid Traverse Override using the
<TAB> key.
<2> Enter a numerical value. 3
The slide bar moves in synchronization with the value entered.
4
5
6
<3> Press <INPUT>. 7
The input value is confirmed.
The rapid traverse override is set.
8
A1
MEMO
A2
 Setting the feedrate override
You can check a program with the feedrate commanded in the program changed Z
by a percentage set in the feedrate override.
For example, when the feedrate command is 100 mm/min in a program, if the
feedrate override is set to 50 %, estimation is executed at the feedrate command
of 50 mm/min.
Setting with the slide bar

By moving the slide bar, you can set the override to 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25... 245, 250,
or 254 %.
<1> Select the slide bar for Feedrate Override using the <TAB> key.
277
B-64644EN/08
<2> Press <←> and <→>.

The slide bar moves to between 1 and 254. Every time you press the key, the
bar moves by 5 %.
1
2
3
4 The feedrate override is set.
5  • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key cancels the settings and closes the
MEMO
6
Setting by entering a numerical value
By entering a numerical value, you can set the override to 1 to 254%.
7 <1> Select the numerical value input field for Feedrate Override using the <TAB>
key.
8 <2> Enter a numerical value.
The slide bar moves in synchronization with the value entered.
A1
A2
Z
<3> Press <INPUT>.
The input value is confirmed.
The feedrate override is set.
MEMO
278
B-64644EN/08
 Setting the optional block skip

You can skip part of a program by setting it as a block not to be estimated.
Setting using <Space>

<1> Select the check box with the <TAB> key. 1
The cursor moves to the target.
<2> Press <Space>.
The selected check box is checked.
2
3
4
5
The optional block skip is set. 6
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key cancels the settings and closes the 7
 PMC Settings window.
• If the optional block skip option is disabled, only “/,/1” can be
MEMO
selected.
8
Setting using the soft key
A1
<1> Select the check box with the <TAB> key.
The cursor moves to the target.
A2
The selected check box is checked.
Z

The optional block skip is set.
• Press the [Select] soft key again on the selected check box to
 uncheck it.
• Pressing the [Select All] soft key selects all check boxes.
MEMO
• Pressing the [Cancel All] soft key unselects all check boxes.
279
B-64644EN/08
3.4.6 Checking the Estimation Results

3.4.6
3.4.6.1 Checking the estimation results

During the estimation, “Cycle Time”, "Cutting Time" (workpiece cutting time), and
3.4.6.1
1 "Non-cut Time" (Cycle Time excluding Cutting Time) are updated regularly. When
the estimation is complete, the estimated time is fixed and “Complete” is displayed
under “Progress” on the Cycle Time Estimation Screen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 3.4.6.1 Cycle Time Estimation Screen
8  Estimation result information
Estimation result information is saved for a program for which estimation is
executed.
A1 However, each estimation result is discarded if the following estimation data is
updated:
A2 • Program storage file (PC_MEM device): Estimation result information of the

program storage file (PC_MEM device)
• Program storage memory (CNC_MEM device): Estimation result information of
Z the program storage memory (CNC_MEM device)
3.4.6.2 Checking on the estimation details screen

The Estimation Details Screen allows you to check estimation results in more
3.4.6.2
detail.
Even while the Estimation Details Screen is displayed, you can update estimation
data and execute estimation.
 Displaying the Estimation Details Screen

<1> Select a program to be displayed on the Estimation Details Screen.
<2> Press the [Estimation Details On] soft key.
The Estimation Details Screen appears.
280
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
 • Press the [Estimation Details Off] soft key to close the details
display.
8
MEMO
A1
A2
Z
281
B-64644EN/08
 How to read the Estimation Details Screen
A
1
2 B
3
C
4
5
Fig. 3.4.6.2 (a) Estimation Details Screen
6 Table 3.4.6.2 Name and Function of Each Part on the Estimation Details Screen
Name Description
A Program Displays the details of the program information.
7 information
Name Displays the program name.
8 Size
Captured
Displays the program size in KB/MB/GB.(*1)
Displays the estimation data update time in the format of YYYY/
Date/Time MM/DD HH:MM:SS.(*1)
A1 B Preview
(Y:Year, M:Month, D:Day, H:Hour, M:Minute, S:Second)
Displays the program text.
If an alarm occurs due to a program error, the alarm information is
A2 displayed.
282
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
C Estimation Displays the detailed information, such as the cycle time and
execution moving distance.
results
Time
related
Displays estimation results related to time, such as the machining
time.
1
items Machining Displays the total amount of machining time, which
Time is comprised of Cutting Time, Rapid Traverse Time,
Aux. Code Time, and Other Time.
2
Cut Time Displays the time to cut.
Rapid Displays the rapid traverse time. 3
Traverse Time
Aux. Code Displays the total amount of time for aux. codes (M,
Time S, T, B). 4
Other Time Time derived by Machining Time - (Cutting Time +
Rapid Traverse Time + Aux. Code Time).
Corresponds to dwelling time, etc. 5
Distance Displays estimation results related to distance, such as the cutting
related distance. The items are displayed in "mm" or "inch".
items Cutting Displays the travel distance by cutting. 6
Distance
Rapid
Traverse
Displays the travel distance by rapid traverse in 11
digits (max.). 7
Distance
Override
related
Displays estimation results related to override, such as the feedrate
override. 8
items Rapid Displays the setting value (in three digits (max.)) for
Traverse
Override
feedrate override in the PMC settings when
estimation is executed.
A1
Feedrate Displays the setting value (in three digits (max.)) for
Override rapid traverse override in the PMC settings when
estimation is executed.
A2
Other items Displays estimation results other than time, distance, and override
related items.
Estimate Displays the date and time when estimation is
Z
Executed completed.
Date/Time
Block Count Displays the total number of blocks in the programs
in ten digits (max.).
Displayed unit is "blocks".
Time The percentage value rounded to two decimal
percentage places of each time is displayed on the bar and
value (%).(*2)
(*1) This is displayed when the chart display is OFF.
(*2) This is displayed when the chart display is ON.
283
B-64644EN/08
• If an alarm occurs or the [Cancel Estimation] soft key is pressed to

cancel the estimation, the estimation results until being canceled is
 displayed.
1 MEMO
• When the estimation progress is "not been executed", hyphens (-) are
displayed for each item other than "Block Count" of estimation
execution results.
2
3 The following programs are displayed in the preview of the Estimation
Details Screen.
 • For the program storage file (PC_MEM device), the program used for
4 MEMO
estimation (while estimation is executed and when completed) and the
latest program (before estimation is executed).
• For the program storage memory (CNC_MEM device), the program
5 used when estimation data update was performed.
6  Alarm information
If there is an error in the program, the alarm information is displayed in the preview
area. The following items are displayed as alarm information:
7 • Alarm number
• Alarm message
8 • Program name when the alarm occurred

• Sequence number when the alarm occurred
A1 • Program text on an area where the alarm occurred
A2
Z
Fig. 3.4.6.2 (b) Estimation Details Screen (Alarm Information)
284
B-64644EN/08
Also note that, when you select the program on which the alarm occurred, the
area where the alarm occurred will be displayed.
• To estimate the cycle time of a program displaying alarm information,
 take an appropriate action according to the alarm and restart from

updating estimation data. For details about alarm numbers and alarm
1
MEMO messages, see "Maintenance Manual" and "Operation Maintenance
Guidelines".
2
 Switching between the display units
On the Estimation Details Screen, the cutting distance and rapid traverse distance 3
are displayed in the unit of "mm" or "inch". Perform the following to operate display
units:
4
To switch from mm to inch
<1> Press the [inch] soft key. 5
The display unit switches to inch.
6
To switch from inch to mm
7
<1> Press the [mm] soft key.
The display unit switches to mm.
8
A1
 Switching chart display
The Estimation Details Screen displays charts by default. You can also hide the
charts. A2
<1> To hide charts, press the [Chart Display Off] soft key. Z
Charts will not be displayed. To display the charts again, press the [Chart
Display On] soft key.
285
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
286
4
OPERATING THE 1
MACHINING AREA 2
3
4
5
You can use applications for machining such as Machine Collision Avoidance
function (used to detect machine collision beforehand) and Remote iPendant
(used to monitor iPendant screen).
6
4.1 MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION .............................. 288
4.2 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION ......................................... 311
A
4.3 Remote iPendant ................................................................................ 363
287
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 4 OPERATING THE MACHINING AREA 
4.1 MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
4.1
4.1 MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE

FUNCTION
1
4.1.1 Overview of the Machine Collision Avoidance Func-
2 4.1.1
tion
The machine collision avoidance function is an optional function to stop the
machine beforehand when detecting interactive interference with the machine,
3 blank, or jig to prevent damage on the machine.
To use this function, you need to have the following options:

4 • 3D interference check by PC functions (-R542)
• Machine collision avoidance function (A02B-0207-J921)
5
This function supports the following indicators:
6 • PANEL iH Pro
7  • This function cannot be used in 0i-F Plus.

MEMO
8
 Definition of terms
The major terms used to explain this function are shown in the table below:
A1 Table 4.1.1 Terms for Machine Collision Avoidance Function
Item Definition
A2 Model file A file of various forms (STL, DXF, etc.) created by CAD that can be
used for detail edit for blanks and jigs.
Machine model A 3D machine model created by the machine tool builder
Z Blank A blank on the actual machine to be defined by a machine user
beforehand in order to use the machine collision avoidance function
Jig A jig on the actual machine to be defined by a machine user
beforehand in order to use the machine collision avoidance function
288
B-64644EN/08
4.1.2 Setting and Operating the Machine Collision Avoid-

ance Function
4.1.2
The setting and operation flow of the machine collision avoidance function are
shown in the figure below:
1
Performed
Action item Reference
by
Create a 3D machine model “SETUP MANUAL” 2.5.61 2
Prepare for definition of blanks and
jigs
“SETUP MANUAL” 2.5.61
2
Machine
tool builder
(MTB)
Set the common items “SETUP MANUAL” 2.5.63
4
Set the machine configuration “SETUP MANUAL” 2.5.64
5
Set for each path “SETUP MANUAL” 2.5.65
Define blanks and jigs "4.1.3 Defining Blanks and Jigs" 6

Machine Set the common items
"4.1.4.1 Setting the common
items"
7
user
Monitor the machine collision "4.1.5 Monitoring the Machine 8

avoidance Collision Avoidance"
Fig. 4.1.2 Setting and Operation Flow of the Machine Collision Avoidance
Function A1
A2
 • For settings to be made by the machine tool builder, contact the
machine tool builder.
MEMO
Z
4.1.3 Defining Blanks and Jigs
4.1.3
This manual describes how to define blanks and jigs on the machine collision
avoidance screen assuming that the machine tool builder settings have been
completed beforehand.
Opening the FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance screen

Press [COLLISION AVOIDANCE] on the Home screen.
289
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4 Fig. 4.1.3 (a) FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance screen
To define blanks and jigs, you can use one of the following methods:
5 • Simple Edit: Simply defines blanks and jigs without a mouse or touch panel.
Note that you cannot use a model file for this method.
6 • Detail Edit: Defines details of blanks and jigs with a mouse or touch panel. You
can use model files in forms such as STL and DXF.
7
 • When you use the machine collision avoidance function for the first
time, blanks and jigs are not defined. Be sure to define blanks and
MEMO jigs before setting the machine collision avoidance function.
8
 FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance screen
A1 On the FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance screen, you can perform the
following operations:
A2 • Define tools and jigs

• Set the common items of the machine collision avoidance function
Z • Monitor machine collision
290
B-64644EN/08
A B
1
2
2
4
C 5
Fig. 4.1.3 (b) FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance screen
6
Table 4.1.3 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Machine Collision
Avoidance Function Screen 7
Name Description
A NC information
display area
Displays the selected path number (only for multiple paths), the
machine coordinate values, and the running program. 8
B Simulation area Performs a simulation based on the 3D machine model and the
preview position of the machine.
If a collision is detected, objects involved in interference appear A1
in red.
For details, see "4.1.5 Monitoring the Machine Collision
Avoidance". A2
Z
291
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
C Horizontal soft keys (First Page) (operations for the entire screen)
[Next Coord.] This key appears for five or more axes and when pressed,
allows you to see the coordinate values of sixth and
1 [Disable Check]
subsequent axes in the NC information display area.
Disables the detection of a collision.
Use this key to start the machine after a collision occurred.
2 If the check function is enabled, an interference is detected
after each start of the machine, preventing it from working.
Each pressing of this key toggles [Enable Check] and [Disable
3 [Cancel Alarm]
Check].
Cancels the alarm raised if a collision is detected.
[Edit] Defines blanks and jigs in simple edit. (You can do that without
4 a mouse or touch panel.)
For details, see "4.1.3.1 Simple edit for blanks and jigs".
[Detail Edit] Defines blanks and jigs with a mouse or touch panel.
5 For details, see "4.1.3.2 Detail edit for blanks and jigs".
[Settings] Sets the common items of the machine collision avoidance
function.
6 For details, see "4.1.4.1 Setting the common items".
[Reset Blank] Resets the blanks on the simulation screen to their initial
states.
7 [End] Ends the machine collision avoidance function.
Horizontal soft keys (second page-1) (simulation area: 3D model operations)
8 [Zoom In]
[Zoom Out]
Zooms in or out of the 3D model with the center of the screen
as a base point.
[Auto (Fit)] Automatically adjusts the display size so that the whole 3D
A1 model is displayed on the screen.
[Rotate/Move] Switches to the Rotation/Move page (second page-2).
Horizontal soft keys (second page-2) (simulation area: Rotation/Move operations)
A2 [Rotate Left] Rotates the 3D model in the arrow directions with the center of
[Rotate Up] the screen as a base point.
Z [Rotate Right]
[Rotate Down]
[Move Left] Moves the 3D model in the arrow directions with the center of
[Move Right] the screen as a base point.
[Move Up]
[Move Down]
[Back] Returns back to the horizontal soft keys (second page-1).
Horizontal soft keys (Third Page) (for the simulation area: 3D model operations)
[Save Geometry] Saves the geometry of a material being cut. You can restart
machining using the saved material geometry next time.
[Cancel Save] Resets the geometry saved in [Save Geometry] to the default.
292
B-64644EN/08
• The 3D machine models created by the machine tool builder have

been registered.
• In general, the machine tool builder configures the contents of
[Settings]. You do not need to change them.
• A simulation area appears only when a 3D machine model exists. If 1
it does not appear, contact the machine tool builder (MTB).
• [Zoom In], [Zoom Out], [Rotation], and [Move] are enabled when
 automatic operating signals (STL) for all paths are turned off in the 2
MDI, MEM, RMT, and EDIT modes.
MEMO • You can also use a mouse or touch panel to operate the [Zoom In],
[Zoom Out], [Rotation], and [Move] soft keys.
• The [Zoom In], [Zoom Out], [Rotation], and [Move] horizontal soft
2
key operations are performed with the center of the screen as a
base point.
• The horizontal soft keys are disabled (grayed out) while the
4
corresponding functions are being executed, and thus operation is
impossible.
5
4.1.3.1 Simple edit for blanks and jigs
4.1.3.1
This section describes an example of how you define a blank.

6
You can define a jig in the same way.
7
 • In simple edit, you cannot use a model file.
MEMO
8
<1> Press the [Edit] soft key. A1
A2
<2> Press the [Add Blank] soft key. Z
The Add Blank Shape screen appears.
293
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6 <3> Set each item.
Item Description Initial
value
7 Parent Select the parent part to which the blank is connected. -
Part (Names cannot be changed.)
8 Model
Name
Select a blank geometry from Block, Cone, and Cylinder.
Enter the name of the blank.
Block
None
Dimensi Specify the dimensions for each model. None
A1 ons • Block: Length/Width/Height
• Cone: Height/Lower Radius/Upper Radius
• Cylinder: Height/Radius
A2 Color Select one of the following:

• Inherit from Parts: Indicates the color set for the part.
None
• Color 1 to 3: Indicates the colors set on the [Color] tab on the

Z Machine Collision Avoidance Function Settings screen (see
""4.1.4.1 Setting the common items"").
Position Specify the position of the blank using coordinates (X, Y, and Z). X=0
Y=0
Z=0
Rotation Specify the position of the blank as the rotation angles of X, Y, and Z X = 0
axes. Y=0
Z=0

The blank is defined according to the settings made in step <3>.
<5> Repeat steps <1> through <4> to define all necessary blanks.
294
B-64644EN/08
 Modifying the defined blanks and jigs

This section describes an example of how you modify a jig.
You can modify a blank in the same way.
The horizontal soft key display changes. 1
2
<2> Press the [Modify Jig] soft key.
The Modify Jig Shape screen appears. 2
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
<3> In [Jig List], select the jig that you want to modify.
<4> Set all items to be modified.
Z
The changes are reflected.
• When you press the [Cancel] soft key, you can exit the screen
 without reflecting the changes.
• If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to
MEMO
the error item.
 Deleting blanks and jigs

This section describes an example of how you delete a defined blank.
You can delete a jig in the same way.
295
B-64644EN/08

1
<2> Press the [Delete Blank] soft key.
2 The Blank List screen appears.

<3> Change the parent part in the [Parent Parts] list as necessary.
3
4
5
6
7
<4> Select a blank to be deleted from the blank list.
8 <5> Press the [Delete Shape] soft key.
A1
A2 The selected blank is deleted.
Z  • When you press the [Cancel] soft key, you can exit the list display
and return back to the last list of soft keys.
MEMO
4.1.3.2 Detail edit for blanks and jigs

You can define details of blanks (Stock) and jigs (Fixture) with a mouse or touch
4.1.3.2
panel.
In detail edit, you can use model files in forms such as STL and DXF.
 Define blanks and jigs

This section describes how you add a cylinder as a blank.
To add types except entering values of dimensions, you can define blanks and jigs
in the same way.
296
B-64644EN/08
• Enable the [Detail Edit] soft key beforehand. To enable this soft
key, check the [[Detail Edit] of Blank/Jig Enabled] checkbox on the
 [Common] tab of the Machine Collision Avoidance Function
MEMO
Settings screen (see ""4.1.4.1 Setting the common items"").
• To add a blank (model), be sure to specify its name. 1
When operated for the first time, you need to set the name
beforehand.
2
<1> Press [COLLISION AVOIDANCE] on the Home screen.
A machine collision avoidance function screen appears. 2
4
<2> Press the [Detail Edit] soft key.
The detail edit screen appears. 5
6
A 7
C
8
B
A1
A2
Name Description Z
A Project tree Adds/modifies/deletes blanks and jigs.
B Setting area Sets each item for blanks and jigs.
C View area Allows you to check the added/modified/deleted blanks and
jigs.
297
B-64644EN/08
<3> In the project tree, click [Stock] (for blanks) or [Fixture] (for jigs) (shown in [1] in
the figure below) and then select a blank geometry from the pulldown list for
[Add Model] (shown in [2] in the figure below).
1
2
3 1
4
5
6
7 2
8
For example, when you select [Cylinder], the setting area will be changed as
A1 shown below.
A2
Z
<4> On the [Component] tab, enter values in [Type], [Height], and [Radius] (for
Cylinder).
The blank geometry is defined and displayed in the view area.
298
B-64644EN/08
1
2
2
4
<5> To move the part, specify the position on the [Move] tab. 5
Here shows an example that [Show Location Relative to Parent] is selected
and [0 0 50] is entered in the edit box where the position is specified. This
means that the part is moved by only 50 in the +Z direction.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<6> Repeat steps <3> through <5> to define all necessary blanks.
 Editing tools and tool holders

On the Tool Manager screen, edit tools and tool holders.
Editing tools
<1> Press the [Detail Edit] soft key.
The detail edit screen appears.
299
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4 <2> Double-click [Tools] in the project tree.
<3> Double-click the tool that you want to edit.
5 A screen appears for you to define the tool geometry.
6
7
8
A1
A2
<4> Enter all values of the dimensions of necessary tools.
Z The tool information is edited.
Editing tool holders

<1> Perform steps <1> through <2> described in the previous section "Editing
tools".
<2> Double-click the tool holder that you want to edit.
A screen appears for you to define the tool holder.
300
B-64644EN/08
1
2
2
4
<3> Enter all specifications of necessary tool holders.
The tool holder information is edited. 5
 • You can also use the tool manager function to output files (xxxx.tls)
that can be used in the tool manager.
6
MEMO
7
4.1.4 Setting the Machine Collision Avoidance Function
8
4.1.4
After defining tools and jigs, the common items of the machine collision avoidance
function are set.
 • To apply changed settings, you need to restart the machine

A1
collision avoidance function.
MEMO
A2
4.1.4.1 Setting the common items
4.1.4.1
Necessary items are set on the Common and Color tabs of the Machine Collision Z
Avoidance Function Settings screen.
<1> Press [COLLISION AVOIDANCE] on the Home screen.
A machine collision avoidance function screen appears.
<2> Press the [Settings] soft key.

301
B-64644EN/08
<3> Press the [Common Settings] soft key.

1 The Machine Collision Avoidance Function Settings screen appears.
2
3
4
5 <4> Display the [Common] tab to set necessary items.
6 Item
Auto Preview Time (msec)
Description
Set the preview time for automatic and
Initial value
50
manual operations (setting range: 0 to 600 milliseconds
7 Manual Preview Time (msec) milliseconds). 50

milliseconds
Update Interval (msec) Set the update interval of a simulation 300
8 (setting range: 128 milliseconds or more). milliseconds
[Detail Edit] of Blank/Jig Enables the [Detail Edit] soft key for blanks Cleared
Enabled and jigs.
A1 [Machine Setting] Enabled Enables the machine setting. Cleared
CNC Alarm Canceled by Cancels the CNC alarm at the same time Cleared
Cancel Alarm when canceling the alarm raised if a
A2 collision is detected.
To use this function, parameter No. 8100#0
(RST) must be set to 0.
Z With this setting, reset is enabled for all
paths in the same machine group.
• When you enable the machine configuration settings, the machine

NOTE
configuration and individual path settings will be displayed. However,
please do not change the settings, as the machine may operate
unexpectedly. Machine configuration settings will be set by the
machine tool builders.
302
B-64644EN/08
 • If you press the [Select Check] soft key when the checkbox is focused,
you can enable/disable the setting items for .
MEMO
1
<5> Display the [Color] tab to set necessary items.
2
2
4
5
Item Description Initial value
Blank Color 1 Specify Blank Color 1 to 3 in RGB (setting range: 0 to 240/220/130 6
Blank Color 2 255). 240/220/190
These settings will be displayed as the setting values
Blank Color 3
for Color 1 to 3 on the Add Blank Shape screen.
240/180/130
7
Jig Color 1 Specify Jig Color 1 to 3 in RGB (setting range: 0 to 220/200/170
Jig Color 2 255). 190/190/190
Jig Color 3
These settings will be displayed as the setting values
for Color 1 to 3 on the Add Jig Shape screen.
90/90/90
8
<6> Display the [Position] tab to set necessary items.

A1
A2
Z
303
B-64644EN/08
Item Description Initial value

Offset Turning Tool Offsets Z and X at the gauge point, which are Cleared
Attaching Position set in the tool manager, at tool change based
1 on the CNC offset information as shown
below:
• Z = Geometry offset (Z) + Z axis offset value
2 • X = Geometry offset (X) + X axis offset value

The same number as the tool number is used
as the offset number.
Note:The compensated data will not be
3 reflected to the data in the tool manager.
1st Turret Offset Value Sets the offset values for Z and X axes for the -
1st turret.
4 Note:The turret for path 1 shall be the 1st
turret.
Z Axis Offset Value Sets the Z axis offset value. 0.0
5 X Axis Offset Value Sets the X axis offset value. 0.0
2nd Turret Offset Value Sets the offset values for Z and X axes for the -
6 2nd turret.
Note:The turret for path 2 shall be the 2nd
turret.
7 Z Axis Offset Value

X Axis Offset Value
Sets the Z axis offset value.
Sets the X axis offset value.
0.0
0.0
Offset Milling Tool Offsets the tool diameter, which is set in the Cleared
8 Radius tool manager, at tool change based on the
CNC offset information as shown below:
• Tool diameter = Tool diameter offset x 2
A1 The same number as the tool number is used

as the offset number.
Note:The compensated data will not be
A2 reflected to the data in the tool manager.
<7> When all settings are completed, press the [OK] soft key.
Z The settings are confirmed and the setting screen is closed.
• When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the setting changes will not be
 reflected.
• If input data is incorrect, a message appears, moving the focus to the
MEMO
error item.
304
B-64644EN/08
4.1.5 Monitoring the Machine Collision Avoidance

4.1.5
Machine collision detection is monitored in the simulation area.

If a machine collision is detected, the tool and jig involved in interference and the
coordinate values of the axes, which were moving at the time of the interference,
appear in red.
1
The coordinate values of the
axes at the time of the
interference appear in red. 2
The tool and jig interfere with
each other (both appear in red).
2
4
Fig. 4.1.5 Display Example When a Collision is Detected

5
With NC parameter No. 10926#0 (O3A), you can specify whether to display the 6
alarm or interlock the NC when a collision is detected.
If you specify alarm display (No. 10926#0 (O3A) set to 0), the messages listed
below appear for the direction of the axis that was moving at the time of collision 7
detection.
Table 4.1.5 Alarms Raised If a Collision Is Detected
Number Message Description
8
OT0516 (n)+COLLISION DETECT(PC) The interference of the axis n was
detected when it was moving to the +
direction.
A1
OT0517 (n)-COLLISION DETECT(PC) The interference of the axis n was
detected when it was moving to the - A2
direction.
Z
 • To cancel the alarm, press the [Cancel Alarm] soft key and then
<RESET>.
MEMO
If you specify interlock (No. 10926#0 (O3A) set to 1), the direction of the axis,
which was moving at the time of collision detection, enters an interlock state.
Immediately after you press the [Cancel Alarm] soft key, the interlock
! state is canceled.
CAUTION Note that when you cancel the interlock state under automatic
operation, the machine may operate unexpectedly.
305
B-64644EN/08
4.1.6 Limitations, Constraints, and Precautions

4.1.6
4.1.6.1 Limitations
4.1.6.1
 Background operation and machine locked

1 You cannot check the machine collision avoidance function under background
operation or in the machine locked state.
2  Effects by other applications

The function may not be able to detect a collision correctly due to the usage of
3 CPUs or memory of other applications running on PANEL iH Pro. Before using the
machine collision avoidance function, thoroughly check the operation.
If there is not enough memory available to the machine collision avoidance
4 function, applications may stop.
 Connection Method
5 The machine collision avoidance function supports only a connection over HSSB,
not over Ethernet.
6 4.1.6.2 Constraints
4.1.6.2
 Cycle time
7 During collision monitoring, it may take more time to perform the following high
speed and high precision related functions (more cycle time required).
8 • AI contour control II
• High-speed processing
A1  Supported functions for preview coordinate value output

Functions where preview coordinate value output is supported are as shown in the
A2 figure below:
306
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.1.6.2 (a) Functions Where Preview Coordinate Value Output is Supported
Category Function name
General Positioning (G00) (*1) Feed axis synchronization control
Linear interpolation (G01) Dry run
Dwell (G04) Jog feed 1
Arc interpolation (G02/G03) Manual handle feed
Helical interpolation (G02/G03)
Polar coordinate interpolation
Single block
Incremental feed
2
(G12.1/G13.1)
Cylinder interpolation (G07.1) Rotary axis control 2
Threading and synchronization 3D coordinate transformation
feed
Drilling fixed cycle Coordinate rotation 4
Chamfering ON/OFF Restart of programs
Rigid tap
Uniform peripheral speed control
Programmable mirror image
Scaling
5
Balance cut One-way positioning
Synchronization and mixture Manual handle interruption (It 6
control supports a feed per minute or per
rotation for the above
interpolations.) 7
Functions Tool tip control (*2) Tool axial direction control
related to five
axes
3D manual feed
3D tool diameter offset
Inclined surface machining
command 8
Others Inclined axis control (*3)
(*1) Set the value specified in the linear interpolation type positioning (parameter A1
LRP (No. 1401#1) = 1).
(*2) Under tool tip control, preview coordinate values are not output when the
following functions are executed: A2
Only current coordinate values are output.
• Cut point command (G43.8) Z
• Tool attitude control
(*3) For the inclined axis under inclined axis control and the orthogonal axes, their
current and preview coordinate values are output as machine coordinate
values that are actually moving along the inclined axis.
 Unsupported functions for preview coordinate value output (support only

current coordinate values)
While the functions listed below are executed, only current coordinate values of
the servo control axis are output, not the preview position.
307
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.1.6.2 (b) Unsupported functions for preview coordinate value output
Function name
Interlock Polygon machining Real-time custom macro
Machine lock Threading cycle retract Spindle positioning
1 Follow-up in an emergency PMC control axis Chopping function
stop or servo off
Manual handle retrace Removal of the control axis Retrace
2
Output of preview coordinate values when the buffering suppression block
3 is executed
The read ahead system calculates preview coordinate values. However, the read
ahead stops when the buffering suppression block is executed, and preview
4 coordinate values cannot be output. When the next block of the buffering
suppression block starts, the axis starts to move while preview coordinate values
after the preview time are output.
5 As shown in the figure below, interference may occur depending on an
intermediate route.
6 Endpoint of the buffering

suppression block
7 Actual moving route of the axis

at the start of the next block of
the buffering suppression
8 block
Original preview position at

A1 the start of the next block of
the buffering suppression
block (the position after the
A2 preview time is output)
Fig. 4.1.6.2 Actual moving route of the axis at the execution of buffering
suppression block
Z
• When parameter O3B (No. 10926#3) is set to 1, preview coordinate
values can be output at the start of the next block of the buffering
suppression block, and the axis can be interlocked until the preview
 time passes.
• Also, when parameter No. 10929 is set to the number of routes
MEMO
checked at the start of the next block of the buffering suppression
block, the axis can start after it is checked at the route position where
the preview time is divided by the number of routes.
308
B-64644EN/08
 Unsupported functions for preview coordinate value output

• β/βi with I/O Link
• Manual handle interface with I/O Link
• Torque control
• Electronic gear box
1
4.1.6.3
4.1.6.3
Precautions 2
 Processing macro statements
During the execution of the machine collision avoidance function, many NC
statements are buffered and processed to output preview coordinate values, as 2
with the execution of the pre-interpolation acceleration and deceleration process
or AI outline control function.
Macro statements are processed at the instant when buffered. The time at which 4
they are processed may depend on whether or not the machine collision
avoidance function is being executed.
When you want to perform a macro statement at the end of executing the last NC 5
statement, we recommend that you should command the M code (M00, M01,
M02, M30, or the M code specified in parameters No. 3411 to 3432) for
suppressing buffering immediately before the target macro statement. 6
Especially, to read and write system variables controlling signals, coordinate
values, and offset values, system variable values may depend on the time at
which the NC statement is executed. Command these M codes as necessary. 7
For details, see "II. PROGRAMMING" - "16.12 PROCESSING MACRO
STATEMENTS" in the "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B,
Series 32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System 8
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
 Error offset values

A1
During the execution of the machine collision avoidance function, error offset
values are not incorporated into current and preview coordinate values to be
output.
A2
 Tool offset values Z
During the execution of the machine collision avoidance function, tool length offset
and diameter offset values are incorporated into current and preview coordinate
values to be output.
 Position under tip control

When tool tip control is used during the execution of the machine collision
avoidance function, current and preview coordinate values represent the position
of the control point, not the tool tip.
309
B-64644EN/08
 Auxiliary functions
When an auxiliary function is commanded individually, the execution time of a
target block is considered as 0 to calculate preview coordinate values. Due to the
time taken for the sequence on the machine, if the machine stops until the FIN
signal is returned, a difference in preview time occurs.
1 When auxiliary functions such as M and T codes are individually commanded in a
row, the preview information of intermediate M and T codes may not be obtained.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
310
B-64644EN/08
4.2 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION
4.2
4.2 3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNC-

TION
1
4.2.1 Overview of the 3D Interference Check Function
2
4.2.1
The 3D interference check function is an optional function to stop the machine

beforehand when detecting interactive interference with the machine, workpiece,
or tool to prevent damage on the machine.
Built in the CNC device, the 3D interference check function is used to register
model figures, such as tools and workpieces, and update setting data to the CNC
2
device using the 3D interference check application.
The roles of the 3D interference check application and CNC device are as shown
in the figure below:
4
3D Interference Check CNC device

5
Application
Register a model figure 6

Set an axis Reflect settings
Set a check target combination
Monitor interference check

7
Perform target interference check
Control the machine when 8

interference is detected
Fig. 4.2.1 (a) Roles of 3D Interference Check Application and CNC Device
A1
This function supports the following indicators:
• PANEL iH A2
• PANEL iH Pro
Z
 • This function cannot be used in 0i-F Plus.
MEMO
To open the 3D interference check application, press [INTERFERENCE CHECK]

on the Home screen.
311
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 4.2.1 (b) Modeling Screen of 3D Check Interference Application
6  Definition of terms
The major terms used to explain this function are shown in the table below:
7
Table 4.2.1 Terms Used for 3D Interference Check Function
8 OBJECT
Term Definition
Refers to a machine component (spindle, table, chuck, jig, tailstock,
etc.) or workpiece.
A1 TOOL HOLDER
"Tool holder" and "tool" are distinguished from "interference object".
A collective term for turret, tool holder, turret, spindle head, etc.
Tool A collective term for cutter, byte, tool, etc.
A2 Model figure Defines interference objects, tool holders, and tools as the
interference check target.
It consists of some figures.
Z Geometry Consists of some figure elements.
Shape Contains position and size information and turns into a "figure
element" when it is set to be associated with a figure.
 Screen layout
The screen layout of the 3D interference check function is shown in the figure
below:
312
B-64644EN/08
3D interference check function
Monitor screen
Modeling screen Object name window 1

(Main screen) Moving axis setting window
Edit figure element window Edit shape window 2

Shape number selection window
Shape No. list slide Rotational movement amount input window 2

Interference check combination manager slide Parallel movement window
Setting slide Display settings window Change length window 4

Data import/export slide Drawing coordinates setting window Size input window
Diagonal point input window 5

Position input window
Fig. 4.2.1 (c) Screen Layout of 3D Interference Check Function 6

 • The main screen consists of the monitor screen and modeling screen,
and you can change the screen using the corresponding soft key. 7
MEMO • The default main screen can be specified in the setting file.
8
A1
A2
Z
313
B-64644EN/08
4.2.2 Setting and Operation Flow of the 3D Interference

Check Function
4.2.2
The setting and operation flow of the 3D interference check function is shown in
the figure below:
1
When creating a new figure model When using a created figure model
Action item Reference Action item Reference
2 Create the following model
figures
4.2.3 Input setting data
• Interference objects (jig, Import setting data created on
3 workpiece, etc.) another device and use it for
interference check instead of
4.2.6
performing the actions from
Set a moving axis 4.2.4
4 "Create model figures" to "Set
a check target combination"
Set a check target shown left
4.2.5
5 combination
Update the setting data 4.2.7 Update the setting data 4.2.7
6
Monitor interference check 4.2.8 Monitor interference check 4.2.8
7 Fig. 4.2.2 Setting and Operation Flow of the 3D Interference Check Function
8
A1
A2
Z
314
B-64644EN/08
4.2.3 Creating Model Figures

4.2.3
The number of definable model figures is as shown in the table below:
Table 4.2.3 (a) Number of Definable Model Figures

Model figure Number of definable model figures
1
TOOL HOLDER For single-path systems: 1
OBJECT
For multi-path systems: Up to 4
Up to 6
2
Up to 3 for single-path systems with parameter ENO (No. 10930#6) =
0
2
The configuration of model figures that can be created with this function is as
shown in the figure below: 4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
315
B-64644EN/08
Model figure Geometry Shape
TOOL 1 Figure n
1
2 TOOL 4
Figure n
3
1 per path
Automatically generated from

tool geometry dimension data
4 or tool compensation data
5
TOOL HOLDER 1 Figure n Shape n
Shape n
6
TOOL HOLDER 4
7 1 per path
Figure n Shape n
Up to 120 figures Shape n
8
A1
OBJECT 1 Figure n Shape n
Figure n Shape n
A2
Z OBJECT 6 Figure n Shape n
Shape n
Figure n
Up to 10 figures per interference Up to 150

object
Fig. 4.2.3 (a) Configuration of Model Figures That Can Be Created with This
Function
316
B-64644EN/08
• Registering multiple figures to a model figure for the following

situations increases the accuracy of interference check.
 Consider workpiece figure changes over machining.
For example, register different figures for before and after rough
MEMO
machining.
Register jigs with different figures. 1
 Modeling screen 2
The available operations in the modeling screen are as follows:
• Set an interference object and tool holder 2
• Add/edit a figure
To switch from the monitor screen to the modeling screen, press the [Modeling
4
Screen] soft key.
A B 5
6
7
E 8
A1
C
A2
D
Z
Fig. 4.2.3 (b) Modeling screen
Table 4.2.3 (b) Part Names and Functions in Modeling Screen

Name Function
A Interference object Displays model figures (interference objects, tool holders, and
list tools) and their component figures in a tree form.
The following items are displayed in the interference object list
and tool holder list according to the valid figure setting:
• Set: Model figure name + Valid figure name
• Not set: Model figure name + (Valid Figure Not Set)
317
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
B Interference object Draws a machine layout in three dimensions and displays its
drawing area origin axis (reference coordinate origin). For details, see
"Reference coordinate origin" described later.
1 The machine layout can be moved and rotated using the

touch panel.
C Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
2 D
area
Horizontal soft keys (First page)
Switches to the monitor screen.
3
[Monitor Screen]
4 Select one of the following in the interference object list or tool
holder list:
• (Add Figure): Displays the [Add Figure] soft key.
5 [Add Figure]/
[Edit Figure]
• Registered figure: Displays the [Edit Figure] soft key.
Either soft key opens the Edit Figure window.
Deletes the figure selected in the interference object list.

6 If you press the [OK] soft key on the delete confirmation
window, the selected figure is deleted.
[Delete Figure] After the figure is deleted, the cursor moves to the figure
7 below the deleted figure in the Interference Object list.
However, if the last figure is deleted when the maximum
number of figures has already been registered, the cursor
8 moves to (Add Figure).

To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
Makes the figure selected in the interference object list
A1 pastable.
[Copy]
A2 Makes the figure selected in the interference object list

pastable and deletes it after it is pasted.
Z [Cut]
Pastes the copied or cut figure.
[Paste]
Sets the figure selected in the interference object list valid.
When the valid figure is set, "" (check mark) is displayed in
the figure name in the interference object list.
[Valid Figure]
Opens the Object Name window.
[Object Name]
318
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
The Moving Axis Setting window appears.
[Moving Axis]
Horizontal soft keys (Second page)
1
Adjusts the size automatically so that the 3D model fits into
the window. 2
[Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings. 2
[Zoom In] 4
Decreases the magnification of the drawings.
5
[Zoom Out]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement.
For details, see "Parallel movement soft keys" described later.
6
[Move]
7
Changes the graphic operation using the touch panel.
Every time you press the key, the operation is toggled
between rotational movement and parallel movement
8
[Change Operation] (default).
For details on touch panel operation, see " Graphic
operations from the touch panel" of "4.2.8 Monitoring
Interference Check". A1
Switches to the row of soft keys used for fixed rotation.
For details, see "Fixed rotation soft keys" described later.
A2
[Fixed Rotation]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation.
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" described later.
Z
[Arbitrary Rotation]
Switches the drawing area from single display to quad display.
For details, see "Quad display of the interference object
drawing area" described later.
[Quad Display]
Switches the drawing area from quad display to single display.
[Single Display]
319
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Vertical soft keys Displays the soft keys to switch to the slides.
Displays the Setting slide.
1 [Setting Slide]
Displays the Shape No. List slide.
2
[Shape No. List]
3 Displays the Interference Check Combination Manager slide.
4 [Interference Check
Combination
Manager]
5 Displays the Data Import/Export slide.
6 [Data Import/Export]
7 • Model figures with [Edit Figure] set to "Invalid" in the Display Settings
window are not displayed in the interference object list (but displayed
8  in the interference object drawing area).

For details, contact the machine tool builder.
MEMO
• If parameter ICD (No. 10930#1) is set to 1, figure names are not
displayed in the tool list of the interference object list.
A1
A2 Parallel movement soft keys
When you press the [Move] soft key, the parallel movement soft keys appear.
The position and action of each parallel movement soft key is as follows:
Z
Fig. 4.2.3 (c) Parallel Movement Soft Keys
320
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.3 (c) Parallel Movement Soft Keys

Name Function
Moves the 3D model upward.
1
[Upper]
Moves the 3D model downward.
2
[Lower]
Moves the 3D model leftward.
2
[Left]
4
Moves the 3D model rightward.
5
[Right]
Moves the center of the 3D model to the center. 6
[Center]
7
Fixed rotation soft keys 8

When you press the [Fixed Rotation] soft key, the fixed rotation soft keys appear.
The position and action of each fixed rotation soft key is as follows:
A1
A2
Fig. 4.2.3 (d) Fixed Rotation Soft Keys
Z
Table 4.2.3 (d) Fixed Rotation Soft Keys
Name Function
Selects the XY plane.
[XY]
Selects the ZY plane.
[ZY]
321
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Selects the YZ plane.
1 [YZ]
Selects the XZ plane.
2 [XZ]
Selects the ZX plane.
3
[ZX]
4 Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward.
5 [Isometric XY]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Z axis faces upward
and has the opposite view.
6
[Isometric XY]
7 Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +X axis faces upward.
8 [Isometric YZ]
Selects the isometric coordinates in which the +Y axis faces upward.
A1 [Isometric ZX]
A2 Free rotation soft keys

When you press the [Free Rotation] soft key, the free rotation soft keys appear.
The position and action of each free rotation soft key is as follows:
Z
Fig. 4.2.3 (e) Free Rotation Soft Keys
322
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.3 (e) Free Rotation Soft Keys

Name Function
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the right
side of the screen.
[Upper]
1
Rotates the 3D model in a counterclockwise direction viewed from the
right side of the screen. 2
[Lower]
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the top of 2
the screen.
[Left] 4
top of the screen.
5
[Right]
Rotates the 3D model in a clockwise direction viewed from the front.
6
[CW]
7
front.
[CCW]
8
Quad display of the interference object drawing area A1

When you press the [Quad Display] soft key, the interference object drawing area
is divided into four.
You can check an interference object from four views simultaneously. A2
To return to the full-screen display, press the [Single Display] soft key.
323
B-64644EN/08
Top view Solid view

1
2
3
Front view Right side
4 view
5
Fig. 4.2.3 (f) Quad Display of Interference Object Drawing Area
6
Operations in the interference object list
7 • To select a figure, press the <↑> and <↓> keys.

The selected figure turns to the selection color (reddish) in the interference
object drawing area.
8 • To expand or collapse the tree, press the <Space> key.
Reference Coordinate Origin

A1 The reference coordinate origin (shown in the red circle below) is displayed in the
origin axis of a machine layout drawn in the interference object drawing area.
A2
Z
Fig. 4.2.3 (g) Reference Coordinate Origin
 Flow of Model Figure Definition

To include a model figure in interference check, it needs to be defined.
The flow of model figure definition is as follows:
324
B-64644EN/08
Action item Reference

Set a model figure name " Setting a model figure name"
Add a figure to the model

figure
" Adding a figure" 1
Add a shape to the figure

• " Adding a shape (new shape)"
• " Adding a shape (by copying)"
2
• " Adding a shape (using the Shape No. List slide)"
2
Set the added shape " Setting the shape"
Fig. 4.2.3 (h) Flow of Model Figure Definition

4
 Setting a model figure name
Using the Object Name window, set the name of a model figure (interference
5
object, tool holder, or tool).
 • To use this function, parameter ICD (No.10930#1) must be set to 0.

6
MEMO
7
To open the Object Name window 8
In the interference object list on the modeling screen, select a model figure and
press the [Object Name] soft key.
A A1
B C
A2
Fig. 4.2.3 (i) Object name window
Z
Table 4.2.3 (f) Part Names and Functions in Object Name Window
Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the window.
B Name Select the name of a model figure (interference object, tool
holder, or tool).
For details on the number corresponding to each name, see
the next table "Number Corresponding to Each Model Figure
Name".
C Suffix Adds a suffix to the name.
Range: 0 to 9 (If "0" is specified, a suffix is not displayed.)
325
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.3 (g) Number Corresponding to Each Model Figure Name

Num Model figure name
ber OBJECT TOOL HOLDER Tool
1 0 Following default names Following default names Following default names
• T-type • T-type: TURRET • T-type: CUTTER
OBJECT 1, 4: • M-type: TOOL HOLDER • M-type: TOOL
2 WORKPIECE
OBJECT 2, 5: CHUCK
OBJECT 3, 6:
3 SPINDLE
• M-type
OBJECT 1, 4:
4 WORKPIECE
OBJECT 2, 5: JIG
OBJECT 3, 6: TABLE
5 1 SPINDLE TURRET CUTTER

2 TABLE TOOL HOLDER BYTE
3 WORKPIECE TURRET Tool
6 4 CHUCK SPINDLE HEAD -
5 JIG - –
7 6 TAILSTOCK - –
7 TOOL HOLDER - –
8 STRUCTURE - –
8 9 OBJECT - –
10 WORK HEAD - –
A1 11 WORK LIMIT - –
A2 • For complex systems under multi-path control, the default names of

the machine control type on each path are used for the default TOOL
and TOOL HOLDER names.
Z For the default OBJECT name, however, the default name on M-type
 is used if all paths are set to M-type or the default name on T-type is
used if at least one of all paths is set to T-type.
MEMO • To update the setting changes to the CNC device, one of the following
operations must be performed:
Turn on the CNC device again.
Change the signal (TDICHG<G519.4>) to change the 3D
interference check settings to "1".
326
B-64644EN/08
To set a model figure name

<1> Select the model figure name from [Name] in the Object Name window.
<2> Specify a suffix as necessary.
The model figure name is set.
1
 Adding a figure 2
To add a figure to the model figure, perform the following:
<1> In the interference object list on the modeling screen, expand the OBJECT or
TOOL HOLDER tree and select "(Add Figure)".
2
4
5
6
• For details on operations in the interference object list, see "
7
 Modeling screen" described earlier.
• When the number of added figures reaches the upper limit, "(Add
MEMO Figure)" is not displayed.
For details, see "Table 4.2.3 (a) Number of Definable Model Figures". 8
<2> Press the [Add Figure] soft key or <INPUT> key. A1
The figure is added and displayed in the interference object list.
• Sequential numbers are assigned to the names of added figures,

starting from 1. If some middle numbers are available after figures
A2
 were deleted, these are assigned to figure names in ascending order.
MEMO
• Figure names cannot be changed.
• After a figure is added, the cursor moves to the added figure in the
Z
Interference Object list.
 Adding a shape (new shape)

Use the Edit Figure window to add a new shape to the figure.
327
B-64644EN/08
To open the Edit Figure window

<1> In the interference object list on the modeling screen, expand the OBJECT or
TOOL HOLDER tree and select "FIGURE n" (n; 1, 2, 3, ...).
1  • For details on operations in the interference object list, see "

Modeling screen" described earlier.
MEMO
2
<2> Press the [Edit Figure] soft key or the <INPUT> key.
The Edit Figure window appears.
3
A
4
B
5
D
6
C
7
8 E
A1 F
A2
Name Function
Z A
B
Title display
Figure list
Displays the title of the window.
Displays the list of figure elements (shapes) that make up of
each figure.
"(Cannot Edit)" may be displayed depending on the setting of
[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings
window. For details, contact the machine tool builder.
C Shape setting list/ Displays the setting values of the figure element (shape) or
figure setting list figure selected in the figure list.
For details on the displayed contents when a figure is
selected, see " Setting the figure reference" described
earlier.
D Figure display area Draws a figure in three dimensions.
E Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
328
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
F Horizontal soft keys
Select one of the following in the figure list:
• (Not Set): Displays the [Add Element] soft key.
[Add Element]/
• Registered shape: Displays the [Edit Element] soft key.
Either soft key opens the Edit Shape window.
1
[Edit Element]
Deletes the figure element selected in the figure list.
If you press the [OK] soft key on the delete confirmation
2
window, the selected figure element is deleted.
[Delete Element] To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
2
Makes the shape selected in the figure list pastable.
4
[Copy]
Makes the shape selected in the figure list pastable and
deletes it after it is pasted. 5
[Cut]
Pastes the copied or cut shape.
6
[Paste]
7
The input support soft keys are displayed.
For details, see " Editing shapes" described later. 8
[Input Support]
A1
 • [Delete Element] only resets the association between the figure and
shape and does not delete the original shape of the figure element. A2
MEMO
To add a new shape to the figure

Z
<1> In the figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
select "(Not Set)".
329
B-64644EN/08
<2> Press the [Add Element] soft key.

The Edit Shape window opens.
For details on subsequent operations, see " Editing shapes" described earlier.
1  Adding a shape (by copying)

To copy a registered shape and add it as a new shape, perform the following:
<1> In the figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
2 select "SHAPE n" (n: 1, 2, 3, ...) in the copy source.
3
4
5 <2> Press the [Copy] or [Cut] soft key.
<3> Press the <↑> and <↓> keys and select "FIGURE n" (n: 1, 2, 3, ...) in the copy
6 destination.
<4> Press the [Paste] soft key.
7 The shape number selection window is displayed.
8
A1
A2  • If you press the [Cut] soft key in step <2>, the shape in the copy
source is deleted.
MEMO
Z
<5> Enter the number (Range: 1 to 150) of a new shape you want to add in [Shape
No.].
• The shape number range varies depending on the setting of

[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings window. For
details, contact the machine tool builder.
 • You can select the number of a registered shape (with "" (check
mark) shown in [Register Shape]), but the original shape is
MEMO
overwritten.
• You cannot select the number of a registered figure element (with
"" (check mark) shown in [Register Figure Element]).
330
B-64644EN/08

The figure element (shape) is set in the Edit Figure window.
If the overwrite confirmation window appears, press the [OK] soft key to set the
figure element (shape) to the Edit Figure window (the original shape is
overwritten).
<7> With the copied figure element (shape) selected, press the [Edit Element] soft
1
key.
The Edit Shape window opens. 2
For details on subsequent operations, see " Editing shapes" described earlier.
 Adding a shape (using the Shape No. List slide) 2

The Shape No. List slide allows you to perform the following operations:
• Add a new shape 4
• Edit/delete a registered shape
To open the Shape No. List slide 5

In the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Shape No. List] vertical soft
key.
6
A
7
8
C
B A1
A2
D E
Z
F
Fig. 4.2.3 (j) Shape No. list slide
Table 4.2.3 (h) Part Names and Functions in Shape No. List Slide
Name Function
A Title display Displays the title of the slide.
331
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
B Shape list Displays the following items:
• Shape No.: Shape type icon of the registered shape +
Shape number
1 Shape Type: Rect., Cylinder, Plane

If shape data is not set, the icon is not displayed.
If shape data is illegal, X mark is displayed in the icon.
Shape number range: 1 to 150 (It varies depending on the
2 setting of [Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display
Settings window.) For details, contact the machine tool
builder.
3 If one shape is registered to multiple figures, the shape
number is not displayed for the second and subsequent
figures.
4 • Interference Object Name: Name of the model figure to

which the shape is registered
• Figure No.: Figure number of the model figure to which the
shape is registered
5 C Shape drawing area Draws the shape selected in the shape list in three
dimensions.
6 D Message display
area
Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
E Shape search Enter a shape number to search.

7 F
number input area
Horizontal soft keys (First page)
Searches for the shape number entered in the shape search
8 number input area.
The following action is performed according to whether the
[Search Shape No.] searched shape number is found or not:
A1 • Shape number found: Highlights the matched shape
number in the shape list.
• Shape number not found: Displays a warning message.
A2 Select one of the following in the shape list:

• Unregistered shape number: Displays the [Add Shape] soft
key.
Z [Add Shape]/
[Edit Shape]
• Registered shape number: Displays the [Edit Shape] soft
key.
Either soft key opens the Edit Shape window.
Used for a shape not registered to a figure.
This key deletes the shape selected in the shape list.
If you press the [OK] soft key on the delete confirmation
[Delete Shape] window, the selected shape is deleted.
To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
Makes the shape selected in the shape list pastable.
[Copy]
332
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Used for a shape not registered to a figure.
This key makes the shape selected in the shape list pastable
and deletes it after it is pasted.
[Cut]
Pastes the copied or cut shape.
1
[Paste]
2
For details, see " Editing shapes" described later. 2
[Input Support]
Displayed when a shape number registered to a figure is 4
selected in the shape list. When you press this key, the Edit
Figure window opens.
[Edit Figure] 5
Horizontal soft keys (Second page)
the window. 6
[Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings.
7
[Zoom In]
8
A1
[Zoom Out]
Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement. A2
For details, see " Parallel movement soft keys" of "4.2.3
Creating Model Figures".
[Move] Z
Every time you press the key, the operation is toggled
For details on touch panel operation, see " Graphic
operations from the touch panel" of "4.2.8 Monitoring
Interference Check".
For details, see "Free rotation soft keys" of "4.2.3 Creating
Model Figures".
[Fixed Rotation]
333
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation.
Model Figures".
1 [Arbitrary Rotation]
2 [Quad Display]
drawing area" of "4.2.3 Creating Model Figures".

3
[Single Display]
4
To add a new shape to the figure
5 <1> In the shape list on the Shape No. List slide, press the <↑> and <↓> keys and
select an unregistered shape.
6 <2> Press the [Add Shape] soft key.

The Edit Shape window opens.
For details on subsequent operations, see " Setting the shape" described
7 earlier.
 Setting the shape

8 In the Edit Shape window, set the details of the following shapes:
• New shape added to the figure
A1 • Registered shape
A
A2 B
C
Z D
Fig. 4.2.3 (k) Edit shape window
334
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.3 (i) Part Names and Functions in Edit Shape Window
Name Function
A Title display Displays one of the following titles according to the window
opening operation (adding a new shape or editing a shape):
• Add Shape
• Edit Shape
1
B Shape No. Select the shape number (1 to 150).
However, it cannot be selected if this window is opened by
specifying a shape number in the Edit Figure window or the
2
Shape No. List slide.
The shape number range varies depending on the setting of
[Number of Displayed Shapes] in the Display Settings 2
window. For details, contact the machine tool builder.
C Shape Type Select "Rect.", "Cylinder", or "Plane" for the shape type.
If you change the type during shape edit, the setting data is 4
cleared (The confirmation message appears).
D Numeric Unit Select either of the following items as the numeric unit.
• "Machine": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the 5
machine.
• "Input": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
input data such as NC programs. 6
E Guide figure Displays a guidance map appropriate for the selected shape
type.
F Shape data input Set items appropriate for the selected shape type.
7
area For details on the setting items of each shape type, see the
next table.
G Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
8
area
A1
Table 4.2.3 (j) Setting Items of Each Shape Type
Shape
Type
Setting item Description A2
Rectangu Reference Specify the position of the reference vertex of the
lar
Parallele
Vertex rectangular parallelepiped using coordinates.
In 3D drawing, the coordinate axis of the reference vertex is
Z
piped displayed in this point.
Adjacent Vertex Specify the three points adjacent to the reference vertex
1, 2, 3 (relative position to the reference point) with coordinates.
Cylinder Start Point Specify the start point of the cylinder.
displayed in this point.
End Point Specify the end point (relative position to the start point)
with coordinates.
Radius Specify the radius of the cylinder.
335
B-64644EN/08
Shape Setting item Description

Type
Plane Free Point Specify the free point on the plane with coordinates.
1 Vertical Vector
displayed in this point.
Specify the plane by inputting a vector perpendicular to the
plane.
2 For example, to specify the ZY (YZ) plane, leave "0.000" in

the Y-axis and Z-axis input fields and enter any number
(except for "0", such as "1") in the X-axis input field.
3 To set a shape as a figure element of the figure

<1> Set each item in the Edit Shape window.
It returns to the Edit Figure window where you added or edited the shape or to
5 the Shape No. List slide.
<3> Repeat adding or editing a shape as necessary.
6  Editing shapes
You can perform the following edit operations on a registered shape.
7 Table 4.2.3 (k) Target Shape Types for Edit Operations
Edit operation Target shape type
8 Rotational movement Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder, plane
Parallel movement Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder, plane
Length change Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder
A1 Size input Rectangular parallelepiped, cylinder
Diagonal point input Rectangular parallelepiped that is parallel to the basic coordinates
A2 Position input
X, Y, and Z
Cylinder
Z To display the soft keys used to select edit methods, perform the following:
<1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, select the target figure
you want to edit.
<2> Press the [Edit Figure] soft key or the <INPUT> key.
The Edit Figure window appears.
• For details on the Edit Figure window, see " Adding a shape (new
 shape)".
• Alternatively, you can edit the shape from the Shape No. List slide.
MEMO For details on the Shape No. List. slide, see " Adding a shape
(using the Shape No. List slide)".
336
B-64644EN/08
<3> Press the [Input Support] soft key.

The positions and operations of the input support soft keys are as follows:
1
2
Name Function
Opens the Rotational Movement window (see "Rotational
movement"). 2
[Rotational
Movement] 4
Opens the Parallel Movement window (see "Parallel movement").
5
[Parallel
Movement]
Opens the Change Length window (see "Length change").
6
[Change Length]
7
Opens the Size Input window (see "Size input").
8
[Size Input]
Opens the Diagonal Point Input window (see "Diagonal point input"). A1
[Diagonal Input] A2
Opens the Position Input window (see "Position input").
Z
[Position Input]
Rotational movement
When you press the [Rotational Movement] soft key for input support, the
Rotational Movement amount input window opens.
Use this window to rotate the shape around each axis.
337
B-64644EN/08
B
1 C
D
2
Fig. 4.2.3 (l) Rotational movement amount input window
3 Table 4.2.3 (l) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rotational Movement
Window
4 Name Function
5 B Rotation Angle Specify the shape rotation angle around each coordinate axis.
Setting range: -360 to 360
C Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the rotation operation.
6 D Message display
area
To rotate the selected shape, specify the rotation angle for each coordinate axis
7 and press the [OK] soft key.
8  • When you rotate a shape n degrees in a certain direction and then

rotate it back n degrees (the same amount) in the opposite direction,
MEMO the shape may not return to its original orientation.
A1 If you perform a rotation operation for two or more axes simultaneously, you may
not achieve the shape/orientation you intended depending on the order the
A2 rotation operation was executed. In such a case, perform the rotation operation for
one axis at a time.
For example, to rotate the target shape 30 degrees around the X axis and 60
Z degrees around the Y axis, perform the following:
<1> On the Rotational Movement amount input window, enter 30 for [Around X
Axis].
The shape rotates 30 degrees around the X axis, and the Rotational Movement
window closes.
338
B-64644EN/08
<3> Press the [Rotational Movement] soft key to open the Rotational Movement
amount input window again.
<4> Enter 60 for [Around Y Axis].
The shape rotates 60 degrees around the Y axis, and the Rotational Movement 1
window closes.
Parallel movement
2
When you press the [Parallel Movement] soft key for input support, the Parallel
Movement amount input window opens.
Use this window to parallel move the shape relative to each axis.
2
A
4
B
C 5
D 6
Fig. 4.2.3 (m) Parallel movement window
7
Table 4.2.3 (m) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Parallel Movement
Window
Name Function
8
B Distance Specify the distance the shape should move relative to each A1
coordinate axis.
C Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the parallel operation.
D Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
A2
area
Z
To parallel move the selected shape, specify the distance for each coordinate axis
and press the [OK] soft key.
Length change
If the shape type is a rectangular parallelepiped or cylinder, when you press the
[Change Length] soft key for input support, the Change Length window opens.
Use this window to adjust the size of the shape.
339
B-64644EN/08
B
1 D
C
2 E
Change Length (Rect.) Window
3
A
4 B
5 C
D
6 E
Change Length (Cyl.) Window
7 Fig. 4.2.3 (n) Change length window
8 Table 4.2.3 (n) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Change Length
Windows
Name Function
A1 A Title display Displays the title of the window.
B Incremental Value • Enter the incremental value to change the length of the
currently set value.
A2 • If a negative value is entered, the shaped will be shortened.
• If you select the [Match the incremental values.] check box,
all input items will be the same value.
Z C Extension Direction Select the direction in which you want to change the length
from the following items.
• "Both Sides": Changes each length on the start point side
and end point side by the amount specified as the
incremental value.
• "Start Point Side": Changes the length on the start point side
by the amount specified as the incremental value, without
changing the end point side.
• "End Point Side": Changes the length on the end point side
by the amount specified as the incremental value, without
changing the start point side.
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the change length
operation.
340
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
area
To change the length of the selected shape, specify an incremental value for the
portion to be changed and press the [OK] soft key.
1

• Results of operations on the radius of a cylinder will be the same
regardless of the extension direction specified. 2
• You cannot set a negative incremental value in which its absolute
MEMO
value is equal to or greater than the size of the shape.
2
Size input
When you press the [Size Input] soft key for input support, the Size Input window 4
opens.
Setting methods will be different depending on the shape type as follows:
• Rectangular Parallelepiped
5
You can set a rectangular parallelepiped using the reference vertex and size in
each axis direction. You can only create or edit a rectangular parallelepiped that
is parallel to the basic coordinates X, Y, and Z.
6
• Cylinder
You can set a cylinder using the start point, radius, and axis direction height. You 7
can only create or edit a cylinder that is parallel to one of the basic coordinates
X, Y, or Z.
8
A1
A2
Z
341
B-64644EN/08
B
1 D
2 C
3 E
Size Input Window (for Rectangular Parallelepiped)
4 A
5 B
6 D
C
7
E
8 Size Input Window (for Cylinder)
Fig. 4.2.3 (o) Size input window

A1
Table 4.2.3 (o) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Size Input Windows
A2 Name Function
Z B Reference Vertex
(rectangular
Specify the position of the reference vertex using coordinates.
parallelepiped)
Start Point (cylinder) Specify the position of the start point using coordinates.
C Size (rectangular Specify the size of each axis using distance from the
parallelepiped) reference vertex.
Radius/Height/ Specify the size of each item.
Height Direction For height direction, select an axis.
(cylinder)
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the size input operation.
area
342
B-64644EN/08
To determine the size of the selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft
key.
Diagonal point input

When you press the [Diagonal Input] soft key for input support, the Diagonal Point
Input window opens. 1
You can set a rectangular parallelepiped using the reference vertex and diagonal
point. You can only create or edit a rectangular parallelepiped that is parallel to the
basic coordinates X, Y, and Z. 2
A
2
B
D 4
C
5
E 6
Fig. 4.2.3 (p) Diagonal point input window
7
Table 4.2.3 (p) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Diagonal Point Input
Window
8
Name Function
B Reference Vertex Specify the position of the reference vertex of the rectangular A1
parallelepiped using coordinates.
C Diagonal Point Specify the position of the diagonal point of the rectangular
parallelepiped using coordinates. A2
D Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the diagonal point input
E Message display
operation.
Z
area
 • You cannot set the same value for the reference vertex and diagonal
point for each axis.
MEMO
To create or edit the rectangular parallelepiped by entering the diagonal point for
the selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
343
B-64644EN/08
Position input
When you press the [Position Input] soft key for input support, the Position Input
window opens.
You can set a cylinder using the start point, end point, and radius.
1 A
2 B
D
3
C
4
E
5 F
Fig. 4.2.3 (q) Position input window

6
Table 4.2.3 (q) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Position Input Window
7 Name Function
8 B Start Point Specify the position of the start point of the cylinder using
coordinates.
C End Point Specify the position of the end point of the cylinder using
A1 D Radius
coordinates.
Specify the radius of the cylinder.
E Guide figure Displays a guide figure that shows the position input
A2 operation.
F Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
Z
To create or edit a cylinder by entering the start point, end point, and radius for the
selected shape, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
 Setting the figure reference

For the figure you created, you must set the reference position, etc. in the Figure
Reference Setting window.
To open the Figure Reference Setting window, perform the following:
344
B-64644EN/08
<1> In the Figure list on the Edit Figure window, press the <↑> or <↓> key to select
"FIGURE n" (where n is 1, 2, 3, etc.).
1
The settings for the selected figure are displayed in the figure settings list.
Setting items are different for the interference object and tool holder. 2
2
4
Setting Items for Interference Object Setting Items for Tool Holder 5
<2> Press the [Figure Reference] soft key.
The Figure Reference Setting window appears.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
345
B-64644EN/08
A
B
C
1
D
2
G
3 Figure Reference Setting Window for Interference Object
4 A
B
5 C
6 E
7 F
8 G
Figure Reference Setting Window for Tool Holder
A1
Name Function
A2 A Title display Displays the title of the window.

B Numeric Unit Select either of the following items as the numeric unit.
• "Machine": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
Z machine.
• "Input": Comply with the settings ("mm" or "inch") for the
input data such as NC programs.
C Figure Reference Specify the position of the origin in the reference coordinates.
Position
D Reference Rotation If the interference object rotates by movement of a rotation
Angle (interference axis, specify the angle of the rotation axis when each figure
object) was measured (1: master rotation axis, 2: slave rotation axis).
This item only displays when a rotation axis was set in the
Moving Axis Setting window.
E Tool Origin (tool Specify the position of the tool origin viewed from the
holder) reference position.
346
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
F Tool Tip Direction Specify the tool tip direction viewed from the tool origin.
(tool holder)
G Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
1
To reflect the figure settings that you have edited, press the [OK] soft key.
2
 Setting the valid figure
To set an interference object figure as the interference check target, you must set
that figure as the valid figure. (Any figure not set as the valid figure will not be
2
checked for interference.)
If multiple figures are set as interference objects, only one figure can be set as the
valid figure. 4
• You do not have to set a valid figure for a tool holder or tool.
For a tool, the figure that will be the interference check target is the 5
 figure that corresponds to the tool selected by the method set with
parameter ICT (No.10930#2).
MEMO
• When parameter ICV (No.10930#3) is set to 1, the valid figure setting
can be canceled.
6
To set an interference object figure as the valid figure, perform the following:
7
<1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, press <↑> or <↓> to
select the figure you want to set as the valid figure. 8
A1
A2
<2> Press the [Valid Figure] soft key. Z
The selected figure is set as the valid figure, and  (check mark) will be
displayed next to the figure name in the Interference Object list.
347
B-64644EN/08
How to cancel the valid figure setting

Press the [Valid Figure] soft key again.
Note that, parameter ICV (No.10930#3) must be set to 1. For details, contact
the machine tool builder.
1
4.2.4 Setting the Moving Axis
2
4.2.4
This section explains how to associate the interference object or tool holder with
the linear axis or rotation axis used to move them. Use the Moving Axis Setting
window to make these settings.
3 To open the Moving Axis Setting window, perform the following:
<1> In the Interference Object list on the modeling screen, press the <↑> or <↓> key
to select the interference object or tool holder to which the moving axis will be
4 set.
5
6 <2> Press the [Moving Axis] soft key.
The Moving Axis Setting window appears.
7
 • If [Moving Axis Setting] in the Display Settings window is set to
"Invalid", the [Moving Axis] soft key will be disabled. For details,
8 MEMO contact the machine tool builder.
A1 A
B
C
A2 D
Z E
Name Function
348
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
B Interference Object If the axis moves in sync with another interference object, set
No. to Sync the number (1 to 6) of that interference object.
However, depending on the conditions, set one of the
following numbers.
• 0: If there is no interference object that moves in sync 1
• 1 to 3: When parameter ENO (No.10930#6) is set to 0 for a
single path system
2
If any number other than 0 is set, [Absolute Path No.] and
items on each tab cannot be set.
For tool holders, this item is not displayed. 2
C Absolute Path No. Set the path number to which the interference object belongs.
0: First path
For tool holders, this setting cannot be changed. 4
D Tab Switch the tab to Linear Axis Setting tab, Rotation Axis Setting
tab, or Settings for Each Figure Element tab (you can also
switch these with the <TAB> key).
Set items related to each tab.
5
E Display area for For details on each item, see the descriptions for each tab
each setting item later in this section. 6
area
7
Linear Axis Setting tab
Set the linear axis used to move the target object.
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 4.2.4 (a) Linear Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis Setting Window
349
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.4 (a) Setting Items on the Linear Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis
Setting Window
Setting item Description
Axis no. For the first to third axes of the linear axis used to move the target
1 object, set the number of the axis that is parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis
in the basic coordinates.
If there is no applicable moving axis, set this item to 0.
2 An axis belonging to the path specified in Absolute Path No. can be

selected for Axis No. If Absolute Path No. is changed, Axis No. 0
becomes selected.
3 Direction Set either of the following values based on whether the direction of
the first to third axes of the linear axis used to move the target object
is the same as the positive direction of the X, Y, or Z axis in the basic
coordinates.
4 • "Same Direction" (0)
• "Reverse Direction" (1)
5 Rotation Axis Setting tab

Set the rotation axis used to rotate the target object.
6
7
8
A1 Fig. 4.2.4 (b) Rotation Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis Setting Window
A2 Table 4.2.4 (b) Setting Items on the Rotation Axis Setting Tab on the Moving Axis
Setting Window
Z Setting item
Axis no.
Description
Set the axis number for the first and second rotation axes used to rotate
the target object.
If there is no applicable rotation axis, set this item to 0. If 0 is set, all
subsequent items cannot be set.
An axis belonging to the path specified in Absolute Path No. can be
selected for Axis No. If Absolute Path No. is changed, Axis No. 0
becomes selected.
350
B-64644EN/08

Rotation Select from the followings the direction of the rotation center axis
Center Axis viewed from the reference coordinates of the first and second rotation
Direction axes used to rotate the target object.
• 1: Around X axis
• 2: Around Y axis
1
• 3: Around Z axis
2
2
• 4: Around the axis inclined at an
arbitrary angle ("a" in the figure on right).
4
Angle "a" is formed by tilting the X axis
from the positive direction of the X axis
toward the positive direction of the Y 5
axis.
arbitrary angle ("a" in the figure on right). 6
Angle "a" is formed by tilting the Y axis
from the positive direction of the Y axis
toward the positive direction of the Z
axis.
7
arbitrary angle ("a" in the figure on right).
Angle "a" is formed by tilting the Z axis 8
from the positive direction of the Z axis
toward the positive direction of the X
axis. A1
Inclination Set the inclination ("a" in the figure above) when the first and second
rotation axes used to rotate the target object are tilted rotation axes.
Rotation Set the rotation direction of the first and second rotation axes used to
A2
Direction rotate the target object.
Set either of the followings based on the direction from the negative
direction toward the positive direction of the axis specified in [Axis No.]. Z
• 0: "CW" (clockwise)
• 1: "CCW" (counter-clockwise)
Rotation Set the position of the rotation center axis viewed from the reference
Center Axis coordinates of the first and second rotation axes used to rotate the
Position target object.
Settings for Each Figure Element tab

Set the master rotation and slave rotation of the rotation axis used to rotate the
target object.
351
B-64644EN/08
1
2
Fig. 4.2.4 (c) Settings for Each Figure Element Tab on the Moving Axis Setting
3 Window
4 Table 4.2.4 (c) Setting Items on the Settings for Each Figure Element Tab on the
Moving Axis Setting Window
5 Setting item
Rotation
Description
Set either of the followings based on whether figure elements 1 to 6
should be rotated using the master rotation axis or the slave rotation
6 axis.
• 0: Rotate
• 1: Do not rotate
7 You cannot set slave rotation without setting a master rotation.
8 4.2.5 Setting Combinations of Model Figures as Interfer-

ence Check Targets
A1 4.2.5
Use the Interference Check Combination Manager slide to set combinations of

targets for interference check.
A2  • To use this function, parameter ICD (No.10930#1) must be set to 0.

MEMO
Z
How to open the Interference Check Combination Manager slide
On the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Interference Check
Combination Manager] vertical soft key.
352
B-64644EN/08
1
B 2
2
C
4
D
Fig. 4.2.5 Interference check combination manager slide

5
Table 4.2.5 Name and Function of Each Part of the Interference Check 6
Combination Manager Slide
Name Function 7
B Interference check Displays the settings for the interference check combinations.
combination list When you place the cursor on a specific combination, that 8
combination will be in the selected state, allowing you to set
whether or not to execute the interference check.
C Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages. A1
area
A2
Z
353
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Sets whether or not to check interference for the selected
interference check combination.
1 [Always Valid]
• Always Valid: Always check interference
• Invalid for Cut Feed: Check interference except during
cutting feed
2 • Always Invalid: Always exclude from interference check
[Invalid for Cut

3 Feed]
4
[Always Invalid]
5 The column that contains the cell where the cursor is placed
(except gray cells) will be set to the selected state.
If this is pressed when a row is selected, the row becomes
deselected, and the column becomes selected.
6 [Select Column]
The row that contains the cell where the cursor is placed
(except gray cells) will be set to the selected state.
7 [Select Row]
If this is pressed when a column is selected, the column
becomes deselected, and the row becomes selected.
8 How to set whether or not to execute interference check

<1> Move the cursor to the cell of the target you want to set.
A1
 • You cannot select gray cells.
MEMO
A2
How to select the column/row that contains the target cell to set
Z Press the [Select Column] or [Select Row] soft key.
<1> Press one of the following soft keys.
• [Always Valid]
• [Invalid for Cut Feed]
• [Always Invalid]
According to the soft key you pressed, whether or not to execute interference
check will be set, and the cell display will change.
If you select multiple cells in step <1>, the setting will be applied to all of those
cells.
354
B-64644EN/08
4.2.6 Importing/Exporting Setting Data for 3D Interference

Check
4.2.6
Use the Data Import/Export slide to perform the following operations.

• Import 3D interference check setting data created with other devices
• Export 3D interference check setting data set with this application
1
 • The data import/export function is enabled only in the EDIT mode.

2
MEMO
2
How to open the Data Import/Export slide
On the modeling screen or monitor screen, press the [Data Import/Export] vertical
soft key. 4
A 5
6
B 7
8
C A1
D
Fig. 4.2.6 (a) Data import/export slide

A2
Table 4.2.6 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part of the Data Import/Export Slide Z
Name Function
B Description display Displays the description of the function.
C Message display Displays guidance for operation or warning messages.
area
355
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
Opens the File Import window.
1 [File Import]
Opens the File Export window.
2
[File Export]
3
 Importing files
4 Use the File Import window to import specified files from the CNC device.
To open the File Import window, press the [File Import] soft key on the Data
Import/Export slide.
5 A
B
6
7 C
D
8
E
A1
Fig. 4.2.6 (b) File import window
A2 Table 4.2.6 (b) Names and Functions of Each Part on the File Import Window
Name Function
Z A Title display Displays the title of the window.
B Imported File Specify either one of the following files as the import file type.
specification area • G10 Format File: Files similar to those output by CNC
devices.
• "Parameter File": Files to which interference check
combination parameters are exported.
356
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
C Folder tree Specify the folder where the import file is stored.
Up to six levels of folders are displayed.
Displayed devices are as follows:
• M_CARD: Memory card (in general)
• USB_MEM: USB flash drive 1
• DATA_SV: Data server
• DTSVR_HOST: Data server host
• FTP_HOST: Multi-function Ethernet 2
• EMB_ETHER: Embedded Ethernet
D File list Displays a list of files contained in the folder you select in the
folder tree. 2
area
4
To import a file from the CNC device, set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
5
 Exporting files
Use the File Export window to export specified files to the CNC device.
To open the File Export window, press the [File Export] soft key on the Data 6
Import/Export slide.
A 7
B
8
A1
C
A2
D
Z
Fig. 4.2.6 (c) File export window
Table 4.2.6 (c) Names and Functions of Each Part on the File Export Window
Name Function
B Export file Specify either one of the following files as the export file type.
specification area • G10 Format File: Files similar to those output by CNC
devices.
• "Parameter File": Files to which interference check
combination parameters are exported.
357
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
C Folder tree Specify the folder where the file should be exported.
Up to six levels of folders are displayed.
For displayed devices, see "Table 4.2.6 (b) Names and
1 D Message display
Functions of Each Part on the File Import Window".
area
2 To export a file to the CNC device, perform the following:

<1> Set each item on the File Export window and press the [OK] soft key.
3 The window to enter the export file name appears.
4
5
<2> Specify the name of the export file and press the [OK] soft key.
6 The file will be exported to the export destination.
7 If a file with the same name exists in the export destination

The overwrite confirmation window appears.
Set the required items and press the [OK] soft key.
8
A1 4.2.7 Reflecting Setting Data for 3D Interference Check
4.2.7
Change the 3D interference check related settings change signal

(TDICHG<G519.4>) to 1 and deploy the 3D interference check data to the CNC
A2 device memory.

Z MEMO
• For details on settings, contact the machine tool builder.
4.2.8 Monitoring Interference Check

4.2.8
You can monitor the state of the interference check on the monitor screen.
You can also use this screen to check that there are any incorrect data settings
you have made up to this point.
 Monitor screen
To display the monitor screen when the modeling screen is displayed, press the
[Monitor Screen] soft key.
358
B-64644EN/08
1
B E
2
C
2
D
F
G
4
Fig. 4.2.8 (a) Monitor screen 5
Table 4.2.8 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part of the Monitor Screen 6
Name Function
A Current position
display area
Displays the current position of all control axes used
throughout the system. 7
B Tool offset number Displays the tool offset number currently used.
C
display area
Valid Figure display The following contents are displayed according to the
8
area interference check target.
• Interference object: Valid figure number
• Tool holder: Figure number A1
D Diagnostic Displays the following information related to the 3D
Information display
area
interference check.
• "Calculated Time"
A2
• "Margin Width"
E Monitoring drawing
area
Simulation results of the 3D interference check are shown in
animation.
Z
area
G Horizontal soft keys
Switches to the modeling screen.
[Modeling Screen]
Switches the control axis displayed.
[Show Next Axis]
359
B-64644EN/08
Name Function
the window.
1 [Auto]
Increases the magnification of the drawings.
2 [Zoom In]
3
[Zoom Out]
4 Switches to the row of soft keys used for parallel movement.
For details, see "Parallel movement soft keys" of "4.2.3
5 [Move]
6 Every time you press the key, the operation is toggled

For details on operations from the touch panel, see "
7 Graphic operations from the touch panel" later in this section.
For details, see "Fixed rotation soft keys" of "4.2.3 Creating
8 Model Figures".
[Fixed Rotation]
A1 Switches to the row of soft keys used for free rotation.

Model Figures".
A2 [Arbitrary Rotation]
Z [Quad Display]
drawing area" of "4.2.3 Creating Model Figures".
[Single Display]
 Alarm display when interference is detected

The following alarm appears when an interference is detected.
Interference Detected ({Interference object 1},{Interference object 2})
360
B-64644EN/08
{Interference object 1} and {Interference object 2} indicate the name of the

interference object that was defined.
For details on defined names, see " Setting a model figure name" of "4.2.3
If Japanese or English is set as the language in the connected CNC device, the 1
location of interference will be highlighted (blinking) in red.
When you deactivate the alarm, the highlight displayed will be canceled.
2
2
4
5
6
7
Fig. 4.2.8 (b) Monitor Screen Display when Interference is Detected
8
 Graphic operations from the touch panel
You can use the touch panel to move the interference object displayed on the
A1
drawing area.
These operations can all be used on the following screens.
A2
• Monitor screen
• Modeling screen
• Edit Figure window
Z
• Shape No. list slide
The operation methods used for graphics will vary depending on whether the
touch panel supports multi-touch operation. The graphic operations based on the
difference in touch panel specifications are as follows:
361
B-64644EN/08
Table 4.2.8 (b) Graphic Operations from Touch Panel

Touch panel operation Operation of interference object drawn
Multi-touch Multi-touch not During parallel During rotation
supported supported movement mode mode (*1)
1 Pinch Tap
(*1)
Zoom out Zoom out
Stretch Double-tap Zoom in Zoom in
2 Drag Drag Parallel movement Rotation
(parallel moves (rotates toward the
toward the drag drag direction. Same
3 direction) movement as when
you press the
[Upper], [Lower],
4 [Left], or [Right] soft
key for free rotation).
(*1)To switch between parallel movement mode and rotation mode, press the [Change
5 Operation] soft key.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
362
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
4.3
4.3 Remote iPendant

Remote iPendant is a function that connects the CNC and robot controller via
Ethernet. It displays and monitors the iPendant screen of the robot controller on
the CNC screen. To use Remote iPendant, add the Remote iPendant screen to
1
PANEL iH or PANEL iH Pro.
2
2
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 4.3 Remote iPendant Screen (Example) A1
4.3.1 How to Add the Remote iPendant Screen A2

4.3.1
Add the Remote iPendant screen to iHMI.

Z
<1> Set Microsoft Internet Explorer.
For the setting method, see "4.3.1.1 Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer".
<2> Register Remote iPendant to the Home screen.

For how to register, see "4.3.1.2 Registering the Remote iPendant screen to
the Home screen".
 • For PANEL iH Pro, you need to install the iPendant Control.

• If you are using PANEL iH, you do not need to install the iPendant
MEMO Control.
363
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
4.3.1.1 Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer

Set Microsoft Internet Explorer.
4.3.1.1
1 
NOTE
• You need to set the IP address for the robot controller before setting
Microsoft Internet Explorer.
2
• For PANEL iH Pro, see "5 Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer" in the
3  iPendant Screen Display Software OPERATOR'S MANUAL that is
included in the CD for iPendant Screen Display Software (A08B-9410-
MEMO
J803).
4
<1> Execute "\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\RMTIP\SETUP.reg".
5 <2> Start Internet Explorer.
<3> Click the [View] menu and select [Internet Options].
6 The [Internet Options] window appears.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
364
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
<4> On the [Security] tab, select [Trusted sites] and click the [Sites...] button.
The [Trusted sites] window appears.
1
2
2
4
5
<5> Enter the IP address of the controller and click the [Add] button.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
365
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
<6> Deselect the [Require server verification] check box and click the [OK] button.
The [Internet Options] window appears.
1
2
3
4
5 <7> Click the [OK] button.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
366
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
<8> Click the [View] menu and select [Save Options].

The settings are saved.
1
2
2
4
5
6
4.3.1.2 Registering the Remote iPendant screen to the Home screen 7
Register an icon to open the Remote iPendant screen to the Home screen.
4.3.1.2
<1> Open "apps-general.xml" in the iHMI data folder.

8
"apps-general.xml" is stored in the following location.
For PANEL iH Pro

A1
• SSD
D:\FANUC\iHMI A2
• HDD
%ProgramData%\FANUC\iHMI
Z
For PANEL iH
\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI
<2> Add the following description in the <apps> tag and save the file.
<entry>
<name>Robot </name>
<category>Machining</category>
<caption>
<en>ROBOT</en>
<ja> ロボット </ja>
</caption>
367
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
<file>(*1)</file>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Robot.svg </image>
<parameters>(*2) </parameters>
</entry>
1 *1: Put the file path to Microsoft Internet Explorer.

For PANEL iH Pro
C:\Program Files (x86)\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe
2 For PANEL iH
%APPPATH%\RMTIP\IESINGLEW.exe
3 *2: Enter the name defined in the DNS on the CNC to be used or the IP
address.
4 <3> Restart the iHMI and confirm that the ROBOT icon is displayed in the Home
screen.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z 4.3.2 Displaying the Remote iPendant Screen
4.3.2
Display the Remote iPendant screen.
<1> Press the ROBOT icon in the Home screen.
368
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
Microsoft Internet Explorer starts up, and the page to connect to iPendant
appears.
1
2
2
4
<2> Select the menu. 5

The iPendant screen appears.
6
• For details of the display contents and operation of Remote iPendant,
 see "15 ADVANCED iPendant FUNCTIONS" in "FANUC Robot Series
MEMO
R-30iA/R-30iA Mate/R-30iB/R-30iB Mate Control Device Ethernet
Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-82974EN).
7
8
A1
A2
Z
369
B-64644EN/08
4.3 Remote iPendant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
370
OPERATING THE 1
5
IMPROVEMENT 2
AREA 3
4
5
You can use applications for improvement such as Data Logger (used to collect
CNC data) and Maintenance Manager (used to monitor the status of the
maintenance target and notify any abnormality).
6
5.1 DATA LOGGER .................................................................................. 372
5.2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER .............................................................. 396
A
5.3 SERVO Viewer ................................................................................... 455
371
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 5 OPERATING THE IMPROVEMENT AREA 
5.1 DATA LOGGER
5.1
5.1 DATA LOGGER

The data logger function is an application to collect the data inside CNC regularly
1 and accumulate them in the database in the storage.

Data stored in the database can be displayed in list form. These data are used in
other applications such as MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT function.
2
5.1.1 Overview of Data Logger
3
5.1.1
5.1.1.1 What data logger can do

5.1.1.1
4 Data Logger Function

The data inside the CNC such as data related to axes, status data, operation data
are stored as a database in an external storage such as a CF card.
5 Computer in the CNC system Setting
data
6 Application
Maintenance Manager Storage
Import log item
Export log item

External
Data Logger - CF device
7 Date setting improvement - HD/SSD
Database
Log
data
Export log
8 Collect data
Export
CNC device
Data related to axes: Actual speed, load meter, etc.
A1 Status data: Alarm message, PMC signal, macro variable, etc.
Operation data: Program name, sequence number, powered time, etc.
A2 Maintenance data: Fan speed, servo insulation deterioration, etc.
Z Fig. 5.1.1.1 (a) Data Logger Function
372
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
With data logger

With data logger, you can create a database, specify data to be collected, set the
collection cycle, display the collected data, import and export log items, and export
log.
1
2
3
4
Log list screen Data list display screen
Fig. 5.1.1.1 (b) What You Can Do with Data Logger
5
Using Data Collected by Data logger
You can use the data collected by data logger in maintenance management data 6
of the maintenance management screen.
7
8
A1
Maintenance management data
Fig. 5.1.1.1 (c) Use of data collected by data logger A2

Z
373
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
5.1.1.2 Collectable data

The collectable data are displayed in the table below.
5.1.1.2
Table 5.1.1.2 Log Items

Group Item Section Cycle (*1)
1 Data related Control axis actual speed 0.1
to axes seconds
2 Control axis load meter Axis no. 0.1

seconds
Control axis load current (%) Axis no. 0.1
3 Actual spindle speed
seconds
0.1
seconds
4 Spindle load meter 0.1
seconds
Status data Status information 0.1
5 seconds
Alarm message 10 seconds
6 Operator message
PMC signal (Bit) Address
10 seconds
0.1
seconds
7 PMC signal (1byte) Address 0.1

seconds
PMC signal (2byte) Address 0.1
8 seconds
PMC signal (4byte) Address 0.1
seconds
A1 Conversational macro variable Variable no. 0.1
seconds
Auxiliary macro variable Variable no. 0.1
A2 seconds
Execution macro variable Variable no. 0.1
seconds
Z Custom macro variable Variable no. 0.1
seconds
Operation Program name 0.1
data seconds
Sequence no. 0.1
seconds
Number of machined parts 5 seconds
Total number of machined parts 5 seconds
Powered Time 5 seconds
Operated Time 5 seconds
Cut Time 5 seconds
374
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
Group Item Section Cycle (*1)

Maintenance Fan speed 5 seconds
data Servo insulation deterioration 30 minutes
Spindle insulation deterioration 30 minutes
Feed axis total travel distance Data number 5 seconds 1
0: Value of
diagnosis No. 365
1: Value of
diagnosis No. 366
2
Spindle total rotations Data number 5 seconds
0: Value of 3
diagnosis No.
1520
1: Value of
diagnosis No.
4
1521
Servo amplifier internal cooling fan
speed
5 seconds 5
Servo amplifier radiator cooling fan 5 seconds
speed 6
Common power supply internal cooling 5 seconds
fan speed
Common power supply radiator cooling 5 seconds 7
fan speed
Spindle amplifier internal cooling fan 5 seconds
speed 8
Spindle amplifier radiator cooling fan 5 seconds
speed
Servo amplifier APC battery status 5 seconds
A1
(*1)Lower limit of the cycle that can be selected
5.1.1.3 Flow of data logger use

A2
The flow of data logger use is described as follows.
5.1.1.3
<1> Setting collection items and cycles -> 5.1.4 Z

<2> Displaying collected data to check -> 5.1.3
<3> Change the ways to display and collect -> 5.1.3, 5.1.4
5.1.2 Basic Operation of Data Logger

5.1.2
This section describes the basic operation of the data logger.
5.1.2.1 Opening data logger

When you open the data logger, the log list screen is displayed.
5.1.2.1
375
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
<1> Press [DATA LOGGER] in the home screen.

The log list screen is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6 5.1.2.2 Data logger screen
This section describes the log list screen.
5.1.2.2
7
A
8
A1
A2
Z B
Fig. 5.1.2.2 Names and Functions of Each Part of Log List Screen
376
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER

Name Description
A Log List A list of registered logs. The group of data, data name
(type), path, section, number of data, and collection
period are displayed. You can register a maximum
number of 20 items with the list.
1
Register data to be collected in the list. See "5.1.4.1
B Data length
Adding list of data to be collected".
The total capacity of the log registered in the list is
2
displayed in byte every second.
Set so that the data to be collected should not exceed
the data amount limit. See "5.1.4.1 Adding list of data to 3
be collected".
C Horizontal soft keys
Display the contents of data collected in the past.
4
[Display Data]
5
When pressed, soft keys change and you will be able to
edit the list.
6
[Edit]
Imports/exports log items or exports logs.
7
[Input/Output]
8
5.1.2.3 Closing data logger
Close the log list screen. A1
5.1.2.3
<1> Press <HOME>.

The log list screen is closed, and the Home screen is displayed. A2
Z
5.1.3 Displaying Data
5.1.3
The data can be displayed in a list.
5.1.3.1 Displaying collected data

Display the contents of data collected in the past.
5.1.3.1
You can see the contents of data in a list form.
<1> In the log list screen, press the [Display Data] soft key.
The Data Display List window is displayed.
377
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
1
2
3
4
5
<2> Select the data to be displayed with <←> <→> <↑> <↓>.
6 The selected data are displayed in the list on the right.
7 A B
8
A1
A2
Z
Setting item Setting contents
A Data item The data items are displayed in a list.
B Data contents list The data contents selected in Data Item are displayed as a list.
By pressing <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN>, you can scroll
within the time span of the acquired data.
378
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
• Collected data are automatically updated in the data list display

screen.
 The minimum update cycle is 1 second. When the date and time
MEMO
setting window is displayed by pressing the [Jump] soft key or the
scroll for the collected data list is displayed, automatic update is 1
stopped.
2
Horizontal soft
keys
Description
3
[Jump] Specify the start time to collect data which is displayed in the list on
the right.
When you press this soft key, a window appears for you to set a
4
date and time.
[Close] Closes the data display list window 5
<3> To specify the collection start date and time displayed in the data contents list,
press the [Jump] soft key.
A window appears for you to set a date and time.
6
7
8
<4> Enter the collection start date and time, and press the [OK] soft key.
You see the data since the specified date and time.
A1
• For items with the cycle set to 0.1 seconds, a date and time can be
specified down to the millisecond using the jump function. A2
• An error message is displayed when date and time later than the
 current is specified.
MEMO Z
5.1.3.2 Display format of collected data

The content of data is displayed in the following format.
5.1.3.2
379
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
Table 5.1.3.2 Content and Format of Displayed Log Data

Data name Format/Example Supplementation
Control axis actual speed Format:
Data (Decimal)
1 Example:
1234
2 Control Axis Load Meter

Control axis load current
Format:
Axis number:Data (Decimal)
(%)
3 Actual spindle speed

Spindle load meter
Example:
1:10 2:50 3:40
Status information Format:
4 Running status, mode

(Strings)
Example:
5 Alarm, MDI mode
Alarm message Format:
Alarm number Message
6
Example:
SW0100 PARAMETER
7 WRITE ENABLE
Operator In case of Format:
message operator Message number Message
8 message
Example:
1234 MESSAGE1
A1 In case of Format:
macro (MACRO) Message
message
A2 Example:
(MACRO) MESSAGE2
PMC signal (Bit) Format:
Z Data (0 or 1)
Example:
1
PMC signal (1byte) Format:
Data (Hexadecimal)
Example:
12 34 AB CD
Data (Hexadecimal)
Example:
3412 CDAB
380
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER

Data (Hexadecimal)
Example:
CDAB3412 1
Conversational macro Format:
variable
Auxiliary macro variable
Data (Float or Empty)
2
Execution macro variable Example:
Custom macro variable 1.234567 (Empty) 987.654321
Program 1st line Format: 3
name (During Program name under
execution) execution
4
Example:
Exec: //CNC_MEM/USER/
PATH1/O1234 5
2nd line Format:
(Main) Main program name
Example:
6
Main: //CNC_MEM/USER/
Sequence no.
PATH1/O1234
Format:
7
Number of machined parts Data (Decimal)
Total number of machined
parts Example:
8
1234
Powered Time
Operated Time
Format:
Data (Float, Unit: Second)
A1
Cut Time
Example:
1234.567 A2
Fan speed Format:
Data (Decimal, Unit: rpm)
Z
Example:
10000 8000 0 0
381
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER

Servo 1st line Format: Value is not displayed if
insulation (Value) Axis number: Data there is no data that has
deterioratio (Float, Unit: M ohm) been measured.
1 n
Example:
Value: 1:100.0 2:100.0
2 2nd line (Info) Format:

Axis number: Data
(Hexadecimal, the value of
diagnosis No. 1700)
3
Example:
Info: 1:00 2:00
4 Spindle 1st line Format:
insulation (Value) Axis number: Data
deterioratio (Float, Unit: M ohm)
5 n
Example:
Value: 1:100.0 2:100.0
6 2nd line (Info) Format:

Axis number: Data
(Hexadecimal, the value of
7 diagnosis No. 1702)
Example:
8 Feed axis in case of

Info: 1:00 2:00
Format:
total travel Linear axis Axis number: Data
A1 distance (Decimal, Unit: m or 100 inch)
Example:
1:1000
A2 in case of Format:
Rotary axis Axis number: Data
(Decimal, Unit: 360 degree)
Z
Example:
(2):100
Spindle total rotations Format:
Axis number: Data
(Decimal, Unit: 1000 rotation)
Example:
1:10 2:50
382
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER

Servo amplifier internal Format: Amp group number and
cooling fan speed [Amp group number:Amp Amp number are based
number] Fan1 Fan2 (Decimal) on the diagnosis
Example:
No.1760. When the PS
control axis is set, data 1
[1:1] 8000 0 [1:2] 8500 0 is acquired.
Servo amplifier radiator
cooling fan speed
Format:
[Amp group number:Amp 2
number] Fan1 Fan2 (Decimal)
Example: 3
[1:1] 8000 0 [1:2] 8500 0
Common power supply Format: Amp group number are
internal cooling fan speed [Amp group number] Fan1 based on the diagnoses 4
Fan2 (Decimal) No.1760, 1761. When
the PS control axis is
Example:
[1:1] 8000 0
set, data is acquired. 5
Common power supply Format:
radiator cooling fan speed [Amp group number] Fan1
Fan2 (Decimal)
6
Example:
[1:1] 8000 0
7
Spindle amplifier internal Format: Amp group number and
cooling fan speed [Amp group number:Amp Amp number are based
number] Fan1 Fan2 (Decimal) on the diagnosis
8
No.1761. When the PS
Example:
[1:1] 8000 0 [1:2] 8500 0
control axis is set, data
is acquired. A1
Spindle amplifier radiator Format:
cooling fan speed [Amp group number:Amp
number] Fan1 Fan2 (Decimal) A2
Example:
[1:1] 8000 0 [1:2] 8500 0 Z
Servo amplifier APC Format: The value is 100 for
battery status Data (Decimal) normal voltage, 50 for
low voltage, or 0 for no
Example: voltage.
100
383
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
5.1.4 Collecting Data

5.1.4
You can add, delete, or modify logs.
1 5.1.4.1
5.1.4.1
Adding list of data to be collected
You can add/specify the group, data name, path, section, number of data, and
period of logs.
2
<1> In the log list screen, press the [Edit] soft key.
Another list of soft keys appears.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1 <2> Press the [Add] soft key.
The Add a logging Data window is displayed.
A2
Z
384
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
<3> In the Add a Logging Data window, select or enter each item and press the
[OK] soft key.
The log is registered.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Group Select a group of data. For the selectable group names, see
"Table 5.1.1.2 Log Items".
7
Data name Select a data name. For the selectable data names, see "Table
5.1.1.2 Log Items". 8
Path Specify the path of data.
Section If data are arranged in an array, specify the array no.
For example, in the case of axis data, specify the first axis no. A1
In the case of PMC data, specify the PMC address.
Address/Symbol When "PMC Signal (Bit/1byte/2byte/4byte)" is selected for the
data name, the section input field changes to "Address/ A2
Symbol", allowing you to input any PMC address or PMC
symbol.
If the value in the field is valid when the entry is confirmed, Z
"PMC Address: PMC Symbol" is displayed in the message
area.
Number of Data Specify the number of the obtained data. The number of data
that you can specify depends on a data type.
Cycle Select a collection cycle of data.
The selectable cycles depend on data.
The retention period of logs relies on a data collection cycle.
385
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
• If there is no PMC symbol corresponding to the PMC address, only

the PMC address is displayed in the message area.
• When you select or enter each item and press the [OK] soft key in
1 the Add Log Item window, if collected data to be added already

exists, the collected data is not added, displaying an error
2

NOTE
message.
Data addition is limited as follows:
Items with the same type are limited by group, data name, and
path.
Items without a path entered are limited only by group and data
3 name.
The PMC data types are limited by up to address/symbol, and
the macro variable types are limited by up to variable number.
4
Servo amplifier
5 Servo motor
Log
CNC Data logger
function on PANEL
6 Spindle amplifier
Spindle motor
iH Pro/iHMI
Function
7 I/O on the
control board
8 Sensor
Database
A1 Fig. 5.1.4.1 Flow of data collection
A2 The allowable amount of logs per unit time is restricted as follows in

consideration of the load to the CPU or bus in collection/storage
processing of data and the life of CF for storage.
Z  • 64 KB/sec.
MEMO • 6 MB/min.
• 360 MB/hour
• 4.2 GB/day (with operation for 12 hours in average)
• 1000 GB/year (with operation for 240 days in average)
5.1.4.2 Deleting log items from list

You can delete log items from the list.
5.1.4.2
386
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
<2> In the log list screen, select a log item to be deleted and press the [Delete] soft
key.
The selected log item is deleted from the list.
1
2
3
4
5
6
<3> Press the [Close] soft key.
The warning message "Your changes will be discarded. Are you sure you want 7
to close?" appears.
<4> To discard the changes, press the [OK] soft key.

8
Pressing the [Cancel] soft key ends the edit process and returns you to the log
item list screen. A1
5.1.4.3 Modify log item
5.1.4.3
A2
<2> In the log list screen, select a log item to be modified and press the [Modify] soft
key. Z
<3> In the log item modification window, select or enter each item and press the
[OK] soft key.
The warning message "Your changes will be discarded. Are you sure you want
to close?" appears.
<5> To discard the changes, press the [OK] soft key.
Pressing the [Cancel] soft key ends the edit process and returns you to the log
item list screen.
387
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
5.1.5 Importing or Exporting Logs

5.1.5
You can import or export log items. The log export function can be added.
1 5.1.5.1
5.1.5.1
Importing log items
You can import log information setting files from an external device (memory card,
USB flash drive, etc.) to the CNC.
2
<1> In the log list screen, press the [Input/Output] soft key.
3
4
<2> Press the [Import Log] soft key.
5 The Import Log window is displayed.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If the number of log items has already reached the limit (20), the
[Import Log] soft key is disabled.
MEMO
388
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
<3> Tap the external device inserted to the CNC or select it with <←>, <→>, <↑>,
and <↓>, and select a file to be imported.
1
2
3
"M_CARD" is displayed for the memory card, and "USB_MEM" is displayed for
USB flash drive. 4
• You can expand the tree of an external device (memory card, USB 5
flash drive, etc.) with <INPUT>.
 • If no external device (memory card, USB flash drive, etc.) is

connected to the CNC, the message "Cannot find external
6
MEMO memory. Check connection." appears. Press the [Cancel] soft key
to close the window and check the connection of the external
device (memory card, USB flash drive, etc.).
7
The import starts. When the import succeeds, the window closes.
8
A1
A2
 If a data item with the same data name, path, section, and number of
data already exists in the storage device, the file is not imported.
Z
NOTE
5.1.5.2 Exporting log items

You can export log items in xml format from the storage device to an external
5.1.5.2
<1> In the log list screen, press the [Input/Output] soft key.
389
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
<2> Press the [Export Log] soft key.

The Export Log window is displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
 • If there is no log item, the [Export Log] soft key is disabled.
7 MEMO
<3> Tap a folder to be exported or select it with <←>, <→>, <↑>, and <↓>, and
8 select the destination external device (memory card, USB flash drive, etc.).
A1
A2
Z
"M_CARD" is displayed for the memory card, and "USB_MEM" is displayed for
USB flash drive.
• If no external device (memory card, USB flash drive, etc.) is
 connected to the CNC, the message "Cannot find external

memory. Check connection." appears. Press the [Cancel] soft key
MEMO to close the window and check the connection of the external
390
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
1
<5> Enter the log item file name and press the [OK] soft key.
The export starts. When the export succeeds, the window closes.
2
3
4
5
6
7
• If no file name is entered or the file name contains a character such

8
as "\/:*?"<>|", an error message appears. Re-enter the correct file

name.
• When the available capacity of the external device is running out of
A1
space, the message "Could not write the file. Check the external
MEMO
memory capacity." appears.
Increase the available capacity of the connected external device, A2
or replace with another device with enough capacity.
391
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
• If a file with the same name as the one you input exists in the
destination folder, a window appears for you to confirm the
overwrite. Select "Overwrite", "Rename", or "Change Folder" and
1 If you select "Overwrite", the file is overwritten to the file with the
same name.
If you select "Rename", the file is exported again under the file
name written in the field below.
2 If you select "Change Folder", the window closes, and you need to
 select a file again.
3 NOTE
4
5
6
5.1.5.3 Exporting log data
7 5.1.5.3
You can export collected logs to an external device (memory card, USB flash
drive, etc.).
Logs are saved in csv format.
8
<1> In the log list screen, select a log item to be exported and press the [Input/
A1 Output] soft key.

A2
Z <2> Press the [Export Log] soft key.
The Export Log window is displayed.
392
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
1
2
3
4
5

MEMO
If there is no log list, the [Export Log] soft key is disabled.
6
<3> Select the destination folder and press the [Time Specified] soft key.
The Time Specified window is displayed.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
393
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
• The Export Log window displays external memory (memory card or

USB flash drive) connected to the CNC. "M_CARD" is displayed
for the memory card, and "USB_MEM" is displayed for USB flash
1  drive.
• Select the export destination folder with <←>, <→>, <↑>, and <↓>.
MEMO
• For items with the cycle set to 0.1 seconds, "Start Time" and "End
Time" in the Export screen for collected data are displayed down to
2 the millisecond.
3 • If no external memory is connected, a message appears at the

NOTE
lower part of the window. When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the
window closes.
4 • If no log exists in the selected log item, the file is not exported.
5 <4> Specify the period of data to be exported ("Start Time" and "End Time") and
The Time Specified screen is displayed.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
394
B-64644EN/08
5.1 DATA LOGGER
• When you press the [Specify Date] soft key, the calendar appears
for you to select the date.
• For items with the cycle set to 0.1 seconds, "Start Time" and "End
Time" in the Time Specified window are displayed down to the
millisecond. 1
• The specifiable range is from the date and time of the oldest data in
the database to the current date and time.
An error message is displayed when the specified date and time is 2
 outside of this range, or the specified start/end date and time are
MEMO reversed.
3
4
5
The export will start. When the export succeeds, the window closes. 6
• If a file with the same name as the one you input exists in the
destination folder, a window appears for you to confirm the 7
overwrite. Select "Overwrite", "Rename", or "Change Folder" and
If you select "Overwrite", the file is overwritten to the file with the 8
same name.
If you select "Rename", the file is exported again under the file
name written in the input field below.
If you select "Change Folder", the window closes, and you need
A1
 to select a file again.
MEMO A2
Z
• If no file name is entered, a message appears at the lower part of

NOTE
the window, and the file is not exported.
• Do not use the characters "\/:*?"<>|" for file names. Otherwise, the
file is not exported.
395
B-64644EN/08
5.2 MAINTENANCE MANAGER
5.2

The maintenance manager function is an application that monitors the state of a
1 maintenance target, and notifies alarms and maintenance timings for efficient
preventive maintenance of machinery.
2
5.2.1 Overview of the Maintenance Manager
3
5.2.1
The maintenance information management function allows you to see a detected

abnormality. In addition, it can display the monitored state graphically and a guide
for maintenance task support.
4
5.2.1.1 Maintenance category
5 5.2.1.1
Maintenance groups monitored by the maintenance manager function are

classified into the following three categories:
6 • [CNC System Maintenance]: Targets maintenance parts provided by FANUC.

• [Machine Maintenance]: Targets maintenance parts provided by machine tool
builders (MTB).
7 • [User Maintenance]: Targets maintenance parts added by machine users.
The following topics describe each maintenance category in detail.
8  [CNC System Maintenance]

The [CNC System Maintenance] category targets CNC systems provided by
A1 FANUC, such as a CNC device or servo amplifier.
The maintenance items of [CNC System Maintenance] monitor the states of the
targets listed below.
A2
Z
396
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.1.1 (a) Maintenance Items of [CNC System Maintenance]

Maintenance Unit Target Abbreviation
group
Fan CNC Fans 1 to 24 Fan-1 to 24#CNC
Servo amplifier Internal cooling fan IntFan-1,2#SVA-N [1]
1, 2
1
Radiator cooling FinFan-1,2#SVA-N [1]
fan 1, 2 2
Common power supply Internal cooling fan IntFan-1,2#PS-N [1]
1, 2
Radiator cooling FinFan-1,2PS-N [1] 3
fan 1, 2
Spindle amplifier Internal cooling fan IntFan-1,2#SPA-N [1]
1, 2 4
Radiator cooling FinFan-1,2#SPA-N [1]
Battery Servo amplifier

fan 1, 2
APC battery Bat#SVM-X [2]
5
motor Spindle motor Insulation Leak#SPM-X [2]
resistance (*1) 6
Servo motor Insulation Leak#SVM-X [2]
resistance (*2)
amplifier Amplifier group Condenser Cap #AMG-N [1] 7
(*1) This is registered as a maintenance item when the parameter No. 4549 #0 is
1. 8
(*2) This is registered as a maintenance item when the parameter No. 2429 #0 is
1.
A1

[1] N indicates the additional number of each unit from the CNC device
NOTE
point of view.
[2] X represents the name of each axis for the servo or spindle. A2
Z
• Press the [Detect Items] soft key, and the maintenance items of [CNC
System Maintenance] are automatically generated.
 • The values recommended by FANUC apply to settings, such as state

monitoring for detecting abnormalities or notification messages.
MEMO • For how to set the maintenance items of [CNC System Maintenance],
see "5.2.2.4 Setting the maintenance item of [CNC System
Maintenance]".
397
B-64644EN/08
 [Machine Maintenance]
The [Machine Maintenance] category targets maintenance parts provided by
machine tool builders (MTB), such as a linear guide and ball screws constituting
machinery, or an air filter and a door rail of a peripheral device.
To add a maintenance item of [Machine Maintenance], enter setting data (-> "5.2.4
1 Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item").
The setting data includes state monitoring data for detecting abnormalities and
notification messages.
2 You can add a maximum number of 50 machine maintenance items when State
Monitor 2 is not set.
3 You can set the following types of state monitor data.
4 Table 5.2.1.1 (b) Data Settable as State Monitor Data

Monitor data type Description
Total Time/Next Maintenance (*1) Time elapsed to the current time
5 Powered Time Integrated value of powered time
Operated Time Integrated value of automatic operated
6 Cut Time
time
Integrated value of cut feed time
Next maintenance Maintenance date registered in the
7 calendar
PMC signal Bit Bit type signal information
1byte Signal information with a length of one
8 byte
2byte Signal information with a length of two
bytes
A1 4byte Signal information with a length of four
bytes
A2 Custom macro variable Value of a specified custom macro

variable
Execution macro variable Value of a specified execution macro
Z Auxiliary macro variable

variable
Value of a specified auxiliary macro
variable
Conversational macro variable Value of a specified conversational
macro variable
(*1)You can set the next maintenance date in the calendar using the next maintenance
data.
For details, see "5.2.4.1 Adding and setting the maintenance item".
 User maintenance
The [User Maintenance] category targets maintenance parts added by machine
users.
398
B-64644EN/08
Machine users add a maintenance part, for example, when they want to monitor
and periodically inspect the state of their proprietary machine with a sensor added.
Enter the setting data to add a user maintenance item, as is the case with the
machine maintenance item (-> "5.2.4 Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item").
You can add a maximum of 30 maintenance items.
1
• The maximum number of monitor data you can register is 35 in

NOTE
machine maintenance and 15 in user maintenance.
• User maintenance items can be protected against edit/deletion by
operators.
2
For details, see "5.2.6 User Maintenance Protection Setting".
3
5.2.1.2 Determining the state of the maintenance item
5.2.1.2
This section describes the state determination types of the maintenance item and
4
how to determine the state.
5
 State Types of the Maintenance Item
The table below lists the states of the maintenance item.
6
Table 5.2.1.2 (a) State Types of the Maintenance Item
State type Description 7
Normal This state indicates that the maintenance target works properly.
Warning This state indicates that the minor abnormality of the maintenance
target was detected. If the target continues to work, an alarm may 8
occur.
Abnormal This state indicates that the abnormality of the maintenance target was
detected and an alarm is occurring. You need to perform maintenance A1
for the target immediately.
A2
 How to determine the state
To determine the state of the maintenance item, use two types of state monitor
data. Z
The logical AND or logical OR of the results based on each threshold value of
[State Monitor 1] and [State Monitor 2] is considered as the state determination
results of the maintenance item. If only one type of state monitor data is set, its
results are used as the state determination results of the maintenance item.
The table below lists the determination results of the maintenance item where the
logical AND or logical OR is used for the results of state monitor data 1 and 2.
399
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.1.2 (b) Determination Results of the Maintenance Item

State Monitor 1 State Monitor 1 State Monitor 1 State Monitor 1
Not set Normal Warning Abnormal
State Monitor 2 - Normal Warning Abnormal
1 Not set
State Monitor 2 Normal OR: Normal OR: Warning OR: Abnormal
Normal AND: Normal AND: Normal AND: Normal
2 State Monitor 2
Warning
Warning OR: Warning
AND: Normal
OR: Warning
AND: Warning
OR: Abnormal
AND: Warning
State Monitor 2 Abnormal OR: Abnormal OR: Abnormal OR: Abnormal
3 Abnormal AND: Normal AND: Warning AND: Abnormal
4 • Suppose that you use the two types of state monitoring based on the
expiration date and sensor. In this case, to provide notification if the
 threshold value of either monitoring is exceeded, you should set OR.
5 MEMO
• To provide notification if the threshold values of two conditions (two
sensors are in abnormal state) are both exceeded, you should set
AND.
6
 State monitor data
7 The maintenance manager function monitors the specified state monitor data at
15-second intervals and notifies you of warning and abnormal states.
At regular intervals (a compilation period), the data logger compiles the obtained
8 data for monitoring into the categories of the maximum value, minimum value, and
average value, and saves them to the database for the maintenance manager.
(For the data logger, see "5.1 DATA LOGGER".)
A1 You can set two time intervals as a data compilation period to save data in the mid
term or long term.
To set a time interval for mid-term monitoring, select a value within the range of
A2 one to four hours. To set a time interval for long-term monitoring, select a value
within the range of 1 to 10 days.
You can set a compilation period in the [State monitor data compilation period (for
Z mid-term storage)] and [State monitor data compilation period (for long-term
storage)] maintenance items.
: Real-time data
: Maximum value within the period
: Minimum value within the period
: Average value within the period
Time
Fig. 5.2.1.2 Image of Compiled State Monitor Data
400
B-64644EN/08
The table below lists the details of state monitor data.
Table 5.2.1.2 (c) Details of State Monitor Data

Item name Description 1
Date/Time Date and time when data was compiled. Data is compiled at specified-
time intervals.
Max. Maximum value in the specified time interval. 2
Min. Minimum value in the specified time interval.
Ave. Average value of data in the specified time interval.
3
State Normal/Warning/Abnormal
Determination
4
Each state monitor data compiled at the mid-term and long-term storage period is
stored to different databases. If each database runs out of capacity, obsolete data
is overwritten. 5
When you register maintenance items at a maximum and set two types of monitor
data, each database can store about 1000 entries of compiled data (data of about 6
41 days for a compilation period of one hour, and about 32 months for a
compilation period of one day). When you reduce the number of maintenance
items or set only one type of monitor data, you can increase the number of entries 7
that can be registered.
You can check state monitor data on the maintenance item information screen 8
(transition graph) (-> "5.2.3.2 Operations in the graph style").
A1
5.2.1.3 Flow of using the maintenance manager
The flow of using the maintenance manager is listed below.
5.2.1.3
<1> Checking the set maintenance items -> See "5.2.2".

A2
<2> Displaying and checking detailed data as necessary -> See "5.2.3".
<3> Setting machine and user maintenance items as necessary -> See "5.2.4".
Z
<4> Performing and completing maintenance if you receive a maintenance
notification -> See "5.2.5".
5.2.1.4 Main screens and screen transition

This section introduces the main screens used for the maintenance manager and
5.2.1.4
shows screen transition.
401
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.1.4 Main Screens/Windows Used for the Maintenance Manager

Screen/window name Work description
Maintenance Icon style Displays maintenance management items as
information list screen icons.
1 Data style Displays maintenance management items as
data.
Maintenance item Transition graph Represents an individual maintenance item in
2 information screen the transition graph.
Maintenance Displays the maintenance guide information
Guide about an individual maintenance item.
3 Add Item window Add a maintenance item.
Edit Item window Edit the maintenance item.
4 Maintenance Complete window Completing maintenance
5
6
7
Home screen
8
A1
A2
Z Maintenance information
list screen (icon style)
Maintenance information list screen
(data style)
Maintenance item information Maintenance item information

screen (transition graph) screen
(maintenance guide)
402
B-64644EN/08
5.2.2 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Information

List Screen
5.2.2
You can see maintenance items in a list form on the maintenance information list
screen.
1
5.2.2.1 Opening the maintenance information list screen
5.2.2.1
Press [MAINTENANCE MANAGER], and a maintenance information list screen 2

appears.
<1> Press [MAINTENANCE INFORMATION] on the home screen.

3
A maintenance information list screen (icon style) appears.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
403
B-64644EN/08
5.2.2.2 Maintenance information list screen (icon style)

You can check a list of registered maintenance items on the maintenance item list
5.2.2.2
screen.
The [Switch Styles] soft key allows you to switch over to either icon or data style.
1 A
2 B
3
C
4
5
6 D
Fig. 5.2.2.2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Maintenance Information
7 List Screen (Icon Style)
8 Table 5.2.2.2 (a) Names and Functions

Name Description
A1 A Maintenance category tab The three maintenance categories ([CNC System

Maintenance], [Machine Maintenance], [User
Maintenance]) are placed horizontally. The tab
including a selection cursor appears in a different
A2 color. To switch over to another tab, press the [Switch
Tabs] soft key, or directly tap that tab or the contents
included in it.
Z When there is a protected maintenance category, the
protection icon is displayed on the left side of the
category name in the maintenance category tab.
404
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
B Maintenance item group Maintenance items appear for each maintenance
group.
You can select maintenance item groups from either
[Part] or [Unit].
At the beginning of the maintenance item group, you 1
see the name of the group and the number of
maintenance items registered with the group, such as
"Fan (N)". 2
If a group contains a maintenance item with a warning
or an abnormality notification, a notification icon
precedes the group name.
If the same group contains one maintenance item with
3
a warning notification and another item with an
abnormality notification, you see an abnormality
notification icon. 4
To switch the group, press the [Switch Groups] soft
key and then the horizontal soft key for the target
group. 5
C Maintenance item icon These are maintenance item icons. An image
representing a maintenance item type appears in a
frame. The abbreviation of the maintenance item 6
appears in the lower part of the icon. Depending on
the results of state determination from monitoring, the
color of the icon turns yellow for a warning notification 7
state or red for an abnormality notification state. Tap
the icon, and you can see the maintenance item
information screen of that maintenance item.
When there is a protected maintenance item, the
8
protection icon is displayed in the lower right section of
the maintenance item.
Maintenance item icon (warning state)
A1
A2
Maintenance item icon (abnormality
state)
Z
405
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
First page
Switches over to another display style of the
1 maintenance information list screen.
Press the key, and the maintenance information list
[Switch Styles] screen (data style) appears.
2 Switches over to another group.
Press the key, and another list of horizontal soft keys
appears.
3 [Switch Groups] Press the horizontal soft key for the target group, and
the display switches to that group.
Switches over to another category tab.
4 Press the key, and the display switches to another
category tab in turn.
[Switch Tabs]
5 Expands or collapses groups.
appears, where you can select [Expand All] or
6 [Expand Collapse] [Collapse All].
Complete
Press the key, and the Maintenance Complete window
7 [Maint. Complete]
appears. (-> "5.2.5 Notification and Completion of
Maintenance")
Switches over to the maintenance item information
8 screen.
Press the key, and the maintenance item information
[Details] screen appears. (-> "5.2.3 Basic Operations of the
A1 Maintenance Item Information Screen")
Second page
Switches to the row of soft keys shown in the table
A2 below.
Each soft key becomes operable according to the
[Item Settings] selected maintenance category.
Z
406
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.2.2 (b) Soft Keys When the [Item Settings] Soft Key Is Pressed
Operation target Name Description
category
[CNC System Detects a maintenance item.
Maintenance] 1
[Detect Maintenance
Item]
Displays the Reset Capacitor Capacity
2
window, allowing you to detect the
capacitor capacity and set the capacity
[Redetect Capacitor] again.
3
For details about the settings, see "FANUC
A preset file is used to check the
4
connection of the device configuration and
[Generate Preset
help the detection during maintenance item
detection. 5
File] For details on the operations, see "FANUC
[Machine Displays the Export window, allowing you to 6
Maintenance] select a memory card or USB flash drive for
User maintenance the export destination. When you press the
[Export] [OK] soft key on the window, the setting 7
data is exported.
Displays the Import window, allowing you to
select a memory card or USB flash drive 8
that contains a file you want to import.
[Import] When you press the [OK] soft key on the
window, the file is imported. A1
Displays the Add Item window, allowing you
to add a maintenance item.
A2
[Add]
Pressing this soft key after selecting the
target maintenance item displays the Edit Z
Item window, allowing you to edit a
[Edit] maintenance item.
target maintenance item displays the
Confirm Delete Item window, allowing you
[Delete] to delete a maintenance item.
Common to all Switches to the row of the [Item Settings]
categories soft keys.
[Close]
407
B-64644EN/08
• For the examples of standard maintenance icon images, see "5.2.7

 List of Icons".
• If no maintenance item appears in [CNC System Maintenance], see
MEMO
1 "5.2.2.4 Setting the maintenance item of [CNC System Maintenance]".
2  Switching from the icon style to the data style

Switches over to another display style of the maintenance information list screen.
3 <1> Press the [Switch Styles] soft key on the maintenance information list screen.
The display switches to the maintenance information screen (data style).
4
 • For the maintenance information screen (data style), see "5.2.2.3
Maintenance information list screen (data style)".
5
MEMO
 Switching the category tab

6 Switch over to the target category tab.
7 <1> Press the [Switch Tabs] soft key on the maintenance information list screen.
The display switches to another category tab in turn.
8
A1
 Switching the maintenance item group
Switch over to the target maintenance item group.
A2
<1> Press the [Switch Groups] soft key on the maintenance information list screen.
Z The horizontal soft key display changes.
<2> Press the group to which you want to switch.

That group appears.
408
B-64644EN/08
Group type Description

Part A group storing parts for each type. It is useful to manage
many of the same type of parts such as consumables.
Unit A group storing units constituting machinery for each type. It is
useful to check maintenance tasks for replacing parts in units 1
instead of parts.
2
<3> When the display switches to the target group, press the [Close] soft key.
 Expanding or collapsing maintenance item groups

3
You can expand or collapse maintenance item groups for each group.
4
<1> Press the [Expand Collapse] soft key on the maintenance information list
screen.
The horizontal soft key display changes. 5
6
<2> Press the [Expand] or [Collapse] soft key. 7
The groups are expanded or collapsed in the specified way.
8
A1
[Expand]
[Expand All]
Expands the selected group.
Expands all the groups within the selected category.
A2
[Collapse] Collapses the selected group.
[Collapse All] Collapses all the groups within the selected category. Z
Groups expanded Groups collapsed
409
B-64644EN/08
<3> When the display switches to the target style, press the [Close] soft key.
● Using the touch panel
Also, when you directly tap the name of the first group, you can expand or
collapse groups.
1 ● Using the cursor move keys

When you put the cursor on the group name and press <←> <→> or <INPUT>,
you can expand or collapse groups.
2
 Completing maintenance
3 If an abnormality of the maintenance item is detected, its details appear on the
Home screen and in the information center. To delete this notification, you need to
complete maintenance.
4 In that case, use the [Maint. Complete] soft key.
5  • For details, see "5.2.5 Notification and Completion of Maintenance".

MEMO
6
 Displaying the details of the maintenance item
You can see the details of the maintenance item.
7
<1> Select the maintenance item for which you want to see details, and press the
8 [Details] soft key.

A maintenance item information screen appears.
A1 ● Using the touch panel

Directly tap the maintenance item for which you want to see details, and a
maintenance item information screen appears.
A2 ● Using the cursor move keys
Use the cursor to select the maintenance item for which you want to see details
Z and then press <INPUT>, and a maintenance item information screen appears.
 • For the operations of the maintenance item information screen, see

"5.2.3 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Item Information Screen".
MEMO
410
B-64644EN/08
5.2.2.3 Maintenance information list screen (data style)

You can see registered maintenance items in a list form on the maintenance item
5.2.2.3
list screen (data style).

The [Switch Styles] soft key allows you to switch from the data style to the icon
style.
The data style is similar to the icon style in the screen layout, except that a data 1
list is used instead of icons.
Also, the same horizontal soft keys are used.
2
A
3
C
D
4
B
5
6
7
E
8
Fig. 5.2.2.3 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Maintenance Information
List Screen (Data Style)
A1
Name Description A2
A Maintenance category tab The three maintenance categories ([CNC System
Maintenance], [Machine Maintenance], [User
Maintenance]) are placed horizontally. The tab including Z
a selection cursor appears in a different color. To switch
over to another tab,
press the [Switch Tabs] soft key, or directly tap that tab
or the contents included in it.
411
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
B Maintenance item group If a group contains a maintenance item with a warning
or an abnormality notification, a notification icon
precedes the group name. If the same group contains
1 one maintenance item with a warning notification and

another item with an abnormality notification, you see
an abnormality notification icon.
You can expand or collapse maintenance item groups
2 for each group. To select whether to expand or collapse
groups, press the [Expand Collapse] soft key. Also,
when you tap the name of the first group or when you
3 put the cursor on the group name and press <←> <→>
or <INPUT>, you can expand or collapse groups.
Use <←> <→> <↑> <↓> move the cursor within the
4 group. To move between groups,

press <↓> or <→> at the bottom group, or press <↑> or
<←> at the top group.
5 C Item header These are the headers of the maintenance item data list
to be displayed.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
412
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
D Maintenance item data These are maintenance item data.
Maintenance item Name of the maintenance item.
name Displays the name shown in the
lower part of the icon in the icon
style.
1
Bar graph ([State Represents the current status of
Monitor 1]) [State Monitor 1] as a bar graph.
The bar appears in a color
2
corresponding to a state. A value
is displayed in the center of it. To
determine normal, warning, and 3
abnormal states, the threshold
value set for monitor data 1 is
used. 4
Threshold values of These are threshold values of
[State Monitor 1] [State Monitor 1]. There are two
threshold values to determine a 5
warning or an abnormal state.
Two threshold values are
delimited by a slash (/). W
indicates a threshold value for a
6
warning notification state, and A
indicates a threshold value for an
abnormal notification state.
7
Bar graph ([State Bar graph representing the
Monitor 2]) current status of [State Monitor 2].
If nothing is monitored, only the
8
frame of the bar graph appears
without a bar and value. To
determine normal, warning, and A1
abnormal states, the threshold
value set for monitor data 2 is
used. A2
Threshold values of These are threshold values of
[State Monitor 2] [State Monitor 2].
Last maintenance Date when the last maintenance Z
date was performed. Completing
maintenance automatically
updates this date.
413
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
E Horizontal soft keys The displayed soft keys are the same as for the
maintenance item list screen (item style).
First page
1 Switches over to another display style of the
maintenance information list screen.
Press the key, and a maintenance information list
2 [Switch Styles] screen (icon style) appears.
Switches over to another group.
3 [Switch Groups]
appears. When you press the horizontal soft key for the
target group, the display switches to that group.
Switches over to another category tab.
4 Press the key, and the display switches to another
category tab in turn.
[Switch Tabs]
5 Expands or collapses groups.
appears, where you can select [Expand All] or [Collapse
6 [Expand Collapse] All].
Complete
Press the key, and the Maintenance Complete window
7 appears. (-> "5.2.5 Notification and Completion of
Maintenance")
[Maint. Complete]
8 screen.
Press the key, and the maintenance item information
[Details] screen appears. (-> "5.2.3 Basic Operations of the
A1 Maintenance Item Information Screen")
Second page
Switches to the row of soft keys shown in the table
A2 below.
Each soft key becomes operable according to the
[Item Settings] selected maintenance category.
Z
414
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.2.3 (b) Soft Keys When the [Item Settings] Soft Key Is Pressed
Operation target Name Description
category
[CNC System Detects a maintenance item.
Maintenance] 1
[Detect Maintenance
Item]
Displays the Reset Capacitor Capacity
2
window, allowing you to detect the
capacitor capacity and set the capacity
[Redetect Capacitor] again.
3
For details about the settings, see "FANUC
A preset file is used to check the
4
connection of the device configuration and
[Generate Preset
help the detection during maintenance item
detection. 5
File] For details on the operations, see "FANUC
[Machine Displays the Export window, allowing you to 6
Maintenance] select a memory card or USB flash drive for
User maintenance the export destination. When you press the
[Export] [OK] soft key on the window, the setting 7
data is exported.
Displays the Import window, allowing you to
select a memory card or USB flash drive 8
that contains a file you want to import.
[Import] When you press the [OK] soft key on the
window, the file is imported. A1
Displays the Add Item window, allowing you
to add a maintenance item.
A2
[Add]
target maintenance item displays the Edit Z
Item window, allowing you to edit a
[Edit] maintenance item.
target maintenance item displays the
Confirm Delete Item window, allowing you
[Delete] to delete a maintenance item.
Common to all Switches to the row of the [Item Settings]
categories soft keys.
[Close]
415
B-64644EN/08
5.2.2.4 Setting the maintenance item of [CNC System Maintenance]

You can add a maintenance item of [CNC System Maintenance].
5.2.2.4
<1> On the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance category ([CNC
1 System Maintenance]) to which you add a maintenance item.
2 <2> In maintenance item list screen, press the [Item Settings] soft key.
3
4 <3> Press the [Detect Items] soft key.
For the devices of the connected CNC system, their maintenance items are
5 detected and automatically configured.
6
The automatic detection completion message appears when the detection is
completed.
7
The table below lists the default settings for detectable maintenance items.
8 Maintenance group
Fan CNC
Unit
Fan 1 to 4
Target
Servo amplifier Internal cooling fan 1, 2

A1 Radiator cooling fan 1, 2
Common power supply Internal cooling fan 1, 2
A2 Spindle amplifier
Radiator cooling fan 1, 2
Internal cooling fan 1, 2
Z Battery Servo amplifier APC battery
motor Spindle motor Insulation resistance
Servo motor Insulation resistance
amplifier Amplifier group Condenser
 Checking the parameters when the maintenance items are detected

You can check values set when the maintenance items are detected on the
maintenance item edit screen.
416
B-64644EN/08
<1> On the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance category ([CNC
System Maintenance]) to which you add a maintenance item.
<2> In maintenance item list screen, press the [Item Settings] soft key.
<3> Press the [Edit] soft key. 1
The Edit Item window appears.
2
3
• On the maintenance item list screen, when you select the
 maintenance category ([CNC System Maintenance]) to which you
add a maintenance item and press the [Details] soft key, you can 4
MEMO
check the image and guide file.
5
 Deleting maintenance items
You can delete a maintenance item of CNC System Maintenance.
6
<1> On the maintenance item list screen, select CNC System Maintenance.
<2> In the maintenance item list screen, press the [Item Settings] soft key. 7
<3> Select the maintenance item you want to delete and press the [Delete] soft key. 8
The deletion confirmation window appears.
The table below lists the maintenance items that can be detected.
A1
Maintenance Unit Target
group A2
Fan CNC Fan 1 to 4
Servo amplifier Internal cooling fan 1, 2
Z
Common power supply Internal cooling fan 1, 2
Spindle amplifier Internal cooling fan 1, 2
Battery Servo amplifier APC battery
motor Spindle motor Insulation resistance
Servo motor Insulation resistance
amplifier Amplifier group Condenser
417
B-64644EN/08
 • When protection is set on the CNC System Maintenance category, the

CNC System Maintenance items cannot be deleted.
MEMO
1
 Setting the capacitor capacity again
2 The Reset Capacitor Capacity function allows you to detect the capacitor capacity
and set the capacity again.
For details about the settings, see "FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN).
3 5.2.2.5 Closing the maintenance information list screen

This section describes how to close the maintenance information list screen.
5.2.2.5
4
<1> Press <HOME>.
This closes the maintenance information list screen and takes you to the Home
5 screen.
6 5.2.3 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Item Informa-

tion Screen
7
5.2.3
You can see the details of the individual maintenance item.

The maintenance item information screen consists of the following two windows:
transition graph and maintenance guide.
8 The default view of the maintenance item information screen depends on the
monitor state of the maintenance item, as listed below.
• Normal state: Transition graph
A1 • Warning state: Maintenance guide
• Abnormal state: Maintenance guide
A2
5.2.3.1 Displaying the maintenance item information screen
Display the maintenance item information screen.
5.2.3.1
Z
<1> Select the maintenance item for which you want to see details, and press the
[Details] soft key.
As shown below, the maintenance item information screen appears depending
on the monitor state of the selected maintenance item.
• Normal state: Transition graph
• Warning state: Maintenance guide
• Abnormal state: Maintenance guide
418
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
5.2.3.2 Operations in the graph style
5.2.3.2
You can see compiled state monitor data on the maintenance item information 6
screen (transition graph).
<1> Press the [Graph] soft key on the maintenance item information screen.
7
A maintenance item information screen (transition graph) appears.
8
A1
A
A2
B
C G
Z
D
E
419
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
A Maintenance item name Displays the maintenance item name.
B Warning or abnormality Displays the warning or abnormality notification
1 notification message message.
C Maintenance target Displays the maintenance target image.
image
2 D Maintenance part serial Displays the serial number of the maintenance part.
number
E State of the maintenance Represents the state of the maintenance item as
3 item [State Monitor 1] or [State Monitor 2].
F Date and time of the last Displays the date and time of the last maintenance.
maintenance
4 G Transition data Allows you to check the state monitor data of the
target maintenance item in the graph style.
The following information appears in the transition
5 graph:
- Displayed date and time
- Compiled value of state monitor data
6 - Threshold value triggering a warning notification
- Threshold value triggering an abnormality
notification
7 - Maintenance state (normal, warning, abnormal)
8
A1
A2
Z
420
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
H Horizontal soft keys
Switch the state monitor data to be displayed in the
graph.
[Switch Graph]
Press the key, and the display switches between
[State Monitor 1] and [State Monitor 2] alternately. 1
You can change the compilation date and time scale
of the horizontal axis.
2
[Change Range] appears, where you select the target duration.
You can change the date and time to be displayed in
the transition graph.
3
[Date Displayed] appears, where you select the target date and time to
be displayed. 4
Switches to the Transition Graph window.
5
[Graph]
Switches to the Maintenance History window.
6
[History]
7
screen (maintenance guide).
[Guide]
-> "5.2.3.3 Operations in the guide style"
8
Completes maintenance.
-> "5.2.5 Notification and Completion of Maintenance"
A1
[Maint. Complete]
Closes the maintenance item information screen and
takes you back to the maintenance information list
A2
screen.
[Close]
Z
 Switching the state monitor data to be displayed in the graph
Switch the state monitor data to be displayed in the graph.
You see the data of the graph title currently shown in the graph display area.
<1> Press the [Switch Graph] soft key.

The display switches to another state monitor data to be shown in the graph.
421
B-64644EN/08
 Switching the duration to be displayed in the graph

The horizontal axis of the transition graph represents the date and time when data
was compiled. By changing the scale of the horizontal axis, you can check the
transition of state monitor data for one year, one month, one day, or one hour.
1 <1> Press the [Change Range] soft key.

2
3
<2> Press the horizontal soft key for the target duration.
4 The display switches to the graph based on the selected duration.
5
6 <3> Press the [Close] soft key.
This takes you back to the original list of soft keys.
7  Changing the date and time to be displayed in the graph

By changing the date and time to be displayed in the transition graph, you can
8 check the transition of the past state monitor data.
• Suppose that the data of September appears for the horizontal axis
A1 with a scale of one month.
 Click [Back], and you see the data of August of that year.
Click [Next], and you see the data of October of that year.
A2 MEMO Click [Specify Date], and a calendar window appears. When you
select June 15 of the preceding year in the window, the data of June
of the preceding year appears in the transition graph.
Z
<1> Press the [Data Displayed] soft key.
<2> Press the horizontal soft key for the date and time to be displayed.
The display switches to the graph based on the selected date and time.
422
B-64644EN/08
Horizontal soft keys Description 1

[Back] Displays the information about the previous compilation date
[Next]
and time.
Displays the information about the next compilation date and
2
time.
[Specify Date] Displays the transition graph including the specified date.
Press this horizontal soft key, and a calendar window appears.
3
Select a date in the window to specify the date and time to be
displayed.
4
When using [Specify Date]
<1> Press [Specify Date].
5
A calendar window appears.
6
<2> Select the date and time to be displayed, and click [OK].
Displays the transition graph including the specified date.
7
8
A1
A2
5.2.3.3 Operations in the guide style
5.2.3.3
The procedure for performing maintenance appears in the maintenance item Z

information screen (guide style).
A PNG file can be displayed in [Guide 1] and [Guide 2] shown in the maintenance
guide.
For how to set a guide, see "5.2.4 Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item".
<1> Press the [Guide] soft key on the maintenance item information screen.
A maintenance item information screen (guide style) appears.
423
B-64644EN/08
1 C
G
2 D
E
3 F
4
H
5
Name Description
6 A Maintenance item name

B Warning or abnormality
Displays the maintenance item name.
Displays the warning or abnormality notification
notification message message.
7 C Maintenance target image Displays the maintenance target image.
D Maintenance part serial Displays the serial number of the maintenance part.
number
8 E State of the maintenance Represents the state of the maintenance item as
item [State Monitor 1] or [State Monitor 2].
A1 F Date and time of the last

maintenance
Displays the date and time of the last maintenance.
G Maintenance Guide Below is the details of the items shown in the
A2 maintenance guide.
[Guide 1] Procedure file 1
[Guide 2] Procedure file 2
Z H Horizontal soft keys
Switch over to another guide to be displayed.
Press the key, and you see soft keys for switching
the guide.
[Switch Guides]
Zooms in the guide.
Press the key, and the size of the guide is
magnified.
[Zoom In]
Zooms out the guide.
Press the key, and the size of the guide is reduced.
[Zoom Out]
424
B-64644EN/08
Name Description
screen (graph style).
-> "5.2.3.2 Operations in the graph style"
[Graph]
The Maintenance History window appears.
1
-> "5.2.3.5 Checking maintenance history data"
[History]
2
Completes maintenance.
-> "5.2.5 Notification and Completion of
Maintenance"
3
[Maint. Complete]
Closes the maintenance item information screen
and takes you back to the maintenance information
4
list screen.
[Close]
5
 Switching over to another guide to be displayed
Switch over to another guide to be displayed.
6
<1> Press the [Switch Guides] soft key. 7
8
A1
<2> Press the horizontal soft key for the guide to be displayed.
The display switches to that guide.
A2
Z
When a touch panel is used

Directly tap the tab of the guide to be displayed, and the target guide appears.
 Zooming in or out the guide

Zoom in or out the guide.
425
B-64644EN/08
<1> Press the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] soft key.

The size of the guide is magnified or reduced.
1
2 5.2.3.4 Closing the maintenance item information screen
Closes the maintenance item information screen and takes you back to the
5.2.3.4

3
4 Closes the maintenance item information screen and takes you back to the
5
6 5.2.3.5 Checking maintenance history data
Displays Maintenance History window from the maintenance item information
5.2.3.5
screen (transition graph or guide style) and check the latest 250 maintenance
7 history data.
8 <1> Displays Maintenance History window from the maintenance item information
screen (transition graph or guide style) and check the latest 250 maintenance
history data.
A1 The Maintenance History window appears.
A2
Z
426
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
The maintenance history data is displayed in the latest order from the top.
5
When the Maintenance History window is displayed, the cursor is set on the
history type of the maintenance history data of the latest date and time.
6
<2> Press the [Update] soft key.
Maintenance history data is obtained again and displayed on the Maintenance 7
History window.
8
A1
<3> Execute the following operations as necessary.
• Display maintenance item information screen (transition graph) (see "5.2.3.2")
A2
• Display maintenance item information screen (guide style) (see "5.2.3.3")
• Display maintenance complete screen (see "5.2.5.2")
• Edit maintenance item (press the [Edit Item] soft key on the second page of
Z
soft keys) (see "5.2.4")
427
B-64644EN/08
5.2.4 Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item

5.2.4
You can add, edit, or delete individual maintenance items. You can also export or
import maintenance item setting data.
1 • With the [Item Settings] soft key pressed, even when you tap the
 maintenance item on the maintenance item list screen, you are not
taken to the maintenance item information screen. That maintenance
2 MEMO
item remains selected with the cursor.
3 5.2.4.1 Adding and setting the maintenance item

You can add a maintenance item.
5.2.4.1
4 <1> On the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance category
(machine maintenance or user maintenance) to which you add a maintenance
5 item.
6 The horizontal soft key display changes.
7
8 <3> Press the [Add] soft key.
The Add Item window appears.
A1
A2
<4> Enter or configure each item, and press the [OK] soft key.
Z This closes the Add Item window and adds the maintenance item.
428
B-64644EN/08
• If you do not set required items (marked by *), that maintenance

item is not registered.
• In [Target Unit Name] and [Target Part Name] of the Add Item
window, the names set for the selected maintenance category are
already input as initial values. 1
2
3
 4
MEMO
5
6
• To copy the input item, move the cursor to the input item you want to 7
copy (source) and press the [Copy] soft key. Then, move the cursor
to the input item where you want to paste it (destination) and press
the [Paste] soft key to paste the copied string. 8
A1
Data name How to set data
* Maintenance Item Name Use alphanumerics to enter the name of the
item, such as the ball screw of the X-axis or the A2
linear guide of the Y-axis.
* Abbreviated Names Use alphanumerics to enter the abbreviated
name of the maintenance item shown in the Z
lower part of the icon on the maintenance item
list screen.
Target Unit Name Use alphanumerics to enter the name of the
unit using maintenance items, such as the X-
axis or Y-axis.
* Target Part Name Use alphanumerics to enter the name of the
target part, such as the ball screw or interior
light.
Serial Number Use alphanumerics to enter any number, such
as a figure number or an order number.
429
B-64644EN/08

Target Image Enter the file name of the target image to be
displayed on the maintenance item information
screen. (A file with the extension ".png" can be
1 specified.)
Save the target photo for each maintenance
category to the folder below and enter that file
name.
2 Machine maintenance:
[Root folder for data]\MTB\Maintenance\
Photo
3 User maintenance:
[Root folder for data]\USER\Maintenance\
Photo
4 Display Icon (Normal) Enter the number (0 to 59) of the display icon
listed in the maintenance item list screen or set
the icon on the Select Icon window.
5 Display Icon (Warning) Set the icon on the Select Icon window.
Display Icon (Abnormal) Set the icon on the Select Icon window.
Register Maintenance Schedule Set the next maintenance date and the
6 Date notification time in the Schedule Settings
window that appears when you press the
[View] soft key.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
430
B-64644EN/08

State Monitor 1 * Data Type For details on data types, see "Table 5.2.1.1 (b)
Data Settable as State Monitor Data".
Data Unit • Time system: Select the data unit (hour, day)
from the combo box or enter it with
alphanumeric values.
1
• Non-time system: Use alphanumeric values
Data Address
to enter the data unit.
• Various types of time
2
[Total Time], [Powered Time]:
Entering a data address is ignored.
• [Operated Time], [Cut Time]: 3
Enter the data address in the form [Path].
Path:1-
• PMC signal 4
Enter the data address in the form [Path],
[Address type][Address number].[Bit
number].
Path:1-
5
Address type: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M,
N, E, Z
Address number: Up to four digits can be set.
6
Bit number: Enabled only when the bit type is
specified as a data type.
• Custom macro variable 7
• Execution macro variable
• Auxiliary macro variable
• Conversational macro variable 8
Enter the data address in the form [Path],
[Variable number].
Path:1- A1
* Data Range
(Minimum) Enter the maximum and minimum values of
* Data Range data (used for the graph style). A2
(Maximum)
* Determination Select [Upper Limit] or [Lower Limit].
Type Z
Warning Enter the threshold value triggering a warning
Threshold message.
Abnormality Enter the threshold value triggering an
Threshold abnormality message.
431
B-64644EN/08

State Monitor 2 * Data Type Select the data type, such as time or PMC
information.
Data Unit • Time system: Select the data unit (hour, day)
1 from the combo box or enter it with
alphanumeric values.
• Non-time system: Use alphanumeric values
2 Data Address
to enter the data unit.
Enter the data address, as is the case with
monitor data 1.
3 * Data Range
(Minimum) Enter the maximum and minimum values of
* Data Range data (used for the graph style).
4 (Maximum)
* Determination Select [Upper Limit] or [Lower Limit].
Type
5 Warning Enter the threshold value triggering a warning
Threshold message.
Abnormality Enter the threshold value triggering an
6 Threshold abnormality message.
* State Determination Method Select [AND] or [OR] when you set two types of
state monitor data.
7 Warning Message Use alphanumerics to enter the contents of the
message notifying you of a warning.
8 Abnormality Message Use alphanumerics to enter the contents of the

message notifying you of an abnormality.
* State monitor data compilation Select 1 hour to 4 hours.
A1 period (for mid-term storage)

* State monitor data compilation Select a value in the range of 0 to 10 days.
period (for long-term storage)
A2
Z
432
B-64644EN/08

Maintenance Guide 1 Enter the name of the file (a maximum two
Maintenance Guide 2 files) storing the contents displayed in the
maintenance guide. (A file with the extension
".png" can be specified.)
Save the maintenance guide file for each 1
maintenance category to the folder below and
enter that file name.
Machine maintenance: 2
[Root folder for data]\MTB\Maintenance\Guide
User maintenance:
[Root folder for data]\USER\Maintenance\Guide
The format for file names is as follows.
3
[Guide file name]_[Language
identifier].[Extension]
Only specify [Guide file name] when specifying 4
the maintenance guide file.
Specify the same character string as in the
<[language]> tag in "Table A.2.1.4 Language 5
List" for the language identifier.
If there is no guide file available in the
language selected in the Switch Language, the
guide file is displayed in English.
6
Display description when the item is Set the screen transition destination when the
selected maintenance item information screen is 7
displayed.
• Display according to the maintenance item
status
Normal: to Transition Graph screen
8
Warning or abnormal: to Maintenance
Guide screen
• Maintenance Guide A1
A2
Z
433
B-64644EN/08
• For how to determine the state, see "How to determine the state" in
"5.2.1.2 Determining the state of the maintenance item".
• For the compilation period of the state monitor data, see "State
1 monitor data" in "5.2.1.2 Determining the state of the maintenance

item".
• The setting data items with "*" preceding their names are required
for the maintenance item.
2 If these are not set, that maintenance item is not registered.
• If you do not set data in [State Monitor Data 2], monitor data 2 is not
displayed and monitored.
3 If you do not set the data of the following optional setting items,
their default settings are used:
 [Warning Message], [Abnormality Message]
4 MEMO
If these are not set, warning and abnormality messages appear
as listed below.
Warning message: [A warning was detected in [Maintenance
5 Item Name]].
Abnormality message: [An abnormality was detected in
[Maintenance Item Name"].
[Target Image], [Displayed Icon]
6 If these are not set, the target image and displayed icon are in
the states described below.
Target image: No image exists.
7 Displayed icon: Solid coating button on the icon screen
• You cannot enter "Display description when the item is selected" if
"Maintenance Guide 1" or "Maintenance Guide 2" is not filled out.
8
 Registering the maintenance schedule date to the calendar
A1 You can set the next maintenance date by linking it with the calendar function in
the Add Item window or Edit Item window. This linkage will also allow you to later
view the maintenance date in the Maintenance Complete window.
A2
Z
434
B-64644EN/08
<1> Select [Next Maintenance] from [State Monitor 1] in the Add Item window.
1
2
3
4
5
<2> Press the [Maint. Date] soft key.
The Maint. Date window appears. 6
 The [Maint. Date] soft key will be displayed when "Next
Maintenance" is registered to [Data Type] in [State Monitor 1].
7
MEMO
8
<3> Set the Next Maintenance Date.
A1
A2
The items that can be set are as follows.
Z
Setting item Setting contents Description
Next Maintenance Enter the date to perform the next Specify the next
Date maintenance. maintenance date with a
Configurable range: four-digit number for the year
2000/1/1 00:00 to 2037/12/31 and a two-digit number each
22:59 for the month, day, hour and
(Default is one day ahead of the minute.
current time)
435
B-64644EN/08
Setting item Setting contents Description

Notifications Select the date and time from the Set when the calendar
followings: application will notify the
None approach of the next
1 5 Min. Prior
10 Min. Prior
maintenance date.
30 Min. Prior
1 Hours Prior
2 6 Hours Prior
1 Day Prior
(Default is [5 Min. Prior])
3 <4> Set when to notify the approach of the next maintenance date.
By default, this is set to [5 Min. Prior].

The subject, repetition, time specification, notification, and details are
registered in the calendar screen.
5
 Changing display icons for maintenance items
6 You can change the display icon for "Normal", "Warning", and "Abnormal".
<1> Select the Display Icon item in the Add Item window.
<2> Press the [View] soft key.
7 The Select Icon window appears.
<3> Select the icon in the Select Icon window.
8
A1
A2
Z
Images to be used as icons must be saved to the following folder in

 advance.
MEMO • Machine maintenance: [Root folder for data]\MTB\Maintenance\Icon\
• User maintenance: [Root folder for data]\USER\Maintenance\Icon\
436
B-64644EN/08
5.2.4.2 Editing the maintenance item

You can edit the maintenance item.
5.2.4.2
• With the maintenance group name selected, the [Edit] soft key is
 grayed out and cannot be selected.
• When an APC battery is not available, set the threshold value as
1
MEMO
empty.
2
<1> On the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance item to be edited.
3
4
5
The Edit Item window appears.
6
7
8
 • The Edit Item window is displayed, even when you press the [Edit
Item] soft key on the second page of soft keys in the Maintenance
A1
MEMO History window.
<4> Edit each item, and press the [OK] soft key.
This closes the Edit Item window and changes the maintenance item.
A2
 • For how to edit the item, see "5.2.4.1 Adding and setting the Z
maintenance item".
MEMO
437
B-64644EN/08
5.2.4.3 Deleting the maintenance item

You can delete the maintenance item.
5.2.4.3
1  • With the maintenance group name selected, the [Delete] soft key is
grayed out and cannot be selected.
MEMO
2 <1> On the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance item to be
deleted.
3
4
5
<3> Move the cursor to a target to be deleted.
6 The item delete confirmation message is displayed.
• To delete all maintenance items in a group, place the cursor in the group.
7 • To delete a target maintenance item, place the cursor in the item.
8 <4> Press the [Delete] soft key.

The delete item selection screen appears, and the set of soft keys changes to
the Delete Item sub-soft keys.
A1 The checkboxes for the target maintenance items are selected according to the
cursor position specified in the previous step.
A2
Z
 • Checkboxes are hidden for maintenance items on which protection
has been set.
MEMO
<5> Change the selection of items to be deleted with the soft keys.
438
B-64644EN/08
 • The soft keys to select items may become disabled depending on

the status of the protection setting.
MEMO
1
The [Confirm Delete Item] window appears.
2
3
<7> Change the selection of items to be deleted with the soft keys.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
<8> Confirm and press the [OK] soft key. Z
The maintenance item is deleted.
 • If any schedule for a maintenance item is registered in the

calendar, that schedule and maintenance item will also be deleted
MEMO from the calendar.
5.2.4.4 Setting the read restriction on user maintenance items

You can set the acquisition or operation restriction on information when reading
the information of maintenance items set in the user maintenance category from
an external application.
439
B-64644EN/08
 • Read restriction can be set for user maintenance items only.

• Read restriction is enabled/disabled for all user maintenance
MEMO categories at once.
1
<1> In the maintenance item list screen, press the [Item Settings] soft key.
2 <2> Put the cursor on a maintenance item set in the user maintenance category or
user maintenance.
<3> Press the [Restriction OFF->ON] soft key.
3 The read restriction confirmation message is displayed.
4
5
 • To disable the read restriction, press the [Restriction ON->OFF]
soft key.
MEMO
6
7 The read restriction is enabled.
5.2.4.5 Text for export

8 5.2.4.4
You can export maintenance item setting information in the selected maintenance
category.
When it is exported, an XML file containing the maintenance item setting
A1 information is created.
Machine maintenance or user maintenance setting information can be exported.
A2 <1> In the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance category to which
you export the setting data.
Z
<3> Press the [Export] soft key.

The Export window appears.
440
B-64644EN/08
<4> Enter the name of the memory card or USB flash drive to specify the storage
where data is exported.
Enter "M_CARD" for the memory card and "USB_MEM" for USB flash drive.
Example) When the xml folder in the external storage is specified
M_CARD/xml/
USB_MEM/xml/ 1
2
3
4
5
6

7
8
A1
A2
Z
<6> Select an export target item and press the [Next] soft key.
The export will start.
441
B-64644EN/08
• When you press the [View] soft key, the Select Folder window
appears.
• If export data exists in the specified output destination, it will be
1 overwritten.
2

3 MEMO
4
• A different window appears according to the export result. If export
fails, "Could not export." appears.
5 • If export is aborted or fails, export data is not created.
• For the format of xml files, see "A.2 MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING
DATA".
6
5.2.4.6 Text for import
7 5.2.4.5
You can import maintenance item setting data. A maintenance item information file
saved in XML format is used for import. Machine maintenance or user
maintenance setting information can be imported.
8
<1> In the maintenance item list screen, select the maintenance category to which
A1 you import the setting data.
A2 The horizontal soft key display changes.
<3> Press the [Import] soft key.

The Import window appears.
<4> Enter the name of the memory card or USB flash drive to specify the storage
where data is imported.
Enter "M_CARD" for the memory card and "USB_MEM" for USB flash drive.
Example) When the xml folder in the external storage is specified
442
B-64644EN/08
M_CARD/xml/
USB_MEM/xml/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<6> Select an import target item and press the [Next] soft key.

The import will start.
443
B-64644EN/08
• When you press the [View] soft key, the Select Folder window
appears.
• This is used to select a folder containing the file.
1
2
3 
MEMO
4 • A different window appears according to the import result. If import

fails, "Could not import." appears.
5 • If import fails, the item name of the failed data is displayed.

• When setting a character string displayed in multiple language, import
the setting data including the character string.
• If an item with the same maintenance item name exists or the number
6 of registrations exceeds the limit, the setting data cannot be imported.
• For the format of xml files, see "A.2 MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING
DATA".
7
5.2.5 Notification and Completion of Maintenance
8 5.2.5
If an abnormality is detected in the state of the maintenance item, it appears in the

information center and on the Home screen.
A1 To delete this notification, complete maintenance.
5.2.5.1 How a notification is displayed

A2 5.2.5.1
The information center and the Home screen provide the state of the maintenance
item, such as an abnormality.
Z
 Information Center
If the notification of the maintenance item occurs, its message appears in the
information center.
When the display of the information center switches to a full screen, you can see a
list of notification messages.
 • For details of the information center, see "2.4 INFORMATION

CENTER".
MEMO
The information center contains the following items:
444
B-64644EN/08
B
1
2
C 3
4
Fig. 5.2.5.1 (a) Displayed Items on the Information Center 5
Table 5.2.5.1 Displayed Items on the Information Center 6
Displayed item
A
B
Maintenance item name
Notification message
7
Abnormality Message
8
Warning Message
Notifications A1
C Detailed message
A2
 • To delete notifications, press the [Delete] soft key. Z
MEMO
 Home screen
If the maintenance manager function provides a warning or an abnormality
notification to the Home screen, a notification icon is appended to the
[MAINTENANCE MANAGER] icon on the Home screen.
If an abnormality notification exists, an abnormality notification icon appears.
For only a warning notification, a warning notification icon appears.
445
B-64644EN/08
Checking the contents of the notification

Select the [MAINTENANCE MANAGER] icon to check the contents of the
notification.
1
Home screen Home screen
2 (occurrence of the warning) (occurrence of the abnormality)
Fig. 5.2.5.1 (b) Display Example of Notification Icon of Maintenance Manager

3 5.2.5.2 Completion task
If the maintenance item has a notification, perform maintenance for the item as
5.2.5.2
4 necessary, for example, replace a part, and then conduct a completion task.
This clears the message shown in the information center and starts new state
monitoring.
5 For multiple maintenance items to be completed, conduct the completion task on
the maintenance information list screen.
For one maintenance item to be completed, conduct the completion task on the
6 maintenance information item screen.
 Operating on the maintenance information list screen

7 Conduct the completion task for multiple maintenance items.
8 <1> Press the [Maint. Complete] soft key on the maintenance information list
screen.
You see a check box for each maintenance item and another list of horizontal
A1 soft keys.
A2
Z <2> Select the maintenance item to be completed, and press the [Select] soft key.
The check box for the maintenance item is selected.
 • Press the [Select] soft key again, and the check box is deselected.
MEMO

To select the check box, directly tap the maintenance item to be completed.
446
B-64644EN/08
Horizontal
soft keys
Description
1
[Select] Use this key to select the check box for the selected maintenance item.
[Select
Group]
Use this key to select the check boxes for all maintenance items within
the group including the selected item.
2
[Select All] Use this key to select the check boxes for all maintenance items
contained in the selected category. 3
[Deselect All] Use this key to deselect the check boxes for all maintenance items
contained in the selected category. The maintenance items contained in
the deselected category are not deselected. 4
5
6
7
Maintenance item list screen Maintenance item list screen
(icon style) (data style)
8
• For the icon style, the check box appears in the lower left of the
 maintenance item icon. A1
• For the data style, the check box appears to the left of the
MEMO
maintenance item name.
A2
<3> Select the check boxes for all the target maintenance items.
Z
<4> Press the [Maint. Complete] soft key.
The confirmation window appears.
<5> Confirm the displayed target to be completed, enter the task and others, and
This completes maintenance and clears the warning or abnormality message.
447
B-64644EN/08
 Operating on the maintenance information item screen

Complete the individual maintenance item.
<1> On the maintenance information item screen, display the maintenance item to
1 be completed.
<2> Press the [Maint. Complete] soft key.

2 The confirmation window appears.
3
4 <3> Enter the task, and press the [OK] soft key.
This completes maintenance and clears the warning or abnormality message.
5
5.2.6 User Maintenance Protection Setting
6 5.2.6
User maintenance items can be protected against edit/deletion by operators.

You can set protection for each user maintenance item or category.
7 With the user maintenance protection setting enabled, the following functions
become unavailable.
• Adding a maintenance item ([Add] soft key disabled)
8 • Editing a maintenance item ([Edit] soft key disabled)
• Deleting a maintenance item (Item not selected as the deletion target)
A1 • Importing setting data
When protection is set on the category, the [Import] soft key becomes
A2 disabled.
• Exporting setting data
Z When protection is set on the category, the [Export] soft key becomes
disabled.
When protection is set on maintenance items, protected maintenance items
will not be output to an XML file.
When protection is set on all maintenance items, the [Export] soft key
becomes disabled.
Functions are restricted as follows:
448
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.6 Correspondence between Each Function and User Maintenance

Protection Settings
Item Description
Category User maintenance
How to set Reading XML file 1
protection
Detect item -
Add item Unprotected ○ 2
Protected(*1) ×
Edit item Unprotected ○
3
Protected ×
Delete item Unprotected ○
Protected × 4
Import Unprotected ○
Protected (*1) ×
5
Export Unprotected ○
Protected ×(*2)
(*1) The function is disabled only when protection is set on the category. 6
(*2)The disabled content varies by the protection setting type.
• When protection is set on the category, the [Export] soft key becomes disabled. 7
• When protection is set on maintenance items, protected maintenance items will
not be output to an XML file.
• When protection is set on all maintenance items, the [Export] soft key becomes
8
disabled.
A1
5.2.6.1 Setting protection on user maintenance
5.2.6.1
Read the XML file describing the user maintenance protection setting to set A2
protection on maintenance items.
<1> Prepare the XML file describing the user maintenance protection setting.
Z
The file name is fixed to "MainteUserSettings.xml".
For details about the file, see "5.2.6.3 User maintenance protection setting XML
format".
<2> Store the XML file in the following folder.
PANEL iH: \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\
D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\
449
B-64644EN/08
<3> Start the maintenance manager application.

The maintenance manager application reads the protection setting from the
XML file at startup and saves it in the database.
When it is located in a folder, the protection setting from the XML file is read at
every startup.
1 When the XML file is deleted, the protection setting will then be read from the
database.
2 • To export a user maintenance item on which protection has been

set, the protection setting needs to be canceled beforehand.
3 • If an error occurs in reading the file at startup, an error log is saved
in a text file.
 The file will be created in the following folder as "UserErrorLog.txt".
4 MEMO
PANEL iH: \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\
D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\
5 C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\
6 5.2.6.2 Outputting user maintenance protection setting

The current user maintenance protection setting can be output in XML format.
5.2.6.2
Output the user maintenance protection setting currently written in the database
7 by storing a file in the specified folder.
For details about the file, see "5.2.6.3 User maintenance protection setting XML
format".
8 When the output of protection setting is successful, the file will be renamed, and
therefore the protection setting is not output at every startup of the maintenance
manager application.
A1
Take the following steps to output the setting for maintenance item display
switching.
A2
<1> Create the following folder.
Z PANEL iH: \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\backup\
D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\backup\
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Maintenance\Settings\backup\
450
B-64644EN/08
<2> Create an empty XML file named "MainteUserSettings.xml" and store it in the
folder created in the step 1.
1
2
<3> Start the maintenance manager application.
The current user maintenance protection setting will be written to the XML file 3
created in the step 2, and the file will be renamed by adding a time stamp.
4
5
6
5.2.6.3 User maintenance protection setting XML format
5.2.6.3
A user maintenance protection setting file is used for the protection function for the 7
user maintenance category.
The protection setting file is created using Unicode.
It describes various types of information between <mainteusersettings> and </ 8
mainteusersettings>.
The following example shows the XML file description for the case of protecting A1
user maintenance and setting protection on the maintenance item "test".
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?> A2

<mainteusersettings>
<items>
<item> Z
<itemname>test</itemname>
<protect>1</protect>
</item>
</items>
<userprotect>1</userprotect>
</mainteusersettings>
451
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.6.3 (a) List of Tags Described between <mainteusersettings> and

</mainteusersettings>
XML tag Required Child Description Usable
element version
1 <userprotect> × None Set whether or not a maintenance

item in the user maintenance
13.0
category is protected.
2 0: Do not protect maintenance item

1: Protect maintenance item (set for
each item)
2: Protect maintenance item (set for
3 category)
When undefined, this is handled as 0
(do not protect maintenance item).
4 When an entered value is out of the
range, this is handled as 2 (protect
maintenance item (set for category))
5 <items> × <item>
and written to the database.
Maintenance item information group. 13.0
Describe information about each
6 maintenance item using the <item>
tag (see table below).
7 Table 5.2.6.3 (b) List of Tags Described between <item> and </item>
XML tag Required Child Description Usable
8 element version
<itemname> ○ None Describe the maintenance item name 13.0
(English) to switch the protection
A1 setting.
You may enter up to 127 characters.
<protect> × None Set whether or not the maintenance 13.0
A2 item is protected.
0: Do not protect maintenance item
1: Protect maintenance item
Z When undefined, this is handled as 0
(do not protect maintenance item).
When an entered value is out of the
range, this is handled as 1 (protect
maintenance item) and written to the
database.
* Only when 1 (protect maintenance
item (set for each item)) is set using
the <userprotect> tag, the
protection setting described using
the <protect> tag is applied.
When you use the following symbols between tags, use the substitution character
strings.
452
B-64644EN/08
Table 5.2.6.3 (c) Symbol and Substitution Character String

Target Substitution Use example
symbol string Before substitution After substitution
& & <itemname>User0&1 <itemname>User0&1 1
</itemname> </itemname>
< < <itemname>User<0>
</itemname>
<itemname>User<0>
</itemname> 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
453
B-64644EN/08
5.2.7 List of Icons

5.2.7
Table 5.2.7 List of Icons

No. Icon Description No. Icon Description No. Icon Description
1 0 No icon 21 Filter 47 Flow rate
1 Fan 22 Regulator 48 Acceleration
2 2 Battery 23 Belt 49 Speed
3 3 Servo motor 24 Gear 50 Shock
4 Spindle 26 Oil 51 Travel distance

motor
4 5 Condenser 28 Door 52 Signal
6 Cable 29 Cushion 53 Time

5 rubber
7 Touch panel 30 Coolant 54 Number of times
of movement
6 8 LCD panel 31 Light 55 Luminous
intensity
9 Memory 32 Fire extinguisher 56 Torque
7 storage
10 Fuse 33 Tool replacement 57 Actual power
device consumption
8 11 Common power 34 Air cylinder 58 Integrated power
supply consumption
12 Servo amplifier 36 Pump 59 Regenerative
A1 electric power
13 Spindle 39 Conveyor
amplifier
A2 14 Pulse coder 41 Resistance value
Z 15 Separate type
detector
42 Temperature
17 Linear guide 43 Pressure
18 Ball screw 44 Concentration
19 Bearing 45 pH
20 Telesco 46 Number of
pic cover revolutions
454
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.1 Overview of the SERVO Viewer 1

5.3.1
The SERVO Viewer function allows you to observe information, such as the
position, speed, or torque of the feed axis or spindle, and display it in waveform.
In addition to behavior of each axis, the CNC operation status, such as program 2
number, sequence number, and MST code, and PMC signal can be observed.
Synchronized analysis of behavior of each axis and the CNC processing timing
optimizes a machining condition or machining program, resulting in reducing cycle 3
time.
This function is also used to monitor secular changes of the machine by
measuring waveforms periodically. 4
5
6
7
8
A1
Fig. 5.3.1 SERVO Viewer A2
5.3.2
5.3.2
Basic Operations of the SERVO Viewer Z
5.3.2.1 Opening the SERVO Viewer
The SERVO Viewer can be displayed as follows:
5.3.2.1
<1> Press [SERVO Viewer] on the Home screen.

The main screen of the SERVO Viewer appears.
455
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
1
2
3
4
5
5.3.2.2 Main screen of the SERVO Viewer
The figure below shows a layout of the main screen of the SERVO Viewer. It
5.3.2.2
6 displays data obtained from the CNC in waveform.
7 B
8
A
A1
A2 C
Z D
E
Fig. 5.3.2.2 Main Screen (Example: Y-Time Display)
456
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Table 5.3.2.2 Main Screen Information List for Each Function

Name Description
A Data description Describes each Draw shown in the waveform display area.
area The first and second lines indicate the axis to be used, data type,
and calculation method.
Pressing the Draw name or the check box will show or hide the
1
selected Draw.
The color and the selected Draw changes when you press the
Draw description area. You can select only one Draw. 2
B Comment display Displays a comment added to waveform data.
area
C Waveform display Displays two-dimensional waveforms in chart format.
3
area For the waveform chart to be displayed, you can select either the
Y-Time chart or the Fourier chart.
In the Y-Time chart, the horizontal axis represents time, and the 4
vertical axis represents the values at that time. In the Fourier
chart, the horizontal axis represents frequency, and the vertical
axis represents the values for those frequencies. 5
The vertical axis represents the values at that time and displays
the scales of the selected Draw with numerical values. A different
waveform color is used for each Draw, with the acquisition date
and time displayed above the waveform.
6
D Status display Displays the status according to the situation.
area The status of obtaining a waveform is displayed in the progress
bar.
7
If "Auto Repeat Measure" is selected, measurement is repeated
E Message display
when the progress bar reaches the end.
Displays information or a message that can be used as guidance.
8
area
F Horizontal soft Displays the horizontal soft keys to operate this screen. A1
keys Use the [<] and [>] soft keys to switch the pages of the soft keys.
First page
Displays a sub menu for selecting a Draw.

A2
[Select Draw] Z
Displays a sub menu for showing/hiding the Draw.
[Show/Hide]
Displays a sub menu for moving or zooming in/out of the
waveform.
[Waveform Move]
Displays a sub menu for automatically scaling each Draw.
[Auto Scale]
457
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Name Description
Displays the Select Mode window.
You can select the mode from the simple display mode, showing
the horizontal axis as time, speed display mode, and acceleration
[Mode]
1 display mode, according to your purpose.
Re-obtain the CNC setting information.
2 [Refresh]
Second page
3 Starts waveform data acquisition.
[Measure]
4 Displays when waveform data is acquired. Use this soft key to
cancel waveform data acquisition.
[Measure Cancel]
5 Sets the base point of measurement.
6 [Origin]
Toggles the checked and unchecked state of the "Auto Repeat
Measure".
7 [Auto Repeat]
Displays Monitor window.
You can monitor the current value of data to be measured.
8 [Monitor]
Third page
A1 Toggles ON/OFF of the auto save settings each time you press
this soft key.
When the setting is ON, the soft key lights up.
A2 [Auto Save
Settings]
Displays Save Data window.
Z Saves the currently displayed waveform data.
[Save Data]
Displays Load Data window.
Loads the existing waveform data.
[Load Data]
Displays Save Setting window.
Batch saves setting information for the SERVO Viewer.
[Save Setting]
Displays Load Setting window.
Batch loads setting information for the SERVO Viewer.
[Load Setting]
458
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Name Description
Displays Save View Setting window.
Batch saves view setting information (operation setting and scale
setting).
[Save View
Setting] 1
Displays Load View Setting window.
Batch loads view setting information (operation setting and scale
[Load View
setting). 2
Setting]
Displays the File Export window.
3
[File Export]
4
• Each waveform displayed in a chart is called Draw. Up to eight Draws
 can be displayed.
• While a window is displayed, horizontal soft keys corresponding to 5
MEMO
each window operation are displayed.
6
5.3.2.3 About SERVO Viewer slides
Clicking a vertical soft key displays a slide that allows you to call the
7
5.3.2.3
corresponding settings for the SERVO Viewer with a single action.

<1> Press the vertical soft key for a slide you want to display.
The corresponding slide is displayed as follows. 8
Name Description
Displays the Measure Setting slide.
A1
Measure setting A2
Displays the Operation Setting slide.
Operation setting Z
Displays the Scale Setting slide.
Scale setting
• While any of the above slides is displayed, another slide cannot be
 displayed with the other vertical soft keys. To switch the slide, close
it and select another vertical soft key. To close the slide, press the
MEMO [Save Data and Close] soft key. Closing it with a vertical soft key
cancels the configured settings.
459
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
 Relationship between data flow and each setting slide until a waveform is
displayed
Operation
1 Measured data processing
Chart display
2 Measure setting Operation setting Scale setting
3 Fig. 5.3.2.3 Flow Chart until a Waveform Is Displayed
5.3.2.4 Screen, slide, and window operations

4 Screens, slides, and windows can be operated with the soft keys or MDI keys.
5.3.2.4
On screens and slides other than the main screen, key operations are as follows:
• You can move the selection with <↑>, <↓>, <←>, and <→> only in a tile on the
5 screen.
• Use the [Change Tile] soft key to select a tile.
6
5.3.3 Displaying and Operating the Main Screen
7 5.3.3
5.3.3.1 Selecting data to be displayed [Select Draw]

Change selected waveform data in the data description area.
5.3.3.1
8 <1> Press the [Select Draw] soft key.

The sub menu for selecting a Draw appears.
A1
A2 <2> Press a soft key between [Draw1] and [Draw8] to select a Draw.
Z
5.3.3.2 Moving the entire waveform
Move a displayed waveform.
5.3.3.2
<1> Press the [Waveform Move] soft key.

The sub menu for moving or zooming in/out of the waveform appears.
460
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Press the [←], [→], [↑], or [↓] soft key.

The entire waveform is moved in the selected direction.
1
2
 • In Fourier chart display, you cannot move the waveform right or
left.
MEMO
3
5.3.3.3
5.3.3.3
Changing the horizontal axis
Zoom in or out the scales of the horizontal axis in the waveform display area.
4
The sub menu for moving or zooming in/out of the waveform appears. 5
6
<2> Press the [Zoom In H-Axis] or [Zoom Out H-Axis] soft key.
The scales of the horizontal axis are changed.
7
8
A1
 • In Fourier chart display, you cannot change the scales for the
horizontal axis. A2
MEMO
5.3.3.4 Changing the vertical axis of the entire waveform

Z
Zoom in or out the scales of the vertical axis in the entire waveform.
5.3.3.4

461
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Press the [Zoom In V-Axis] or [Zoom Out V-Axis] soft key.
The scales of the vertical axis are changed.
1
2 5.3.3.5 Moving a selected waveform

Move only a selected waveform.
5.3.3.5
3 <1> Press the [Waveform Move] soft key.

4
5 <2> Press the [Change Draw] soft key to select a Draw.
Every time you press the soft key, a selected Draw switches to another.
6
7 <3> Press the [Select Draw ↑] or [Select Draw ↓] soft key.
Only the selected waveform is moved in the selected direction.
8
A1 <4> Press the [Close] soft key.
A2 5.3.3.6 Changing the vertical axis scale of a selected waveform

Zoom in or out of the vertical axis scale of only a selected waveform.
5.3.3.6
Z <1> Press the [Waveform Move] soft key.

<2> Press the [Change Draw] soft key to select a Draw.

Every time you press the soft key, a selected Draw switches to another.
462
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<3> Press the [Vertical Zoom In] or [Vertical Zoom Out] soft key.
The vertical axis scale of only the selected waveform is changed.
1
5.3.3.7 Showing or hiding waveform data in a chart 2

Show or hide a waveform in a chart indicating the position or speed of the motor.
5.3.3.7
<1> Press the [Show/Hide] soft key.

The sub menu for displaying or hiding a Draw appears.
3
4
<2> Press a soft key between [Display Draw 1] and [Display Draw 8] for a Draw you
want to show or hide.
5
Pressing any soft key toggles the selected chart between shown and hidden.
6
7
5.3.3.8 Automatically adjusting the scale [Auto Scale]
Automatically adjust the displayed scale. You can select from three adjusting
8
5.3.3.8
methods.
<1> Press the [Auto Scale] soft key. A1

The display switches to the Auto Scale menu.
A2
<2> Press the soft key for the automatic adjusting method you want to display. Z

All Area Automatically adjusts the scale to be suitable for each Draw.
Vertical Only Automatically adjusts the scale of the vertical axis only.
Common Scale Automatically adjusts the scale so that it is common in all
Draws.
463
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.3.9 Changing the display mode [Mode]

The display mode of the main screen can be changed as follows according to the
5.3.3.9
purpose of the display:
Configure a frequently-used operation setting at once.

1 • XTYT mode: Simple display mode (Horizontal axis: Time)
• VT mode : Speed display mode
2 • AT mode : Acceleration display mode
3 <1> Press the [Mode] soft key.

The Select Mode window appears.
4
5 <2> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a mode you want to display from the pull-
down list.
6 The display switches to the selected mode.
7
The window closes, switching to the selected operation setting mode.
A1
 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key closes the window without changing the
settings.
A2 MEMO
Z 5.3.3.10
5.3.3.10
Starting or canceling measurement [Measure] / [Measure Cancel]
Start or stop measurement as follows:
<1> Press the [Measure] soft key.

Measurement starts.
 • To cancel measurement, press the [Measure Cancel] soft key.

MEMO
464
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.3.11 Setting the base point of measurement [Origin]

Set the starting base point of measurement beforehand.
5.3.3.11
<1> Press the [Origin] soft key.

The set origin value is defined as the base point. 1
2
5.3.3.12 Setting to repeat measurement [Auto Repeat]
5.3.3.12
Set whether or not to automatically repeat measurement with the same settings.
3
<1> Press the [Auto Repeat] soft key. 4
The check box is selected, enabling the settings to automatically repeat
measurement.
5
6
 • Pressing the [Auto Repeat] soft key toggles it between checked and
unchecked. 7
MEMO
5.3.3.13 Monitoring measured data [Monitor]

8
Display the monitor window to monitor measured data.
5.3.3.13
<1> Press the [Monitor] soft key. A1

The Monitor window appears, allowing you to monitor the current value of data
to be measured.
A2
Z
<2> To close the monitor, press the [Close] soft key.
The window closes.
• Pressing the [Detailed Display] soft key displays the Monitor window in
 details.
• The [Origin] soft key allows you to set the starting base point of
MEMO measurement. See "5.3.3.11 Setting the base point of measurement
[Origin]".
465
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.3.14 Auto saving the waveforms [Auto Save Setting]

When measurement is completed, you can set whether or not to automatically
5.3.3.14
save the waveforms.
1

NOTE
• When you perform auto save settings and continuous measurement at
the same time, if the amount of data obtained per hour is too large,
data may not be saved correctly and may be lost.
2
<1> Press the [Auto Save Setting] soft key.
3 Each time you press this soft key, the auto save settings will switch between
ON and OFF.
4
5
 • When you change the measure setting, auto save settings will turn
OFF.
6 MEMO • Auto save settings will stop if the data size exceeds the upper limit.
7  When the profile name is not set

If the profile name is not set when auto save settings is turned ON, the Auto Save
Settings window appears.
8
A1
A2 Fig. 5.3.3.14 Auto Save Settings Window
<1> Enter a profile name using the MDI keys and press the [OK] soft key.
Z The profile name will be set.
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key closes the window without saving the
 settings.
• The profile name is the currently used name for the profile.
MEMO • Profile name is deleted when you perform measure setting. It will be
set again when you save or load data.
466
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.3.15 Saving data [Save Data]

Save measured waveform data and setting (measure profile).
5.3.3.15
<1> Press the [Save Data] soft key.

The Save Data window appears with the profile name input field selected.
1
2
3
4
<2> Enter a profile name.
5
<3> Enter a view setting name.
<4> Press the [Input Comment] soft key.
The cursor moves to the comment input field. Enter a comment as necessary.
6
<5> Press the [Save] soft key.
The waveform data and setting (measure profile) are saved. 7
8
 • You can switch between the profile name and comment input fields
A1
with the corresponding soft keys.
MEMO
A2
5.3.3.16 Loading data [Load Data]
5.3.3.16
Select a measure profile, waveform data, and view setting (operation setting, Z
scale setting) and load them.
<1> Press the [Load Data] soft key.

The Load Data window appears.
467
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
1
2
3
4
5
<2> Select a measure profile and view setting you want to load and press the [Load]
6 soft key.
The waveform data and setting (measure profile) are loaded at once.
7
8
• For the displayed profile, the number of times consecutive data
 acquisition was conducted will be displayed as the "Number of
A1 MEMO
repetitions". The number of repetitions for measured data without
conducting consecutive measurement will be displayed as 1.
A2  Working with saved data

• [Delete Profile] soft key: Deletes the selected measure profile.
Z • [Delete Data] soft key: Deletes the selected waveform data.
• [Delete View] soft key: Deletes the selected view setting.
5.3.3.17 Saving the setting [Save Setting]

Save the current channel setting, operation setting, and scale setting at once.
5.3.3.17
<1> Press the [Save Setting] soft key.

The Save Setting window appears.
468
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a profile you want to save from the pull-
down list.
1
<3> Enter a profile name using the MDI keys and press the [Save] soft key.
The file name is set, and the setting is saved at once.
2
3
 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key closes the window without saving the
settings.
4
MEMO
5
5.3.3.18 Loading the setting [Load Setting]
Load a saved profile and view setting at once.
5.3.3.18
6
<1> Press the [Load Setting] soft key.
The Load Profile window appears. 7
8
<2> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a profile and view setting you want to load
from the pull-down list.
A1
A2
Z
<3> Press the [Load] soft key.
The selected setting is loaded at once.
settings.
MEMO
469
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
5.3.3.19 Saving the view setting [Save View Setting]

Save the view setting (operation setting and scale setting) at once.
5.3.3.19
This can be used when the following two conditions are met.
1 • A measure profile is selected.

• The measurement setting has not been changed.
2 <1> Press the [Save View Setting] soft key.

The Save View Setting window appears.
3
4
5
6 <2> Enter a view setting name using the MDI keys and press the [Save] soft key.
The file name is set, and the setting is saved at once.
7
8
 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key closes the window without saving the
A1 MEMO
settings.
A2 5.3.3.20 Loading the view setting [Load View Setting]

Load the view setting (operation setting and scale setting) at once.
5.3.3.20
Z This can be used when the following two conditions are met.
• A measure profile is selected.
• The measurement setting has not been changed.
<1> Press the [Load View Setting] soft key.
The Load View Setting window appears.
470
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a view setting you want to load from the pull-
down list.
1
2
<3> Press the [Load] soft key.
The selected setting is loaded at once. 3
4
5
settings.
MEMO
6
5.3.3.21 Exporting data to a file
5.3.3.21
Exports the waveform data that is saved in the database to a file. 7

<1> Press the [File Export] soft key.
The File Export window appears.
8
A1
A2
Z
471
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Select the profile.

<3> Select the data to be exported.
1
2
3  • You cannot specify a folder name by entering the folder name.
MEMO
4 <5> Select the folder to export the data and press the [OK] soft key.
5
 • To cancel the selecting of the folder, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
6
<6> Press the [File Export] soft key.
7 The selected data is saved as a file.
8
A1 • You cannot change the name of the file where you will save the
exported data.
 • You can delete profiles and data in the File Export window.
A2 MEMO
To delete a measurement profile, select the profile and press the
[Delete Profile] soft key. In the same way, to delete waveform data,
select the waveform data and press the [Delete Data] soft key.
Z
5.3.4 Measure Setting Slide
5.3.4
This is a slide to set items required to measure waveform data.
 Displaying the Measure Setting slide

Display the Measure Setting slide as follows:
<1> Press the [Measure Setting] vertical soft key.

The Measure Setting slide appears.
472
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
1
2
3
4
5
 • To return to the main screen, press the [Save Data and Close] soft
MEMO
key. 6
5.3.4.1 Description of each part of the slide (example: Measure Setting slide) 7
Each setting window displayed from the Measure Setting slide consists of areas
5.3.4.1
called tiles, each of which has a specific setting function. Different horizontal soft
keys are displayed depending on the tile selected. 8
A B D
A1
A2
C
Z
Fig. 5.3.4.1 Measure Setting Slide
473
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Table 5.3.4.1 Measure Setting Slide Information List for Each Function
Name Description
A Measurement Set a measurement time.
time setting area Set a measurement time individually for the measured data points
1 and the sampling cycle (data acquisition interval). For example, if
you set the measured data points to 1000 and the cycle to 1 msec,
measurement of 1000 msec (1 sec) can be performed.
2 B Trigger settings
area
You can display the Trigger Settings window to set a trigger to start
obtaining data.
For a trigger, you can set the N number to specify the position of
3 C Comment edit
the program or enter an address to turn on or off the signal.
You can edit a comment to be added to the waveform.
area
4 D Other conditions This is an area to configure settings other than the measurement
setting area time setting, trigger settings, comment edit, and obtained data
setting.
5 • Auto Scale: Adjusts the scale to fit a waveform in the screen after
measurement.
• Data Shift: Displays the Data Shift Settings window.
• Time Shift: Displays the Time Shift Settings window.
6 E Obtained data You can display the Set Channel window to set the type of data to
setting area be measured.
The data types include position data (POSF) and speed data
7 (SPEED).
8  Switching the tile

To switch to a tile you want to set in the Measure Setting slide or a window
displayed after operation, perform the following:
A1
<1> Press the [Change Tile] soft key to switch to a tile you want to set.
A2 Soft keys corresponding to the selected tile are displayed.
Currently selected tile Description
Z A Measurement time setting area

Saves all contents of the settings made in the measure
setting slide and closes the slide.
Save Data and Close
B Trigger settings area
Save Data and Close
The Trigger Settings window appears.
Change Trigger
474
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Currently selected tile Description

C Comment edit area
Save Data and Close 1
Copies the text for the date and time measurement was
performed.
Copy Date
2
D Other conditions setting area
3
Save Data and Close
Changes the selected item for "Auto Scale". 4
Change Auto Scale
Toggles the checked and unchecked state of the "Sync
5
Mode".
Select Sync Mode 6
Toggles the checked and unchecked state of the "Auto
Origin".
Auto Origin
7
The DataShift Settings window appears.
8
DataShift
The TimeShift Settings window appears.
A1
TimeShift
E Obtained data setting area
A2
Save Data and Close Z
The Set Channel window appears.
Set Channel
5.3.4.2 Measurement time setting area to set a measurement time

This area is used to set the measured data points and the sampling cycle (data
5.3.4.2
acquisition interval).
475
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<1> On the Measure Setting slide, press the [Change Tile] soft key.
<2> Press the [Sampling Cycle] soft key.
<3> Enter measured data points.
<4> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a sampling cycle for each from the pull-
1 down list.
The measurement time is set.
2
3
4
5.3.4.3 Comment edit area to edit a comment
This area is used to edit a comment displayed in the comment display area on the
5.3.4.3
5 main screen.
6 <1> On the Measure Setting slide, press the [Change Tile] soft key.
<2> Press the [Comment] soft key.
<3> Select a box with <↑> and <↓>.
7 <4> Edit a comment using the MDI keys.
The comment is edited.
8
A1
5.3.4.4 Obtained data setting area to set the type and axis of measured data
A2 5.3.4.4
This area is used to set the type and axis of data to be obtained by measurement.
476
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
 Displaying the Channel Setting window
A B
1
2
3
C
4
5
Fig. 5.3.4.4 Channel Setting Window
Table 5.3.4.4 (a) Channel Setting Window Information List for Each Function
6
Name Description
A Obtained data Configure the settings for obtained data.
setting area 7
B Advanced setting Configure the advanced settings for obtained data.
area
C Signal address Set a signal address when a PMC, PMCB, or PMCW signal is set 8
setting area in "Axis" in the obtained data.
<1> On the Measure Setting slide, tap the obtained data setting area. A1
<2> Press the [Channel Setting] soft key.
The Set Channel window appears.
A2
Z
 Setting data to be obtained
Set the data by setting the level of the data to be obtained. In "Basic", you can
select integrated value of position feedback, actual speed of the servo motor,
torque command, and position deviation. In "Standard" and "Advanced", you can
obtain more detailed measurement data.
477
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<1> Select the configurable option mode from the [Basic], [Standard], and
[Advanced] soft keys.
1
<2> Select or enter a value for each setting item.
2
 • "Description" shows description corresponding to the selected "Type".
3 MEMO
4  Setting a signal address

Set to obtain data only at a configured signal address.
5 <1> Press the [Add] soft key.

Press the [Modify] soft key when the signal is a byte-type or word-type.
The Input Signal window appears.
6
7
<2> Enter a bit-type signal address.
Enter with the MDI keys.
8
A1
A2
Z The input signal is confirmed.
Editing a signal address (list)

You can edit a signal address displayed in the list, such as deleting it from the list
or changing the order.
Select a bit-type signal address you want to edit from the list and edit it with the
following soft keys.
478
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Table 5.3.4.4 (b) Soft Keys Used to Edit Signal Address (List)
Name Description
Modifies the selected item.
[Modify] 1
Deletes the selected item.
[Delete]
2
Deletes the entire list.
3
[Delete All]
Switches the position of the selected item with the item above it.
4
[Move Up]
Switches the position of the selected item with the item below it.
5
[Move Down]
6
 • While the Input Signal window is displayed, pressing the [Cancel] soft
key cancels the input and closes the window. 7
MEMO
5.3.4.5 Trigger settings area to set a trigger to start obtaining data

8
This area is used to set a trigger to start obtaining data during measurement.
5.3.4.5
For a trigger, you can set the N Number to specify the position of the program or
enter an address to turn on or off the signal.
A1
 Displaying the Trigger Settings window A2

Display the Trigger Settings window from the Measure Setting slide as follows:
<1> On the Measure Setting slide, press the [Settings] in the Trigger Settings area. Z
The Trigger Settings window appears.
479
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
 Trigger Settings window

The Trigger Settings window consists of four tiles.
Trigger Path
1
Trigger Signal
2
Trigger Position
3 Auto Repeat
4 Fig. 5.3.4.5 Trigger Settings Window

 Setting a trigger path
5 Set a trigger path for measurement.
<1> On the Trigger Settings window, press the [Change Tile] soft key.
6 <2> Press [Trigger Path].
<3> Select ▼ with <Space> and select a path from the pull-down list.
7 <4> Select a trigger from the [N Number], [SV Alarm], and [SP Alarm] soft keys to
select the check box.
8
A1
 • If you set [N Number] to a trigger, enter the number.
A2 MEMO
Z <5> Press the [OK] soft key.

The trigger settings are confirmed.
 • Pressing the [N Number], [SV Alarm], or [SP Alarm] horizontal soft key
toggles it between checked and unchecked.
MEMO
 Setting a trigger signal

Set a signal address and signal status condition to trigger measurement.
480
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<1> On the Trigger Settings window, press the [Change Tile] soft key.
<2> Set [Trigger Signal].
<3> Press the [Signal Address] soft key to select the check box.
1
<4> Enter an address to trigger using the MDI keys. 2
<5> Press the [Signal Condition] soft key and select a signal condition.
Use the radio button to change the selection.
3
4
The trigger settings are confirmed. 5
 Setting a trigger position
Set a position to trigger.
6
<1> On the Trigger Settings window, press the [Change Tile] soft key and select
[Trigger Position].
7
<2> Press a soft key between [Trigger -10.0] and [Trigger +10.0] to select the
position.
8
A1
The trigger settings are confirmed.
A2
 Setting a measurement stop condition
Set a signal address and signal status condition to trigger to stop measurement.
Z
<1> On the Trigger Settings window, press the [Change Tile] soft key and select
[Auto Repeat].
<2> Press the [Auto Repeat] soft key to select the check box.
<3> Enter a signal address to stop using the MDI keys.

<4> Press the [Stop Condition] soft key and select a stop condition.
481
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer

1 The trigger settings are confirmed.
2  • When [Auto Repeat] is selected, measurement is repeated

automatically if the condition is met.
MEMO
3
5.3.4.6 Other conditions setting area to set other conditions
4 Set Auto Scale, DataShift, and TimeShift.
5.3.4.6
 Setting Auto Scale

5 It adjusts the scale automatically to fit a waveform in the screen after
measurement.
6 <1> On the Measure Setting slide, press the [Change Tile] soft key and select
[Other].
7 <2> Press the [Change Auto Scale] soft key.

8
A1
 • Pressing the [Change Auto Scale] soft key toggles the radio box
between checked or unchecked.
A2 MEMO
Z  Setting the synchronous mode selection

Check or uncheck the synchronous mode.
<1> On the Measure Setting slide, press the [Change Tile] soft key and select
[Other].
<2> Press the [Select Sync Mode] soft key to check or uncheck the check box.
482
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
 • Pressing the [Select Sync Mode] soft key toggles it between checked
and unchecked.
MEMO
1
 Setting Auto Origin
Check or uncheck Auto Origin.
2
[Other]. 3
<2> Press the [Auto Origin] soft key to check or uncheck the check box.
4
5
 • Pressing the [Auto Origin] soft key toggles it between checked and
MEMO
unchecked.
6
 Setting DataShift 7
Display the DataShift Settings window and set an offset to measured data on each
channel.
8
[Other].
<2> Press the [DataShift] soft key.
A1
The DataShift Settings window appears.
A2
Z
483
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<3> Enter a value for each channel using the MDI keys.
1
2
3
The shift value is set.
5
settings.
6 MEMO
7  Setting TimeShift
Display the TimeShift Settings window and set a time-shifted operation to
measured data on each channel.
8
[Other].
A1 <2> Press the [TimeShift] soft key.
The TimeShift Settings window appears.
A2
Z <3> Press the [SV - SP Offset] soft key to check or uncheck the check box.
<4> Enter an offset time (msec) using the MDI keys.

<5> Press the [Individual Settings] soft key and select the Individual Settings tile.
484
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<6> Enter an offset value for each channel using the MDI keys.
1
2
3
4
The shift value is set.
5
settings. 6
MEMO
7
5.3.5 Operation Setting Slide
8
5.3.5
Set an operation method used to display waveforms.
 Displaying the Operation Setting slide

Display the Operation Setting slide as follows: A1
<1> Press the [Operation Setting] vertical soft key.
The Operation Setting slide appears.
A2
Z
485
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
Displayed
1 waveform
setting area
2 Other settings
operation
area
3
4
5 Fourier transform specification area
6
Contents to be Description
displayed
7 Displayed Set what waveform is displayed for each Draw.
waveform setting Specify a calculation method used to machine original data for
area Operation.
8 In Input 1 and Input 2, select measured data (original source data)
used for Operation.
Fourier transform Performs Fourier transform on the measured data, and displays the
A1 specification area chart in the main screen waveform display area as a Fourier chart.
Other settings Displays the Other Settings window.
operation area
A2  Configuring the operation setting
Set an operation method, waveform setting value, and waveform display unit.
Z <1> Press the [Operation Setting] vertical soft key.
The Operation Setting slide appears.
486
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
<2> Select ▼ with <Space> in each setting item and specify a value from the pull-
down list.
1
2
3
4
5
<3> Press the [Save Data and Close] soft key.
Each input value is set.
6
7
 Performing Fourier transform and displaying data in a Fourier chart
Performs Fourier transform on the measured data, and displays the chart in the
8
main screen waveform display area as a Fourier chart.
A1
<1> On the Operation Setting slide, press the [Fourier Transform] soft key to select
the check box.
The measured data will be converted by Fourier transform. A2
Z
487
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
1
2
3
4
5
• If you unselect the check for Fourier transform, a Y-Time chart will be
6  displayed on the main screen waveform display area.

• When Fourier transform is selected (ON), you can edit the Fourier
MEMO settings in the scale setting slide. When Fourier transform is
unselected (OFF), you can edit the Y-Time settings.
7
 Configuring other settings
8 Configure other settings such as speed or acceleration required to display a chart.
<1> On the Operation Setting slide, press the [Other Settings] soft key.
A1 The Other Settings window appears.
<2> Select ▼ with <Space> in each setting item of Default Units and specify a
value from the pull-down list.
A2 <3> Enter a value in each setting items of Filter.

Each setting is changed.
488
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
settings.
MEMO
1
5.3.6 Scale Setting Slide
5.3.6
Set the display range of the main screen waveform display area by manually 2
entering a numerical value.
 Displaying the Scale Setting slide 3

For the Y-Time chart display, you can set scale Y-Time. For the Fourier chart
display, you can set scale Fourier.
4
<1> Press the [Scale Setting] soft key.
The Scale Setting slide appears.
 Setting Scale Y-Time
5
<1> Press the [Scale Y-Time] soft key.
The display switches to the scale Y-Time setting tab. 6
<2> Enter a value in Vertical Axis Scale and Time Scale using the MDI keys.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<3> Press the [Save Data and Close] soft key.

Each input value is set, and the slide closes.
489
B-64644EN/08
5.3 SERVO Viewer
 Setting the Scale Fourier

<1> Press the [Scale Fourier] soft key.
The display switches to the scale Fourier tab.
<2> Enter the values for strength and frequency using the MDI keys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 <3> Press the [Save Data and Close] soft key.
Each input value is set, and the slide closes.
8
A1
A2
Z
490
6
OPERATING THE 1
UTILITY AREA 2
3
4
5
You can use applications for utilities such as Manual Viewer, Memo Function,
and Web Browser.
6
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER .............................................................................. 492
6.2
6.3
MEMO FUNCTION .............................................................................
WEB BROWSER ................................................................................
516
543
A
6.4 SETTINGS .......................................................................................... 552
6.5 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY .................................................................. 583
491
B-64644EN/08
CHAPTER 6 OPERATING THE UTILITY AREA 
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
6.1
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER

Manual Viewer is an application to manage and view manuals.
1 In the manual list screen, manuals are listed in icon format. You can view, add,
and delete manuals.
You can view each manual in the manual file viewer screen. The formats of
2 manuals that you can view are pdf files (*.pdf), text files (*.txt), and html files
(*.html).
3  • Text files saved in UTF-16 (except for Big Endian without BOM)
character code can be viewed.
MEMO • A set of html files having index.html can be viewed.
4
6.1.1 Overview of Manual Viewer
5 6.1.1
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z Fig. 6.1.1 Manual list screen
492
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
6.1.1.1 How to use manual viewer (screen transition diagram)

To operate the manual viewer, use the Home screen, manual list screen, and
6.1.1.1
external application to display each manual.
1
2
3
Home screen 4
5
6
Manual list screen
7
8
Manual file viewer screen
A1
Fig. 6.1.1.1 Screen Transition of Manual Viewer
6.1.1.2 Information list for each function A2

The following is information of each function of Manual Viewer.
6.1.1.2
Table 6.1.1.2 Information List for Each Function

Z
Manual list screen 6.1.2 Operating in Manual List Screen
Viewing manuals
Sorting manuals
Selecting categories of
manuals
Deleting manuals
Importing manuals
493
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER

Manual file viewer screen 6.1.3 Operating in Manual File Viewer Screen
Searching in file
Contents
1 Jump page
Changing display
magnification
2 Switching over to another
tab
3 Closing a tab
Go back to the manual list
screen
4 Go back to the previous
application
5
6.1.2 Operating in Manual List Screen
6.1.2
The manual list screen is a screen to display manuals in a list. Manuals

6 corresponding to the display language set in "Settings" are displayed.
You can view or delete each manual. You can select the category to display and
sort the manual list. You can also import manuals.
7 Set the names and categories of manuals to be displayed with the manual
information setting file.
8
 • For the manual information setting file, see "Appendix A.1.1.1 Manual
information settings file".
A1 MEMO
6.1.2.1 Displaying manual list screen

A2 6.1.2.1
Display the manual list screen.
Z <1> Press the [MANUAL] icon in the Home screen.

The manual list screen is displayed.
494
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5
6.1.2.2 Names and functions of each part on the manual list screen
6.1.2.2
B C 6
7
A
8
A1
A2
D
Z
Fig. 6.1.2.2 (a) Names and Functions of Each Part on the Manual List Screen
Fig. 6.1.2.2 (b) Second Page of Horizontal Soft Keys
495
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER

Name Description
A Manual file view The titles of manuals are displayed in icon list format.
• Select a manual by using the cursor control keys <←>,
1 <→>, <↑>, and <↓>. When using a touch panel, you can
select them by tapping directly.
• When you press <PAGE UP> or < PAGE DOWN>, the
2 page is scrolled. For a touch panel, tap the scroll bar to

scroll the page.
• For manuals that are protected, the Protection icon is
displayed at the lower right.
3 Displayed for protected
[Protection] icon manuals.
4 B Category combo box The category of the manuals is displayed in the combo
box.
The manuals of the selected category are displayed in the
5 manual file view.

• Press the [Select Category] soft key and select with <↑>
and <↓>.
• If no manual corresponding to the specified category
6 exists, the combo box is not displayed.
C Sort display The current sort status is displayed. A ▲ mark is displayed
for ascending order and a ▼ mark for descending order.
7 D Horizontal soft keys If all the manuals displayed in the manual list are not
categorized, the [Select Category] soft key is disabled.
8 Displays the selected manual to an external application

based on the manual file format.
A1 [Open]
Displays the manual list in the ascending or descending
order of the titles.
A2 [Sort]
Displays the manuals of the selected category in the
Z manual list.
[Select Category]
Deletes the selected manual.
[Delete]
Imports manual files, manual information setting files, and
icon image files from an external device.
[Import Manual]
496
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
6.1.2.3 Viewing manuals

Use the external application to display the manual selected on the manual list
6.1.2.3
screen, based on the manual file format.

<1> In the manual list screen, select a manual to be viewed and press the [Open]
soft key. 1
Manuals are displayed in the manual file viewer screen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
6.1.2.4 Sorting manual list
6.1.2.4
Sort the manuals displayed in the manual file view in the order of titles. 8
 • Every time you press the [Sort] soft key, the ascending order and the
descending order are switched.
A1
MEMO
A2
<1> In the manual list screen, press the [Sort] soft key.
The manuals are sorted in the descending order if they were displayed in the
ascending order. Z
The manuals are sorted in the ascending order if they were displayed in the
descending order.
De-
scend-
ing
order
Ascend-
ing
order
497
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
6.1.2.5 Selecting categories of manuals

Display manuals in the manual list with the selected category.
6.1.2.5
<1> In the manual list screen, press the [Select Category] soft key.
1 The options are opened in the combo box at the upper left of the screen.
2
3 <2> Select a category to be displayed.
The manuals that belong to the category are displayed in a list.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2 • For a touch panel, tap the category combo box to select the
category to be displayed.
 • If you want to display manuals that are not categorized, select

"(Not categorized)".
Z MEMO • If you want to display all the manuals, select "(Select All)".
• If no manual corresponding to the specified category exists, the
combo box is not displayed.
6.1.2.6 Deleting manuals

You can select one of the following options to delete manuals for available
6.1.2.6
languages:
• [All Languages]: Manuals in all languages
• [Displayed Language Only]: Only manual in a language selected in [Language
Setting]
498
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
• Only "All Languages" can be selected under the following

conditions:
 The current displayed language is English.
MEMO
The manual in the displayed language does not exist.
• The currently viewed manual cannot be deleted. 1
To delete it, close it first.
2
<1> In the manual list screen, select a manual to be deleted and press the [Delete]
soft key in the second page of horizontal soft keys.
The delete window appears. 3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
<2> Select languages you want to delete.
A2
Z

Of the selected manuals, manuals in the target languages are deleted.
499
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
• If you do not want to delete it, press the [Cancel] soft key. Deletion
 operation is canceled.
• The selected manual cannot be deleted if protected. The [Delete]
MEMO
1 soft key becomes disabled.
2 6.1.2.7
6.1.2.7
Importing manuals
You can import manuals.
Import manual files (*.pdf, *.txt, *.html), manual information setting files, and icon
3 image files (*.png, *.bmp, *.svg) from external devices (USB flash drive or memory
card).
4 When a manual is imported, it is added to the manual list.

For the added manual, the title/category set in the manual information setting file
and the icon image are displayed in the manual list screen. You can also set
5 manual protection.
<1> Connect an external device that includes the manual files to be added, manual
6 information setting files and icon image files.
7 <2> In the manual list screen, press the [Import Manual] soft key in the second page
of horizontal soft keys.
The [Import Manual (1/4)] window is displayed.
8
A1
<3> Enter the folder that includes the manual files to be added in the [Import
A2 Manual (1/4)] window and press the [Next] soft key.
All the manuals in the import source folder are displayed in the window.
Z
500
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5
• When you press the [View] soft key, the Manual Import Input
window is displayed, and you can switch the folder to be selected.
6
 7
MEMO
8
• To cancel import, press the [Cancel] soft key. A1

A2
Z
501
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
<4> Select manuals to be imported and press the [Next] soft key.
1
2
3
4
5
6 • To select manuals, select them with the cursor control keys, <←>,
 <→>, <↑> and <↓>, and then press the [Change Selection] soft key.
7 MEMO
You can also select all the manuals in the folder.
• To cancel import, press the [Cancel] soft key.
8
Soft keys Description
A1 Change Selection Selects an import target.
When you press this key again, the selection is canceled.
Select All/Cancel All Cancels all the selected import targets.
A2 When you press this key again, all the targets are selected.
Z <5> Check the information of the manuals to be imported displayed in the window
and press the [Next] soft key.
Import is started, and the progress is displayed.
When import is completed, the result of import is displayed.
502
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5
Contents to be Description
ID
displayed
Select the ID of the manual. An ID is a unique character string
6
assigned to each manual in the manual information setting file.
Select "New" or an existing ID. If New is selected, an ID is
registered with the import file name. If an existing ID is selected, a 7
new language manual can be added to that ID.
When you press the [Select ID] soft key, the focus moves to the
selection combo box. 8
Caption Input a title to be displayed on the manual list screen. You can
enter any character string.
When you press the [Input Caption] soft key, the focus moves to A1
the input area.
Language Select the language of a manual to import.
When you press the [Select Language] soft key, the focus moves A2
to the selection combo box.
Category Select the category of a manual to import.
Select "Not Categorized" or an existing category item. If an Z
existing ID is selected, the associated category item is displayed,
which cannot be changed.
When you press the [Select Category] soft key, the focus moves to
the selection combo box.
503
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
• ID, Caption, Language, and Category cannot be edited under one of

the following conditions:
When the manual information settings file (ManualInfo.xml) was
1 imported at the same time

When the manual information settings file (ManualInfo.xml) was not
imported at the same time, and the import file has Import Type
2  "Update"
• If you register a new language other than English, information for
MEMO
English is also registered at the same time.
• Of the following 25 languages, you can select available languages:
3 English, Japanese, German, French, Chinese (Traditional), Italian,
Spanish, Portuguese, Chinese (Simplified), Korean, Dutch, Danish,
Polish, Hungarian, Swedish, Czech, Russian, Turkish, Bulgarian,
4 Romanian, Slovak, Finnish, Vietnamese, Indonesian, Slovene

The import completed message is displayed, and import will end.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • If import failed halfway, the relevant manual and subsequent ones
are not imported.
MEMO Import them again.
<7> Remove the external device.
504
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
6.1.2.8 Closing manual list screen

Close the manual list screen.
6.1.2.8
<1> Press <HOME>.

The manual list screen is closed, and the Home screen is displayed. 1
2
6.1.3 Operating in Manual File Viewer Screen
6.1.3
The manual file viewer screen is a screen to display and view manuals selected in
the manual list screen. 3
The manuals that you can view are pdf files (*.pdf), text files (*.txt), and html files
(*.html). Up to five manuals can be displayed simultaneously.
4
 Name and Function of Each Part of Manual File Viewer Screen
C 5
6
B D
E 7
8
A
A1
A2
F
Z
Fig. 6.1.3 Name of Each Part of Manual File Viewer Screen
Table 6.1.3 Name and Function of Each Part of Manual File Viewer Screen
Name Description
A Manual view The contents of the manual are displayed.
• You can scroll the page with <↑> and <↓>. For a touch panel, tap
the scroll bar to scroll the page.
• When you press the <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN>, you can
move to another page.
505
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
Name Description
B Page display The current page/total number of pages is displayed.
They are not displayed while text files (*.txt) or html files (*.html)
are viewed.
1 C Magnification
display
The magnification of the manual being viewed is displayed.
This is not displayed while text files (*.txt) are viewed.
D Search The search character string at the time of search in the file is
2 character string
display
displayed.
E Tab Switches the displayed manual when a tab is selected.

3 The manual file name is displayed on the tab.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
506
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
Name Description
F Horizontal soft
keys
Searches a character string in the manual being viewed.
1
[Search]
Searches texts before the previous page by character string
search.
2
[Previous]
Searches texts after the next page by character string search.
3
[Next]
4
Displays the table of contents of the manual being viewed and the
page of the selected item within the table of contents. 5
[Contents]
Allows you to specify and display a page of the manual being
viewed to display.
6
[Jump Page]
7
Changes the display magnification of the manual being viewed to
display.
[Display]
8
Closes the tab of the manual currently being viewed.
A1
[Close Tab]
Switches the tab of the manual currently being viewed. A2
[Switch Tabs] Z
Close the manual file viewer screen to return to the manual list
screen.
[Manual List]
Takes you back to the application you were using before manual
viewer.
[Back to App]
507
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
 Displaying Manual in Manual File Viewer Screen

Display the manual selected in the manual list screen in the manual file viewer
screen.
1 <1> In the manual list screen, select a manual to be viewed and press the [Open]
soft key.
Manuals are displayed in the manual file viewer screen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8  Searching Character String in Manual
You can search a character string in the manual being viewed.
A1 <1> In the manual file viewer screen, perform one of the following:
• Press the [Search] soft key.
A2 • Touch a search string.
Z
<2> Enter a character string to be searched in the Search window and press the
[OK] soft key.
A page that includes the search character string is displayed.
508
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5
• The Search window is displayed during search, showing the
 searching page number.

To cancel searching for a character string while the Search window 6
MEMO is displayed, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• Search is case-insensitive.
7
<3> If the search character string is found in multiple places in the manual, press
the [Previous] or [Next] soft key to display the pages that include the search 8
character string.
A1
 • The search character string is highlighted in yellow.
MEMO
A2
Z
509
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5
• If the manual has no character string that matches the search
6  character string, the message [No match found.] is displayed in the

window.
MEMO Enter another character string to search again or press the
[Cancel] soft key to end character string search.
7
 Displaying Page Selected from Contents
8 You can display the contents of the manual being viewed and display the page of
the selected item of contents.
The contents function is enabled only when manuals in pdf file (*.pdf) format are
A1 viewed.
A2 <1> In the manual file viewer screen, press the [Contents] soft key.
The [Contents] window is displayed.
Z
<2> Select the item to be displayed in the [Contents] window with <↑> and <↓> and
The relevant page is displayed.
510
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
 Specifying Page to Display 5

You can specify a page of the manual being viewed to display.
The jump page function is enabled only when manuals in pdf file (*.pdf) format are
viewed.
6
<1> In the manual file viewer screen, press the [Jump Page] soft key. 7
The [Jump Page] window is displayed.
8
<2> In the [Jump Page] window, enter the number of pages to be displayed and A1
The relevant page is displayed.
A2
Z
511
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3
4
5  Changing Display Magnification of Page
Display a manual with the display magnification changed.
6 The magnification change function is enabled only when manuals in pdf file (*.pdf)
format and html file (*.html) format are viewed.
7 ● When a touch panel is not used

<1> In the manual file viewer screen, press the [Display] soft key.
The soft keys are changed.
8
A1
<2> Adjust the display magnification of the manual being viewed by using soft keys.
A2
Z
[Zoom In] Every time you press this key, the page being viewed is
displayed with increment of magnification of 25 %.
[Zoom Out] Every time you press this key, the page being viewed is
displayed with decrement of magnification of 25%.
[Full Page] To display with a magnification that allows the entire page
being viewed to be displayed.
[Screen Width] To display the page being viewed with a magnification suitable
for the width of manual view.
512
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER

[Zoom to] Displays the magnification change window.
When you enter a magnification value and press the [OK] soft
key, the page being viewed is displayed with the specified
magnification.
1
2
[Back] The status before you pressed the [Display] soft key is
restored.
3
● Using the touch panel
<1> In the manual file viewer screen, select a magnification percentage for display 4
from the display magnification pull-down displayed when you tap [Scale].
The page being viewed is displayed with the selected magnification.
5
6
7
8
 • For pdf files, the magnification can be changed between 100 %
(displaying the entire page) and 400 %. For html files, the
A1
MEMO magnification can be changed between 50 % and 400 %.
 Switching over to another tab

A2
Switch from the current tab to the next tab to the right.
When the rightmost tab is selected, the control switches to the leftmost tab.
Z
<1> Press the [Switch Tabs] soft key.
The current selected tab switches to the next tab to the right.
513
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
3  Closing a tab
Close the tab of the manual currently being viewed.
4
<1> Press the [Close Tab] soft key.
If there are multiple tabs open, the tab of the current manual will close and the
5 other manual will be displayed.
If there is one tab open, the tab of that manual will close and the screen will go
back to the manual list screen.
6
7
8
A1
A2  Go back to the manual list screen
Close the manual file viewer screen to return to the manual list screen.
Z
<1> In the manual file viewer screen, press the [Manual List] soft key.
The manual file viewer screen is closed, and the manual list screen is
displayed.
514
B-64644EN/08
6.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1
2
 Go back to other applications
You will go back to the application you were using before manual viewer.
3
<1> In the manual file viewer screen, press the [Back to App] soft key. 4
You will go back to the application you were using before manual viewer.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
515
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

The memo function is an application that allows you to enter text, draw lines, and
1 insert images to a screen called "whiteboard". You can use it for notes and
messages.
You can create and edit multiple whiteboards. You can also convert a whiteboard
2 itself to an image format and output to an external device (USB flash drive or
memory card).
3 6.2.1 Overview of Memo Function

6.2.1
4 Drawing lines, handwritten characters Creating memos
5
6
7
8
Inserting
images
A1
A2 Fig. 6.2.1 Example of Use of Whiteboard Screen
516
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.1.1 How to use whiteboard

Operate the whiteboard function in the following order: Home screen ->
6.2.1.1
whiteboard list screen -> whiteboard screen.
1
2
3
Home screen
4
Whiteboard list screen 5

6
7
Whiteboard screen 8
6.2.1.2 Information list for each function A1

The following table shows a list of functions included in the MEMO function.
6.2.1.2
Table 6.2.1.2 Information List for Each Function A2

Whiteboard list screen 6.2.2 Operating in Whiteboard
List Screen
Z
Creating new whiteboards
Displaying stored whiteboards
Deleting stored whiteboards
Changing the names of stored
whiteboards
Sorting whiteboard list
Outputting stored whiteboards
517
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

Whiteboard screen 6.2.3 Operating in Whiteboard
Drawing function Line drawing Screen
Drawing setting
1 Memo function Creating new
memos
Inputting memos
2 Selecting memos
Moving memos
3 Deleting memos
Memo setting
Memo display
4 switching
Memo output
5 Image insertion
Undoing and redoing
Closing the whiteboard screen
6
6.2.2 Operating in Whiteboard List Screen
7 6.2.2
The whiteboard list screen is a screen to display new whiteboards and stored
whiteboards in a list.
8 For each whiteboard, you can conduct operations to edit, delete, change the
name, and output externally. In addition, you can conduct sorting within the list.
A1 6.2.2.1 Displaying whiteboard list screen

Display the whiteboard list screen.
6.2.2.1
A2
<1> Press the [MEMO] icon in the Home screen.
The whiteboard list screen is displayed.
Z
518
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6.2.2.2 Names and functions of each part of whiteboard list screen
6
6.2.2.2
7
8
A
A1
A2
B
Z
Fig. 6.2.2.2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Whiteboard List Screen
519
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

Name Description
A Whiteboard list Preview images and names of the whiteboards are displayed.
• The number of created whiteboards and the remaining number of
1 whiteboards that can be created are displayed at the upper right.
• At the head of the list, the [Create New] item is displayed. After
that, stored whiteboard items are displayed in the order of names.
2 • You can select each item by pressing <←>, <→>, <↑>, and <↓>.
For a touch panel, you can select a whiteboard by tapping it
directly.
• In the default state, the [Create New] item is selected.
3 When you have returned from the whiteboard screen to the
whiteboard list screen, the whiteboard that was opened is
selected.
4 • On one screen, up to 12 items (four columns x three rows) + a
part of four items (four columns x one row) are displayed.
If the number of items exceeds 12, a scroll bar is displayed on the
5 right of the list.

When you press <PAGE UP> or <PAGE DOWN> with the scroll
bar displayed, the display contents can be switched.
For a touch panel, when you tap the up and down buttons of the
6 scroll bar, you can switch the display contents.
B Horizontal soft When the [Create New] item is selected on the whiteboard list, the
7 keys [Delete], [Rename] and [Output] soft keys are disabled and cannot
be selected.
Opens the selected whiteboard to edit.
8 The whiteboard screen is displayed.
[Open]
A1 Deletes the selected whiteboard.
A2 [Delete]
Changes the order in the whiteboard list.
Z [Sort]
Renames the selected whiteboard.
[Rename]
Outputs the selected whiteboard externally in image format.
[Output]
520
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.2.3 Creating new whiteboards

Create new whiteboards.
6.2.2.3
You can create up to 100 whiteboards.

For the whiteboard name, the date and time of new creation are set automatically.
1
 • The name of a whiteboard that was newly created on 17:27:35,
February 26, 2016 is set to "20160226_172735".
MEMO
2
<1> In the whiteboard list screen, select the [Create New] and press the [Open] soft
key.
3
The whiteboard screen with a new whiteboard is displayed.
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
 • You can create up to 100 whiteboards.
MEMO
Z
Press the [OK] soft key and close the message window.
Delete an unnecessary whiteboard and create a new whiteboard again.
 • For deleting the whiteboard, see "6.2.2.5 Deleting whiteboards".

MEMO
521
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.2.4 Displaying whiteboards

From the whiteboard list screen, display an arbitrary whiteboard in the whiteboard
6.2.2.4
screen.
When a whiteboard is displayed in the whiteboard screen, you can edit that
whiteboard.
1
2  • For editing the whiteboard, see "6.2.3 Operating in Whiteboard
Screen".
MEMO
3 <1> In the whiteboard list screen, select a whiteboard to be displayed and press the
[Open] soft key.
4 The selected whiteboard is displayed in the whiteboard screen.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
6.2.2.5 Deleting whiteboards
Z Delete a whiteboard.
6.2.2.5
<1> In the whiteboard list screen, select a whiteboard to be deleted and press the
[Delete] soft key.
The [Delete Whiteboard] window is displayed.
522
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
<2> To delete the whiteboard, press the [OK] soft key.
A window is displayed to confirm the delete, and the selected whiteboard is
deleted.
6
 • If you do not want to delete it, press the [Cancel] soft key. Deletion 7
operation is canceled.
MEMO
8
6.2.2.6 Sorting whiteboard list
6.2.2.6
Change the order of the whiteboards displayed in the whiteboard list screen to the A1
ascending order or descending order.
A2
 • The [Create New] item is always displayed at the head.
MEMO
Z
<1> In the whiteboard list screen, press the [Sort] soft key.
The whiteboards are sorted in the descending order if they were displayed in
the ascending order.
The whiteboards are sorted in the ascending order if they were displayed in the
descending order.
523
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
De-
scend-
ing
order
1 Ascend-
ing
order
2
3 6.2.2.7 Renaming whiteboards
Rename a whiteboard.
6.2.2.7
4
<1> In the whiteboard list screen, select a whiteboard to be renamed and press the
[Rename] soft key.
5 The [Rename Whiteboard] window is displayed.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> Enter a new whiteboard name and press the [OK] soft key.
The whiteboard name is changed.
 • As a default, the current whiteboard name is displayed.

MEMO
524
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.2.8 Outputting whiteboards

Convert a whiteboard to an image format (PNG file) to output to an external
6.2.2.8
device.
<1> In the whiteboard list screen, select a whiteboard to be output and press the
[Output] soft key.
1
The [Output] window is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
<2> Enter the file name of the output destination and press the [OK] soft key.
8
The selected whiteboard is output in the specified place as an image file with
the specified output file name. A1
• As a default of the file name, "whiteboard_whiteboard name.png" is
displayed. A2
 • When you press the [Switch Focus] soft key, the focus on the folder
display, image display, and output file name can be switched.
MEMO
• If you do not want to output it, press the [Cancel] soft key. Output
operation is canceled.
Z
525
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
• If a file with the same name exists in the output destination, a
6 
message to confirm the overwrite is displayed.
To output by overwriting, press the [OK] soft key.
To cancel the output operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO
7 • If output failed, an output error message is displayed.
Press the [OK] soft key and close the message.
8 6.2.2.9 Closing whiteboard list screen

Close the whiteboard list screen.
6.2.2.9
A1
<1> Press <HOME>.
The whiteboard list screen is closed, and the Home screen is displayed.
A2
Z
526
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.3 Operating in Whiteboard Screen

6.2.3
The whiteboard screen is a screen to allow you to draw lines freely with a touch
panel or mouse.
You can paste memos and insert images.
1

NOTE
• To draw lines, a touch panel or mouse is required.
2
6.2.3.1
6.2.3.1
Names and functions of each part of whiteboard screen 3
B
4
C
5
A
6
E
7
D
8
F
Fig. 6.2.3.1 Name of Each Part of Whiteboard Screen A1

Table 6.2.3.1 Names and Functions A2
Name Description
A Drawing setting
area
An area to make settings related to drawing, such as the
thickness of the pen and color.
Z
B Drawing area An area to draw lines, paste memos, and insert images.
C MEMO A pasted memo. You can paste it in an arbitrary place in the
drawing area.
D Inserted image An inserted image. You can insert it in an arbitrary place in the
drawing area.
E Line drawing A drawn line. You can draw it in an arbitrary place in the drawing
area.
527
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
Name Description
F Horizontal soft
keys
Creates a new memo.
1 If no memo has been created, the [Select Memo], [Move Memo],

[Delete Memo],
[Create New [Memo Settings], and [Hide Memo]/[Display Memo] keys are
Memo] disabled.
2 Selects a memo in the drawing area.
3 [Select Memo]
Moves the selected memo.
4
[Move Memo]
5 Sets whether to hide or display a memo.
[Hide Memo]/
6 [Display Memo]
Inserts an image.
7
[Insert Image]
Used to undo an action.
8
[Undo]
A1 Used to redo an action.
A2 [Redo]
Closes the whiteboard screen to return to the whiteboard list
screen.
Z
[Close]
Deletes the selected memo.
[Delete Memo]
Makes settings of a memo.
[Memo Settings]
Saves the memo to an external device (USB flash drive or
memory card).
[Output Memo]
528
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.3.2 Drawing lines

Set the method to draw lines in the drawing area, thickness of the pen, etc.
6.2.3.2

NOTE
• To draw lines, a touch panel or mouse is required. 1
 Drawing Lines
2
You can draw arbitrary lines on the whiteboard.
3
<1> In the drawing area of the whiteboard screen, left-click the mouse at the
drawing start position and drag to the drawing end position without removing
your finger from the mouse. 4
For a touch panel, tap the screen at the drawing start position and drag to the
drawing end position without removing your finger from the panel.
A line is drawn. 5
6
7
8
A1
 Setting Drawing Conditions A2

To draw a line, you can set the thickness and color of the pen and the thickness of
the eraser.
In the drawing setting area in the whiteboard screen, select the [Pen Size] and the
Z
[Pen Color] or [Eraser Size].
 • For the [Pen Size] and the [Eraser Size], you can select only one of
the options.
MEMO
529
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
Drawing setting area
1
2
3
4
Fig. 6.2.3.2 Condition Setting When Drawing Lines
5
Table 6.2.3.2 Setting Items of Pen and Eraser
6 Setting item Description
Pen size You can select only one of the options.
7 Sets the thickness of the pen to be extra-thin.
8 Extra-thin
Sets the thickness of the pen to be thin.
A1 Thin
Sets the thickness of the pen to be thick.
A2
Thick
Sets the thickness of the pen to be extra-thick.
Z
Extra-thick
Pen color Select the color of the pen among the fixed six colors.
Sets the color of the pen to black.
Black
Sets the color of the pen to red.
Red
Sets the color of the pen to blue.
Blue
530
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

Sets the color of the pen to green.
Green
Sets the color of the pen to pink.
1
Pink
Sets the color of the pen to light blue. 2
Light blue
Eraser size You can select only one of the options. 3
Sets the thickness of the eraser to be thin.
Thin
4
Sets the thickness of the eraser to be thick.
5
Thick
Sets the thickness of the eraser to be extra-thick. 6
Extra-thick
7
6.2.3.3 Handling memos
Handle memos to be pasted on the whiteboard.
8
6.2.3.3
This section describes new creation, input, selection, move, deletion, setting, and
display switching of memos.
A1
MEMO
A2
Z
Fig. 6.2.3.3 (a) Memo in Whiteboard
531
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
 Creating new memos

Creates a new memo.
1  • You can create up to 12 memos.

MEMO
2 <1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Create New Memo] soft key.
A new memo is created.
3
4
5
6
7 
• You can create up to 12 whiteboards.
Press the [OK] soft key and close the message window.
Delete an unnecessary memo and create a new memo again.
MEMO
• For how to delete the item, see " Deleting memos" (p. 535).
8
 Entering to memos
A1 Enter characters to the selected memo.
You can enter up to 1024 characters.
A2
 • For how to select a memo, see "Selecting memos" (p. 533).
Z MEMO
<1> Select a memo to enter text in the whiteboard screen and enter characters with
the MDI key or software keyboard.
For a touch panel, tap the character input area and enter characters.
The characters are entered at the cursor position in the character input area of
the selected memo.
532
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
Cursor Character
position input area
1
2
• You can change the position of the cursor with <←>, <→>, <↑> and
 <↓>.
• For a touch panel, you can change the position of the cursor by 3
MEMO
tapping a position to which the cursor should be moved.
4
 Selecting memos
Select a memo.
5
When a touch panel is not used
<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Select Memo] soft key. 6
Then, the whiteboard shows that a memo has been selected.
The display of the horizontal soft keys is also switched.
7
8
<2> Select a memo with the [Next] or [Previous] soft key and press the [OK] soft
key. A1
The selection of the memo is confirmed.
A2
Z
 • To cancel memo selection, press the [Cancel] soft key.
MEMO

<1> Tap a memo to be selected directly.
The memo is selected.
533
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
 Moving memos
Move the display position of the selected memo.
When a touch panel is not used
1 <1> In the whiteboard screen, select a memo to be moved and press the [Move
Memo] soft key.
The screen enters memo move mode (in which a memo can be moved), and
2 the horizontal soft key display is switched.
3
4
5
6
7
8
<2> By using the [Move Up] soft key, etc., move the memo to the desired position
and press [Back].
A1 The position of the memo is confirmed, and the memo move mode is canceled.
A2  • You can also move the selected memo by pressing <↑>, <↓>, <←>,
and <→>.
MEMO • When you press a key once, the memo is moved by six pixels.
Z

[Move Up] Moves the memo upward.
[Move Down] Moves the memo downward.
[Move Left] Moves the memo to the left.
[Move Right] Moves the memo to the right.
534
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

[Back] Confirms the display position of the memo, and cancel memo
move mode.
When a touch panel is used 1

You can move a memo by tapping the title area of the memo directly to select it
and then dragging it. You do not need to use the [Move Memo] soft key.
2
Title area
3
4
Fig. 6.2.3.3 (b) Title Area of Memo
5
• In memo move mode, the display of the memo is changed,
indicating that you cannot input or edit the text in the memo 6
 selected.
• For a touch panel, when you select (tap) a memo other than the
MEMO
one being moved, the position of the memo being moved is 7
confirmed, and memo move mode is canceled.
8
Normal condition Memo move mode
Press the [Move Memo] soft A1
key.
A2
Press the [Back] soft key.
Z
Fig. 6.2.3.3 (c) Switching Between Memo Moved Mode and Normal Display
 Deleting memos
Delete a memo.
<1> In the whiteboard screen, select a memo to be deleted and press the [Delete
Memo] soft key.
A window is displayed to confirm the delete of the memo.
535
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

The memo is deleted.
2
 • To cancel delete, press the [Cancel] soft key.
3 MEMO
4  Changing settings of memo

Change the settings of the color, transparency, and size of selected memo.
5 <1> In the whiteboard screen, select a memo that you want to change settings, and
press the [Memo Settings] soft key.
The [Memo Settings] window appears.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> In the [Memo Settings] window, change the settings and press the [OK] soft
key.
The settings are changed.
536
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
1
2
3
Color Select the color of the memo among "yellow", "blue", "green", 4
"red", and "violet".
The default is "yellow".
Transparency Select the transparency of the memo among "0 %", "50 %", 5
and "100 %".
The default is "0 %".
Size Select the "Width" and "Height" of the memo among "Small",
6
"Medium", "Large", and "Extra Large".
Both of the defaults are "Small".
7
 Saving memos
Save the contents of the selected memo to an external device (USB flash drive or 8
memory card) as a text file.
A1
 • The text is saved as a file in UNICODE TXT format.
MEMO
A2
be saved.
Z
<2> In the whiteboard screen, select the memo to be saved and press the [Output
Memo] soft key.
The Output Window appears.

537
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
1
2
3 <4> In the [File Name] input field, edit the file name.
4 
• The initial value of the output file name is
"memo_Whiteboardname_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss(time).txt".
• Use the [Switch Focus] soft key to change the focus in the folder
MEMO
display, file display, or [File Name] input field.
5
6 The memo is saved with the specified file name into the external device, and
the window closes.
7  Switching display of memos

Switch Display/Hide for all the memos on the whiteboard screen.
8
A1 
NOTE
• When memos are hidden, you cannot conduct operations such as
selection of a memo.
A2 When the memos are displayed

<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Hide Memo] soft key.
Z All the memos are hidden, and the display of the horizontal soft key is switched
to [Display Memo].
When the memos are hidden

<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Display Memo] soft key.
All the memos are displayed again, and the display of the horizontal soft key is
switched to [Hide Memo].
538
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
When the memo is displayed When the memo is hidden
1
2
3
[Hide Memo] [Display Memo]
4
6.2.3.4
6.2.3.4
Inserting images
Insert an image to the whiteboard.
5
For image files, you can use PNG files, JPEG files, and BMP files.
6
<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Insert Image] soft key.
The display of the horizontal soft keys is switched.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> In the horizontal soft key display, press the [Select Image] soft key.
The insert image selection window appears.
539
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
<3> In the insert image selection window, select an image to be inserted and press
the [OK] soft key.
The selected image is inserted at the upper left of the whiteboard.
1 • You can switch the folder from which an image is selected by using
 the [Switch Focus] soft key.

• You can switch the folder with <←> <→> <↑> <↓> to display sub
2 MEMO folders.
• For a touch panel, you can tap a sub folder directly.
3
4
5
6
7
8 <4> Adjust the display position and size of the inserted image by using the
horizontal soft keys below and press the [OK] soft key.
The inserted image is adjusted.
A1
A2  • If the inserted image is larger than the drawing area, it is adjusted
automatically to the maximum size that allows the image to be
MEMO displayed, with the aspect ratio maintained.

[Move Up] Moves the image upward.
[Move Down] Moves the image downward.
[Move Left] Moves the image to the left.
[Move Right] Moves the image to the right.
[Small] Changes the image size to 1/3 of the maximum size.
[Medium] Changes the image size to 2/3 of the maximum size.
540
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION

[Large] Changes the image size to the maximum size.
[Initial Size] Returns the image size to the size at the time of image
insertion.
1
• You can also move the inserted image by pressing <↑>, <↓>, <←>,
 and <→>.
• For a touch panel, you can move the inserted image by dragging 2
MEMO the image directly.
• To cancel image insert, press the [Cancel] soft key.
3
6.2.3.5 Undoing and redoing
6.2.3.5
This section describes how to undo the last action conducted after the whiteboard
4
is opened and how to redo the undone action.
5
 How to undo
<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Undo] soft key.
The previous state is restored.
6
 7
• If the previous state does not exist, the [Undo] soft key is disabled.
MEMO
8
A1
 How to redo
A2
<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Redo] soft key.
The state before you undo is restored. Z
 • If the next state does not exist (for the final action), the [Redo] soft
key is disabled.
MEMO
541
B-64644EN/08
6.2 MEMO FUNCTION
6.2.3.6 Closing whiteboard screen

Close the whiteboard screen to return to the whiteboard list screen.
6.2.3.6
<1> In the whiteboard screen, press the [Cancel] soft key.

1 The whiteboard screen is closed to return to the whiteboard list screen.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
542
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
6.3
6.3 WEB BROWSER

This function allows you to browse Web pages on the CNC screen.
You can use the function to collect information required for a machining site, for
example, when you browse Web pages providing machining know-how.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 6.3 Web Browser Screen (Example)
8
 Formats of Web pages that cannot be browsed
You cannot browse Web pages in the following formats:
• HTML5
A1
• CSS3
• ActiveX
A2
• Java
• VBScript Z
• Adobe Flash
• VML
• Encrypted communication (including electronic commerce)
543
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
6.3.1 Basic Operations of the Web Browser

6.3.1
You can register multiple Web browsers as icons on the Home screen. Each icon
allows you to see a different start page on startup.
1 6.3.1.1 Opening the Web browser

You can perform the following to see the Web browser function:
6.3.1.1
2 <1> On the Home screen, press [BROWSER] or the icon of the registered Web
browser.
A registered start page appears.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Start page 1 Start page 2 Start page 3
A1
• Only [BROWSER] is registered to the Home screen at default.
A2 • You can register a maximum of 10 Web browser icons with the Home
 screen.
• To register a Web browser icon, use the Home screen configuration
MEMO
Z file apps-general.xml. For details, see "6.3.4 Web Browser
Configuration File".
544
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
6.3.1.2 Web browser screen

The figure below shows a layout of the Web browser screen.
6.3.1.2
A
1
B
C 3
4
5
D
Fig. 6.3.1.2 Web Browser Screen

6
Table 6.3.1.2 Name and Description of Each Part on the Web Browser Screen 7
Name Description
A Address bar Provides the URL of the currently displayed Web page. 8
B Tab Represents the currently displayed Web page in a tab
format.
C Web page Area for displaying the Web page. A1
For operations using each soft key, see the subsequent
topics. A2
 Displaying the start page [Start Page] Z

Display the registered start page.
<1> Press the [Start Page] soft key.
This takes you to the registered start page.
545
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
• If no start page is registered, you cannot perform this operation.

 • To register a start page with the Home screen, use the Home screen
configuration file apps-general.xml. For details, see "6.3.4 Web
MEMO
1 Browser Configuration File".
 Changing the displayed page [Change Enter URL]

2 Enter a URL to switch over to its Web page.
<1> Press the [Enter URL] soft key.
3 You see the [Enter URL] window providing the URL of the currently displayed
Web page.
4
5 <2> Use the MDI keys to enter a URL, and press the [OK] soft key.
The URL autocomplete function automatically inserts one of the following texts
6 at the beginning of the URL for access:
• http://
7 • file:/// (When an actual file exists)
The following shows an example of automatically inserting text by the URL

8 autocomplete function.
Text before autocomplete Text after autocomplete
A1 fanuc.co.jp
¥Hard Disk¥Folder¥file.txt
http://fanuc.co.jp
file:///Hard Disk/Folder/file.txt
E:¥Folder¥file.txt file:///E:/Folder/file.txt
A2
Z
• Texts to be autocompleted are "http://" and "file:///" only.
 • If a scheme conforming to RFC3986 or RFC1738 exists in the

URL, the above text is not autocompleted.
MEMO • When "file:///" is autocompleted, "¥" is replaced with "/" in the URL
text.
546
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
 Switching over (going back or next) to another displayed page ([Back]/

[Next])
Go back or next to the Web page.
<1> Press the [Back] or [Next] soft key.
This takes you to a previous or next page. 1
2
 • If a previous or next page has not been displayed, you cannot

perform this operation.
3
MEMO • Soft keys can be operated even while the page is being loaded.
4
 Updating the displayed page [Update]
Update the displayed Web page. 5
<1> Press the [Update] soft key.
The currently displayed page is updated.
6
7
 • When it is being updated, you see [Updating] in the tab.
• When it is being updated, the soft key changes to [Stop] which 8
MEMO allows you to stop the update process.
A1
 Displaying a new page [Open Tab]
Use a tab to open a new Web page.
<1> Press the [Open Tab] soft key.
A2
A start page appears in the new tab.
Z
 • If no start page is registered, a blank page appears.

• Soft keys can be operated even while the page is being loaded.
MEMO
547
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
 Closing the tab [Close Tab]

When Web pages appear in multiple tabs, you can use this key to close the tabs.
<1> Press the [Close Tab] soft key.
The currently displayed tab is closed.
1
2
 Switching over to another tab [Switch Tabs]
3 When Web pages appear in multiple tabs, you can use this key to switch to
another tab.
<1> Press the [Switch Tabs] soft key.
4 Switch from the currently displayed tab to the next tab to the right.
5
6
 • When the rightmost tab is selected, the control switches to the
leftmost tab.
MEMO
7
 Changing the start page [Change Start Page]
8 Register the currently displayed Web page as a start page.
<1> Press the [Change Start Page] soft key.
A1 The currently selected Web page is registered as a start page.
A2
Z 6.3.2 Operations Performed While the Web Page Appears
6.3.2
You can perform the operations listed below while the Web page appears.
 To move to the linked location

<1> Tap the hyper link in the Web page.
The display switches to the linked page from the currently displayed Web page.
 • When another window opens, it appears in a new tab.

• Use <TAB> to move focus and press <INPUT>, and you can move
MEMO to the linked location.
548
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
 To move focus
<1> Press <TAB>.
Focus moves within the currently displayed Web page.
 Scrolling the page 1

<1> Drag the scroll bar.
This allows you to scroll the page. 2
 • You can also scroll the page by using <↑>, <↓>, <PAGE UP>, and
<PAGE DOWN>.
3
MEMO
4
 User authentication
When you access the Web page requiring user authentication, the [User
Authentication] window appears. 5
<1> Use the MDI keys to enter authentication information, and press the [OK] soft
key.
6
7
8
6.3.3 Setting a Proxy
6.3.3
To use a proxy, configure the settings in the [Set Proxy] window.

A1
<1> Press the [Set Proxy] soft key.
The [Set Proxy] window appears. A2
<2> Use the MDI keys to enter data, and press the [OK] soft key.
The proxy is set. Z
549
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
6.3.4 Web Browser Configuration File

6.3.4
The Web browser configuration file, an xml format file, describes the URL of the
start page.
You can set the start page by editing the configuration file.
1 Configuration file: Home screen configuration file apps-general.xml
2 6.3.4.1 Storage location of the configuration file

The following locations store the xml format file describing the URL of the start
6.3.4.1
3 page.
PANEL iH Pro (SSD):

4 D:\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Browser\browserinfo.xml
PANEL iH Pro (HDD):

5 C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Browser\browserinfo.xml
For PANEL iH
6 \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\USER\Browser\browserinfo.xml
7 6.3.4.2 Contents of the configuration file

Descriptions enclosed in <startpage> tags represent the information about each
6.3.4.2
start page.
8
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>
<browserinfo>
A1 <startpage>
<name>default</name>
<url>http://xxxxxxxxxx</url>
A2 </startpage>
<startpage>
<name>mtlinki</name>
Z <url>http://yyyyyyyyyy</url>
</startpage>
<startpage>
<name>zzz</name>
<url>http://zzzzzzzzz</url>
</startpage>
</browserinfo>
</xml>
Table 6.3.4.2 XML Tags Used to Describe Web Browser Configuration Files
XML tag Description
<name> ID (Set not to be duplicated, up to 63 characters)
550
B-64644EN/08
6.3 WEB BROWSER
XML tag Description

<url> URL of the start page
 • Only ID=default and ID=mtlinki are defined by default in

browserinfo.xml.
1
MEMO
2
6.3.4.3 Setting the start page
To set the start page, change the Home screen configuration file apps-general.xml
3
6.3.4.3
as described below.
<1> Edit the apps-general.xml file to add a Web browser icon. 4

<2> Specify the ID defined in the browserinfo.xml file to the <subject> tag of the
Web browser icon. 5
 • If no ID is specified, you see the start page defined by the ID

6
"default" in the browserinfo.xml file.
MEMO
7
8
A1
A2
Z
551
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4
6.4 SETTINGS
1 6.4.1 Overview of the Settings

6.4.1
You can use this control center screen to configure the settings for the entire
application on iHMI.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 6.4.1 Settings Screen
8
A1
A2
Z
552
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.2 Basic Operations of the Settings

6.4.2
6.4.2.1 Opening the Settings screen

You can perform the following to see the Settings screen:
6.4.2.1
1
• Press [Setting] in the UTILITY category.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 6.4.2.1 Home screen
8
6.4.2.2 Displaying the Settings screen
6.4.2.2
The figure below shows a layout of the Settings screen. A1

A
A2
Z
B C
Fig. 6.4.2.2 Settings Screen
553
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
Table 6.4.2.2 List of the Information about Each Part on the Settings Screen
Name Description
A Screen common Displays the CNC status.
information display
1 B Category item display
field
Display
Settings
You can use this item to configure the
following settings:
• [Language Setting] Set the language to
2 be used.
• [Theme Setting] Set the theme
(background color set).
3 General
• [Slide Setting]
You can use this item to configure the
Settings following settings:
4 • [Brightness Setting]
• [Touch Panel Setting]
• [Time Setting]
• [Cleaning Mode]
5 • [Screen Saver Setting]
• [Screenshot Settings]
• Inputting Japanese/Chinese
6 • [Boot Setting]
Information You can use this item to configure the
Center following settings:
7 Setting • [Auto Display Setting]: Set which type of
messages appears in the information
center at the time of their occurrence.
8 Update You can set the following items:
• [Update Check]
• [Server Settings]
A1 System You can display the following information:
Information • [Display Version]
• [Display License]
A2 • [Remaining Data Capacity]
• [Memory Usage Display]
• [Operation History Display]
Z C Setting item display field Displays setting items belonging to a category item.
D [Select] key When the cursor is placed on the setting item display
field, use this key to display the settings window of the
selected setting item.
6.4.3 Display Settings

6.4.3
In the [Display Settings] category, you can configure the iHMI display settings.
554
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
• [Language Setting] and [Theme Setting] may take time. On each

 setting dialog, you see a window indicating that the setting is being
changed. While you see the window indicating the updating state, you
MEMO
cannot perform any operation.
1
2
3
Fig. 6.4.3 Window Indicating the Updating State 4
6.4.3.1 Switching the language [Language Setting]
Set the language displayed on the Home screen. The language you set here 5
6.4.3.1
applies to each application.
<1> Press [Display Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Language 6
Setting] in the setting item display field.
The [Language Setting] window appears.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
<2> Set the language and press <INPUT>.
The screen appears in the selected language.
555
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
 • When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the window operation will be
canceled.
MEMO
1
6.4.3.2 Switching the background color of the screen [Theme Setting]
2 To set the background color of the screen, select one of registered themes (from a
6.4.3.2
background color set).

<1> Press [Display Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Theme
3 Setting] in the setting item display field.
The [Theme Setting] window appears.
4
5
6
7
8
<2> Press the theme (color) that you want to set, and press <INPUT>.
A1 The screen appears in the selected background color.
A2
Z
canceled.
MEMO
556
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.3.3 Showing or hiding slide animation [Slide Setting]

Set whether to show or hide slide animation.
6.4.3.3
<1> Press [Display Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Slide
Setting] in the setting item display field. 1
The [Slide Setting] window appears.
<2> If you want to hide slide animation, tap the check box. 2
Select [Disable slide animation.].
3
If selected, slide animation is hidden.
4
5
 • Alternatively, you can press the [Check] soft key to select or deselect.
• When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the slide animation setting is 6
MEMO canceled without being saved.
7
6.4.4 General Settings
8
6.4.4
In the General Settings, you can use [Brightness Setting], [Touch Panel Setting],
[Time Setting], [Screen Saver Setting], [Screenshot Settings], [Cleaning Mode],
[Japanese And Chinese Input], and [Boot Setting].
6.4.4.1 Adjusting the brightness of the screen [Brightness Setting] (for

A1
PANEL iH only)
6.4.4.1
Adjust the brightness of the screen. You can set brightness between 10 to 99 %. A2
 • [Brightness Setting] is available for the PANEL iH only. Z
MEMO
<1> Press the [General Settings] category and then [Brightness Setting].
The [Brightness Setting] window appears.
557
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
1
2
3
4 <2> Use <↑> and <→> (up) or <↓> and <←> (down) to select a value of brightness,
and press the [OK] soft key.
5 The screen appears at the selected brightness.
6
7
8 MEMO
canceled.
A1 6.4.4.2 Correcting the settings of the touch panel [Touch Panel Setting]
Correct the tap position of the touch panel.
6.4.4.2
A2 <1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Touch
Panel Setting] in the setting item display field.
A screen appears for you to set the touch panel.
Z
558
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
<2> Follow the prompts to correct the settings of the touch panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6.4.4.3 Setting whether to show or hide the mouse cursor [Mouse Cursor 6
Settings]
If the mouse is connected to PANEL iH Pro, you can show the mouse cursor on 7
6.4.4.3
the following applications:

• Calendar
• Data Logger
8
• Maintenance Manager
• SERVO Viewer A1
• Memo Function
• QSSR A2
• CNC operation screen
• Cycle Time Estimation Z
• 3D interference check function
• Tool Manager
559
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
To show the mouse cursor, perform the following:

<1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Mouse
Cursor Settings] in the setting item display field.
1
2
3
4
5 The Mouse Cursor Settings window appears.
<2> Press the [Check] soft key to select the check box.
6
8 When the mouse cursor is shown on an indicator with a touch panel,

if you touch the screen, the white dot (cursor) is displayed for about
one second. To avoid this phenomenon, hide the mouse cursor.
A1
A2 
NOTE
Z When the mouse cursor is set When the mouse cursor is set
to be hidden to be shown
6.4.4.4 Setting a time [Time Setting]

Set a date and time.
6.4.4.4
<1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Time
Setting] in the setting item display field.
The [Time Setting] window appears.
560
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
1
2
3
<2> Select [Date] or [Time] with <TAB>.

4
<3> Use the MDI keys to enter numbers or change values with <↑> <↓> and press
the [OK] soft key. 5
The date and time is set.
6
7
8
canceled.
MEMO
A1
6.4.4.5 Disabling the touch panel operation [Cleaning Mode] A2
To clean the surface of the touch panel, disable the touch panel operation
6.4.4.5
temporarily.
<1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Cleaning Z
Mode] in the setting item display field.
The [Cleaning Mode] window appears.
While the [Cleaning Mode] window is displayed, you cannot operate the setting
screen. To exit the cleaning mode, press <ESC> to close the window.
561
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.4.6 Enabling the screen saver [Screen Saver Setting]

Set the screen saver to reduce power consumption.
6.4.4.6
• If the setting is enabled, the screen saver behaves as follows when an

1 alarm occurs:
When an alarm occurs, the screen saver is automatically reset.
When all alarms are reset, the screen saver can be restarted.
2  • The time until the screen saver is restarted after alarm reset is
different depending on the indicator as follows:
MEMO
PANEL iH: An elapse of the time set on the setting screen after
3 alarm reset
PANEL iH Pro: An elapse of the time set on the setting screen after
the last input operation using the key or touch panel
4
<1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Screen
Saver Setting] in the setting item display field.
5 The [Screen Saver Setting] window appears.
6
7
8
A1
A2
<2> Press the [Check] soft key.
Every time you press this soft key, the screen saver setting toggles between
Z enabled and disabled.
 • You can also press the check box to select or deselect it.
• When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the window operation will be
MEMO canceled.
562
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
<3> Select [Timeout Period] with <TAB>.

<4> Use the MDI keys to enter numbers or change values with <↑> <↓> and press
the [OK] soft key.
The screen saver setting is enabled.
1
• When the screen saver setting is disabled, the timeout period
 cannot be set.
• Even when the screen saver setting is enabled, if the timeout 2
MEMO
period is set to 0, the screen saver will be disabled.
3
 Start the screen saver
<1> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press [Screen
Saver Setting] in the setting item display field. 4
The [Screen Saver Setting] window appears.
<2> Press the [Start] soft key. 5
The screen saver starts.
6.4.4.7 Saving a screen image [Screenshot Settings] 6

You can specify the destination folder and save a screen image as an image file
6.4.4.7
(PNG file).
7
be saved.
8
<2> Press [General Settings] in the category item display field, and press
[Screenshot Settings] in the setting item display field.
The Screenshot Settings window appears. A1
A2
Z
563
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS

1
2
3
• You can specify only a folder in an external device (USB flash drive
4 or memory card) for the destination. The destination folder root is
displayed as follows.
5 
NOTE
USB flash drive: USB_MEM
Memory card: M_CARD
• If the destination folder is not specified, a screenshot is not
captured.
6 • When you press the [Clear] soft key, the destination setting is
cleared, and a screenshot is not captured.

The destination folder setting is saved.
8 <5> After setting the destination, press the <CTRL> + <GRAPH> keys.
The screen image is saved as an image file (PNG file) with the following name:
HDCPYyyyy-mm-ddThh.mm.ss.png
A1 yyyy-mm-dd: Date when the image was saved (Example: 2018-03-23)
hh.mm.ss: Time when the image was saved (Example: 17.35.21)
A2 When the file is successfully saved, the following message window appears.

The window closes.
Alternatively, you can close the window with the <INPUT> or <ESC> key.
564
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
• If the image file was not saved because the specified folder is not
found after the external device was removed, the message window
does not appear.
• A file saved at the same time is overwritten by a file saved later.
• While the message window is displayed, a screen image cannot be 1
 saved.
• You cannot save an image of the BOOT screen or IPL screen.
NOTE
• For indicators without a touch panel, do not move to another 2
screen with a menu key or Information Center key (Pos key) right
after the message window appears. Otherwise, the keyboard focus
moves to the destination screen, which prevents you from closing
the message window with the <INPUT> or <ESC> key.
3
6.4.4.8 Setting Japanese/Chinese input [Japanese and Chinese Input]

4
You can input Japanese or Chinese (Simplified/Traditional) using Microsoft IME.
6.4.4.8
5
• In case of PANEL iH Pro, the following OS is required:

OS recovery disk A08B-0090-K781: Version 01.4 or later
OS recovery disk A08B-0090-K782: Version 14.4 or later 6
OS recovery disk A08B-0090-K783: Version 02.0 or later
MEMO
Other OS recovery disks: First version or later
• This item may not be displayed depending on the MTB settings. 7
Enable Japanese/Chinese input as follows: 8
<1> Press the [General Settings] category and then [Japanese And Chinese Input].
The Japanese And Chinese Input window appears. A1
A2
Z
565
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
1  • To enable this function for the first time, you need to turn off and on
the device.
MEMO
2
After the settings are completed, when you switch the display language to
Japanese or Chinese, you will be able to input the corresponding language.
3
• If you switch the language to any other than Japanese and
4 Chinese, English input is automatically set.

• If you are using the EWF (Enhanced Write Filter) in PANEL iH Pro,
disable it when you set this function for the first time. If you set this
function with the EWF enabled, the setting change will be canceled
5 when the device is turned off and on.
 For details on the EWF, see "8.3 PROTECTING THE OS USING
THE ENHANCED WRITE FILTER (EWF) FUNCTION" in "FANUC
MEMO
6 PANEL i CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-
64223EN-1).
• When you configure the settings for the first time in PANEL iH Pro,
7 the Information Center displays "Windows must be restarted to

enable Japanese and Chinese input.".
When you restart Windows, IME becomes enabled.
8
6.4.4.9 Displaying the NCBOOT32 screen at startup [Boot Setting]
A1 You can set the application so that the NCBOOT32 screen is displayed at the next
startup of iHMI.
For details about the NCBOOT32.exe, see “NCBOOT32.EXE OPERATOR’S
A2 MANUAL”.
To display the NCBOOT32 screen, operate as follows.
<1> Press the [General Settings] category and then [Boot Setting].
Z The Boot Setting window appears.
 • If the NCBOOT32 screen is set to be displayed, the NCBOOT32

screen will be displayed at the next startup.
MEMO • This setting will be disabled after the next startup of iHMI.
566
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.5 Information Center Setting

6.4.5
In the [Information Center Setting] category, you can use [Auto Display Setting].
6.4.5.1 Setting the type of the automatically displayed message [Auto

Display Setting]
1
Set whether or not messages are automatically displayed in the information center
6.4.5.1
if alarms occur. 2
<1> Press [Information Center Setting] in the category item display field, and press
[Auto Display Setting] in the setting item display field. 3
The [Auto Display Setting] window appears.
4
5
6
7
8
<2> Press the check box and then the [OK] soft key.
Select [Automatically display when alarm occurs]. A1
When the check box is selected, messages are automatically displayed.
• You can also press the [CHECK] soft key to select or deselect the
A2
 check box.
MEMO
• When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the window operation will be
canceled.
Z
567
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.6 Update
6.4.6
In the Update category, you can set [Update Check] or [Server Settings].
1 6.4.6.1
6.4.6.1
Enabling update check [Update Check]
Enable the update function to provide a software update notification on the
Information Center screen.
2
<1> Press [Update] in the category item display field, and press [Update Check] in
the setting item display field.
3 The Update Check window appears.
4
5
6
7
8
<2> Press the [Check] soft key and set the update check time by entering a
A1 numerical value using the MDI keys or changing the value using the <↑> and
<↓> keys.
"Enable update check." will be checked and the update check time will be set.
A2
• To cancel the window operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.
• If you press <Space> when the focus is placed on the "Enable
Z  update check." checkbox, you can change the checkbox selection.
MEMO • Press <←> or <→>, or <TAB> to select "Hour" / "Minute" and then
press <↑> or <↓> to change the update check time. Alternatively,
press <0> to <9> to manually enter a value.
<3> Press the [Apply] soft key.

568
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
 Checking the update now

Update check is performed based on the setting configured in the server setting
screen, and the results will be shown on the check latest software screen.
<1> In the Update Check window, press the [Check Now] soft key.
The Check Results window appears to notify of the latest software check
1
results.
If the latest software is available, the "There is an update file." message
appears in the Check Results window.
2
When the latest software is available, press the [Software Update] soft key to start
updating. If you do not want to update it, press the [Cancel] soft key to close the
3
Check Results window.
If the latest software is not available, press the [OK] soft key to close the Check
Results window.
4
6.4.6.2 Setting update server [Server Settings]

5
Set the IP address of the server where the update file is stored, port, update
6.4.6.2
software storage location, etc. 6

<1> Press [Update] in the category item display field, and press [Server Settings] in
the setting item display field. 7
The Server Settings window appears.
8
A
B A1
C
D
E A2
Z
Name Description
A IP Enter a server IP address.
B Port Enter a port number.
C User Enter an FTP user name.
D Password Enter an FTP user password.
E Update Software Storage Enter a latest software storage location of the server
Location side.
569
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
 • To cancel the window operation, press the [Cancel] soft key.

• Press <TAB> to change the input item selection.
MEMO
1
<2> Press the [Apply] soft key.
2 The window will be closed.
• Press the [Connection Check] soft key to check the connection

3  with the specified server.
• To close the Connection Check Results window, press the [OK] soft
MEMO
key.
4
6.4.7 Displaying System Information
5 6.4.7
You can display the following information in the system information categories:
• [Display Version]
6 • [Display License]
• [Remaining Data Capacity]
7 • [Memory Usage Display]
• [Operation History Display]
8
6.4.7.1 Outputting version information to text [Version Information]
A1 6.4.7.1
Display iHMI version information and output it to a text file.

The following are displayed as version information.
• iHMI package version
A2 • iHMI software figure number (*1)
• Registered application version
Z • CNC system information
• CNC servo/spindle information
(*1) One of the following figure numbers is displayed according to the installed
iHMI software.
Screen iHMI software figure

iHMI software type Note
display number
60VU For 30i/31i/32i-B A02B-0323-J587#60VU PANEL iH
J582 A08B-0090-J582 PANEL iH Pro
60X1 For 0i-F Plus A02B-0349-J587#60X1 PANEL iH
J585 A08B-0090-J585 PANEL iH Pro
570
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
Screen iHMI software figure

iHMI software type Note
display number
60X4 30i-B Plus/31i-B Plus/ A02B-0353-J587#60X4 PANEL iH
J587 For 32i-B Plus A08B-0090-J587 PANEL iH Pro
1
<1> Press [System Information] in the category item display field, and press
[Version Information] in the setting item display field.
The [VERSION INFORMATION] window is displayed.
2
3
4
5
6
7
 • When you press the [OK] soft key, the window closes.
MEMO
8
<2> Press the [Output] soft key.
A window appears for you to select the output destination folder.
A1
A2
Z
571
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
<3> Select the output destination folder and press the [OK] soft key.
The version information text is output to the selected folder.
1
2
3
4
5  • When you press the [Cancel] soft key, the window operation will be
canceled.
MEMO
6
6.4.7.2 Displaying license information [License Information]
7 6.4.7.2
Display iHMI license information.
8 <1> Press [System Information] in the category item display field, and press
[License Information] in the setting item display field.
The [License Information] window is displayed.
A1
A2
Z
MEMO
572
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.7.3 Displaying data usage [Remaining Data Capacity]

Display data usage in the following areas.
6.4.7.3
For PANEL iH Pro

PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:
PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:
1
For PANEL iH
CF card (Storage Card2)
2
<1> Press [System Information] in the category item display field, and press 3
[Remaining Data Capacity] in the setting item display field.
The [Remaining Data Capacity] window appears.
4
A
B 5
C
6
Name Description
A Data area name For PANEL iH Pro
7
PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:
PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:
For PANEL iH 8
Storage Card2
B Bar graph Displays the used area and free area of the data area in the
bar graph as follows. A1
Blue: Used area
White: Free area
C Free area Displays the available capacity and total capacity of the data A2
area.
Z
MEMO
573
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
6.4.7.4 Displaying memory usage [Memory Usage Display]

The iHMI memory usage is displayed.
6.4.7.4
[Memory Usage Display] in the setting item display field.
1 The Memory Usage Display window appears.
2
3
Name Description
4 A Bar graph Displays the used area and free area of the memory in the bar
graph as follows.
Blue: Used area
5 White: Free area
B Free area Displays the available capacity and total capacity of the
memory.
6 <2> Press the [Per App] soft key.
The Memory Usage Display window per application appears.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
Name Description
A Caption Displays the application names and icons.
B Launch Displays the application launch condition with a check mark.
Condition
C Memory (KB) Displays the memory capacity used by the applications.
<3> Use the <←>, <→>, <↑>, and <↓> keys to scroll the display.
 • Pressing the [Overall] soft key returns to the overall Memory Usage
Display window.
MEMO
574
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS

The Memory Usage Display window closes.
 End launched application

Perform the following when the Memory Usage Display window per application
appears.
1
<1> Select a launched application by touch operation or with the <↑><↓> keys.
2
3
<2> Press the [Close App] soft key.
The end application confirmation message appears.
4
5
 • Ending an application may take time.
In such cases, the processing window appears.
MEMO
6
6.4.7.5 Displaying operation histories [Operation History Display]
6.4.7.5
You can display operation histories, such as system/application/message/input

7
device (key/touch operation).
8
 • The displayed operation history types vary depending on the MTB
settings.
MEMO For details, contact the machine tool builder. A1
A2
Z
575
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
[Operation History Display] in the setting item display field.
The Operation History Display window appears.
1
2
A
3
4
5 B
6
Name Function
7 A Operation history list

Type Displays the history type with one of the following icons.
iHMI system histories
8
Information Center notified message histories
A1
Histories in each iHMI application
A2
Key operation histories
Z
Touch or mouse operation histories
Date/Time Displays the date and time when the operation or system/
application action took place.
Log Displays the history log message.
576
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
Name Function
B Horizontal soft keys
Moves the history display cursor to the top and shows the
oldest history.
1
[Top]
Moves the history display cursor to the end and shows the
newest history. 2
[End]
Displays only operation histories that meet the set
3
conditions.
For details on the operation, see " Displaying the
operation history filter" described later. 4
[Filter]
Saves the operation histories as a text file.
For details on the operation, see " Saving the operation 5
histories" described later.
[Output]
6
How to close the operation history window
Press the [OK] soft key.
Alternatively, display the Home screen or another application.
7
• Histories are displayed in order from earliest to latest. The default 8

display period is from five days earlier to the latest. You can change
the display period with the filter function (For details, see " Displaying
the operation history filter" described later). A1
• It may take a while to display the Operation History Display window.
• A message is recorded in history in a language set on iHMI when it is
sent. If you display history when a language different from the one set
on iHMI when the message was sent is selected on iHMI, the log may
A2
 not be displayed correctly.
MEMO
• If a message is too long, it may be omitted and replaced with "...".
• The operation histories are not saved while the operation history Z
window is displayed.
• Even though key operations and touch operations are set to be saved,
these histories may not be retained on the password input screen.
• Key operation and touch operation histories are not retained on the
following applications:
Maintenance Display
PC Operation
iHMI browser
577
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
 Displaying the operation history filter

Perform the following to display only operation histories that meet the set
conditions.
<1> Press the [Filter] soft key.
1 The Filter Settings window appears.
2
3
4
5
<2> Set the operation history display conditions.
6 Item Description
Type Select the display history type from the following:
• All: All type histories
7 • System: iHMI system histories
• Message: Information Center notified message histories
• Application: Histories in each iHMI application
8 • Key Operation/Touch Operation: Key operation, touch
operation, or mouse operation histories
Start Date/Time/End Specify the history start date and time and end date and time
A1 Date/Time to display.
A2 <3> Press the [OK] soft key.

The operation histories are displayed based on the specified conditions.
Z • When you close the operation history window, the set conditions are
 cleared.
• When filtering is used, the cursor moves about a few seconds slower
MEMO
than when filtering is not used.
578
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
 Saving the operation histories

Perform the following to save the operation histories as a text file.
<1> Connect an external device (USB flash drive or memory card) where the
operation histories are to be saved to the CNC.
<2> Press the [Output] soft key. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
<3> Select the output destination folder with <←>, <→>, <↑>, and <↓>.
The operation histories are saved as a text file.
8
The record format is as follows:
yyyy-mm-dd[TAB]hh:mm:ss[TAB]Message
In this format, "yyyy-mm-dd" and "hh:mm:ss" indicate the date and the time
A1
when the file was saved, respectively.
A2
• It may take a while to save a text file.
 During the save, the progress window is displayed.

• The text file name is "OperationHistory_yyyy-mm-ddThh.mm.ss.txt". Z
MEMO "yyyy-mm-ddThh.mm.ss" is the time when the file was saved.
• The encoding for saved text files is UNICODE (UTF-16).
 Operation history message list

The following table shows the list of operation history messages.
 • Within square brackets ([]) is replaced by information specific to each

message.
MEMO • Within parentheses (()) may be omitted.
579
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
System
Table 6.4.7.5 (a) Operation History Message List (System)
Description Description
iHMI version [version] iHMI version information
1 iHMI startup begin iHMI started booting.
iHMI startup end iHMI finished booting.
2 iHMI shutdown iHMI was closed.
Version mismatch between system [System The system and data versions do not
version] and data [Data version] match.
3 iHMI option not found The iHMI optional functions are not found.
System incorrectly started twice The system was started multiple times.
4 CNC connected
CNC disconnected
The system was connected to the CNC.
The system was disconnected from the
CNC.
5 Home app cannot be launched :[AppID] The Home screen is not launched.
Initial app cannot be launched :[AppID] The initial application is not launched.
6 Activated :[AppID] The application was successfully displayed

in the foreground.
Activated again :[AppID] The application was displayed in the
7 Deactivated :[AppID]
foreground again.
The application was exited or halted.
Disabled :[AppID] The application startup is disabled.
8 Enabled :[AppID] The application startup is enabled.
Launched :[AppID] The application is being launched.
A1 Ready :[AppID] The application is ready to be launched.

Activation failed by invalid process :[AppID] The application was not launched due to an
invalid process.
A2 Activation failed by invalid window :[AppID] The application was not launched due to an
invalid window.
Activation failed by window loss :[AppID] The application was not launched due to a
Z window loss.
Window locked :[AppID] The application is locked.
Window origin clicked :[AppID] The origin of the application window was
clicked.
Subject set, [subject] :[AppID] The subject was set to the application.
Timeout detected in foreground process The application startup was timed out.
:[AppID]
Timeout detected in resume process The application restart was timed out.
:[AppID]
Timeout detected in setting process The entire settings were timed out.
Timeout detected in startup The iHMI startup was timed out.
Timeout detected in startup of apps The application startup was timed out.
580
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
Setting complete The entire settings were completed.
Language setting start, [Language name] The language is being changed.
Color setting start, [Theme color] The theme color is being changed.
Settings open The settings screen was started. 1
Settings close The settings screen was closed.
Information center open
Information center close
The Information Center was started.
The Information Center was closed.
2
Troubleshooting open Troubleshooting was started.
Troubleshooting close Troubleshooting was closed. 3
LiveUpdate start, ([Version before update]- Live update was started.
>[Version after update])
LiveUpdate complete, ([Version after Live update was finished.
4
update])
Screenshot failed
Setting file cannot be written, [File name],
The screenshot was not taken.
The setting file cannot be written.
5
[Details]
Setting file not found, [File name], [Details] The setting file is not found. 6
Setting file incorrect, line [Row number], The setting file has incorrect data.
[Column number], [File name], [Details]
7
Message
Table 6.4.7.5 (b) Operation History Message List (Message) 8
[Attached information 1],[Attached
information 2],[Summary message]
Alarm message
A1
[Attached information 1],[Attached Warning message
[Attached information 1],[Attached Notification message
A2
Clear:[Attached information 1],[Attached Alarm, warning, or notification clear Z
Touch operation
Table 6.4.7.5 (c) Operation History Message List (Touch Operation)
X=[X coordinates],Y=[Y coordinates] Coordinates of the pointer when the mouse
(Window offset X=[X coordinates],Y=[Y button was clicked or coordinates of the
coordinates]) touch panel when it was touched (Window
offset = Offset from the top left of the
window on top)
581
B-64644EN/08
6.4 SETTINGS
Key operation
Table 6.4.7.5 (d) Operation History Message List (Key Operation)
1 [Key](+SHIFT)(+CONTROL)(+MENU(ALT)) Pressed key

(+WIN)
2 Application
Table 6.4.7.5 (e) Operation History Message List (Application)
3 Description Description
Window open, [Screen ID] (of [Screen The window was displayed.
group ID]) :[AppID]
4 Slide open, [Screen ID] (of [Screen group The slide was displayed.
ID]) :[AppID]
Screen switch, [Screen ID] (of [Screen The screen was switched.
5 group ID]) :[AppID]
Slide switch, [Screen ID] (of [Screen group The slide was switched.
ID]) :[AppID]
6 Window close, [Screen ID] (of [Screen The window was closed.
group ID]) :[AppID]
7 Slide close, [Screen ID] (of [Screen group

ID]) :[AppID]
The slide was closed.
Horizontal soft key push(, [Displayed The horizontal soft key was pressed.
8 character string]),
[Soft key number]:[AppID]
Vertical soft key push(, [Displayed The vertical soft key was pressed.
A1 character string]),
[Soft key number]:[AppID]
Path change, [Path number] :[AppID] The path was changed.
A2 Help open, [Help file name]:[AppID] Help was displayed.
Help close, [Help file name]:[AppID] Help was closed.
Z Content change, [Tab number](, [Displayed The tab/layout was switched.

character string]):
[AppID]
582
B-64644EN/08
6.5 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY
6.5
6.5.1 Overview of Maintenance Display 1

6.5.1
This function displays the following conventional CNC screen. It is used when
CNC initial setting and maintenance work are done on the conventional CNC
screen. 2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 6.5.1 Conventional CNC Screen Used in Maintenance Display
8
6.5.2 Open Maintenance Display
6.5.2
Maintenance display is displayed by pressing the [MAINTENANCE DISPLAY] icon

A1
on the Home screen.
A2
Z
583
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 6.5.2 [MAINTENANCE DISPLAY] Icon Displayed on the Home Screen
6 6.5.3 Register Multiple Icons of Maintenance Display

6.5.3
By editing the application definition file (apps-general.xml), you can register

multiple icons for maintenance display on the home screen by changing the
7 designation of the CNC screen to be displayed first.
For details on how to edit the application definition file, refer to "2.2.1 Application
definition file" in "FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL" (B-64647EN).
8
Examples of editing an application definition file:
<entry option="noinformation">
A1 <name>SDF</name>
<category>Utility</category>
<caption>
A2 <en>CNC PARAMETER</en>
<ja>CNC パラメータ </ja>
</caption>
Z <subject>0103</subject >
<file>%APPPATH%\SDF\CNCScrn.exe</file>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\ClassicDisplay.svg</image>
<current>%APPPATH%\SDF</current>
</entry>
<entry option="noinformation">
<name>SDF</name>
<category>Utility</category>
<caption>
<en>CUSTOM MACRO</en>
<ja> カスタムマクロ </ja>
</caption>
<subject>0602</subject >
<file>%APPPATH%\SDF\CNCScrn.exe</file>
584
B-64644EN/08
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\ClassicDisplay.svg</image>
<current>%APPPATH%\SDF</current>
</entry>
6.5.4 Display Size of Maintenance Display 1

6.5.4
In this section, it is explains the type of the maintenance display screen in the
screen size set with iHMI. The screen size set by iHMI may be different from the
display screen size.
2
In maintenance display, the following types of screen can be displayed.
• 10.4 inch display (SVGA enlarged display) 3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 6.5.4 (a) Maintenance Display Screen - 10.4 Inch Display
(SVGA Enlarged Display)
A1
It is a standard screen image for 10.4 inch display. (SVGA enlarged display in the
above figure)
The screen resolution is 640 × 480 dots (VGA). Depending on the setting, it can A2
be displayed enlarging to 800 x 600 dots (SVGA). Since the 10.4 inch display
screen of iHMI is 800 x 600 dots (SVGA), you can display it on the whole screen
by setting it to SVGA enlarged display. Z
For the setting method, see "6.5.5 Setting The Display Screen Size".
In the PANEL iH, if a display of 15 inches or more is equipped with it, it is possible
to display 10.4 inches by setting the following parameters.
Set bit 7 of CNC parameter No. 13115 to 1.
585
B-64644EN/08
• If the display size is enlarged larger than the screen size, the
protruding area will be clipped and not displayed, so please set it
within the screen size of the display unit.
1 • You can only obtain SVGA-size enlarged display of standard CNC/

PMC screens (including screens created using the C Executor or
Macro Executor) and MANUAL GUIDE i screens. It may not be
2 
NOTE
displayed correctly on other user screens such as interactive macro
screen.
• On an enlarged display of any user-created screens (including
screens created using the C Executor or Macro Executor), the
3 distances between each drawn shapes are not even and some spaces
may be created between each shapes. Therefore, the shape fill may
not work correctly.
4 • Fonts of displayed characters depends on which screen size is used,

VGA or SVGA enlarged display.
5 • 15 inch display
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 6.5.4 (b) Maintenance Display Screen - 15 Inch Display
Z
The screen resolution is 1024 x 768 dots (XGA). It is displayed when a display of
15 inches or more is attached.
In case of PANEL iH Pro, the following parameter setting is required.
586
B-64644EN/08
• 15 inch display (XGA enlarged display)
1
2
3
4
Fig. 6.5.4 (c) Maintenance Display Screen - 15 Inch Display
(SVGA Enlarged Display) 5
Depending on the settings, you can display a 640 x 480 dot (VGA) image with
10.4 inch display enlarged to 15 inches (XGA) as shown above. For the setting
6
method, see "6.5.5 Setting The Display Screen Size".
In the PANEL iH, it has a display of 15 inches or more, it is possible to display 10.4
inches by setting the following parameters.
7
8
protruding area will be clipped and not displayed, so please set it
within the screen size of the display unit. A1
• You can only obtain SVGA-size enlarged display of standard CNC/
PMC screens (including screens created using the C Executor or
Macro Executor) and MANUAL GUIDE i screens. It may not be
displayed correctly on other user screens such as interactive macro
A2
screen.

NOTE
• On an enlarged display of any user-created screens (including
screens created using the C Executor or Macro Executor), the Z
distances between each drawn shapes are not even and some spaces
may be created between each shapes. Therefore, the shape fill may
not work correctly.
• Fonts of displayed characters depends on which screen size is used,
VGA/XGA or XGA enlarged display.
• It is not displayed on the entire screen in XGA enlarged display. As
shown above, black borders of 24 dots vertically and 32 dots left and
right are displayed.
587
B-64644EN/08
• 19 inch display (SXGA enlarged display)
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 6.5.4 (d) Maintenance Display Screen - 19 Inch Display
(SVGA Enlarged Display)
6
You can display 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) of 15 inch display enlarged to 1280 x 960
7 dots (SXGA) by setting. For the setting method, see "6.5.5 Setting The Display
Screen Size". In case of PANEL iH Pro, the following parameter setting is
required.
8 Set bit 0 and bit 3 of CNC parameter No. 13114 to 1.
A1 protruding area will be clipped and not displayed, so please set it
within the screen size of the display unit.
• For the SXGA enlarged display in PANEL iH Pro, "19 inch enlarged
A2 screen display" option is required.
• On an enlarged view of any user-created screens (including screens
Z

NOTE
created using the C Executor or Macro Executor), the distances
between each drawn shapes are not even and some spaces may be
created between each shapes. Therefore, the shape fill may not work
correctly.
• Fonts of displayed characters depends on which screen size is used,
XGA or SXGA enlarged display.
• In the SXGA enlarged display it is not displayed on the entire 19 inch
screen. There is a margin of 64 dots vertically.
588
B-64644EN/08
• 19 inch display (WXGA wide display)
1
2
3
4
Fig. 6.5.4 (e) Maintenance Display Screen - 19 Inch Display 5
(WXGA Wide Display)
The screen resolution is 1280 x 768 dots (WXGA).

6
By setting the following parameters, 19 inch WXGA wide display is possible.
7
• For PANEL iH Pro, 19 inch CNC screen display "option is required for 8

NOTE
19 inch wide display.
• In the WXGA enlarged display it is not displayed on the entire 19 inch
screen. There is a margin of 256 dots vertically. A1
6.5.5 Setting The Display Screen Size A2

6.5.5
In this section, the setting of the display screen size is explained.
When the CNC screen is 10.4 inch display, it is possible to enlarge the standard
Z
resolution 640 x 480 dots (VGA) to 800 x 600 dots (SVGA) or 1024 x 768 dots
(XGA).
When the CNC screen is 15 inch display, it is possible to enlarge the standard
resolution 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) to 1280 x 960 dots (SXGA) and display it.
To enlarge the display, operate as follows.
<1> Open the pop-up menu and select [Setting ...].

The pop-up menu is displayed by pressing the [SHIFT] + [S2] key or pressing
the touch panel for a few seconds.
589
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3 <2> Since various setup screens are displayed, select [Screen].
Select the resolution you want to change and press the <OK> button.
4
5
6
7
<3> Since following message will be displayed, press the <OK> button.
8
A1
<4> Open the pop-up menu and select [Exit] to close the maintenance display.
A2 <5> Open the maintenance display again by pressing the [MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY] icon on the Home screen.
Z
6.5.6 Keyboard Input
6.5.6
In this section, how to enter keys is explained.

• MDI keyboard input
The MDI key of CNC can be input by the operation described in the operation
manual of CNC as usual except for some of key.
To enter MDI keys not assigned to MDI of iHMI, please enter the following
alternative key.
Table 6.5.6 (a) Alternative Keys for MDI Keys
MDI key Alternative key
[CUSTOM2] [SHIFT]+[CUSTOM1]
590
B-64644EN/08
• USB full keyboard input

MDI keys other than alphanumeric keys and keys not common are assigned as
follows as standard.
Table 6.5.6 (b) MDI Key Assignments to USB Full Keyboard
MDI key USB full keyboard 1
Home menu Numeric keypad [9]
[ALTER]
[HELP]
Numeric keypad [+]
Numeric keypad [-]
2
[PAGE↑] [Page Up]
[PAGE↓] [Page Down] 3
[POS] [Ctrl]+[F1] or Numeric keypad [1]
[PROG]
[OFFSET]
[Ctrl]+[F2] or Numeric keypad [2]
4
[SYSTEM] [Ctrl]+[F4] or Numeric keypad [4]
[MESSAGE] [Ctrl]+[F5] or Numeric keypad [5] 5
[GRAPH] [Ctrl]+[F6] or Numeric keypad [6]
[CUSTOM1]
[CUSTOM2]
6
Soft keys [F1] to [F10] [F1],..,[F10]
[FL] Soft key on the far left [F11] 7
[FR] Soft key on the far [F12]
right
[CALC] [Shift]+[Home]
8
• The [SHIFT] key is processed internally and not transferred to CNC.

A1
Therefore, the following functions can not be used.

NOTE
Example: Press and hold [SHIFT] for Screen capture
Please use the screen shot function of iHMI for screen hard copy. A2
• You can not simultaneously press multiple MDI keys except [SHIFT]
[Ctrl] [Alt] [RESET].
Z
6.5.7 Touch Panel And Mouse Input
6.5.7
In this section, how to input from the touch panel and mouse is explained.
1) Press the soft key on the screen, the virtual MDI key, the custom screen
button, etc. on the touch panel.
2) Using the mouse , click soft keys, virtual MDI keys, custom screen
buttons etc.
591
B-64644EN/08
1
Fig. 6.5.7 Display Example When Clicking with a Mouse
2
6.5.8 Entering Function Keys
3
6.5.8
In this section, how to enter function keys using the popup screen is explained.
<1> Open the pop-up menu and select [Function key].

4 The pop-up menu is displayed by pressing the [SHIFT] + [S2] key or pressing
5
6
7
8
<2> Since the function key screen is displayed, press the button of the screen you
A1 want to switch.
A2
Z
Button MDI keyboard
[POS]
[PROG]
[OFFSET]
592
B-64644EN/08
Button MDI keyboard

[CUSTOM1]
[SYSTEM]
1
[MESSAGE]
2
[GRAPH]
3
[CUSTOM2]
4
• The function switch screen appears at the center of the screen for the 5

NOTE
first time. Move the screen to any desired location. When the screen is
displayed for the second and subsequent times, the screen appears at
the location to which the screen was moved previously.
6
6.5.9
6.5.9
Input and Output of CNC Data 7
This section explains input and output of CNC data to and from the memory card
and USB flash drive inside the display unit.
8
When inputting to/outputting from the memory card and the drive/folder of the
USB flash drive assigned by Windows, please set as follows.
A1
• Setting CNC parameters
When inputting/outputting with memory card, please set the following parameters. A2
Set CNC parameter No. 20 to 4.
Set CNC parameter No. 0300 bit 0 to 1.
Z
When inputting/outputting with USB flash drive, please set the following
parameters.
Set CNC parameter No. 20 to 17.
• Register drive/folder of memory card and USB flash drive

Check the drive or folder of the memory card and USB flash drive assigned by
Windows and register their respective paths. If the drive or folder of the memory
device is changed, you will need to reconfigure.
593
B-64644EN/08
<1> Open the pop-up menu and select [Data input / output ...].
The pop-up menu is displayed by pressing the [SHIFT] + [S2] key or pressing
1
2
3
4 <2> The "Data Input / Output" dialog box appears.
For PANEL iH Pro:
5
6
7
8 For PANEL iH:
A1
A2
Z <3> Enter the folder of the memory card and USB flash drive, then click the <OK>
button.
Check the drive or folder of the memory card and USB flash drive assigned by
Windows and register their respective paths.
594
B-64644EN/08
If you press the <Browse> button on this screen, a folder reference dialog box
will be displayed. Here, you can easily enter the folder name by selecting the
appropriate folder and pressing the <OK> button.
For PANEL iH Pro, if you select [Auto detection], the memory card assigned by
Windows and the drive of the USB flash drive are automatically detected. 1
However, the folder is fixed in the root directory. Even if the drive name
assigned by Windows changes due to attachment/detachment of the memory
device, there is an advantage that re-setting becomes unnecessary. If more 2
than one USB flash drive is installed, the first detected drive in alphabetical
order ABC of the drive name is selected.
3
[Assign to any memory device]
You can also assign all the folders on the Windows file system, such as a hard
disk or networked drive as an input/output destination You can specify the drive 4
directly, or you can specify a subfolder. After assignment, various data of CNC
will be input/output to that folder.
5
• In the case of PANEL iH Pro, the drive of the memory card and the
USB flash drive assigned by Windows can not be fixed when
6

NOTE
attaching/detaching the device. As for the drive and folder name
registered by the above operation, it may be necessary to confirm and
reset the drive name when attaching/detaching the device.
• If a folder name contains characters other than alphanumeric 7
characters, it can not be set correctly.
8
6.5.10 Other Pop-Up Menu Items
A1
6.5.10
In this section, the items of other pop-up menus which are not explained above
are explained.
The following pop-up menu items are not normally used, so this section briefly
explains them.
A2
<1> Display title bar (Title bar) Z
Toggles the display of the title bar. (PANEL iH only)
<2> Foreground display (Display above task bar)

Toggle enable/disable of the foreground display for the maintenance display
screen.
<3> Clear CNC alarm (Alarm Clear)

Clear CNC alarm (SW0100) displayed at power on. (PANEL iH Pro only)
595
B-64644EN/08
<4> Screen capture (Capture)

Capture the screen display and output a bitmap file. (PANEL iH Pro only)
Do not use this function, please use the screen shot function of iHMI.
1 <5> Display version number of maintenance display function (About)

Display version number of maintenance display function.
Do not use this function, please use the version information display of iHMI.
2
<6> Minimize screen (Minimize)
3 Minimize the screen for maintenance display function.
<7> Close maintenance display function (Exit)

4 Ends the maintenance display function.
5 6.5.11 Alarms
6.5.11
The alarms generated by the maintenance display function are explained below.
6 There is no response from the CNC.
Description There is no response from the CNC.
7 Action (1) Check whether the power to the CNC is turned on.
(2) When the personal computer or display unit is connected using a high-
speed serial bus, check whether the cables are connected correctly.
8 (3) Please check if a system alarm has occurred on the CNC main unit.
A1 Function is already in use with another PC.

Description The CNC screen display function has already been executed from another
personal computer or display unit.
A2 Action Only one instance of the CNC screen display function can be started for
each CNC at one time. After the CNC screen display function has been
terminated on another personal computer or display unit, try starting the
Z function again.
Restart this application to restore this setting.

Description This alarm is generated when switching between display languages has
been performed.
Action Restart the maintenance display function.
Font pattern file (%s) open failed.

Description The font pattern file indicated by %s does not exist.
596
B-64644EN/08
Action The font pattern file to be displayed by %s must be placed in the same
folder as the executable file of the maintenance display function
(CNCScrn.exe). Copy the font file to the folder containing the executable
file.
If the font file does not exist, re-install the iHMI software.
1
Font pattern file (%s) is invalid.
Description The font pattern file indicated by %s is destroyed. 2
Action Re-install the iHMI software.
Keyboard allocation file (%s) open failed.

3
Description The keyboard assignment file does not exist.
Action The keyboard assignment file must be placed in the same folder as the 4
executable file of the maintenance display function (CNCScrn.exe). Copy
the keyboard assignment file to the folder containing the executable file.
If the keyboard assignment file does not exist, re-install the iHMI software. 5
Keyboard assignment file (%S) is write-protected.
6
Description The save setup results cannot be saved as the file attributes for the
keyboard assignment file to be displayed by %s are read-only.
Action Change the file attributes, and cancel read-only. 7
Function key assignment file (%s) open failed; 8
Description The function key assignment file does not exist.
Action The function key assignment file to be displayed by %s must be in the same
folder as the execution file (CNCScrn.exe) of the maintenance display A1
function. Copy the function key assignment file to the same folder as the
execution file.
If the function key assignment file does not exist, re-install the iHMI A2
software.
Key definition assignment file (%s) open failed.

Z
Description The key definition file does not exist.
Action The key definition file to be displayed by %s must be in the same folder as
the execution file (CNCScrn.exe) of the maintenance display function. Copy
the key definition file to the same folder as the execution file.
If the function key assignment file does not exist, re-install the iHMI
software.
Please select folder.

Description No folder is selected in data I/O setting.
Action Set a correct folder.
597
B-64644EN/08
Folder is not chosen.

Description No folder is set in data I/O setting.
1
The folder does not exist or invalid folder name.
2 Description A nonexistent folder or an invalid folder name was set in data I/O setting.
3 CNC type differs from HSSB device set value.

Description The CNC Type of the HSSB device set value differs from the connected
4 CNC.
Action Change the CNC Type of the HSSB device set value to the same Type as
the connected CNC.
5
CNC not supported by maintenance function is connected.
6 Description The connected CNC is not supported by the maintenance display function.
Action Change the CNC, or consider discontinued use of the maintenance display
function.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
598
A
1
APPENDIX 2
3
4
5
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER................................................................................ 600
A.2
A.3
MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA............................................... 605
TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL CATALOG DATABASE ......... 613
6
A.4 LIVE UPDATE ...................................................................................... 630
A.5 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CNC DEVICES AND iHMI SOFT-
WARE ................................................................................................... 640
A
A.6 CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR TRADITIONAL CHINESE ZHURIN
SYMBOLS ............................................................................................ 641
A.7 ITEMS DISPLAYED IN "OPERATION HISTORY" ............................... 644
599
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER
A.1
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER
1 A.1.1 Settings for the Manual List Screen

A.1.1
To configure the settings for the manual list screen, use the import function.
The manual information settings file to import and the file configuration are as
2 follows.
3 A.1.1.1 Manual information settings file

The manual information settings file (ManualInfo.xml) has description about
A.1.1.1
information required to display the manual list screen.

4 Describe manual and category information between <manualinfo> and </
manualinfo>.
Describe manual information between <manuals> and </manuals> and category
5 information between <categories> and </categories>.
A description example of ManualInfo.xml is as follows.

6 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>
<manualinfo>
<manuals>
A <manual protect = "1">

<name> MAINTENANCE MANUAL </name>
<category> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B </category>
<image>iconImage.sgv</image>
<lang>
<ja>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B 保守説明書 </caption>
<file>B-64485JA_02.pdf </file>
</ja>
<en>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE
MANUAL </caption>
<file>B-64485EN_02.pdf </file>
</en>
</lang>
</manual>
<manual>
(...)
</manuals>
<categories>
<category>
<name>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</name>
<lang>
<ja>
<caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</ja>
<en>
<caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</en>
</lang>
</category>
<category>
(...)
</categories>
</manualinfo>
600
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER
The following shows tags described between <manuals> and </manuals>.
Table A.1.1.1 (a) List of Tags for Manual Information

XML tag Requi
red
Child
element
Description
1
<manual> ○ <name> Describe information about one manual. The protect
<category>
<image>
attribute can be written.
- protect (deletion protection)
2
<lang> If 1 is written, the manual cannot be deleted.
If 0 is written or this is not written, the manual can be
deleted. 3
<name> ○ None Manual identifier ID. Describe unique text. If <name>
already registered is written, the current information is
overwritten by contents to import. 4
<category> × None Manual category. Describe the identifier ID of the
category (see Table A.1.1.1 (b)).
If this is not written, the manual has no category.
5
<image> × None Describe the file name of the icon image.
<lang> ○
If this is not written, the default image is used.
<[language]> Describe information for each language in the
6
<[language]> tag.
English (<en>) is required.
If a language not described in the <lang> tag is set to
A
the display language, information described in English
(<en>) is displayed.
<[language]> ○ <caption> Describe information about one display language.
<file>
<caption> ○ None Describe the manual title.
<file> ○ None Describe the manual file name.
For a pdf or txt file, write the file name including the
extension.
For an html file, write the folder name containing
index.html.
The following shows tags described between <categories> and </categories>.
Table A.1.1.1 (b) List of Tags for Category Information

XML tag Requi Child Description
red element
<category> ○ <name> Describe information about one category.
<lang>
<name> ○ None Category identifier ID. Describe unique text.
601
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER

red element
<lang> ○ <[language Describe information for each language in the
]> <[language]> tag. English (<en>) is required.
1 If a language not described in the <lang> tag is set to

the display language, information described in English
(<en>) is displayed.
2 <[language]>
<caption>
○
○
<caption>
None
Describe information about one display language.
Describe the name of the category.
3 The following shows a list of languages that can be used in the <[language]> tag.
Table A.1.1.1 (c) Language List

4 <[language]> Language <[language]> Language <[language]> Language
Tag name Tag name Tag name
5 <en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
<de> German <pl> Polish <sk> Slovak
6 <fr> French <hu> Hungarian <fi> Finnish
<zh-CHT> Traditional <sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
A <it>
Chinese
Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian
<ko> Korean <zh-CHS> Simplified <sl> Slovene
Chinese
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian
<nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
If a manual file/folder aligned to the name rules (*) for update is imported, the
version number is updated.
* For the name rules for update, see "Appendix A.1.1.3 Name rules to update a
manual file".
If a manual file/folder not written in the manual information settings file

(ManualInfo.xml) is imported, the following information is added during the import.
Table A.1.1.1 (d) Manual Information When Importing Only a Manual File
XML tag Information
<name> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
<category> Not specified
<image> Not specified
<lang> English
<caption> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
602
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER
XML tag Information

<file> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
A.1.1.2 Folder configuration for import 1

Place manual files (*.pdf, *.txt) and the manual information settings file
A.1.1.2
(ManualInfo.xml) under a folder to import.

Imported text files saved in UTF-16 (except for Big Endian without BOM) 2
character code can be viewed.
Store manual files (*.html) including index.html in a folder and place the folder
under the import folder. 3
Folders containing a set of html files are to be imported.
Store icon image files (png, bmp, svg) in the images folder and place the folder
under the import folder. 4
(Example) When specifying the Manual folder in the external device as an import
folder
5
External B-64484EN pdf file (*.pdf)
device Manual
6
_02.pdf
B-64485EN
_02.txt Text file (*.txt)
Manual
A
html files (*.html)
B-64490EN_05 * A set of files
including
index.html
Manual information settings file

(ManualInfo.xml)
images Icon image files

(*.png, *.bmp, *.svg)
Fig. A.1.1.2 Import Folder Configuration
A.1.1.3 Name rules to update a manual file

If the following name rules are met when importing a manual not aligned to the
A.1.1.3
manual information settings file (ManualInfo.xml), the manual file/folder can be

updated without removing the old version number during the import.
 Name rules
• A file/folder must have the manual name and version number (two-digit number)
connected by an underscore (_).
603
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.1 MANUAL VIEWER
• An import file/folder must have a higher version number than an original file/
folder.
Manual name Version number Manual name Version number

(two-digit number) (two-digit number)
1 AAAAA_BB.xxx AAAAA_BB
For a file For a folder
2
Fig. A.1.1.3 (a) Name rules to update a manual file
3 For pdf and text files

Current manual Manual to be imported
4
FANUC Series FANUC Series
30i-MODEL B, Series 30i-MODEL B, Series
5 31i-MODEL B, Series
32i-MODEL B lathe
31i-MODEL B, Series
32i-MODEL B lathe
system system
Operator's manual Operator's manual
6 first release
B-64484EN-1_01.pdf
second release
B-64484EN-1_02.pdf
A
B-64484EN-1_01.pdf is updated to B-64484EN-1_02.pdf, assuming that
the two files are the same manual.
Fig. A.1.1.3 (b) Example of pdf Files and Text Files Being Updated at Import
For html files

Current manual Manual to be imported
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,

Import FANUC Series 30i-MODEL
Series 31i-MODEL B, Series B, Series 31i-MODEL B,
32i-MODEL B Series
Machining center system 32i-MODEL B
Operator's manual third Machining center system
release Operator's manual second
release
B-64484EN-2_03 (folder) B-64484EN-2_02 (folder)
The manual is not updated because it is the same but has a lower
version.
Fig. A.1.1.3 (c) Example of html Files Not Updated at Import
604
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.2 MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA
A.2

The format of a maintenance item information file used to import and export
maintenance item setting data is as follows. Create a maintenance item
information file in the "Unicode" XML format.
1
A.2.1 Description Position of Maintenance Item Informa- 2

tion
A.2.1
Describe maintenance item information between <maintenanceinfo> and </ 3

maintenanceinfo>.
A.2.1.1
A.2.1.1
Description example of MaintenanceInfo.xml 4
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>
<maintenanceinfo>
<category>
5
<name>MACHINE</name>
<items>
<item>
<itemname> 6
<lang>
<en>Machine01</en>
<ja> 機械 01</ja>
</lang> A
</itemname>
<abbreviation>
<lang>
<en>M01</en>
<ja> 機 01</ja>
</lang>
</abbreviation>
<partsname>
<lang>
<en> Machine01-parts </en>
<ja> 機械 01- パーツ </ja>
</lang>
</partsname>
<decitionmethod>OR</decitionmethod>
<datatype1>1201</datatype1>
<datarangemax1>123.45</datarangemax1>
<datarangemin1>0</datarangemin1>
<decitiontype1> LOWER</decitiontype1>
</item>
<item>
・
・
</item>
<item>
・
・
</item>
</items>
</category>
</maintenanceinfo>
605
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.2.1.2 Between <maintenanceinfo> and </maintenanceinfo>

A list of tags described between <maintenanceinfo> and </maintenanceinfo> is as
A.2.1.2
follows.
1 Table A.2.1.2 List of Tags for Maintenance Item Information

red element
2 <category> ○ <name> Describe information about one maintenance
<items> item.
3 <name> ○ None Describe a maintenance category.

Enter "MACHINE" for machine maintenance
and "USER" for user maintenance.
4 <items> ○ <item> Maintenance item information group. Describe

information about each maintenance item in the
<item> tag (see Table A.2.1.3).
5 A.2.1.3 Between <item> and </item>

A list of tags described between <item> and </item> is as follows.
A.2.1.3
6
Table A.2.1.3 List of Tags for Information for Each Maintenance Item
A XML tag Requi

red
Child
element
Description
<itemname> ○ <lang> Describe the maintenance item name. You

may enter up to 127 characters (*) for the
address.
It must be written in each language tag, which
is a child element of the <lang> tag.
<lang> ○ <[language]> Describe information for each language in the
<[language]> tag (see Table A.2.1.4).
English (<en>) is required.
<[language]> ○ None Describe information about one display
language.
<abbreviation> ○ <lang> Describe the maintenance item abbreviation.
You may enter up to 127 characters (*) for the
address.
<partsname> ○ <lang> Describe the target part name. You may enter
up to 127 characters (*) for the address.
606
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

red element
<unitname> × <lang> Describe the target unit name. You may enter
is a child element of the <lang> tag. 1
If this is not defined, "None" is used when data
is imported.
<serialnumber> × None Describe the serial number of the maintenance 2
part. You may enter up to 127 characters (*) for
the address.
<photograph> × None Describe the maintenance target photo. You 3
may enter up to 127 characters (*) for the
address.
<icon> × None Specify the display icon with a numerical value. 4
If this is not defined, 0 (No icon) is used when
data is imported.
<normalicon> × None Describe the original icon to be displayed 5
when the status of the maintenance item is
"Normal". Set the file name that follows the
Icon folder, which includes the path name and 6
extension (.png).
<warningicon> × None Describe the original icon to be displayed
when the status of the maintenance item is A
"Warning". Set the file name that follows the
Icon folder, which includes the path name and
extension (.png).
<alarmicon> × None Describe the original icon to be displayed
when the status of the maintenance item is
"Abnormal". Set the file name that follows the
Icon folder, which includes the path name and
extension (.png).
<decitionmethod> × None Describe the state determination method.
Enter "OR" or "AND".
If this is not defined, "OR" is used when data is
imported.
<warningmessage> × <lang> Describe the warning message. You may enter
<alarmmessage> × <lang> Describe the abnormality message. You may
enter up to 127 characters (*) for the address.
<mediumterm> × None Describe the state monitor data compilation
period (for mid-term storage). You may enter
between 1 and 4.
If this is not defined, 1 is used when data is
imported.
607
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

red element
<longterm> × None Describe the state monitor data compilation
period (for long-term storage). You may enter
1 between 0 and 10.

imported.
2 <guidefile1> × None Describe maintenance guide file 1. You may

<guidefile2> × None Describe maintenance guide file 2. You may
3 <datatype1> ○ None
Specify the data type of state monitor data 1
with a numerical value.
4 <graphtitle1> × <lang> Describe the graph title of state monitor data 1.

address.
5 It must be written in each language tag, which

<dataunit1> × <lang> Describe the data unit of state monitor data 1.
6 You may enter up to 127 characters (*) for the

address.
A <dataaddress1> × None Specify the data address of state monitor data
1 in data address format. You may enter up to
127 characters (*) for the address. This is not
required when the data type is "Total Time" or
"Powered Time".
<datarangemax1> ○ None Describe the maximum data range of state
monitor data 1. You may enter a numerical
value (including decimal places) between -
999999999999 and 999999999999.
<datarangemin1> ○ None Describe the minimum data range of state
monitor data 1. You may enter a numerical
value (including decimal places) between -
999999999999 and 999999999999.
<decitiontype1> ○ None Describe the determination type of state
monitor data 1.
Enter "UPPER" for the upper limit
determination or "LOWER" for the lower limit
determination.
<warningthreshold1> × None Describe the warning threshold of state
monitor data 1.
You may enter a numerical value (including
decimal places) between -999999999999 and
999999999999.
If this is not defined, -1e12 (a value indicating
no input) is used when data is imported.
608
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

red element
<alarmthreshold1> × None Describe the abnormality threshold of state
monitor data 1.
decimal places) between -999999999999 and 1
999999999999.
no input) is used when data is imported. 2
<datatype2> × None Specify the data type of state monitor data 2
with a numerical value.
If this is not defined, 0 (None) is used when 3
data is imported.
<graphtitle2> × <lang> Describe the graph title of state monitor data 2.
You may enter up to 127 characters (*) for the 4
address.
is a child element of the <lang> tag. 5
<dataunit2> × <lang> Describe the data unit of state monitor data 2.
address.
6
<dataaddress2> × None Specify the data address of state monitor data
2 in data address format. You may enter up to
A
127 characters (*) for the address. This is not
required when the data type is "Total Time",
"Powered Time", or "None".
<datarangemax2> × None Describe the maximum data range of state
monitor data 2.
999999999999.
imported.
<datarangemin2> × None Describe the minimum data range of state
monitor data 2.
999999999999.
imported.
<decitiontype2> × None Describe the determination type of state
monitor data 2.
Enter "UPPER" for the upper limit
determination or "LOWER" for the lower limit
determination.
If this is not defined, "LOWER" is used when
data is imported.
609
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

red element
<warningthreshold2> × None Describe the warning threshold of state
monitor data 2.
1 You may enter a numerical value (including

999999999999.
2 no input) is used when data is imported.
<alarmthreshold2> × None Describe the abnormality threshold of state
monitor data 2.
3 You may enter a numerical value (including
999999999999.
4 If this is not defined, -1e12 (a value indicating
no input) is used when data is imported.
(*)No case-sensitive
5
A.2.1.4 Used languages
6 A.2.1.4
A list of languages that can be used in the <[language]> tag is as follows:
A Table A.2.1.4 Language List

<[language]> Language <[language]> Language <[language]> Language
Tag name Tag name Tag name
<en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
<de> German <pl> Polish <sk> Slovak
<fr> French <hu> Hungarian <fi> Finnish
<zh-CHT> Traditional <sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
Chinese
<it> Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian
<ko> Korean <zh-CHS> Simplified <sl> Slovene
Chinese
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian
<nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
A.2.1.5 Data types that can be used in the <datatype1> and <datatype2> tags
Data types that can be used in the <datatype1> and <datatype2> tags are as
A.2.1.5
follows:
610
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Table A.2.1.5 Data types that can be used in the <datatype1> and <datatype2>
tags
Value Data type
0 None
101 Total Time 1
102 Powered Time
103
104
Operated time
Cutting time
2
106 Next maintenance
401 Bit type signal information 3
402 Signal information with a length of one byte
403
404
Signal information with a length of two bytes
Signal information with a length of four bytes
4
501 Custom macro variable
502 Execution macro variable 5
503 Auxiliary macro variable
504 Conversational macro variable
6
A.2.1.6 Data address formats that can be used in the <dataaddress1> and
A.2.1.6
<dataaddress2> tags
Describe data addresses that can be used in the <dataaddress1> and
A
<dataaddress2> tags in the following appropriate format according to the data
type:
Table A.2.1.6 Data address formats that can be used in the <dataaddress1> and
<dataaddress2> tags
Data type Data address format
Operated Time Integer of 1 or more
Cut Time
PMC (Bit) "A,BCCCC.D"
The format of each symbol is as follows:
• A: Integer of 1 or more
• B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (no case sensitive)
• CCCC: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such as
"0001".)
• D: Integer from 0 to 9
PMC (1-byte) "A,BCCCC"
PMC (2-byte) The format of each symbol is as follows:
• A: Integer of 1 or more
PMC (4-byte) • B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (no case sensitive)
• C: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such as "0001".)
611
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Data type Data address format

Custom macro "A,B"
variable The format of each symbol is as follows:
Execution macro A: Integer of 1 or more
1 variable
Auxiliary macro
B: Integer of 0 or more (It may be zero filled such as "0001".)
variable
2 Conversational
macro variable
3 A.2.1.7 Substitution character strings of symbols that used in tags

The following symbols cannot be used in tags:
A.2.1.7
• &
4 • <
5 Instead, use the following substitution character strings:
Table A.2.1.7 Symbol and substitution character string

6 Target Substitution Use example
symbol character
A &
string
& Before <itemname>Machine0&1</itemname>
substitution
After <itemname>Machine0&1</itemname>
substitution
< < Before <itemname>Machine<0></itemname>
substitution
After <itemname>Machine<0></itemname>
substitution
612
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.3 TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL CATALOG DATABASE
A.3
A.3 TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL

CATALOG DATABASE
Displayed items for tool information used in the tool catalog database will vary 1
according to tool type and holder geometry type.
2
A.3.1 Tool Information in Tool Catalog Database
3
A.3.1
The following table shows the correspondence between the displayed items for
part information (tool part) of the tool catalog database and tool types.
Table A.3.1 (a) Correspondence between Displayed Items for Part Information
and Tool Types 4
Tool Type
Displayed
item
Tool
using
Drilling Chamf Flat End
Tool ering Mill Tool
Ball End
Mill Tool
Tap
Tool
Reamer
Tool
5
insert Tool
Manufacturer
Name
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6
Tool Model ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Number A
Material ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Insert ○ × × × × × ×
Geometry Type
Function × × ○ × × × ○
Length
Min. Cut Width × × × ○ ○ × ×
Machining × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
Diameter
Neck Diameter × × × × × ○ ×
Cut Edge  (*) × × × × × ×
Length
Protruding × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Length
Available × ○ ○ × × ○ ×
Length
Total Length × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Chamfering × × × × × × ○
Height
Nose Angle  (*) ○ × × × × ×
Taper Angle × × ○ × × × ×
Tip Diameter × × × × × ○ ×
613
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Tool Type
Displayed Tool Drilling Chamf Flat End Ball End Tap Reamer
item using Tool ering Mill Tool Mill Tool Tool Tool
insert Tool
1 Max. Cut
Depth
× ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
Contact × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Surface
Diameter
Screw Part × × × × × ○ ×
3 Length
Screw Part × × × × × ○ ×
Diameter
4 Screw Thread × × × × × ○ ×
Pitch
Thread Part × × × × × ○ ×
5 Inner Diameter
Inscribed  (*) × × × × × ×
Circle
6 Tip Thickness  (*) × × × × × ×
Corner R  (*) × × × × × ×
A Main
Clearance
 (*) × × × × × ×
Angle
Tip Width  (*) × × × × × ×
Comment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
• "Tool using insert" refers to General Tool, Threading Tool, Grooving
 Tool, Button Turning Tool, Straight Tool, Versatile Tool, Boring Tool,
and Face Mill Tool.
MEMO • (*) The following table shows how information will be displayed or
hidden when you select the [Insert Geometry Type].
Table A.3.1 (b) Correspondence between [Insert Geometry Type] and Displayed
Items
Insert type
Displayed
item Regular Square Regular Regular Regular Triangle Parallel Rhomb Rectang Circle
Triangle Pentagon Hexagon Octagon Hexagon ogram us le
Cut Edge ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Length
Inscribed ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Circle
Diameter
614
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Insert type
Displayed
item Regular Square Regular Regular Regular Triangle Parallel Rhomb Rectang Circle
Triangle Pentagon Hexagon Octagon Hexagon ogram us le
Tip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Thickness
Corner R ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
1
Main ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Clearance
Angle
2
Nose ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Angle 3
Tip Width × × × × × × ○ × ○ ×
4
A.3.2 Holder Part and Holder Geometry Information of
Tool Catalog Database 5
A.3.2
The following table shows the correspondence between the displayed items for
holder part and holder geometry of the tool catalog database and the tool types
and holder geometry types. 6
Table A.3.2 Correspondence between Tool Type/Holder Geometry Type and
Displayed Items
Rectangular
A
Holder Geometry Type: Circular Column
Parallelepiped
Holder
Holder
Displayed item Tool Type:

Face Mill Tool
Boring Tool
* Applies only to Tool types other than those
* Applies only to
part information shown left
part information
(holder part) 1
(holder part) 1
Manufacturer Name ○ ○ ○ ○
Holder Model ○ ○ ○ ○
Number
Holder Geometry ○ ○ ○ ○
Type
Cutting Angle ○ × ○(*) ○(*)
Shank Width × × × ○(*)
Shank Height × × × ○(*)
Function Height × × ○(*) ○(*)
Total Length ○ ○ ○(*) ○(*)
Function Width ○ × ○(*) ○(*)
Function Length ○ × ○(*) ○(*)
Head Length × × ○(*) ○(*)
Part Diameter ○ ○ ○(*) ×
615
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Rectangular
Holder Geometry Type: Circular Column
Parallelepiped
Holder
Holder
Displayed item Tool Type:

Face Mill Tool
1 Boring Tool
* Applies only to
* Applies only to
part information
Tool types other than those
shown left
part information
(holder part) 1
(holder part) 1
2 Shank Diameter ○ ○ ○(*) ×
Machining Diameter ○ ○ ○(*) ×
3 Max. Machining
Diameter
○ ○ ○(*) ×
Contact Surface × × ○(*) ×

4 Diameter (Machine)
Contact Surface × × ○(*) ×
Diameter
5 (Workpiece)
Max. Cut Depth × ○ × ×
Max. Cutting Width × ○ × ×
6 Min. Cutting Width × ○ × ×
Cutting Width × ○ × ×
A Comment ○ ○ ○ ○
* Displayed when the holder geometry type is selected.
A.3.3 Offset Number Set for Each Tool

A.3.3
The following table shows the offset number types and settings for the data of the
registered tool.
 When tool management is enabled

Table A.3.3 (a) Offset Number and Type of Tool Data (When Tool Management Is
Enabled)
Offset number Setting
type
H Tool Length Offset Number (for machining center systems only)
D Tool Diameter Offset Number (for machining center systems only)
TG Tool Geometry Offset Number (for lathe systems only)
TW Tool Wear Offset Number (for lathe systems only)
616
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
 When tool life management is enabled

Table A.3.3 (b) Offset Number and Type of Tool Data (When Tool Life
Management Is Enabled)
type 1
H Tool Length Offset Number (for machining center systems only)
D Tool Diameter Offset Number (for machining center systems and
lathe systems (when tool change method is ATC = 1)) 2
OFS Tool Compensation Number (for lathe systems only (when tool
change method is turret turn))
3

• When a lathe system is used and the tool change method is by turret
turn, the number of digits that can be set for [Tool Number (T Code)] 4
and [Tool Compensation Number] will vary according to the parameter
MEMO
value.
5
 When tool management function and tool life management function

6
option are both disabled
Table A.3.3 (c) Offset Number and Type of Tool Data (When Tool Management A
Function and Tool Life Management Function Option Are Both Disabled)
type
OFS Tool Offset Number
A.3.4 About Reflecting Tool Catalog Data into the NC Tool

Database
A.3.4
You can reflect the dimension data and cutting conditions in the tool catalog data
into the NC tool database. The following table shows the correspondence
between source and destination data when data is reflected.
Table A.3.4 Correspondence between Source and Destination Data when Data is
Reflected
Destination:
Source:
Tool Type Item name of tool NC
Item name of tool catalog data
data
Tool Catalog No. Catalog No.
Tool Tool Name Tool Name
Tool Tool Type Tool Type
Tool Tool Image Tool Image
617
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Destination:
Source:
data
Tool Comment Comment
1 Tool
Tool Part
Flutes
Tool Model Number
Flutes
Tool Model Number
Tool Part Tool parts image Tool parts image
2 Tool Part Insert Geometry Type
(*1)
3 Holder Part
Holder Part
Holder Model Number
Holder Image
Holder Model Number
Holder Image
Holder Part Holder Geometry Type
4 General Tool Holder Part
(*1)
Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
5 Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*2) Tip Width
Tool Part Tip Thickness Tip Thickness
6 Threading Tool Tool Part

Tool Part
Nose Angle
Cut Edge Length (*2)
Nose Angle
Tip Width
A Grooving Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*2) Tip Width
Tool Part Cut Edge Length Tip Length
Button Turning Tool Part Inscribed Circle Tip Length
Tool Diameter
Tool Part Inscribed Circle Tip Width
Diameter
Point Corner Holder Part Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
Straight Tool Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*2) Tip Width
Versatile Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*2) Tip Width
Tool Part Cut Edge Length Tip Length
Drilling Tool Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
Tool Part Available Length Tip Length
Tool Part Machining Diameter Radius
Chamfering Tool Tool Part Machining Diameter Cutter Diameter
Tool Part Max. Cut Depth/ Cutter Length
Available Length
618
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Destination:
Source:
data
Flat End Mill Tool Tool Part Max. Cut Depth/Min. Tip Length
Tool Part
Cut Width
Machining Diameter Radius
1
Ball End Mill Tool Part Max. Cut Depth/Min. Tip Length
Tool
Tool Part
Cut Width
Machining Diameter Radius
2
Tap Tool Tool Part Screw Part Length Tip Length
Tool Part Screw Part Diameter Radius 3
Reamer Tool Tool Part Function Length Tip Length
Boring Tool
Tool Part
Holder Part
Machining Diameter
Total Length
Radius
Tip Length
4
Holder Part Function Width Radius
Face Mill Tool Holder Part Max. Cut Depth/Max. Tip Length 5
Cutting Width/Min.
Cutting Width/Cutting
Width/Function Length 6
Holder Part Machining Diameter Radius
(*1) This is displayed because this is not a reference item when data is reflected but
triggers the display of a dimension data item.
A
This may not be displayed depending on the tool type.
(*2) When the insert geometry type is a parallelogram or rectangle, the display item "Tip
Width" will be referenced.
• To set the tool type, dimension, or geometry information, the tool

compensation number must be set for the destination NC tool data.
 • To reflect [Spindle Speed (S)] and [Feedrate (F)], the tool
management function option is required.
MEMO
• The function length of the holder part dimension data of a face mill tool
can be reflected to the NC tool database.
A.3.5 About the Tool Information Used in the Machine Col-

lision Avoidance Function
A.3.5
The tool information used in TOOL MANAGER can be output in TLS file format
that can be used in link with the machine collision avoidance function. Output of
tool information is possible when the machine collision avoidance function is
enabled. Table A.3.5 shows information on whether reference of information or
input of data is required or not when a TLS file is output.
619
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
Table A.3.5 (a) Input Required Item List 1

No. Referenced data Setting required (required: ○, optional: , not required: ×)
Tools using insert Other tools
Insert Geometry Type
1
Triangular Hexagon
Tool catalog data
Parallelogram
2
Ball End Mill

NC tool data
Flat End Mill

Chamfering
Rectangle
Rhombus
Pentagon
Hexagon
Octagon
Triangle
Reamer
Drilling
Square
Circle
3
Tap
1 Tool ○
Number
4 (T Code)
2 Tool 
5 Name
3 Tool Model 
Number
6 4 Flutes ○
5 Comment 
A 6 Insert
Geometry
○ ×
Type
7 Cut Edge ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Length (*)
8 Tip Width × ○ × × × × × × × ○ × × × × × ×
9 Tip ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Thickness
10 Max. Cut ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
Depth
11 Nose ○ ○ × × × × × × × × × ○ × × × ×
Angle
12 Total × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Length
13 Protrudin × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
g Length
14 Corner R ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
15 Inscribed ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × × ×
Circle
Diameter (*)
16 Contact × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Surface
Diameter
620
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
No. Referenced data Setting required (required: ○, optional: , not required: ×)

Tools using insert Other tools
Insert Geometry Type
Triangular Hexagon
1
Tool catalog data
Parallelogram
Ball End Mill

Flat End Mill
NC tool data
Chamfering
2
Rectangle
Rhombus
Pentagon
Hexagon
Octagon
Triangle
Reamer
Drilling
Square
Circle
Tap
17 Screw Part × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × × 3
Diameter
18 Thread Part × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ×
Inner 4
Diameter
19 Screw × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ×
Thread 5
Pitch
20 Screw × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ×
Part 6
Length
21 Neck × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ×
Diameter A
22 Available × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
Length
23 Tip × × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ×
Diameter
24 Chamferi × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × × ×
ng Height
25 Cutting × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Angle
26 Machining × × × × × × × × × × ○ × ○ × × ×
Diameter
27 Main ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × × × × ×
Clearanc
e Angle
28 Min. × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
Cutting
Width
29 Function × × × × × × × × × × × × ○ × × ×
Length
30 Taper × × × × × × × × × × ○ × × × × ×
Angle
621
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
• "Tool using insert" refers to General Tool, Threading Tool, Grooving

Tool, Button Turning Tool, Straight Tool, Versatile Tool, Boring Tool,
and Face Mill Tool.
1 • For the [Nose Angle] input value for the drilling tool, enter the "tip
angle" provided in the tool catalog.
 • (*) Input is only required when "inch" is set on the NC side or for a
"Circle". [Cut Edge Length] must be entered for both "mm" and "inch"
2 MEMO
since there is no "Inscribed Circle Diameter" in parallelogram and
rectangle parts.
• For Chamfering Tool, Drilling Tool, Ball End Mill Tool, and Flat End Mill
3 Tool, you must enter at least one of [Max. Cut Depth], [Available
Length], or [Min. Cutting Width].
4 Table A.3.5 (b) Input Required Item List 2

No. Referenced data Setting required
5 (required: ○, optional: , not
required: x)
Holder Geometry Type
6 Tool catalog data Rectangular Circular Column
Parallelepiped
A 1 Holder Model
Number
○ ○
2 Holder Geometry ○ ○
Type
3 Shank Width ○ ×
4 Total Length ○ ○
5 Shank Height ○ ×
6 Part Diameter × ○
7 Machining Diameter × ○
8 Max. Machining × ○
Diameter
9 Max. Cut Depth × ×
10 Cutting Angle × ×
11 Function Height ○ ×
12 Function Width × ×
13 Head Length × ×
14 Function Length × ×
15 Ejection Length × ×
16 Shank Diameter × ○
17 Contact Surface × ×
Diameter
Diameter (Machine)
622
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
No. Referenced data Setting required

(required: ○, optional: , not
required: x)
Holder Geometry Type
Tool catalog data Rectangular Circular Column
Parallelepiped
1
Diameter
(Workpiece)
2
• For "Rectangular Parallelepiped", either [Shank Height] or [Function

3
 Height] data must be set.
• For "Circular Column", one of [Part Diameter], [Machining Diameter],
MEMO
[Max. Machining Diameter], or [Shank Diameter] data must be set. 4
A.3.6 Data That Can Be Imported as Tool Catalog Data

5
A.3.6
You can import tool data that was output from MachiningCloud App. From the tool
data that can be obtained with MachiningCloud App, you can import tool data that 6
includes the following tool type parameters (mcType). (You cannot import tool data
if any tool type parameter not listed in the table below is set or no tool type
parameter is set.) A
Table A.3.6 Tool Data That Can Be Imported
mcType Tool type set in tool Part where
(Tool type parameter of Machining catalog database data is
Cloud) imported
Part
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_SQUARE_ General Tool (*) Holder Part
SHANK Button Turning Tool (*)
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_EXTERNAL
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_THREADIN Threading Tool Holder Part
G
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_EXTERNAL_T
HREADING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_INTERNAL_T
HREADING
TURN_HOLDER_AXIAL_GROOVING Grooving Tool Holder Part
TURN_HOLDER_OD_GROOVING_PARTI
NG
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_AXIAL_GROO
VING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_ID_GROOVIN
G
623
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Cloud) imported
Part
1 TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_OD_GROOVI
NG_PARTING
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_SQUARE_ Button Turning Tool Holder Part
2 SHANK
DRILL_INDEX_TWIST Drilling Tool Tool Part
3 DRILL_INDEX_TWIST_BLADES
DRILL_SOLID_CENTER_A
4 DRILL_SOLID_CENTER_B
DRILL_SOLID_CENTER_R
DRILL_SOLID_CHAMFER
5 DRILL_SOLID_CORE
DRILL_SOLID_DEEP_HOLE
6 DRILL_SOLID_SPOT
DRILL_SOLID_STEP
DRILL_SOLID_TWIST
A DRILL_INDEX_ADJUST_STEP Chamfering Tool Tool Part
DRILL_INDEX_BELL_CSINK
DRILL_INDEX_CBORE
DRILL_INDEX_CHAMFER
DRILL_INDEX_CHAMFER_BLADES
DRILL_INDEX_CORE
DRILL_INDEX_DEEP_HOLE
DRILL_INDEX_DEEP_HOLE_BLADES
DRILL_INDEX_FACE_CSINK
DRILL_INDEX_REV_CSINK
DRILL_INDEX_STEP
DRILL_INDEX_STEP_BLADES
DRILL_INDEX_STEP_CSINK
DRILL_INDEX_TREPANNING
DRILL_SOLID_CBORE
DRILL_SOLID_SHELL_CBORE
DRILL_SOLID_SHELL_CORE
DRILL_SOLID_SHELL_STEP_CSUNK
DRILL_SOLID_SHELL_TAPERED_CSUN
K
DRILL_SOLID_STEP_CSUNK
624
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Cloud) imported
Part
DRILL_SOLID_TAPERED_CSUNK
MILL_SEM_CHAMFER
1
MILL_SEM_CORNER
MILL_SEM_STYLUS 2
MILL_SEM_THREAD_DRILL
MILL_SEM_TSLOT
MILL_SEM_VGROOVE
3
MILL_SOLID_ANGULAR_PROFILE
MILL_SEM_CENTER_CUT Flat End Mill Tool Tool Part 4
MILL_SEM_DOVETAIL
MILL_SEM_FACE
MILL_SEM_NON_CENTER_CUT
5
MILL_SEM_THREAD
MILL_SOLID_ANGULAR_MILL 6
MILL_SOLID_THREAD
MILL_INDEX_DIE Ball End Mill Tool Tool Part
MILL_SEM_BALL
A
MILL_SEM_DIE
TAP_SOLID_CONICAL_FORMING_OFFS Face Mill Tool Tool Part
ET
TAP_SOLID_CONICAL_FORMING_REIN
FORCED
TAP_SOLID_FORMING_OFFSET
TAP_SOLID_FORMING_REINFORCED
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_CONICAL_CHI
P_FLUTE_ OFFSET
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_CONICAL_CHI
P_FLUTE_ REINFORCED
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_SPIRAL_FLUT
E_OFFSET
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_SPIRAL_FLUT
E_REINFORCED
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_SPIRAL_POINT
_OFFSET
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_SPIRAL_POINT
_ REINFORCED
TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_STRAIGHT_FL
UTE_OFFSET
625
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Cloud) imported
Part
1 TAP_SOLID_SCREWING_STRAIGHT_FL
UTE_REINFORCED
REAMER_INDEX_BELL
2 REAMER_INDEX_CYLINDRICAL
REAMER_INDEX_SHELL
REAMER_INDEX_STEPPED
3 REAMER_INDEX_TAPERED
REAMER_SOLID_BELL
4 REAMER_SOLID_CYLINDRICAL
REAMER_SOLID_SHELL
REAMER_SOLID_STEPPED
5 REAMER_SOLID_TAPERED
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_BORING_B
6 AR
TURN_HOLDER_INTERNAL_BORING_B
AR_ GROOVING
A TURN_HOLDER_INTERNAL_BORING_B
AR_ THREADING
TURN_HOLDER_PULL_BACK_BORING_
BAR
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_INTERNAL
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_NEUTRAL_O
D
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_PULL_BACK
MILL_INDEX_ANGULAR_BALL_NOSE
MILL_INDEX_ANGULAR_NON_CENTER_
MULTI_ ROWS
MILL_INDEX_BELL
MILL_INDEX_CENTER_CUT_MULTI_RO
WS
MILL_INDEX_CHAMFER
MILL_INDEX_DOVETAIL
MILL_INDEX_FACE_MILL
MILL_INDEX_FULL_SIDE_ANGULAR
MILL_INDEX_FULL_SLOT
MILL_INDEX_FULL_SLOT_PROFILE
MILL_INDEX_GROOVING
MILL_INDEX_HALF_SLOT
626
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Cloud) imported
Part
MILL_INDEX_NON_CENTER_CUT_MULT
I_ROWS 1
MILL_INDEX_NON_CENTER_CUT_SING
LE_ROW
MILL_INDEX_PLAIN_MILL
2
MILL_INDEX_ROUND_END_MILL
MILL_INDEX_SAW_BLADE 3
MILL_INDEX_SHELL_MILL
MILL_INDEX_SHOULDER
MILL_INDEX_SHOULDER_MULTI_ROWS
4
MILL_INDEX_SPOT_FACE
MILL_INDEX_STRAIGHT_BALL_NOSE 5
MILL_INDEX_THREADING
MILL_INDEX_TSLOT
MILL_INDEX_VGROOVE
6
MILL_SOLID_CONCAVE_PROFILE
MILL_SOLID_CONVEX_PROFILE A
MILL_SOLID_CORNER_ROUNDING
MILL_SOLID_FLAT_SLOT
MILL_SOLID_GROOVING
MILL_SOLID_PLAIN_MILL
MILL_SOLID_POINT_SLOT
MILL_SOLID_SAWING_BLADE
MILL_SOLID_SHELL_MILL
MILL_SOLID_SLOTTING
INSERT_HEXAGONAL Tool Part
(insert)
INSERT_OCTOGONAL
INSERT_PENTAGONAL
INSERT_RECTANGULAR
INSERT_RHOMBIC
INSERT_RHOMBOIDAL
INSERT_SQUARE
INSERT_TRIANGLE
INSERT_TRIGON
INSERT_ROUND
ADAPTER_CONVERTER_ROTATED Holder Part
627
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Cloud) imported
Part
1 ADAPTER_CONVERTER_STATIONARY
ADAPTER_EXTENDER
ADAPTER_REDUCER_PRIMARY
2 ADAPTER_REDUCER_REVERSE
COLLET_DOUBLE_ANGLE
3 TURN_HOLDER_AXIAL_GROOVING
TURN_HOLDER_BORING_BAR_AXIAL_
GROOVING
4 TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_BORING_B
AR
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_SQUARE_
5 SHANK
TURN_HOLDER_EXTERNAL_THREADIN
G
6 TURN_HOLDER_INTERNAL_BORING_B
AR_ GROOVING
TURN_HOLDER_INTERNAL_BORING_B
A AR_ THREADING
TURN_HOLDER_OD_GROOVING_PARTI
NG
TURN_HOLDER_PULL_BACK_BORING_
BAR
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_AXIAL_GROO
VING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_EXTERNAL_T
HREADING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_ID_GROOVIN
G
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_INTERNAL
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_INTERNAL_T
HREADING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_NEUTRAL_O
D
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_OD_GROOVI
NG_PARTING
TURN_HOLDER_SYSTEM_PULL_BACK
(*) When the "Insert Geometry Type" is a "Circle" (INSERT_ROUND), the tool will
be identified as a "Button Turning Tool"; otherwise it will be identified as a "General
Tool".
628
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
• MachiningCloud and MachiningCloud App are registered trademarks

 of MachiningCloud GmbH.
• Data from the old version of the tool catalog database cannot be
MEMO
imported.
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
629
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
A.4
A.4 LIVE UPDATE

Using the live update function, the system administrator of the environment using
1 CNC can update the iHMI software according to a simplified procedure.
2 A.4.1 Overview of Live Update Function

A.4.1
The following shows the overview of live update function.

3
iHMI software
4 (latest version)
iHMI disk
5
Local network
6
A Alternate
server
CNC
Fig. A.4.1 Configuration of Live Update Function
<1> Acquire the latest software from the iHMI disk.

<2> CNC performs update using the latest software located in the iHMI software
distribution server (alternate server).
 Alternate server (performed by administrator)

Prepare a folder (update file storage location) that allows FTP connection with
CNC.
Copy the latest software from the iHMI disk to the update file storage location.
 CNC (performed by administrator)
Configure the alternate server connection settings and live update software initial
settings.
630
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
A.4.1.1 CNC update flow

The following shows the CNC update flow.
A.4.1.1
 Initial CNC environment settings
2. 1. Settings related to live update 1

Connection
check iHMI 2
Alternate 3
server
CNC
Fig. A.4.1.1 (a) CNC Update (Initial Environment Settings)

4
 From checking the latest software to updating iHMI 5

6
Alternate server
4. Download latest software

A
1. Check
latest 5. Decompress file (PANEL iH Pro)
software
DRAM 5.
CF card Decompress
USB flash file
drive (PANEL iH
7. Update iHMI Pro)
6. Save data
CNC
Storage Card2 (PANEL iH)
C/D drive (PANEL iH Pro)
2. Notification 8. Restore data
iHMI
3. Start update
Fig. A.4.1.1 (b) CNC Update (From Checking the Latest Software to Updating
iHMI)
The live update execution file is placed in the following location.
631
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
Table A.4.1.1 (a) Folder to Contain Execution File

Item Device Description
Execution file name Common LiveUpdate.exe
PANEL iH \Storage Card\FANUC\iHMI\LiveUpdate
1 PANEL iH Pro C:\Program Files
(x86)\FANUC\iHMI\LiveUpdate
2 The following table shows the setting values related to live update. These values
can be checked/changed via the Settings screen.
3
Table A.4.1.1 (b) List of Items Settable from Settings Screen
4 Screen
name
Setting item Setting value Initial
value
Setting range/limit
[Update [Enable Update ON or OFF Disable Either ON or OFF

5 Check] Check] (OFF)
Update Time 00:00 00:00 to 23:59

6 [Server
check time
IP address
Format: HH:MM
Server IP address
* Numerical value only
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Settings] Format: * Numerical value only
A xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Used port Port number to 21 0 to 65535
use * Numerical value only
Connected user User name for (Blank) One-byte alphanumerical
name server connection characters or symbols
* Up to 64 characters
* Multibyte characters
prohibited
Connection Server connection (Blank) One-byte alphanumerical
password password characters or symbols
* Up to 64 characters
prohibited
Update file File storage (Blank) One-byte alphanumerical
storage location location in the characters or symbols
server * Up to 256 characters
prohibited
The setting values are saved in the following file.
Table A.4.1.1 (c) Folder to Contain Setting File

Item Device File path
File name Common LiveUpdateSetting.ini
LiveUpdateSubSetting.ini
632
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
Item Device File path

PANEL iH \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\LiveUpdate
PANEL iH Pro (SSD D:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\LiveUpdate
equipped version)
PANEL iH Pro (HDD
equipped version)
C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\LiveUpdate 1
2
A.4.2 Checking and Downloading Update Software
A.4.2
FTP is used as a communication protocol between the alternate server and CNC.
3
 Successful access to the alternate server
When update check is enabled by the setting, update check is performed
automatically at the specified time.
4
Pressing the [Check Now] soft key in the Update Check screen also performs
update check regardless of the update check setting. If you press the [Check Now]
soft key when update check is already in progress, an error message appears.
5
The following data are referenced as the version information to be used for update
check.
6
Table A.4.2 Version Information File
Location OS Referenced data
A
Alternate server Windows [Location specified as update file storage
location]
\LiveUpdateSummary.txt
Linux [Location specified as update file storage
location]
\LiveUpdateSummary.txt
CNC PANEL iH \Storage
Card2¥FANUC\iHMI\SYSTEM\iHMI_ver.txt
PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\SYSTEM\iHMI_ver.txt
(SSD equipped
version)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData¥FANUC\iHMI\SYSTEM\iHMI_v
(HDD equipped er.txt
version)
 • When a new version is released, an update notification is displayed on

the Information Center screen.
MEMO
633
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
 Unsuccessful access to the alternate server

Connection is retried for up to three times.
When the retries fail, a connection failure notification is displayed on the
Information Center screen.
If you press the [Check Now] soft key in the Update Check screen, connection is
1 not retried.
First time
2 First retry
Second retry
3
Alternate Third retry
server
4 CNC
Notification from
5 Information Center
Fig. A.4.2 Flow of Unsuccessful Access to the Alternate Server
6
 • If the alternate server cannot be accessed due to power-off of the
computer, connection retry will not be performed when iHMI is started
A MEMO after restoration of the power.
A.4.2.1 Downloading latest software

Press the [Software Update] soft key in the latest software check results screen or
A.4.2.1
press the [Software Update] on the Information Center screen to check the free
space in the update destination and download the latest software.
By inserting a CF card or USB flash drive that contains the downloaded or
unzipped latest software in advance, you can skip steps to check the free space in
the unzip location and download the latest software.
If you press the [Software Update] soft key on the Information Center screen when
update check is already in progress, an error message appears.
 Free space check

Before downloading the latest software, the free space in the update destination is
checked to see if the subsequent update process can be executed without
problem.
If the free space is not enough, a dialog box for specifying the device to use and
folder will be displayed.
634
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
 Check target
Table A.4.2.1 (a) Free Space Check Target (PANEL iH)
Check area type Check target folder Folder selected in free
space shortage
Latest software Storage Card2 (*1) Cannot be selected. 1
update destination (Only an error dialog box
is output.)
Latest software Storage Card3 (CF card) or Storage Card3 2
decompression Hard Disk (USB flash drive)(*2) Hard Disk
destination
Data backup Storage Card2 Storage Card2 3
destination Storage Card3
Hard Disk
(*1)Storage Card is included in the latest software update destination, but the free 4
space is not checked since the disk usage does not change before and after per-
forming update.
(*2)Hard Disk is checked on a high priority. If Hard Disk is not inserted, Storage Card3
5
is checked.
Table A.4.2.1 (b) Free Space Check Target (PANEL iH Pro) 6

Check Check target Folder selected in free
area type
Latest software C drive (SYSTEM and DATA areas for
space shortage
Cannot be selected.
A
update destination HDD) (Only an error dialog box
C drive (SYSTEM area for SSD) is output.)
D drive (DATA area for SSD)
Latest software C drive (HDD) Folders under D drive
decompression D drive (SSD) (Common to HDD and
destination SSD)
Data backup C drive (HDD)
destination D drive (SSD)
• If you select a CF card or USB flash drive for the location where the
 latest software is unzipped, the root directory is selected. A directory

under the root directory cannot be selected.
MEMO • In PANEL iH, the same directory cannot be selected for the latest
software unzip location and data backup destination.
 Checking method
• Latest software update destination
The summary files (*) corresponding to the versions before and after update are
referenced, and the increment in the capacity after update is calculated from the
specified SYSTEM/DATA area usage to check if a free space of the same size
exists in the check target folder.
635
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
* For the summary file corresponding to the version before update, the file
downloaded at the last update is stored and used automatically (no need to
store it in the alternate server).
1 • Latest software decompression destination

The summary file corresponding to the version after update is referenced, and the
system checks if a free space having the same size as the specified latest
2 software usage after decompression exists in the check target folder.
• Data backup destination

3 The DATA area size of CNC is measured to see if a free space of the same size
exists in the check target folder.
4  Download
After checking the free spaces, the latest software is downloaded from the
5 alternate server to CNC.
If the latest software has already been downloaded to the CF card or USB flash
drive, this download is not performed.
6
Table A.4.2.1 (c) Download File Location
A Location
Alternate
Device
Windows
File location
[Location specified as update file storage location]\WES.zip
server [Location specified as update file storage location]\WEC.zip
Linux [Location specified as update file storage location]/WES.zip
[Location specified as update file storage location]/WEC.zip
CNC PANEL iH DRAM
PANEL iH Pro DRAM
 • If the latest software having the same name already exists in the file
location, download will be executed and the file will be replaced.
MEMO
When file download is completed normally, the latest software will be

decompressed.
Table A.4.2.1 (d) Latest software decompression location

Device Latest software decompression location
PANEL iH Storage Card3 (fixed)
PANEL iH Pro Location specified at the start of download
* Initial values are as follows:
C drive (HDD)
D drive (SSD)
636
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
A.4.3 Updating Software

A.4.3
Execute iHMI update according to the procedure suitable for each indicator:
PANEL iH or PANEL iH Pro.
Data backup is performed using the batch backup function.
The following shows the update flow.
1
 For PANEL iH
Table A.4.3 (a) PANEL iH Update Flow (Version earlier than 19.0) 2
No. Operation Auto/ Note
manual 3
1 Start update. Manual Press the [OK] soft key on the update
start screen.
2 Save data (batch backup Auto 4
function used).
3 Restart CNC. Manual Update is performed from the compact
flash card (Storage Card3). 5
4 Installer executes the update Auto
process.
5 After CNC power off, remove Manual
6
the compact flash card.
6
7
Restart CNC.
Restore data (batch backup
Manual
Auto
A
function used).
8 Update the summary file in the Auto
archive.
9 Delete temporary files. Auto
• Summary file
• Backup data
10 Start iHMI. Auto
Table A.4.3 (b) PANEL iH Update Flow (Version 19.0 or later)

manual
1 Start update. Manual Press the [OK] soft key on the update
start screen.
2 Save data (batch backup Auto
function used).
3 Start iHMI installer (PANEL iH Auto
version).
4 Restart CNC. Manual You do not need to remove the CF
card/USB flash drive.
5 Restore data (batch backup Auto
function used).
637
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE

manual
archive.
1 7 Delete temporary files.

• Summary file
Auto
• Backup data
2 8 Display the update completion

dialog.
Manual Remove the CF card/USB flash drive.
9 Start iHMI. Auto

3
 For PANEL iH Pro
4 Table A.4.3 (c) PANEL iH Pro Update Flow
5 1 Start update.
manual
Manual Press the [OK] soft key on the
update start screen.
6 2 Check the write protection

status.
Auto
3(*) Restart Windows without write Auto

A protection set.
4(*) Start iHMI. Manual This is not necessary when iHMI
start is registered in NCBOOT32
startup.
5 Save data (batch backup Auto
function used).
6 Start iHMI installer. Auto
7 Execute Add\Update.exe. Auto NCBOOT32, hardware monitor, etc.
are terminated.
8 Start NCBOOT32 and Auto
hardware monitor.
9 Restore data (batch backup Auto
function used).
archive.
11 Delete temporary files. Auto
• Summary file
• Decompressed file
• Backup data
12 Restart Windows with write Auto
(*) protection set.
13 Start iHMI. Auto/ Auto for no write protection
manual This is not necessary when iHMI
start is registered in NCBOOT32
startup.
638
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.4 LIVE UPDATE
(*) Execute only when the disk is write protected by the EWF.
• Additional operations when the disk is write protected

In PANEL iH Pro, if the disk is write protected by the Enhanced Write
Filter (EWF) function, change the write protection status. At this time,
you need to restart Windows. 1
When update starts, a message appears in the dialog box to indicate
that the disk is write protected. When you press the [OK] button in the
 dialog box, the disk becomes write unprotected, and Windows is 2
restarted. After Windows is restarted, start iHMI (No. 3 and 4 in Table
MEMO
A.4.3 (b)).
When update is completed, a message appears in the dialog box to
enable write protection. When you press the [OK] button in the dialog
3
box, the disk becomes write protected, and Windows is restarted.
After Windows is restarted, start iHMI (No. 12 and 13 in Table A.4.3
(b)). 4
5
6
A
639
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.5 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CNC DEVICES AND iHMI SOFTWARE
A.5
A.5 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN CNC

DEVICES AND iHMI SOFTWARE
1 The iHMI does not start if it is used with iHMI software that is not compatible with
the target CNC device.
2 • If iHMI software that is not compatible with the CNC device connected to the
indicator is installed
• If a CNC device that is not compatible with the installed iHMI software is
3 connected to the indicator
4 The table below shows whether the iHMI can start or not depending on the
combination of a CNC device and iHMI software.
5 Table A.5 Correspondence between CNC Devices and iHMI Software

CNC Whether iHMI can start
device
6 30i-B
iHMI software: For 30i/31i/32i-B
○
iHMI software: For 0i-F Plus
×
31i-B ○ ×
A 31i-B5 ○ ×
32i-B ○ ×
0i-F Plus × ○
○: Can start
×: Cannot start
640
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.6 CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR TRADITIONAL CHINESE ZHURIN SYMBOLS
A.6
A.6 CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR

TRADITIONAL CHINESE ZHURIN
SYMBOLS 1
This section shows a correspondence table between Zhuyin symbols used to
input Traditional Chinese and MDI key characters. 2
 Assigning Zhuyin symbols to a QWERTY keyboard 3
Table A.6 (a) Correspondence Between Traditional Chinese Zhurin Symbols and
MDI Keys (QWERTY Keyboard)
Keyboard letter Zhuyin symbols Keyboard letter Zhuyin symbols
4
Shift Shift Shift Shift
Q ! ㄆ X ^ ㄌ 5
W @ ㄊ C < ㄏ
E
R
#
$
ㄍ
ㄐ
V
B
>
/
ㄒ
ㄖㄥ
6
T % ㄔ N ? ㄙ
Y & ㄗ M ㄩ A
U * ㄧ 7 HOME ˙
I ( ㄛ 8 ㄚ
O ) ㄟ 9 ㄞ
P \ ㄣ 4 ˋ
A ` ㄇ 5 ㄓ
S ~ ㄋ 6 ˊ
D _ ㄎ 1 END ㄅ
F ; ㄑㄤ 2 { ㄉ
G : ㄕ 3 } ˇ
H " ㄘ - + ㄦ
J ' ㄨ 0 = ㄢ
K [ ㄜ . , ㄡㄝ
L ] ㄠ EOB ㄤ
Z | ㄈ
641
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
 Assigning Zhuyin symbols to an M series ONGP keyboard

Table A.6 (b) Correspondence Between Traditional Chinese Zhurin Symbols and
MDI Keys (M Series ONGP Keyboard)
1 Shift Shift Shift Shift
O ( ㄟ D ] ㄎ
2 N ) ㄙ H & ㄘ
G E ㄕㄍ B % ㄖ
P C ㄣㄏ 7 HOME ˙
3 X U ㄌㄧ 8 ; ㄚㄤ
Y V ㄗㄒ 9 : ㄞ
4 Z W ㄈㄊ 4 " ˋ
Q ? ㄆ 5 ' ㄓ
I , ㄛㄝ 6 | ˊ
5 J A ㄨㄇ 1 END ㄅ
K @ ㄜ 2 { ㄉ
6 R
M
_
#
ㄐ
ㄩ
3
-
}
^ ㄦ
ˇ
S = ㄋ 0 < ㄢ
A T * ㄔ . > ㄡ
L + ㄠ／ ` ㄥ
F [ ㄑ EOB ㄤ
642
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
 Assigning Zhuyin symbols to a T series ONGP keyboard

Table A.6 (c) Correspondence Between Traditional Chinese Zhurin Symbols and
MDI Keys (T Series ONGP Keyboard)
Shift Shift Shift Shift 1
O ( ㄟ K ] ㄜ
N ) ㄙ R & ㄐ
2
G E ㄕㄍ F % ㄑ
P Q ㄣㄆ 7 HOME ˙
X A ㄌㄇ 8 ; ㄚㄤ 3
Z B ㄈㄖ 9 : ㄞ
C D ㄏㄎ 4 " ˋ
4
Y ? ㄗ 5 ' ㄓ
U , ㄧㄝ 6 | ˊ
W J ㄊㄨ 1 END ㄅ 5
H @ ㄘ 2 { ㄉ
V
M
_
#
ㄒ
ㄩ
3
-
}
^ ㄦ
ˇ
6
S = ㄋ 0 < ㄢ
T * ㄔ . > ㄡ A
L + ㄠ／ ` ㄥ
I [ ㄛ EOB ㄤ
643
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
A.7 ITEMS DISPLAYED IN "OPERATION HISTORY"
A.7
A.7 ITEMS DISPLAYED IN "OPERATION

HISTORY"
1 The IDs and meanings (names) of items displayed in "Operation History" are
shown in the table below:
2 Tool Manager function

Table A.7 (a) List of IDs and Names of UI Parts in the Tool Manager Function
3 ID of UI part Name of UI part
Main Table Table display screen
4 Tool Status Tool Status

Magazine Management Magazine Management
Total Life Data Total Life Data
5 Select Import/Export Item Select Import/Export Item
Indiviual Tool Settings Individual Tool Settings
6 Catalog Data Catalog Data

Search Search
Filter Filter
A Edit End Edit
Input Operation Memo Input Operation Memo
Detailed Life Data Detailed Life Data
Add Group Add Group
Add Tool Add Tool
Life Type Check Life Type Check
Check Check
Add Tool(Catalog) Add Tool
Import Data Wizard Import Data Wizard
Group State Group State
Search(Catalog ) Search
Machine Collision Avoidance Function Tool Machine Collision Avoidance Function Tool
Data Export Data Export
Sort(Total Life Data) Sort
Search(Total Life Data ) Search
Measurement Data Import Measurement Data Import
Select Image Select Image
Large Tool Geometry Settings Large Tool Geometry
Search(Large Tool Geometry) Search
Import/Export (All/Individual) Tool Data Import/Export (All/Individual) Tool Data
Select Folder Select Folder
644
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 
ID of UI part Name of UI part

Import Edit Import
Import/Export Import/Export
Search(Magazine) Search
Mount Attach 1
Unmount Detach
Move
Confirm Paste Destination
Move
Confirm Paste Destination
2
Input No. Copy (*1)
Paste (*2) 3
Reference Data Reference Data
Life State Reset Life Reset
Magazine/Pot Property Magazine/Pot Properties
4
Search(Magazine/Pot Property ) Search
Data Export(Error Message) Data Export
5
Tool Mount/Unmount History Tool Attach/Detach History
Main Table Table display screen 6
Tool Status Tool Status
Magazine Management
Total Lfe Data
Magazine Management
Total Life Data
A
Select Import/Export Item Select Import/Export Item
Indiviual Tool Settings Individual Tool Settings
Catalog Data Catalog Data
Search Search
Search(Catalog ) Search
Filter Filter
Edit End Edit
Input Operation Memo Input Operation Memo
Detailed Life Data Detailed Life Data
Add Group Add Group
Add Tool Add Tool
Life Type Check Life Type Check
Check Check
Reference Data Reference Data
Add Tool(Catalog) Add Tool
Import Data Wizard(1/4) Data Import Wizard (1/4)
645
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Group State Group State
Data Export Data Export
1 Sort(Total Life Data) Sort
Search(Total Life Data) Search
Measurement Data Import Measurement Data Import
2 Input Operation Memo Input Operation Memo
Large Tool Geometry Settings(Matrix) Large Tool Geometry Settings (Matrix)
3 Large Tool Geometry Settings(Chain) Large Tool Geometry Settings (Chain)
Search(Large Tool Geometry) Search
Import/Export (All/Individual) Tool Data Import/Export (All/Individual) Tool Data
4 Select Folder Select Folder
Import Edit Import
5 Import/Export Import/Export
Search(Magazine) Search
Mount Attach
6 Unmount Detach
Move Move
A Confirm Paste Destination Confirm Paste Destination
Input No. Copy(*1)
Paste(*2)
Life State Reset Life Reset
Magazine/Pot Property Magazine/Pot Properties
Search(Magazine/Pot Property ) Search
Data Export(Error Message) Data Export
Tool Mount/Unmount History Tool Attach/Detach History
(*1)Table display screen
(*2)Catalog data screen
Maintenance Manager function

Table A.7 (b) List of IDs and Names of UI Parts in the Maintenance Manager
Function
Icon Icon style
List List display
Graph Maintenance Information
Item History Maintenance Information
Item Guide Maintenance Information
646
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Complete Maintenance Complete
Select Directory Wizard Import 1/2
Export 1/2
Select Folder Select Folder 1
Select Import/Export Import 2/2
Export 2/2
Date Specification Specify Date 2
Add Item Add item
Edit Item
Select Image
Edit item
Select Icon
3
Select AMP Reset Capacitor Capacity
Setting Mainte Date Next Maintenance Date 4
Delete Date Confirm Delete Item
Select Delete Item
Fail Select Delete Item
Confirm Delete Item
Delete Item Failure
5
Select Directory Generate Preset File
CNC Mismatch Detect Maintenance Item 6
Denied Complete Maintenance Complete
Machine collision avoidance function

A
Table A.7 (c) List of IDs and Names of UI Parts in the Machine Collision Avoidance
Function
Add Blank Shape Add Blank Shape
Add Jig Shape Add Jig Shape
Modify Blank Shape Modify Blank Shape
Modify Jig Shape Modify Jig Shape
Delete Blank Blank List
Delete Jig Jig List
Detail edit window FANUC Machine Collision Avoidance
(By CGTech)(Edit)
Common Setting Machine Collision Avoidance Function
Settings
Machine Configure Machine Setting of Machine Collision
Avoidance Function
Individual Path Machine Setting of Machine Collision
Avoidance Function (Individual Path)
PMC Notification Move Notification with PMC Data (Setting)
Reload Reload 3D Model File (Setting)
Attachment Attachment Replacement (Setting)
647
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

Position Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting
(Setting)
Blank Delivery Blank Delivery (Setting)
1 M/T Mode Change M/T Mode Change (Setting)
Skiving Skiving (Setting)
Model Reset Model Reset (Setting)
2 Switch Check Enable/Disable Check Change (Setting)
Select Storage Select Storage
3
3D interference check function
4 Table A.7 (d) List of Screen (Group) IDs and Screen (Group) Names in the 3D
Interference Check Function
Screen ID/Screen group ID Screen name/Screen group name
5 Main Main screen group
SettingSlide Setting slide
6 CombinationSlide Interference check combination manager

slide screen group
ShapelistSlide Shape no. list slide screen group
A IodataSlide Data import/export slide screen group
ObjectNameSettingWindow Object name window screen group
EditFigureWindow Edit figure window screen group
EditShapeWindow Edit shape window screen group
SelectShapeWindow Select shape window screen group
RotationTranslationWindow Rotational movement window screen group
ParallelTranslationWindow Parallel movement window screen group
ChangeLengthWindow Change length window screen group
InputRectDimensionWindow Rectangular parallelepiped size input
window screen group
InputDiagonalpointWindow Diagonal point input window screen group
InputPointWindow Position input window screen group
FigureReferenceSettingWindow Figure reference setting window screen
group
MoveaxisSettingWindow Moving axis setting window screen group
DisplaySettingWindow Display settings window screen group
ImportFileWindow File import window screen group
ExportFileWindow File export window screen group
SelectExportFileWindow Export file name input window screen group
OverwriteDialogWindow Overwrite confirmation window screen
group
InputCylinderDimensionWindow Cylinder size input window screen group
648
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

DrawSettingWindow Drawing coordinates setting window screen
group
Monitoring Monitoring screen
Modeling Modeling screen 1
CombinationSlide Interference check combination manager
slide 2
ShapelistSlide Shape No. list slide
IodataSlide
ObjectNameSettingWindow
Data import/export slide
Object name window
3
EditFigureWindow Edit figure window
EditShapeWindow Edit shape window 4
SelectShapeWindow Select shape window
RotationTranslationWindow
ParallelTranslationWindow
Rotational movement window
Parallel movement window
5
ChangeLengthWindow Change length window
InputRectDimensionWindow Rectangular parallelepiped size input 6
window
InputDiagonalpointWindow Diagonal point input window
InputPointWindow Position input window
A
FigureReferenceSettingWindow Figure reference setting window
MoveaxisSettingWindow Moving axis setting window
DisplaySettingWindow Display settings window
ImportFileWindow File import window
ExportFileWindow File export window
SelectExportFileWindow Export file name input window
OverwriteDialogWindow Overwrite confirmation window
InputCylinderDimensionWindow Cylinder size input window
SettingDrawCoordWindow Drawing coordinates setting window
CNC operation screen

Table A.7 (e) List of Screen (Group) IDs and Screen (Group) Names in the CNC
Operation Screen
MDI MDI mode screen group
MdiFavoriteRegist Add MDI mode favorite screen group
MdiFavoriteInsert Select MDI mode favorite screen group
MdiFavoriteRename Rename MDI mode favorite screen group
MdiFavoriteImport Import MDI favorite screen group
649
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

MdiFavoriteExport Export MDI favorite screen group
MdiSelectCycle Select MDI mode cycle screen group
MdiInputCycle Input MDI mode cycle screen group
1 MEM MEM mode screen group
Seqnocompstop Sequence no. comparison stop screen
group
2 ClearPluseWindow Machining information window content
group
3 PresetWorkcoordinate
EDIT
Workpiece coordinates preset screen group
EDIT mode screen group
FixedFormUserDef Register fixed sentence user screen group
4 FixedFormImport Import fixed sentence screen group
FixedFormExport Export fixed sentence screen group
5 EDIT
SelectSubprogram
EDIT screen group
Select subprogram screen group
SelectCycleWindow Select cycle screen group
6 InputCycleWindow Input cycle screen group
FreeFigureDrawWindow Free figure base screen group
A FreeFigureCreateWindow
SelectBlankWindow
Save free figure screen group
Select blank screen group
PrgmgrCopy Input copy information screen group
FreeFigureCopyWindow Select copy target/preview copy result
screen group
FreeFigureSelectAreaWindow Select area screen group
SelectAlterFigureWindow Select modified figure screen group
FreeFigureAuxcalcWindow Auxiliary calculation screen group
FreeFigureReuseWindow Reuse screen group
FreeFigureOptionWindow Select area assistance screen group
SelectIntersectionWindow Select intersection window screen group
NcProgramConversionWindow NC program conversion screen group
Calccut Graph comparison screen group
JOG JOG mode screen group
ClearPulseWindow Clear pulse screen group
INC INC mode screen group
HND HND mode screen group
RefDef REF mode screen group
RmtDef RMT mode screen group
SettingSlide Setting slide screen group
SettingWindow Settings screen group
WorkSlide Workpiece coordinates slide screen group
650
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

WorkMeasure Measure screen group
WorkPlusinput + input screen group
PresetRelative Relative coordinates preset screen group
WorkmeasureEndface Workpiece measurement (end face) screen 1
group
WorkmeasureMidpoint Workpiece measurement (midpoint) screen
group 2
WorkmeasureCirclecenter Workpiece measurement (circle center)
ToolOffsetSelect
screen group
Select tool offset screen group
3
ToolSlide Tool slide screen group
ToolSlide Tool slide screen group 4
ToolSlideNoSearchWindow No. search screen group
ToolSlideCounterWindow Input counter screen group
ToolSlidePlusInputWindow + input screen group
5
ToolSlideMeasureWindow Measure screen group
ToolSlideToolchangeWindow Change tool screen group 6
OutputWindow Import tool slide screen group
ToolSlideExportWindow Export tool slide screen group
Prgmgr Program manager slide screen group
A
PrgmgrMkfile Create new screen group
InputProgram Input program screen group
OutputProgram Output program screen group
SelectOutputFile Program output confirmation screen group
PrgmgrSearch Program search support screen group
PrgmgrRegimg Register image screen group
ProgramComment Edit comment screen group
PrgmgrRename Rename screen group
CopyProgram Copy program screen group
OverwriteProgram Overwrite confirmation screen group
CheckCapacity Capacity check screen group
M198 M198 setting screen group
CstmmcrSlide Custom macro slide screen group
CstmmcrSearch Custom macro: Number search/name
search screen group
CstmmcrImport Import custom macro screen group
CstmmcrExport Export custom macro screen group
UtilitySlide Utility slide screen group
Restart Restart program screen group
Restart2 Restart program screen group
651
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

MdiDef MDI mode base screen
MdiFavoriteRegist Add favorite fixed MDI window
MdiFavoriteInsert Select favorite fixed MDI window
1 MdiFavoriteRename Rename favorite fixed MDI window
MdiFavoriteInput Input favorite fixed MDI window
2 MdiFavoriteOutput
MdiSelectCycle
Output favorite fixed MDI window
Select MDI mode cycle window
MdiInputCycle Input MDI mode cycle window
3 MemDebug MEM mode base screen
MemAuto Continuous machining screen
4 MemBgedit
MemMulti
Background edit screen
Multi-path display screen
MemSimulation Machining simulation screen
5 SeqnocompstopWindow Sequence no. stop setting window
MachineInfoWindow Machining information window
6 PresetWorkcoordinate
EditDefault
Workpiece coordinates preset window
EDIT mode base screen
EditSimulation Machining simulation screen
A FixedFormUserDef Register new fixed sentence window
FixedFormInput Input fixed sentence file window
FixedFormOutput Output fixed sentence file window
EditProgramCreate Create new program window
FixedForm Insert fixed sentence window
Mcode M code list window
Replace Replace window
SelectSubprogram Select subprogram window
SelectCycleWindow Select cycle window
InputCycleWindow Input cycle window
FreeFigureDrawWindow Contouring figure base screen
FreeFigureCreateWindow Save contouring program window
SelectBlankWindow Select blank connection candidate window
PrgmgrCopy Input contouring figure copy information
window
FreeFigureCopyWindow Select contouring figure copy target window
FreeFigureAreaSelectWindow Select area window
SelectAlterFigureWindow Select edit target figure window
FreeFigureAuxcalcWindow Auxiliary calculation window
FreeFigureReuseWindow Reuse window
FreeFigureOptionWindow Input free division point window
652
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

SelectIntersectionWindow Select intersection window
NcProgramConversionWindow NC program conversion window
OverwriteNcPrgConversion NC program conversion confirmation
window 1
CompareGraph Graph comparison window
JogDef JOG mode base screen
Jog3D JOG mode 3D manual feed screen
2
ClearPulseWindow Clear pulse window
IncDef INC mode base screen 3
Inc3D INC mode base screen
HndDef HND mode base screen
Hnd3D HND mode 3D manual feed screen
4
RefDef REF mode base screen
RmtDef RMT mode base screen 5
SettingWindow Settings window
WorkSlide Workpiece coordinates slide
6
WorkMeasure Input measurement window
WorkPlusinput + input window A
PresetRelative Relative coordinates preset window
MeasureEndFace Workpiece measurement window (end
face)
MeasureMidpoint Workpiece measurement window
(midpoint)
MeasureCenterOfCircle Workpiece measurement window (circle
center)
ToolOffsetSelect Select tool offset window
ToolSlide Tool slide
ToolSlideNoSearchWindow No. search window
ToolSlideCounterWindow Input counter window
ToolSlidePlusInputWindow + input window
ToolSlideMeasureWindow Measure window
ToolSlideToolchangeWindow Change tool window
ToolSlideInputWindow Input tool slide file window
ToolSlideOutputWindow Output tool slide file window
ProgramList Program manager slide
PrgmgrMkfile Create new program window
InputProgram Input program file window
OutputProgram Output program file window
SelectOutputFile Select program file output window
653
B-64644EN/08
APPENDIX 

PrgmgrSearch Program search window
PrgmgrRegimg Connect image window
EditComment Edit comment window
1 PrgmgrRename Rename program window
CopyProgram Copy program window
2 CopyProgramRename
OverwriteProgram
Display condition 3 copy window
Program overwrite confirmation window
CheckCapacity Device capacity check screen window
3 M198Set M198 setting window
CstmmcrList Custom macro variable list slide
4 NumberSearch
CstmmcrInput
Custom macro variable search window
Custom macro variable file input window
CstmmcrOutput Custom macro variable file output window
5 UtilityList Utility slide
SearchPoint Restart program window
6 RestoreMstb
MoveToPoint
Restore auxiliary function window
Move to restart position window
OverstoreWindow Overstore window
A MovementAxisSettingWindow Moving axis setting window
654
B-64644EN/08
INDEX 1
Numerics Basic Operation in the Tool Individual Settings 2
3D INTERFERENCE CHECK FUNCTION ...... 311 Screen .............................................................. 118
Basic Operation in the Tool Status Screen ...... 134
A Basic Operation of Data Logger ....................... 375 3
About Reflecting Tool Catalog Data into the NC Tool Basic Operations of the Maintenance Information
Database .......................................................... 617 List Screen ....................................................... 403
About Screen Common Information Display ...... 29 Basic Operations of the Maintenance Item 4
About SERVO Viewer slides ............................ 459 Information Screen ........................................... 418
About the Tool Information Used in the Machine Basic Operations of the SERVO Viewer .......... 455
Collision Avoidance Function ........................... 619 Basic Operations of the Settings ...................... 553 5
Adding and Editing the Maintenance Item ....... 428 Basic Operations of the Total Life Data
Adding and setting the maintenance item ........ 428 Screen .............................................................. 170
Adding catalog data (part) ................................ 185 Basic Operations of the Web Browser ............. 544 6
Adding catalog data (tool) ................................ 184 Between <item> and </item> ........................... 606
Adding list of data to be collected .................... 384 Between <maintenanceinfo> and
Adjusting the brightness of the screen [Brightness </maintenanceinfo> .......................................... 606 7
Setting] (for PANEL iH only) ............................ 557
Advanced connection settings ........................... 64 C
Alarms .............................................................. 596 CALENDAR ...................................................... 236 8
APPENDIX ....................................................... 599 Canceling the registered pot management
number ............................................................. 151
APPLICATION COMMON INFORMATION ....... 28
Applications .......................................................... 5
Canceling tool storage information ................... 152 A1
Canceling/changing the setting for catalog data to
Applications Registered with the Home
be referenced ................................................... 199
Screen ................................................................ 39
Attaching a tool onto a pot ............................... 147
Changing multiple properties data settings in the A2
magazine properties screen (list view) ............. 159
Auto saving the waveforms [Auto Save
Changing multiple properties data settings in the pot
Setting] ............................................................. 466
Automatically adjusting the scale [Auto
properties screen (list view) .............................. 169 Z
Changing the display mode [Mode] .................. 464
Scale] ............................................................... 463
Changing the display of life type ...................... 174
B Changing the horizontal axis ............................ 461
BASIC OPERATION .......................................... 15 Changing the properties data settings in the
Basic Operation in the Large Tool Geometry magazine properties screen (divided screen
Settings Screen ................................................ 203 view) ................................................................. 158
Basic Operation in the Magazine Management Changing the settings in the pot properties screen
Screen .............................................................. 140 (divided screen view) ........................................ 168
Basic Operation in the Table Display Screen ..... 86 Changing the vertical axis of the entire
waveform .......................................................... 461
Basic Operation in the Tool Catalog Data
Management Screen ........................................ 179 Changing the vertical axis scale of a selected
waveform .......................................................... 462
i-1
B-64644EN/08
Checking and Downloading Update Software ..633 D

Checking maintenance history data ..................426 Data address formats that can be used in the
Checking on the estimation details screen .......280 <dataaddress1> and <dataaddress2> tags ..... 611
Checking the Estimation Results ......................280 DATA LOGGER ............................................... 372
Data logger screen ........................................... 376
1 Checking the estimation results ........................280
Checking the icon data .....................................138 Data That Can Be Imported as Tool Catalog
Checking the life type (count, time) match ........108 Data .................................................................. 623
2 Clearing latched data ..........................................56 Data types that can be used in the <datatype1> and
<datatype2> tags ............................................. 610
Closing calendar screen ...................................252
Defining Blanks and Jigs .................................. 289
Closing data logger ...........................................377
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE,
3 Closing manual list screen ................................505
Closing the maintenance information list
AND MEMO ...................................................... s-1
Deleting all catalog data ................................... 194
screen ...............................................................418
Deleting catalog data ....................................... 193
4 Closing the maintenance item information
screen ...............................................................426 Deleting log items from list ............................... 386
Closing whiteboard list screen ..........................526 Deleting manuals ............................................. 498
Deleting properties data in the magazine properties
5 Closing whiteboard screen ................................542
CNC data imported to the cycle time estimation
screen (divided screen view) ............................ 159
function .............................................................264 Deleting properties data in the magazine properties
screen (list view) .............................................. 159
6 CNC status display .............................................29
CNC update flow ...............................................631
Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen
(divided screen view) ....................................... 168
Collectable data ................................................374
Deleting properties data in the pot properties screen
7 Collecting Data ..................................................384
Comment edit area to edit a comment ..............476
(list view) .......................................................... 169
Deleting schedules ................................... 246, 256
COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTATIONAL
Deleting the maintenance item ......................... 438
8 CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL ....................16
Compatibility of the tool life management
Deleting tool data ............................................. 102
Deleting whiteboards ........................................ 522
function ...............................................................80
A1 Compatibility of the tool management function ...79
Completion task ................................................446
Description example of MaintenanceInfo.xml .. 605
Description of each part of the slide (example:
Measure Setting slide) ..................................... 473
Concept of iHMI ................................................ p-1
A2 Constraints ........................................................306
Description of the troubleshoot window ............. 52
Description Position of Maintenance Item
Contents of the configuration file ......................550
Information ....................................................... 605
Copying and pasting catalog data .....................187
Z Copying and pasting tool data ............................98
Detaching a tool from a pot .............................. 148
Detail edit for blanks and jigs ........................... 296
Copying schedules ....................................245, 255
Details of Each Data in the Tool Database ...... 223
Correcting the settings of the touch panel [Touch
Determining the state of the maintenance
Panel Setting] ....................................................558
item .................................................................. 399
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE FOR TRADITIONAL
Disabling the touch panel operation [Cleaning
CHINESE ZHURIN SYMBOLS .................640, 641
Mode] ............................................................... 561
Creating (registering) new schedules .......242, 255
Display format of collected data ....................... 379
Creating Model Figures .....................................315
Display Settings ............................................... 554
Creating new whiteboards ................................521
Display Size of Maintenance Display ............... 585
CYCLE TIME ESTIMATION .............................260
Displaying and Operating the Main Screen ...... 460
Displaying calendar screen .............................. 239
Displaying collected data ................................. 377
i-2
B-64644EN/08
Displaying Data ................................................ 377 Enabling the screen saver [Screen Saver
Displaying data usage [Remaining Data Setting] ............................................................. 562
Capacity] .......................................................... 573 Enabling update check [Update Check] ........... 568
Displaying license information [License Entering data with the calculator ...................... 132
Information] ...................................................... 572 Entering equations ................................... 103, 190
Displaying manual list screen ........................... 494 Entering Function Keys .................................... 592 1
Displaying memory usage [Memory Usage Executing estimation ........................................ 271
Display] ............................................................ 574
Displaying operation histories [Operation History
Exporting data to a file ...................................... 471
Exporting log data ............................................ 392 2
Display] ............................................................ 575
Exporting log items ........................................... 389
Displaying schedule that includes specified
date .................................................................. 247
Exporting machine collision avoidance function tool
data .................................................................. 216
3
Displaying System Information ......................... 570
Exporting schedules ......................................... 249
Displaying the cycle time estimation screen .... 261
Displaying the detailed life data screen ............ 177
Exporting tool attach/detach histories .............. 234
4
Displaying the large tool geometry settings F
screen ...................................................... 112, 133
Displaying the magazine management
Flow of data logger use .................................... 375
Flow of using the maintenance manager ......... 401
5
screen .............................................................. 140
Folder configuration for import ......................... 603
Displaying the magazine properties screen ..... 153
Displaying the maintenance item information G 6
screen .............................................................. 418 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS .............................. s-2
Displaying the pot properties screen ................ 159
Displaying the Remote iPendant Screen ......... 368
General Settings ............................................... 557
7
Displaying the select import/export item H
screen .............................................................. 209
Displaying the Settings screen ......................... 553
Handling memos .............................................. 531
HARDWARE OVERVIEW .................................... 2
8
Displaying the table display screen .................... 87 Holder Part and Holder Geometry Information of
Displaying the tool catalog data management
screen .............................................................. 183
Tool Catalog Database ..................................... 615
Home Screen ....................................................... 4
A1
Displaying the tool individual settings screen ... 125 HOME SCREEN (APPLICATION MENUS) ....... 34
Displaying the tool slide ........................... 109, 130
Displaying the tool status display screen ......... 138
How a notification is displayed ......................... 444
How to Add the Remote iPendant Screen ....... 363
A2
Displaying the total life data screen ................. 173 How to Connect the PC to the CNC ................... 63
Displaying Tool Attach/Detach Histories .......... 230
Displaying whiteboard list screen ..................... 518
How to operate from the MDI ............................. 68 Z
How to Read the Cycle Time Estimation
Displaying whiteboards .................................... 522 Screen .............................................................. 261
Downloading latest software ............................ 634 How to set estimation conditions ...................... 275
Drawing lines .................................................... 529 How to use calendar ......................................... 237
How to use manual viewer (screen transition
E diagram) ........................................................... 493
Editing catalog data .......................................... 186 How to use whiteboard ..................................... 517
Editing magazine management data ................ 146
Editing schedules ..................................... 243, 255 I
Editing the maintenance item ........................... 437 iHMI ................................................................... p-1
Editing tool data ......................................... 97, 125 Import/export data ............................................ 220
Importing catalog data ...................................... 194
i-3
B-64644EN/08
Importing log items ............................................388 MAINTENANCE MANAGER ............................ 396

Importing manuals ............................................500 Managing multi-edge tools ............................... 113
Importing or Exporting Logs ..............................388 Managing offset data for each tool ..................... 81
Importing schedules ..........................................248 Manual information settings file ........................ 600
1 Importing tool presetter measurement

data ...........................................................109, 129
MANUAL VIEWER ................................... 492, 600
MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI ......................... p-2
Importing/exporting all tool data ........................214 MDI key operation .............................................. 45
2 Importing/Exporting Setting Data for 3D Measure Setting Slide ...................................... 472
Interference Check ............................................355 Measurement time setting area to set a
Importing/Exporting Tool Data ..........................209 measurement time ........................................... 475
INFORMATION CENTER ...................................41 MEMO FUNCTION .......................................... 516
3 Information Center Displays ................................41 Message display ................................................ 32
Information Center Overview ..............................43 Modify log item ................................................. 387
4 Information Center Setting ................................567

Information list for each function .......238, 493, 517
Monitoring Interference Check ......................... 358
Monitoring measured data [Monitor] ................ 465
Input and Output of CNC Data ..........................593 Monitoring the Machine Collision Avoidance ... 305
5 Inputting an operation memo ............................128

Inserting images ................................................539
Moving a selected waveform ............................ 462
Moving the entire waveform ............................. 460
ITEMS DISPLAYED IN "OPERATION Moving tools in magazines ............................... 149
6 HISTORY" .........................................................644
N
K Name and function of each part of the magazine
7 Keyboard Input ..................................................590 management screen ........................................ 141

Name and function of each part on the select import/
L export item screen ............................................ 209
8 Limitations .........................................................306
Limitations, Constraints, and Precautions .........306
Name and function of each part on the tool import/
export screen ................................................... 210
Limiting display items ........................................257 Name of each part on the cycle time estimation
A1 List of Icons .......................................................454

LIVE UPDATE ...................................................630
screen .............................................................. 263
Name rules to update a manual file ................. 603
Loading data [Load Data] ..................................467 Names and functions of each part of calendar
A2 Loading the setting [Load Setting] ....................469

Loading the view setting [Load View Setting] ...470
screen .............................................................. 239
Names and functions of each part of schedule list
screen .............................................................. 253
Z M
MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE
Names and functions of each part of total life data
screen .............................................................. 170
FUNCTION .......................................................288 Names and functions of each part of whiteboard list
Main Display Description ....................................44 screen .............................................................. 519
Main screen of the SERVO Viewer ...................456 Names and functions of each part of whiteboard
Main screens and screen transition ............85, 401 screen .............................................................. 527
Maintenance category .......................................396 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Home
Screen ................................................................ 37
MAINTENANCE DISPLAY ................................583
Names and functions of each part on the manual list
Maintenance information list screen (data
screen .............................................................. 495
style) .................................................................411
Notification and Completion of Maintenance .... 444
Maintenance information list screen (icon
style) .................................................................404
MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA ...........605
i-4
B-64644EN/08
O Overview of Manual Viewer .............................. 492

Obtained data setting area to set the type and axis Overview of Memo Function ............................. 516
of measured data ............................................. 476 Overview of the 3D Interference Check
Offset Number Set for Each Tool ..................... 616 Function ............................................................ 311
Open Maintenance Display .............................. 583 Overview of the Machine Collision Avoidance
Opening data logger ......................................... 375 Function ............................................................ 288 1
Opening the maintenance information list Overview of the Maintenance Manager ............ 396
screen .............................................................. 403 Overview of the SERVO Viewer ....................... 455
Opening the SERVO Viewer ............................ 455 Overview of the Settings .................................. 552 2
Opening the Settings screen ............................ 553 Overview of TOOL MANAGER .......................... 72
Opening the Web browser ............................... 544
Operating in Calendar Screen .......................... 239 P 3
Operating in Manual File Viewer Screen .......... 505 Part names and functions in the large tool geometry
settings screen ................................................. 203
Operating in Manual List Screen ...................... 494
Operating in Schedule List Screen ................... 252
Part names and functions in the table display 4
screen ................................................................. 87
Operating in Whiteboard List Screen ............... 518
Part names and functions in the Tool Attach/Detach
Operating in Whiteboard Screen ...................... 527
OPERATING THE IMPROVEMENT AREA ..... 371
History screen .................................................. 231 5
Part names and functions in the tool catalog data
Operating the Information Center Screen .......... 45 management screen ......................................... 180
OPERATING THE MACHINING AREA ........... 287 Part names and functions in the tool individual 6
OPERATING THE PLANNING AREA ................ 61 settings screen ................................................. 118
OPERATING THE UTILITY AREA ................... 491 Part names and functions in the Tool Status
Operating with the horizontal soft keys .............. 46 screen ............................................................... 134 7
Operation and display while updating estimation PC OPERATION ................................................ 62
data .................................................................. 266 PC OPERATION Overview ................................ 62
Operation Setting Slide .................................... 485 Performing troubleshooting ................................ 54 8
Operations in the graph style ........................... 419 Precautions ...................................................... 309
Operations in the guide style ............................ 423 Precautions for PC OPERATION ....................... 70
Operations Performed While the Web Page PREFACE ......................................................... p-1 A1
Appears ............................................................ 548
Other conditions setting area to set other R
conditions ......................................................... 482 Referencing tool catalog data ............................. 85 A2
Other Pop-Up Menu Items ............................... 595 Reflecting catalog data to NC tool database .... 200
Output tool data that can be imported in tool
manager ........................................................... 202
Reflecting Setting Data for 3D Interference
Check ............................................................... 358 Z
Outputting a tool information file ...................... 217 Register Multiple Icons of Maintenance
Outputting user maintenance protection Display .............................................................. 584
setting ............................................................... 450 Registering a tool number to a pot ................... 150
Outputting version information to text [Version Registering the Remote iPendant screen to the
Information] ...................................................... 570 Home screen .................................................... 367
Outputting whiteboards .................................... 525 Registering tool storage information ................. 151
OVERVIEW .......................................................... 1 Remote iPendant ............................................. 363
Overview of Calendar Function ........................ 236 Renaming whiteboards ..................................... 524
Overview of Cycle Time Estimation ................. 260 Resetting the tool life state ....................... 107, 133
Overview of Data Logger ................................. 372 Returning to the Home Screen ........................... 39
Overview of Live Update Function ................... 630
Overview of Maintenance Display .................... 583
i-5
B-64644EN/08
S Setting the embedded Ethernet function to the

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................s-1 CNC ................................................................... 63
Saving a screen image [Screenshot Settings] ..563 Setting the geometry ........................................ 208
Saving data [Save Data] ...................................467 Setting the Machine Collision Avoidance
Function ........................................................... 301
1 Saving the setting [Save Setting] ......................468
Saving the view setting [Save View Setting] .....470 Setting the maintenance item of [CNC System
Maintenance] .................................................... 416
Scale Setting Slide ............................................489
2 Screen Common Information Display .................28
Setting the Moving Axis .................................... 348
Setting the occupied area ................................ 207
Screen, slide, and window operations ..............460
Setting the PC .................................................... 63
Searching by tool number (T code) ...................175
Setting the start page ....................................... 551
3 Searching empty pots in magazines .................146
Searching for catalog data ................................200
Setting the type of the automatically displayed
message [Auto Display Setting] ....................... 567
Searching for tool data ......................................105
Setting to repeat measurement [Auto
4 Searching for tool data in the icon data list .......139
Searching information on tools within magazines
Repeat] ............................................................. 465
Setting tool parts image/holder image pictures 188
and magazines/pots ..........................................147
Setting update server [Server Settings] ........... 569
5 Searching magazines/pots in the pot properties
screen ...............................................................169
SETTINGS ....................................................... 552
Settings for the Manual List Screen ................. 600
Searching tools within magazines using the tool
Showing or hiding slide animation [Slide
6 number ..............................................................147
Selecting a program for estimation ...................269
Setting] ............................................................. 557
Showing or hiding waveform data in a chart .... 463
Selecting categories of manuals .......................498
Shutting down PANEL iH Pro ............................ 35
7 Selecting data to be displayed [Select Draw] ....460
Selecting estimation data update items ............265
Simple edit for blanks and jigs ......................... 293
Sorting display contents ................................... 258
Selecting the large tool geometry number ........208
8 SERVO Viewer .................................................455
Sorting manual list ............................................ 497
Sorting the total life data table .......................... 175
Setting a Proxy ..................................................549
Sorting whiteboard list ...................................... 523
Setting a time [Time Setting] .............................560
A1 Setting and Operating PC OPERATION .............63
Starting an Application ....................................... 38
Starting Estimation ........................................... 269
Setting and Operating the Machine Collision
Avoidance Function ..........................................289 Starting from the Home screen .......................... 63
A2 Setting and Operation Flow of the 3D Interference Starting or canceling measurement [Measure] /
[Measure Cancel] ............................................. 464
Check Function .................................................314
Setting catalog data to be referenced ...............198 Starting the Home Screen .................................. 35
Z Setting Combinations of Model Figures as Steps for Cycle Time Estimation ...................... 260
Interference Check Targets ..............................352 Steps to use tool manager ................................. 85
Setting filters for catalog data ...........................202 Storage location of the configuration file .......... 550
Setting filters for tool data .................................106 Substitution character strings of symbols that used
Setting image pictures for tool/holder parts ......130 in tags ............................................................... 612
Setting Japanese/Chinese input [Japanese and Switching between [Show Month] and [show
Chinese Input] ...................................................565 schedule] .......................................................... 251
Setting Microsoft Internet Explorer ....................364 Switching between the previous tool and next
tool ................................................................... 128
Setting protection on user maintenance ...........449
Switching the background color of the screen
Setting the base point of measurement
[Theme Setting] ................................................ 556
[Origin] ..............................................................465
Switching the language [Language Setting] ..... 555
Setting the common items ................................301
Switching to calendar screen ........................... 259
Setting The Display Screen Size ......................589
i-6
B-64644EN/08
Switching to list screen ..................................... 251
T
Text for export .................................................. 440
Text for import .................................................. 442
Time display ....................................................... 33 1
Tool database .................................................... 73
Tool geometry dimension data that can be set .. 83
Tool Information in Tool Catalog Database ...... 613 2
TOOL INFORMATION USED IN TOOL CATALOG
DATABASE ...................................................... 613
TOOL MANAGER .............................................. 72 3
Touch Panel And Mouse Input ......................... 591
Trigger settings area to set a trigger to start
obtaining data ................................................... 479 4
Troubleshooting ................................................. 52
U 5
Undoing and redoing ........................................ 541
Update .............................................................. 568
Updating Estimation Data ................................ 265 6
Updating estimation data ................................. 274
Updating Software ...................................... 57, 637
Usage examples of PC OPERATION ................ 62
7
Used languages ............................................... 610
USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW ......................... 4
User Maintenance Protection Setting ............... 448
8
User maintenance protection setting XML
format ............................................................... 451 A1
V
Viewing manuals .............................................. 497
A2
W
WEB BROWSER ............................................. 543
Web Browser Configuration File ...................... 550
Z
Web browser screen ........................................ 545
What data logger can do .................................. 372
i-7
B-64644EN/08
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
i-8
B-64644EN/08
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents of Revision
08 Sep., 2021 • Addition of new functions.
1
07 Jan., 2021 • Addition of new functions.
• Correction of errors.
06 Jan., 2020 • Addition of new functions. 2
05 Jun., 2017 • Addition of new functions.
04
03
Apr., 2017
Feb., 2017
• Addition of new functions.
• Addition of new functions.
3
02 Dec., 2016 • Addition of new functions.
• Correction of errors. 4
01 May, 2016 -
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
r-1
B-64644EN/08
* B - 6 4 6 4 4 E N / 0 8 *

B-64644EN - 08 FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-64644EN - 08 FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

< +HMI

© FANUC CORPORATION, 2016

In this manual, we endeavor to include all pertinent matters.

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

3 • Carefully check that program command value, offset value, current

7 direction and value. Operation with incorrect data may cause

2 MANUALS RELATED TO iHMI

1 Table 2 Related Manuals List

3 FANUC iHMI Machining Cycle OPERATOR'S MANUAL

2.4.5 Troubleshooting ............................................................................. 52

2 3 OPERATING THE PLANNING AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

5 3.1.3.2 Advanced connection settings ................................................ 64

6 3.2 TOOL MANAGER ....................................................................... 72

Z 3.2.2.4 Copying and pasting tool data ................................................ 98

3.2.3.1 Part names and functions in the tool individual settings

3.2.5.22 Changing multiple properties data settings in the pot properties

6 3.2.7.5 Editing catalog data .............................................................. 186

3.2.9.5 Importing/exporting tool manager unique data that contains iCAP

3.4.5 Starting Estimation ....................................................................... 269

6 4.1.5 Monitoring the Machine Collision Avoidance ............................... 305

5.1.1.3 Flow of data logger use ......................................................... 375

5.2.6.1 Setting protection on user maintenance ............................... 449

3 5.3.2.4 Screen, slide, and window operations .................................. 460

A1 5.3.3.15 Saving data [Save Data] ....................................................... 467

A2 5.3.3.18 Loading the setting [Load Setting] ........................................ 469

6 OPERATING THE UTILITY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

6.3.4.1 Storage location of the configuration file .............................. 550

1 6.4.1 Overview of the Settings .............................................................. 552

3 6.4.3.2 Switching the background color of the screen [Theme

4 6.4.4 General Settings .......................................................................... 557

6.5.6 Keyboard Input ............................................................................. 590

1.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW ....................................................................... 2

1.1 HARDWARE OVERVIEW

3 FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 31i–B5

5 FANUC Series 31i-B5 Plus 31i-B Plus Series 31i

Fig. 1.1 PANEL iH

1.2 USER INTERFACE OVERVIEW

1 various operations and works in the machining process.

2 1.2.1 Home Screen

In the Home screen, you can start each categorized application.

Fig. 1.2.2 (a) PC Operation 5

Fig. 1.2.2 (b) Tool Manager

5  • You can receive a notification about your schedule from the

3. Select a program for which you want to

5. Finish the estimation.

6. Check the estimation results.

Fig. 1.2.2 (d) Steps for Cycle Time Estimation

 CNC operation screen

 Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe (Option)

5 - Check the movement of the

Automatically create NC program

 • For details on Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe,

 Machine Collision Avoidance Function (Option)

 3D Interference Check Function (Option)

A1 Fig. 1.2.2 (i) Data Logger

Fig. 1.2.2 (k) SERVO Viewer

Fig. 1.2.2 (m) Memo function

2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS IN THIS

2.1 COMMON OPERATIONS AND NOTA-

7 Operation of returning to the previous screen

Fig. 2.1 (b) Soft keys

Touch panel operation

Fig. 2.1 (d) Controls Displayed on Top of the Home Screen